Contents

Finale 3.7 Help

Click on any of the following for help.

Dialog Boxes

Menus

Main Tool Palette

Simple Entry Palette

Smart Shape Palette

Special Tools Palette

Glossary

Simple Entry Keypad

Speedy Entry Keypad

General MIDI

Technical Support


Finale 3.0 for Windows
Finale 3.7 for Windows

The Art of Music Notation

Finale is a music notation application. With Finale, you can create, modify, playback and print everything from lead sheets to full orchestral scores.

©1996 Coda Music Technology. All rights reserved.


ADIALOG
Dialog Boxes

Accidental Octave Placement

Accidental Order and Amount

Action Type

Add - Continuous Data

Add - Key Velocities

Add - Note Durations

Add Bookmark

Add Measures

Additional PostScript Information

Adjust Baselines

Adjust Page Range

Adjust Staff System Range

Align Time Tags To Note Starts

Alter Feel - Key Velocities

Alter Feel - Note Durations

Alteration for Slot

Alternate Notation

Apply Articulation

Articulation Designer

Articulation Selection

Augmentation Dot


BDIALOG
Dialog Boxes

Backward Repeat Bar Assignment

Barlines

Baseline Shift

Beam Extension Selection

Beaming Chart

Beat Chart Element

Bracket

Bracket Style


CDIALOG
Dialog Boxes

Change Articulation Assignments

Change Barlines

Change Chord Assignments

Change Chord Suffix Fonts

Change Clef

Change Measure Width

Change Note Durations

Change Note Size

Change Positioning

Change Staff Expression Assignments

Character Settings

Check Document Fonts Against System Fonts

Check Graphics

Chord Definition

Chord Suffix Editor

Chord Suffix Selection

Clef Designer

Clef Selection

Click and Countoff

Click Assignment

Click Input

Click Output Type

Compile PostScript Listing

Composite Time Signature

Copy Measures

Copy MIDI Data

Custom Frame

Cut Measures

Cut Music

Curves


DDIALOG
Dialog Boxes

Dashed Line

Data Check

Default Tuplet Visual Definition

Delete Blank Pages

Document Options

Dot Offsets

Duration Allotment


EDIALOG
Dialog Boxes

Edit Bookmark

Edit Frame

Edit Learned Chords

Edit Lyrics

Edit Major and Minor Key Spellings

Edit Modal or Chromatic Spellings

Edit Page Offset

Edit Text

Elapsed Time

Enclosure Designer

Ending Repeat Bar Assignment

Entry Items

Entry Modifications

Executable Shape Designer

Executable Shape Selection

Explode Music

Export Pages

Export Selection

Extract Parts


FDIALOG
Dialog Boxes

File Info

File Statistics

Fill

Filter Channels

Fit Music

Fixed Split

Fixed Split Point

Floating Quantization

Format Parts

Font

Frame Attributes


GKDIALOG
Dialog Boxes

Graphic Attributes

Grid Definition

Group Attributes

Hand Width Split

Handle Positioning

HyperScribe Duration/Division

HyperScribe Options

Instrument Definition

Instrument List

Insert Blank Pages

Interval

Items to Clip

Items to Erase

Key Signature

Key Step Map


LDIALOG
Dialog Boxes

Layer Options

Limit - Continuous Data

Limit - Key Velocities

Limit - Note Durations

Line Spacing

Line Thickness

Lines


MDIALOG
Dialog Boxes

Mass Measure Grouping

Measure Assignment for Ossia Measure

Measure Attributes

Measure Items

Measure Number

Measure Number Style

Mid-measure Clef

MIDI Event

MIDI Input Filter

MIDI File Options

MIDI Setup

MIDI Thru

MIDI Thru Table

MIDI Tool split-window

Mirror Attributes

Movable Items

Move Layers

Moving Split Point

Multimeasure Rest

Multiple Splits

Multiple Total Passes for Ending

Multiple Total Passes for Repeat

Music Characters

Music Character Positioning

Music Options

Music Spacing Options


NODIALOG
Dialog Boxes

New Staves

Nonstandard Key Signature

Notation Options

Note Shapes

Open\Save\Save As

Optimizing a System of Staves

Ossia Measure Designer


PDIALOG
Dialog Boxes

Page Assignment for Ossia Measure

Page Format for Parts

Page Format for Score

Page Layout

Page Options

Partial Measure Selection

Percent Alteration Continuous Data

Percent Alteration Key Velocities

Percent Alteration Note Durations

Percussion Map Designer

Percussion Map Selection

Piano Braces

Place Graphics

Placeholder

Playback Controls

Playback Data Dump

Playback Options

Playback Source

Position Measure Number

Position Staff and Group Names

PostScript Options

Print Parts

Print Score

Print Setup

Program Options

Punch In PreRoll


QRDIALOG
Dialog Boxes

Quantization

Randomize - Key Velocities

Randomize - Note Durations

Rebar Options

Rebeam to Lyrics

Rebeam to Time Signature

Redefine Pages

Redefine Selected Pages

Redraw Options

Remove Staff

Repeat Assignment

Repeat Barlines

Repeat Designer

Repeat Selection

Resize Note

Resize Notehead

Resize Page

Resize Staff

Resize Staff System

Respace Staves

Retranscribe

Rulers and Grid


SDIALOG
Dialog Boxes

Sample List for Executable Shapes

Save Library

Save Tempo Changes

Scale - Continuous Data

Scale - Key Velocities

Scale - Note Durations

Scale View

Score Expression Assignment

Score Expression Selection

Secondary Beam Break Selection

Select Default Fonts

Select Display Colors

Select Region

Selective Mirror

Send MIDI Value

Set Distances

Set Durations

Set Patch To

Set Placeholder

Set Swing Ratio

Set To - Continuous Data

Set To - Key Velocities

Set To - Start/Stop Times

Shape Designer

Shape Expression Designer

Shape Selection

Shift Lyrics

Size

Slur Definition

Slur Placement

Smart Shape Options

Special Key Signature

Specify Current Lyric

Staff Attributes

Staff Expression Assignment

Staff Expression Selection

Staff List

Staff Setup

Staff System Optimization

Staff Transpositions

Staff Usage List

Standard Frame

Stem Connections

Stem Connection Editor

Suffix Keynumber Offsets

Superscript

Sweep for Channels Present in a Track

Symbol List

Symbol Selection


TDIALOG
Dialog Boxes

Tablature

Tap Source

Tap States

Tempo Adjustment

Text Expression Designer

Text Inserts

There Are Too Many Beats in This Measure

Tie Alterations

Tilting Mirror

Time Signature

Time Signature Options

Tone Center(s)

Track/Channel Mapping

Track/Channel Mapping to Staves

Tracking

Transcribe

Transcribe MIDI File

Transcription

Transcription Filters

Transposition

Tuplet Definition


VDIALOG
Dialog Boxes

Unknown Chord Suffix

Unknown Font

Update Layout Options

View Continuous Data

View Resolution


Menus

A set of six menus always appears when you're using Finale. These menus contain standard file operations and editing commands that you need during your work, as well as Finale settings that apply to your entire score.

File Menu

Edit Menu

View Menu

Options Menu

Window Menu

Help Menu

The following menus are associated with particular Finale tools. They only appear when the tool is selected in the Main Tool Palette. Click a tool to display its menu.

Chord Menu

Graphics Menu

HyperScribe Menu

Lyrics Menu

Mass Mover Menu

Mass Edit Menu

MIDI Menu

Note Mover Menu

Search Menu

Page Layout Menu

Shape Designer Menu

Simple Menu

Smart Shape Menu

Special Tools Menu

Speedy Menu

Staff Menu

Text Menu

Frame Menu

Transcription Menu

Time Tag Menu


Chord Menu

Finale can add chord symbols automatically to your piece, if you like. In the Chord menu, you can choose from two manual typing methods in addition to three automatic chord analysis methods. All of the methods work best if you've already loaded a Chord Suffix Library (by  choosing Open Library from the File menu). If your Finale default file is in place in the Finale directory, you don't have to load this library, since the most common chord suffixes have been loaded already.

If you're entering chord symbols using either of the typing methods -- Type Into Score, or Manual Input, Finale lets you type your chord symbols directly on screen -- or type the chord symbols in the Chord Definition dialog box. If you're typing chord symbols and Finale doesn't recognize a chord, it will give you the option of creating the suffix. If you click OK, Finale will display the Chord Suffix Editor dialog box with the suffix already entered. You can make changes then return to the score with the new suffix  placed on the chord symbol.

If you're entering chord symbols using any of the automatic methods and Finale doesn't recognize a chord, it will display the Unknown Chord Suffix dialog box. If you click "Let Finale do it," Finale will attempt to create the proper chord suffix and place the resultant chord symbol in the score. For most chord qualities (M, m, Maj7, m7, dim, m7b5, aug, sus4, and so on), Finale will arrive at the right solution. See Unknown Chord Suffix dialog box.

For the few chords Finale doesn't identify correctly, you can "teach" them to Finale as new chords. When you see the Unknown Chord Suffix dialog box, click "I'll do it" to access the Chord Definition dialog box; then create the chord symbol (and its suffix, if necessary) in the Chord Definition dialog box. The next time you play the chord (in any octave and any voicing), Finale will know what chord symbol to display. See Unknown Chord Suffix dialog box and Chord Definition dialog box.

Manual Input

Type Into Score

MIDI Input

One Staff Analysis

Two Staff Analysis

======================

Chord Style

Left-Align Chords

Show Guitar Fretboards

======================

Position Chords

Position Fretboards

======================

Simplify Spelling

Substitute Symbols

======================

Edit Learned Chords

Change Chord Suffix Fonts

See also: Menus


Chord/Manual Input

When this option is selected, you can click a note or rest in the score to bring up the Chord Definition dialog box, where you can construct a chord symbol by typing the chord symbol into a single text box. Or, you can enter the three parts of the chord symbol separately by entering the scale degree for the root and alternate bass and choosing a suffix (such as "maj7"). You also use the Chord Definition dialog box to edit an existing chord symbol; double-click the chord symbol's handle.

For detailed information, see the Chord Definition dialog box.

See also: Chord Menu


Chord/Type Into Score

When you select this option, you can click on a note or rest in the score to which you want to attach a chord; a blinking cursor appears above the note. (If no cursor appears, make sure the note you click is in the active music layer.) Type the chord's root with any alteration (# or b), followed by the suffix. If you want an alternate bass to appear for the symbol, type a slash (/) or underscore (_) followed by the alternate bass note and alteration.

Pay attention to capitalization as you type: Finale displays chords like "F" or "e" or "IV" or "iii".  Capitalization also matters in suffixes -- it's how Finale distinguishes a "CM7" from "Cm7".

To advance the blinking cursor to the next note to continue entering chords press Spacebar, Tab or Shift-Right arrow; Finale displays the fully formatted chord after you enter it.

Special keystrokes for typing chords.

Press Enter to accept changes to the selected chord

Press Esc to discard changes to the entered chord

Press Spacebar, Tab, or Shift-Right arrow to move to next entry

Shift-Spacebar, Shift-Tab, Shift-Left arrow to move to previous entry

Press Up arrow to move to the next chord on the same entry, or prepare to create a new chord

Press Down arrow to move to the previous chord on the same entry

Type b to display flat symbol

Type # (Shift-3) to display sharp symbol

Type * (Shift-8)  to display diminished symbol (When Substitute Symbols is selected in the Chord menu)

Type % (Shift-5) to display half-diminished symbol  (When Substitute Symbols is selected in the Chord menu)

Type / to put alternate bass note next to the chord root

Type _ (Shift-hyphen) to put alternate bass note below the chord root

Press Left arrow to move to previous character in the chord

Press Right arrow to move to next character in the chord

Type Letters with or without Shift (A, B, C, D, E, F, G or a, b, c, d, e, f, g) to display corresponding pitches for the root and alternate bass notes (press Shift for uppercase display)

Type , (comma) to distinguish the chord root from the suffix

Type :# (colon number) to display the chord suffix assigned to a specific slot number in the Chord Suffix Selection dialog box

Type :0 (colon zero) to display the Chord Suffix Selection dialog box, where you can choose any suffix

See also: Chord Menu


Chord/MIDI Input

When you select this option, you can click a note or rest in the score, and a tiny ear icon will appear. Finale will add a chord symbol above the note you clicked when you play the chord on your synthesizer. (It's "listening" to the chord you play.) The register of the chord you play doesn't matter, but the inversion does: if you play a C chord with an E on the bottom, Finale will place a C/E chord symbol above the note. If it doesn't recognize the chord, it will display the Unknown Chord Suffix dialog box letting you know. See Unknown Chord Suffix dialog box.

To advance the ear cursor to the next note, press any MIDI instrument key above middle C; to make the ear cursor retreat to the left, play any key below middle C. If you don't move the cursor in this way, each time you play a chord, each new chord symbol will appear stacked above the previous one.

See also: Chord Menu


Chord/One Staff Analysis
Chord/One-Staff Analysis

If you select this menu item, Finale will immediately analyze the notes in any chord you click. (It only considers notes in the staff you clicked.) If it doesn't recognize the chord, it will display the Unknown Chord Suffix dialog box letting you know. See Unknown Chord Suffix dialog box.

See also: Chord Menu


Chord/Two Staff Analysis
Chord/Two-Staff Analysis

If you select this item, Finale will immediately analyze the notes in any chord you click, also taking into account the notes in the next staff down. In other words, it will use the notes struck simultaneously in both staves to formulate its chord guess, making this a useful option for deriving chord symbols from piano parts.

Once again, if Finale doesn't recognize the chord, it will display the Unknown Chord Suffix dialog box letting you know. See Unknown Chord Suffix dialog box.

See also: Chord Menu


Chord/Edit Learned Chords

Select this command to display the Edit Learned Chords dialog box, where you can teach Finale to recognize new chords (or to label chords it does recognize in different ways), or to "forget" chords you've already taught it.

For detailed information, see the Edit Learned Chords dialog box.

See also: Chord Menu


Chord/Show Guitar Fretboards

When this item is selected, Finale displays full-blown guitar fretboard-chart diagrams beneath each chord symbol in the score (or will do so as soon as you add chord symbols). These fretboard diagrams are actually characters in the Seville chord-diagram font included with Finale, and therefore will only print out correctly on a PostScript laser printer if Sevil.PFB, the printer-font file, is in your PSFONTS directory.

The fretboard Finale displays depends on the playback defined for the suffix on the chord symbol. If no suffix is specified for the chord, Finale uses the "Lowercase" setting for the Root Scale Tone in the Chord Definition dialog box to determine what fretboard to display; if "Lowercase" is selected for the Root Scale Tone, Finale displays a minor fretboard; if "Lowercase" is not selected, Finale displays a major fretboard.

When you choose Show Guitar Fretboards a second time, all fretboards disappear.

See also:

Chord Menu

Chord Definition


Chord/Position Chords

When you choose this command, four small triangles appear at the left side of the screen. These triangles govern the position of the baseline for the chord symbols (the imaginary horizontal line against which the bottoms of the chord symbols align).

Drag the first (leftmost) triangle up or down to move all the chords in the piece. Drag the second triangle to move the chords up or down in this staff only, regardless of the position of the leftmost triangle. Drag the third triangle, in Page View, to move the chords in this staff in this system only. Dragging the rightmost triangle doesn't move any existing chord symbols; instead, it sets the position for the next one you enter.

See also: Chord Menu


Chord/Position Fretboards

Position Fretboards is only available if Show Guitar Fretboards is selected in the menu.

When you choose Position Fretboards, four small triangles appear at the left side of the screen. These triangles govern the position of the baseline for the diagrams (the imaginary horizontal line against which the bottoms of the fretboard diagrams align).

Drag the first (leftmost) triangle up or down to move all the diagrams in the piece. Drag the second triangle to move the chord diagrams up or down in this staff only, regardless of the position of the leftmost triangle. Drag the third triangle, in Page View, to move the diagrams in this staff in this system only. Dragging the rightmost triangle doesn't affect diagrams at all.

See also: Chord Menu


Chord/Change Chord Suffix Fonts

Choose this command to display the Change Chord Suffix Fonts dialog box, which lets you swap one font and style for another in your chord suffix library.

For detailed information, see the Change Chord Suffix Fonts dialog box.

See also: Chord Menu


Chord/Left-Align Chords

Normally, Finale centers each chord symbol above the note to which it's attached. When this item is selected, however, Finale aligns the leftmost edge of each chord symbol with the note below it. Choose this command a second time to restore chord symbols to their centered position.

See also: Chord Menu


Chord/Chord Style

Use this submenu to choose the display style for all chord roots and alternate bass notes in the piece.

Standard

European

German

Roman

Nashville

Solfeggio

See also: Chord Menu


Chord Style/Standard

When selected, Finale displays the chord root and alternate bass notes as letters. An accidental, if present, follows the chord root.

See also: Chord Menu


Chord Style/European

When selected, Finale displays the chord root and alternate bass note as letters. An accidental, if present, follows the chord root.

This style is the same as Standard, with one exception; Finale always displays a natural sign on B natural.

See also: Chord Menu


Chord Style/German

When selected, Finale displays the chord root and alternate bass note as letters. An accidental, if present, follows the chord root.

This style displays "es" for the flat sign and "is" for the sharp sign, with the following exceptions: E-flat is displayed as "Es"; A-flat is displayed as "As"; B-flat appears as B, and B appears as H.

See also: Chord Menu


Chord Style/Roman

When selected, Finale uses Roman numerals to represent the chord root and alternate bass note. An accidental, if present, precedes the chord root.

When entering chords, type upper or lowercase letters to determine whether lowercase roman numerals are used. For example, in the key of C Major, C = I, d=ii, e=iii, F = IV, and so on.

See also: Chord Menu


Chord Style/Nashville

When selected, Finale displays the chord root and alternate bass note as a scale degree number. An accidental, if present, precedes the chord root.

In the key of C Major, 1 indicates a C chord, 2 indicates a D chord, 3 an E chord, and so on, up to 7, which indicates a B chord.

See also: Chord Menu


Chord Styles/Solfeggio

When selected, Finale displays the chord root as Do, Di, Ra, Re, Ri and so on, starting with Do as the first scale degree, Di the next half-step, Re the second scale degree, and so on.

The following table shows how Finale displays the chord root for each scale degree and half-step in the key of C Major.

Note	Chord Root (in C Major)

Do	C (or B#)

Di	C#

Ra	Db

Re	D

Ri	D#

Me	Eb

Mi	E (or Fb)

Fa	E# (or F)

Fi	F#

Se	Gb

So*	G

Si	G#

Le	Ab

La	A

Li	A#

Te	Bb

Ti	Cb (or B)

* If you prefer using Sol rather than So, add the "l" as a suffix in the Chord Definition dialog box.

See also: Chord Menu


Chord/Simplify Spelling

Choose this command to switch between spelling chord roots enharmonically, or spelling chord roots exactly as defined in the Chord Definition dialog box. When selected, Finale spells the root using the "simplest" enharmonic spelling (for example, Finale spells E# as F). When this command is not selected, Finale spells the root using the exact root and alteration that appears in the Chord Definition dialog box.

See also: Chord Menu


Chord/Substitute Symbols

When selected, Finale substitutes the Petrucci diminished and half-diminished symbols when you type "*" (Shift-8) or "%" (Shift-5), respectively. When not selected, Finale simply maps the keys directly, without substituting symbols. Deselect this command if you are using a font other than Petrucci, and want to use the characters mapped to the Shift-8 and Shift-5 slots in that font.

Note: This command is used for chord entry only. Choosing this command will not affect any characters on chords already entered in the document

See also: Chord Menu


File Menu

As in any Windows program, Finale's File menu contains various commands for opening, closing, saving, and printing files. The File menu also contains commands for importing and exporting libraries (files containing various symbols, markings, and other musical elements that are stored separately and can be "loaded into" any file). Finally, the File menu contains the Exit command used to exit the program.

New

Open

Close

Close All

Save

Save As

Save All

Revert

======================

Open Library

Save Library

======================

Extract Parts

File Info

Save Preferences

======================

Printer Setup

Print Score

Print Parts

Compile Postscript Listing

======================

Exit

1, 2, 3, 4

Next to these numbers are the names of the four most recently opened files, with number 1 being the most recent. If the file you want to open is one of the four most recently opened files, then selecting it from here saves you the trouble of selecting open and navigating through directories in the open dialog box to find your file.

See also: Menus


File/New

Opens a new, untitled file. You can open as many files as you wish.

In Finale, however, "new" doesn't necessarily mean "blank." As a means of saving you formatting and customizing time, Finale lets you specify dozens of variables - position of the name, size of the notes, frequently used symbols or markings, and so on - into a special file called "DEFAULT.FTM." As long as you keep this file in the same directory as the Finale program itself (or the directory indicated for music in the Program Options dialog box), every possible Finale parameter will always be set just the way you like it when you choose New from the File menu.

You can, by the way, deliberately override the Finale default file if you want to open a completely fresh, unformatted score. To do so, press Ctrl while choosing New from the File menu.

See also: File Menu


File/Open

Opens an existing file. Finale is capable of opening four kinds of files: Finale Binary File (the usual notation file), ENIGMA Transportable File (ETF), MIDI File, and Finale Template File.

Note:  Finale can open binary files created in Finale Macintosh (or Windows) using version 3.o or later; you do not need to create ETF files to transfer files to other computer platforms.

For detailed information see the Open dialog box.

See also: File Menu


File/Close

Closes the active (frontmost) document and any corresponding windows you opened by choosing the New Window command in the Window menu.

See also: Window Menu, File Menu


File/Close All

Closes all documents and any corresponding windows you opened by choosing the New Window command in the Window menu.

See also: Window Menu, File Menu


File/Save

Saves to disk any changes you've made to the active file. It's a good idea to save your work fairly often - every ten minutes, perhaps; if you're the kind of person who forgets, consider using Finale's automatic backup feature (see Program Options dialog box). The Save command saves only the active file (the one in the frontmost window).

See also: File Menu


File/Save As

Saves to disk any changes you've made to the active file, using the name that you specify. This offers you a chance to create a duplicate of the file you're working on, with a different name, and - if you wish - in a different directory or on a different disk. You can also save the current file as another kind of file - namely, a Finale Template File, an ENIGMA Transportable File or a Standard MIDI File.

See also: File Menu


File/Save All

Saves to disk any changes you've made to all open files with a single command.

See also: File Menu


File/Revert

Restores your file to whatever condition it was in the last time you saved your work. (This command does the same thing as closing the file without saving it, then reopening it.)

See also: File Menu


File/Open Library

Loads the specified library (set of special symbols or settings) into the active file. A Finale file with no libraries loaded will seem stripped-down, because each time you open a selection dialog box (to place an articulation or chord symbol, for example), it will be empty. That's why the Finale default file has already been loaded with the most commonly used libraries so you can begin work immediately.

See also: File Menu


File/Save Library

Saves the specified set of special symbols (or settings) you create while working in a file (articulations, chord symbols, and so on) into a separate file called a library. These sets of musical elements may then be "loaded into" any file.

For detailed information, see the Save Library dialog box.

See also: File Menu


File/Extract Parts

This command is Finale's most powerful part-extraction feature. Extracts the staves you specify from the active file, and saves each part as a separate file. Offers you a chance to change layout aspects for the parts. You can format, inspect, and adjust the resultant files, fixing any awkward page turns, for example, before you print them out.

For detailed information, see the Extract Parts dialog box.

See also: File Menu


File/File Info

Use this command to enter a description of your work into the file or enter any file-specific information that you may want to refer to later on. If you're sending the file to a publisher, for example, you might use the file description area to communicate information about the fonts that were used in the file. You can also review statistical information such as the total number of measures in the file.

For detailed information, see File Info dialog box and File Statistics dialog box.

See also:

File Menu

Program Options


File/Save Preferences

In Finale, you can customize program preferences to the work environment best suited to your music, so you can get straight to work when you open a file. Organize the tools, change the palette size and location, or set menu options such as Mass Mover's Select Partial Measures command and Speedy Entry's Use MIDI Keyboard command just the way you want them. The Save Preferences command gives you control over when to savethese settings.

Choose Save Preferences from the File menu to save your current settings in the FINALE.INI file (in your Finale directory). If you want these settings are saved automatically when you exit Finale, choose Program Options from the Options menu, and make sure that "Save Preferences At Exit" is checked. Otherwise the settings are saved only when you choose Save Preferences.

See also:

File Menu

Program Options


File/Printer Setup

Displays the standard Windows Printer Setup dialog box, which differs depending on the kind of printer you're using. For example, you can specify the size of paper you want to print on, but note that the page size of your score itself (that is, the size of the printed image) is completely independent of the paper size you specify here. (Use the Page Layout Tool to set the actual page size.) To make sure that no music will be chopped off when you print, the size of the page as set by the Page Layout Tool should be equal to or smaller than that specified in the Printer Setup dialog box.

See also: File Menu


File/Print Score

Prints the full score as it appears in Page View. When you choose this command, the standard Print dialog box appears listing additional printing options, which vary depending on your printer. You'll be able to specify, for example, which pages of the score you want to print, and how many copies.

For detailed information see the Print Score dialog box.

See also: File Menu


File/Print Parts

Extracts the parts from your score by sending each directly to the printer. Provides options for the various attributes of block rests in the printed parts. However, you won't have a chance to reformat each part before it prints; you won't even see it. Unless your score contains measures of fairly uniform width, you may prefer to use one of the other two part extraction methods, which give you some control over the page layout.

For more detailed information see the Print Parts dialog box.

See also:

Extract Parts

Special Part Extraction


File/Compile PostScript Listing

Provides options for compiling a PostScript listing - a printer file of your score that Finale can print faster than it can print the score itself - or an EPS graphics file.

For more detailed information, see the Compile PostScript Listing dialog box.

See also: File Menu


File/Exit

Exits Finale and returns to the Program Manager. Finale closes all open files automatically, after first asking you if you want to save your changes (if you made any).

See also: File Menu


Edit Menu

You can find an assortment of editing and program operations commands in the Edit menu. Note that some of them have keyboard equivalents (which are listed in the menu beside the command names); as you become more familiar with Finale, you may want to start learning these keyboard equivalents.

Some of the commands names change when the Mass Mover Tool is selected, or if you press the Ctrl or Shift before displaying the menu. For details, see Cut, Copy, Insert, Paste/Replace Entries, Export MIDI to Clipboard, Import MIDI from Clipboard.

Undo

=====================

Cut

Copy

Insert

Replace Entries

=====================

Export MIDI to Clipboard

Import MIDI from Clipboard

=====================

Select All

=====================

Special Part Extraction

Update Layout

Update Layout Options

See also: Menus


Edit/Undo

Choose the Undo command immediately after performing any action with the Mass Mover Tool that you want to "take back"; Finale will undo your action. The Undo command also restores anything with a handle you've just dragged or deleted; examples include staves (Staff Tool), expression marks (Articulation, Staff or Score Expression Tools), titles (Text Tool), and so on. Undo also restores any change you've made with the Speedy Entry Tool.

See also: Edit Menu


Edit/Cut

After selecting a region of music with the Mass Mover Tool , choose Cut to place the selected music on the Clipboard and simultaneously remove the music from the score. (Finale asks you if you want to remove only the music, leaving behind rests, or to remove the selected beats or measures entirely.) Once you've placed the cut music on the Clipboard, you can paste it to another place in your score or another Finale file.

If you like, you can save the cut material into a separate file of its own, called a Clip File, which you can later access for pasting into another file. Press Ctrl before choosing Cut; the command name changes; Finale will ask you to give the Clip File a name. In this way, you can create an assortment of musical segments or motifs, each of which you can access with the Insert or Replace Entries commands (see below) to paste them into other files.

If you press Shift before choosing Cut, the command name changes, and Finale will display the Items to Clip dialog box, which gives you the option of excluding some of the score elements - lyrics or expression marks, for example - from the cut material. (If you press both Ctrl and Shift before choosing Cut, the command name changes, and Finale will display the Items to Clip dialog box and place the cut material into a Clip File.)

You can also place cut text on the Clipboard in Finale's Edit Lyrics or Edit Text window, or when editing text on-screen with the Text Tool. Select the text by dragging, then choose Cut from the menu or use its keyboard equivalent (Ctrl-X).

See also:

Items to Clip

Edit Menu


Edit/Copy

After selecting a region of music with the Mass Mover Tool , choose Copy to place a duplicate of the selected music on the Clipboard, ready to paste to another place in your score or another Finale file. (You can't paste copied Finale music into another program, however).

As with the Cut command, you can press Ctrl before choosing Copy to save the copied material into a separate Clip File, which you can later access for pasting into another file. The command name changes, and Finale will ask you to give the Clip File a name. In this way, you can create an assortment of musical segments or motifs, each of which you can access with the Insert or Replace Entries commands (see below) to paste them into other files.

If you press Shift while choosing Copy, the command name changes, and Finale will display the Items to Clip dialog box, which gives you the option of excluding some of the score elements - lyrics or expression marks, for example - from the copied material. (If you press both Ctrl and Shift when you choose Copy, the command name changes and Finale will display the Items to Clip dialog box and place the copied material into a Clip File.)

You can also place copied text on the Clipboard in Finale's Edit Lyrics or Edit Text window, or when editing text on-screen with the Text Tool. Choose Copy from the Edit menu, or use its keyboard equivalent (Ctrl-C).

See also:

Items to Clip

Edit Menu


Edit/Insert

Choose Insert if you want to insert whatever music you've cut or copied to the Clipboard between two existing beats or measures. First tell Finale where you want the material inserted by selecting any amount of music just after the desired point of insertion.

If you copied complete measures from only one staff, but you're pasting into a multistaff score, the music on all the other staves will be shifted to the right (and empty measures added), even though you're only inserting the copied music into one staff. In other words, Finale will ensure that one staff's music always aligns with another's.

On the other hand, if you've copied partial measures, Finale will shift the existing notes to the right, rebarring the piece as necessary, only in the  staves you're pasting into. To insert copied material while Select Partial Measures is turned on in the Mass Mover menu, select a region of any size; Finale will insert the material just before the selected region.

If the music on the Clipboard was copied from ten staves, you don't have to insert the contents of all ten staves in the target score. For example, you can select (highlight) a measure in only four staves of the target score; Finale will insert the music in those staves, and insert blank measures in all other staves. On the other hand, if you do want the entire copied section to be inserted, be sure to select a target region as many staves "deep" as the copied region.

If you've created Clip Files using the Copy or Cut commands, you can paste any one into the score using the Insert command. Press Ctrl while choosing Insert; the command name changes and Finale displays the Paste dialog box showing the names of any Clip Files on your disk. Double-click the one you want to paste.

See also: Edit Menu


Edit/Replace Entries
Edit/Paste or Replace Entries

The Edit menu displays the Paste command unless the Mass Mover Tool is selected in which case the Edit menu displays the Replace Entries command instead.

Choose Replace Entries if you want whatever music you've cut or copied to the Clipboard to paste over (replace) the selected music in the target file (first use the Mass Mover to select the area whose music you want to replace).

The Replace Entries command doesn't replace any Score Expressions you may already have in the target (selected) region. Only notes and items attached to them (such as articulations, Staff Expressions, chord symbols, and so on) are replaced.

If you've created Clip Files using the Copy or Cut commands (see above), you can paste any one of them into the score using the Replace Entries command. Press Ctrl before choosing Replace Entries; the command name changes and Finale displays the Paste dialog box showing the names of any Clip Files on your disk. Double-click the one you want to paste.

The Place command appears when the Mass Mover Tool is not selected. You can paste text you've cut or copied to the Clipboard in Finale's Edit Lyrics or Edit Text window, or when editing text on-screen with the Text Tool. Choose Paste from the Edit menu, or use its keyboard equivalent (Ctrl-V)  if you want the selected text replaced with whatever text you've cut or copied to the Clipboard.

See also: Edit Menu


Edit/Export MIDI to Clipboard

This command provides a quick way to transfer MIDI information to sequencing programs, such as Cakewalk, that support MIDI information on the clipboard. When you're ready to export your MIDI information, select the region that you want to export using the Mass Mover Tool, then choose Export MIDI to Clipboard. Finale copies the MIDI information from the selected region on to the clipboard. You can then paste or import the MIDI information into another program.

Press Shift before choosing this command to use the current transcription settings (without displaying the Transcribe dialog box).

See also: Edit Menu


Edit/Import MIDI from Clipboard

Use this command to import MIDI information from sequencing programs that support MIDI information on the clipboard. Once you've recorded your performance or created the MIDI information (such as controller data) in a sequencing or other MIDI program, copy it into the clipboard. Switch to Finale, click the Mass Mover Tool, select the measures into which you want to paste the information, then choose this command. The Transcribe dialog box appears. If necessary, change the transcription settings for the notated music, then click OK. If the copied sequencer information contains any MIDI note data, Finale transcribes new notes. Otherwise, Finale preserves its existing notes and pastes only the copied information into the measures.

Press Shift when choosing this command to use the current settings in the Transcribe dialog box (without displaying the dialog box on the screen).

See also:

Edit Menu

Transcribe


Edit/Select All

You can use this command with the Mass Mover or MIDI tools (to select every measure in every staff); in the Transcription window (to select all the music you've recorded); with the Note Mover Tool (to select every note handle in a measure you've clicked); or with the Staff Tool (to select every staff handle). In the last two cases, you can exclude (deselect) one handle at a time from the selection by Shift-clicking its handle.

See also: Edit Menu


Edit/Special Part Extraction

This command provides access to one of Finale's three part-extraction methods. Using Special Part Extraction, you can see the full score in Scroll View, while the extracted part appears, ready for editing and printing, in Page View.

Before the Special Part Extraction command will work, you must select a staff (or staves) by clicking the Staff Tool and then selecting their handles. When you choose Special Part Extraction, a dialog box appears, letting you select the multimeasure (block) rest shape you want to use, specify a font for the number to appear above such a rest, and so on. (See Special Part Extraction dialog box.) After you've made your settings, click OK. You return to the score.

At first you won't notice anything different. But if you look at the Edit menu, you'll see that there's now a check mark beside Special Part Extraction, telling you that Page View now contains the extracted part. Choose Page View from the View menu to examine and edit the extracted part.

To exit Special Part Extraction mode (and return to viewing the full score in Page View), choose Special Part Extraction again from the Edit menu.

For detailed information, see the Multimeasure Rest dialog box.

See also: Edit Menu


Edit/Update Layout

To speed up its operations, Finale doesn't constantly recalculate the positioning and page layout of measures within your score. Instead, this recalculation only takes place when you request it by choosing Update Layout from the Edit menu.

When you choose this command, Finale uses the settings in the Update Layout Options dialog box to determine what parts of the music layout it will recalculate to catch the changes in positioning and page layout.

To speed up its operations, Finale doesn't constantly recalculate the positioning and page layout of measures within your score. Instead, this recalculation only takes place when you request it by choosing Update Layout from the Edit menu.

If you enter Page View without choosing Update Layout, you may discover strange measure spacing if you've made any changes to the widths of measures - by using, for example, the Resize Tool, the Music Spacing commands, the Page Layout Tool, or the Measure Attributes Tool (to widen a measure by dragging its barline). Any of these actions can result in very wide or very cramped measures, or duplicated or missing systems on each page. By choosing Update Layout, you tell Finale to lay the measures out again within each system, taking such changes into account, in order to create attractive, neatly justified systems with appropriate measure spacing.

To further save you time, when you're in Page View, Finale only readjusts the measure layout from the page you're viewing to the end of the file. In other words, if you're satisfied with the layout of the first five pages, you don't have to wait for Finale to readjust them; scroll to page six before choosing Update Layout. (Update Layout affects the entire piece if you're viewing page one, or if you're in Scroll View.)

Update Layout offers two other useful functions. One way to manually arrange measures on the page is to use Finale's measure group features (such as the Group Measures command in the Page Layout menu, the Fit Music command in the Mass Edit menu, or the Mass Mover up/down arrow technique). If you ever want to delete such measure groups (and restore all measures to their original "floating" status), press Shift while selecting Update Layout.

Finally, if you're printing (on a PostScript printer) a file containing many key and time signature changes within a system, you may notice peculiar spacing of the key or time change at the end of the line. If that's the case, press Ctrl while choosing Update Layout; Finale will perform a "floating-point" recalculation that will correct the printout problem (but may make the screen display appear slightly misaligned).

See also: Edit Menu


Edit/Update Layout Options

Choose this command to display the Update Layout Options dialog box which lets you control how and when Finale adjusts the layout of your score in Page View when you choose the Update Layout command from the Edit menu.

For more detailed information, see the Update Layout Options dialog box.

See also: Edit Menu


Frame Menu

The Frame menu contains all the commands you'll need to display, edit, and adjust measure-assigned or page-assigned text blocks. Change whether text blocks are assigned to a measure or a page, displayed on one or more pages, or displayed with a border around text in a standard frame, or within a custom frame. You can also use this menu to change whether page-assigned text blocks are positioned from the page edge (or from the page margins), and how they are horizontally and vertically positioned on a page.

Standard Frame

Custom Frame

=========================

Alignment

Attributes

Show Frame Only On Screen

=========================

Edit Text

See also: Menus


Frame/Standard Frame

This command is selected by default so that text is surrounded by a rectangle. Choose this command to display the Standard Frame dialog box, where you specify whether a border appears around the frame, the line thickness of the border, and the amount to inset the text from the frame.

For more detailed information, see the Standard Frame dialog box.

See  also: Frame Menu


Frame/Custom Frame

When this command is selected, text is surrounded by a custom shape. Choose this command to display the Custom Frame dialog box, where you specify the positioning of text within or around a custom shape that you can create in the Shape Designer, and set the amount to indent the text from the frame.

For more detailed information, see the Custom Frame dialog box.

See  also: Frame Menu


Frame/Alignment

The commands in this submenu are only available when you're in Page View and have a page-assigned text block selected. Use this submenu to specify how you want the text block positioned on the page. Checkmarks appear by the alignment settings currently in use for the text block. You can also set the alignment for text blocks in the Frame Attributes dialog box .

Left

Center Horizontally

Right

Top (Header)

Center Vertically

Bottom (Footer)

Distance From Page Edge

Distance From Page Margin

See  also:

Frame Menu

Frame Attributes


Frame/Alignment/Left

This command is only available when you're in Page View and have a page-assigned text block selected. Use this command to align the text block to the left page margin or the page edge. You can also set the alignment for text blocks in the Frame Attributes dialog box.

When you change the horizontal alignment of a text block, Finale clears any manual positioning done in the score, and resets the H: positioning setting in the Frame Attributes dialog box to zero.

See  also:

Frame Menu

Frame Attributes


Frame/Alignment/Center Horizontally

This command is only available when you're in Page View and have a page-assigned text block selected. Use this command to center the text block between the left and right page margins or the edges of the page. You can also set the alignment for text blocks in the Frame Attributes dialog box.

When you change the horizontal alignment of a text block, Finale clears any manual positioning done in the score, and resets the H: positioning setting in the Frame Attributes dialog box to zero.

See  also:

Frame Menu

Frame Attributes


Frame/Alignment/Right

This command is only available when you're in Page View and have a page-assigned text block selected. Use this command to align the text block to the right page margin or the page edge. You can also set the alignment for text blocks in the Frame Attributes dialog box.

When you change the horizontal alignment of a text block, Finale clears any manual positioning done in the score, and resets the H: positioning setting in the Frame Attributes dialog box to zero.

See  also:

Frame Menu

Frame Attributes


Frame/Alignment/Top (Header)

This command is only available when you're in Page View and have a page-assigned text block selected. Use this command to align the text block to the top page margin or the page edge. You can also set the alignment for text blocks in the Frame Attributes dialog box.

When you change the vertical alignment of a text block, Finale clears any manual positioning done in the score, and resets the V: positioning setting in the Frame Attributes dialog box to zero.

See  also:

Frame Menu

Frame Attributes


Frame/Alignment/Center Vertically

This command is only available when you're in Page View and have a page-assigned text block selected. Use this command to center the text block between the top and bottom page margins or the edges of the page. You can also set the alignment for text blocks in the Frame Attributes dialog box.

When you change the vertical alignment of a text block, Finale clears any manual positioning done in the score, and resets the V: positioning setting in the Frame Attributes dialog box to zero.

See  also:

Frame Menu

Frame Attributes


Frame/Alignment/Bottom (Footer)

This command is only available when you're in Page View and have a page-assigned text block selected. Use this command to align the text block to the bottom page margin or the page edge. You can also set the alignment for text blocks in the Frame Attributes dialog box.

When you change the vertical alignment of a text block, Finale clears any manual positioning done in the score, and resets the V: positioning setting in the Frame Attributes dialog box to zero.

See  also:

Frame Menu

Frame Attributes


Frame/Alignment/Distance From Page Edge

Choose this command to align the selected text block with the edge of the page instead of the page margin. You can also change this setting in the Frame Attributes dialog box.

See  also:

Frame Menu

Frame Attributes


Alignment/Distance From Page Margin

Choose this command to align the selected text block with the page margin instead of the edge of the page. You can also change this setting in the Frame Attributes dialog box.

See  also:

Frame Menu

Frame Attributes


Frame/Attributes

This command is available when a single text block is selected. Choose this command to display the Frame Attributes dialog box for the currently selected page-assigned or measure-assigned text block. Use this dialog box to change the placement of the text block in your score, its alignment on the page (left, right or centered), and what pages, if applicable, the text block appears on.

For more detailed information, see the Frame Attributes dialog box.

See  also: Frame Menu


Frame/Show Frame Only On Screen

Determines whether a text block will appear on-screen only. When selected, the text block will appear on-screen, but not on your printed music. When this command is not selected, the text block will appear on the printed page as it appears on-screen. Select this command for editorial comments, compositional notes, or other notes you do not want to print.

See  also: Frame Menu


Frame/Edit Text

Choose this command to display the Edit Text window for the currently selected text block. Or, choose this command when no text block handle is selected to cycle through and edit all text blocks in your score, including staff and group names.

For more detailed information, see the Edit Text dialog box.

See  also: Frame Menu


Graphics Menu

The Graphics menu contains all the commands you'll need to export a selected region of a page, or to export one or more pages, and save them as either a PostScript or bitmapped graphics file. Export full pages or portions of pages as EPS or TIFF files. Place EPS, TIFF, or WMF (Windows Metafiles) graphics into your score (in Scroll or Page View), and assign them to a measure, a page, or a range of pages. Use the Check Graphics command to verify that Finale is able to locate the graphics files placed into the document. Once you've placed a graphic into the score, you can adjust its placement using the Alignment submenu (for page-assigned graphics) or the Attributes command.

Export Selection

Export Pages

Place Graphic

==============

Alignment

Attributes

==============

Check Graphics

See also: Menus


Graphics/Export Selection

This command is only available in Page View when a region of music is selected. Choose this command to display the Export Selection dialog box, where you can export the selection on the current page or on a range of pages; save the graphic as an EPS or TIFF file.

For more detailed information, see the Export Selection/Pages  dialog box.

See  also: Graphics Menu


Graphics/Export Pages

This command is only available in Page View. Choose this command to display the Export Pages dialog box, where you can export a single page, a range of pages, or all pages, as separate graphics files; save the graphic as an EPS or TIFF file.

For more detailed information, see the Export Selection/Pages  dialog box.

See  also: Graphics Menu


Graphics/Place Graphic

Choose this command to place an EPS, TIFF, or WMF (Windows Metafile) graphic into your score in Scroll View or Page View. The Place Graphic dialog box appears, listing the available graphic formats, as well as the option to display all files.

Note: Finale doesn't actually embed the graphics placed into your Finale document. Instead, it places a link to the graphic's location. Use the Check Graphics command for a list of graphics placed into a document; when you copy Finale documents, make sure that you copy all the graphics used in the documents as well.

For detailed information, see the Place Graphic dialog box.

See  also:

Graphics Menu

Check Graphics


Graphics/Alignment

The commands in this submenu are only available when you're in Page View and have a page-assigned graphic selected. Use this submenu to specify how you want the graphic positioned on the page. Checkmarks appear by the alignment settings currently in use for the graphic. You can also set the alignment for graphics in the Graphic Attributes dialog box .

Left

Center Horizontally

Right

Top (Header)

Center Vertically

Bottom (Footer)

Distance from Page Edge

Distance from Page Margin

See  also:

Graphics Menu

Graphic Attributes


Graphics/Alignment/Left

This command is only available when you're Page View and have a page-assigned graphic selected. Use this command to align the graphic to the left page margin or the page edge. You can also set the alignment for graphics in the Graphic Attributes dialog box.

When you change the horizontal alignment of a graphic, Finale clears any manual positioning done in the score, and resets the H: positioning setting in the Graphic Attributes dialog box to zero.

See  also:

Graphics Menu

Graphic Attributes


Graphics/Alignment/Center Horizontally

This command is only available when you're in Page View and have a page-assigned graphic selected. Use this command to center the graphic between the left and right page margins or the edges of the page. You can also set the alignment for graphics in the Graphic Attributes dialog box.

When you change the horizontal alignment of a graphic, Finale clears any manual positioning done in the score, and resets the H: positioning setting in the Graphic Attributes dialog box to zero.

See  also:

Graphics Menu

Graphic Attributes


Graphics/Alignment/Right

This command is only available when you're in Page View and have a page-assigned graphic selected. Use this command to align the graphic to the right page margin or the page edge. You can also set the alignment for graphics in the Graphic Attributes dialog box.

When you change the horizontal alignment of a graphic, Finale clears any manual positioning done in the score, and resets the H: positioning setting in the Graphic Attributes dialog box to zero.

See  also:

Graphics Menu

Graphic Attributes


Graphics/Alignment/Top (Header)

This command is only available when you're in Page View and have a page-assigned graphic selected. Use this command to align the graphic to the top page margin or the page edge. You can also set the alignment for graphics in the Graphic Attributes dialog box.

When you change the vertical alignment of a graphic, Finale clears any manual positioning done in the score, and resets the V: positioning setting in the Graphic Attributes dialog box to zero.

See  also:

Graphics Menu

Graphic Attributes


Graphics Alignment/Center Vertically
Graphics/Alignment/Center Vertically

This command is only available when you're in Page View and have a page-assigned graphic selected. Use this command to center the graphic between the top and bottom page margins or the edges of the page. You can also set the alignment for graphics in the Graphic Attributes dialog box.

When you change the vertical alignment of a graphic, Finale clears any manual positioning done in the score, and resets the V: positioning setting in the Graphic Attributes dialog box to zero.

See  also:

Graphics Menu

Graphic Attributes


Graphics/Alignment/Bottom (Footer)

This command is only available when you're in Page View and have a page-assigned graphic selected. Use this command to align the graphic to the bottom page margin or the page edge. You can also set the alignment for graphics in the Graphic Attributes dialog box.

When you change the vertical alignment of a graphic, Finale clears any manual positioning done in the score, and resets the V: positioning setting in the Graphic Attributes dialog box to zero.

See  also:

Graphics Menu

Graphic Attributes


Graphics/Alignment/Distance from Page Edge

Choose this command to align the selected graphic with the edge of the page instead of the page margin. You can also change this setting in the Graphic Attributes dialog box.

See also:

Graphics Menu

Graphic Attributes


Graphics/Alignment/Distance from Page Margin

Choose this command to align the selected graphic with the page margin instead of the edge of the page. You can also change this setting in the Graphic Attributes dialog box.

See  also:

Graphics Menu

Graphics Attributes


Graphics/Attributes

This command is available when a single graphic is selected. Choose this command to display the Graphic Attributes dialog box for the currently selected page-assigned or measure-assigned graphic. Use this dialog box to change the placement of the graphic in your score, its alignment on the page (left, right or centered), its scaling, and what pages, if applicable, the graphic appears on.

For more detailed information, see the Graphic Attributes dialog box.

See  also: Graphics Menu


Graphics/Check Graphics

Choose this command to display a listing of all the graphics you've placed directly into your score or into the Shape Designer. If any graphics files are missing, they will be listed before the remaining "found" graphics. Use this command to make sure you have all the necessary graphics for your document if you'll be printing the document on another system.

For more detailed information, see the Check Graphics dialog box.

See  also:

Graphics Menu

Graphic Attributes


Help Menu

The Help menu lets you view the online help for Finale Dialog boxes, Menus and Palettes. You can also display the online help for a particular menu command or dialog box by pressing F1.

Contents

Search for Help On

=================

How to Use Help

=================

About Finale

See also: Menus


Help/Contents

Choose Contents to display the main help topics available on Finale Dialog boxes, Menus and Palettes.

See also: Help Menu


Help/Search for Help
Help/Search for Help On

Choose Search for Help On to search for a particular dialog boxes or menu command, or choose from a list of general Finale topics such as MIDI or Printing, or Entering Music to display a list of Finale dialog boxes or menus related to the topic.

See also: Help Menu


Help/How to Use Help

Choose How to Use Help for information about using Finale's Online Help.

See also: Help Menu


Help/About Finale

Choose About Finale to display the application version number and copyright information for Finale.

See also: Help Menu


HyperScribe Menu

Before you transcribe a real-time performance, there are a few things Finale needs to know about the music you're about to play. For example, you need to tell Finale what rhythmic value you'll be using for your key or foot taps as you play, and the value to which you want your performance quantized. This menu lets you make these settings, which have a great deal to do with the quality of the resulting transcription.

Beat Source

Quantization

Record Mode

==================

HyperScribe Options

See also: Menus


HyperScribe/Beat Source

Use this submenu to tell Finale what MIDI signal will serve as the tempo reference while you play - and who will provide it (either you or Finale).

Tap

Playback

External MIDI Sync

See also: HyperScribe Menu


HyperScribe/Beat Source/Tap Source
Beat Source/Tap

Choose Tap if you're going to be tapping a pedal or a key while you play; the Tap Source dialog box appears.

For detailed information, see the Tap Source dialog box

See also: HyperScribe Menu


HyperScribe/Beat Source/Metronome
Beat Source/Playback

Choose Playback if you want Finale to provide a metronome click for the beat, and if you want Finale play music in existing staves; the Playback Source dialog box appears.

When Playback is selected for the Beat Source, Finale uses the settings for the metronome click sound and the countoff measures specified in the Click and Countoff dialog box.

For detailed information, see the Playback Source dialog box and the Click and Countoff dialog box

See also: HyperScribe Menu


HyperScribe/Beat Source/External MIDI Sync
Beat Source/External MIDI Sync

Choose External MIDI Sync if you're using HyperScribe to transcribe music being played by an external sequencer or another computer that's equipped to transmit a MIDI Sync signal. Finale will wait for such a signal from the external sequencer, at which point Finale will automatically "sync up" to it, transcribing the music as it goes. No tapping (or even playing) is necessary.

See also: HyperScribe Menu


HyperScribe/Quantization

Quantization is when the computer rounds off each note you play to the nearest eighth note (or some other value you specify), since a literal transcription of what you played - down to 1024th-note accuracy - would be impossible to read.

When you choose this item, the Quantization dialog box appears, in which you can specify how Finale should perform this rounding-off, and to what value.

For detailed information, see the Quantization dialog box.

See also: HyperScribe Menu


HyperScribe/Record Mode

Use this submenu to tell Finale whether you'll be recording your performance into one staff, or splitting the performance into two staves. If you prefer, you can record into two or more staves -- or layers of a staff at one by using the multitrack record mode.

Record into One Staff

Split into Two Staves

Multitrack Record

See also: HyperScribe Menu


HyperScribe/Record Mode/Record into One Staff
Record Mode/Record into One Staff

Choose this command to notate your performance onto one staff. When this option is selected, Finale records from the channel set in the HyperScribe Options dialog box, then notates the music onto the staff you clicked for recording. (Or, if you click the Playback Controls' Record button, Finale records into the staff specified in the Instrument List.)

See also: HyperScribe Menu


HyperScribe/Record Mode/Split into Two Staves
Record Mode/Split into Two Staves

Choose this command to split your performance onto two staves. Finale notates your performance onto the staff you click and the staff below it. The notes are split into the two staves according to the note you specify in the Fixed Split Point dialog box.

When this option is selected, Finale records from the channel set in the HyperScribe Options dialog box, then notates the music onto the staff you clicked (and the staff below it) for recording. (Or, if you click the Playback Controls' Record button, Finale records into the staff specified in the Instrument List - and splits the notes into the staff directly below it.)

For detailed information, see the Fixed Split Point dialog box

See also: HyperScribe Menu


HyperScribe/Record/Multitrack Record
Record Mode/Multitrack Record

Choose this command to record into any number of staves or layers of staves simultaneously.

When this option is selected, Finale uses the Instrument List's R (Record) column to determine what staves or layers to record into. Finale also uses the Instrument List's RChan (Record Channel) column, which only appears when Multitrack Record is selected, to determine the incoming channel(s) for the staff or layer set to record into. Click a measure or click the Playback Controls' Record button to start recording; Finale notates the music onto the staves or layers selected for recording.

For detailed information, see the Instrument List window and the Playback Controls

See also: HyperScribe Menu


HyperScribe/HyperScribe Options
HyperScribe/Options

Choose this item to display the HyperScribe Options dialog box, which holds a number of specialized transcription choices such as the incoming channel for the Record into One Staff, or Split Into Two Staves record modes, and whether you want Finale to record key velocities and note durations as you play.

For detailed information, see the HyperScribe Options dialog box.

See also: HyperScribe Menu


Lyrics Menu

The Lyrics menu contains all the commands you'll need to create and edit lyrics, distribute the text in the score, adjust the positions of individual syllables, draw word extensions for syllables that are sustained, and so on.

You can have as many sets of lyrics as you want - up to 512 of each of Finale's three lyric types: Verse, Chorus, and Section. There's no technical distinction between these three types - the lyrics you enter as a Verse can be used in the chorus of your song, and vice versa. They're only there to help you keep your lyrics straight, and to make it easy to change the font or style for a large chunk of lyrics at once (you can specify a different font for Verses, Choruses, and Sections by choosing Select Default Fonts from the Options menu).

Edit Lyrics

==================

Adjust Syllables

Click Assignment

Clone Lyric

Edit Word Extensions

Shift Lyrics

Type Into Score

==================

Align Syllable Left

Align Syllable Right

===================

Specify Current Lyric

Adjust Baselines

See also: Menus


Lyrics/Edit Lyrics

Choose this command to enter the Edit Lyrics window. If you have copied lyrics from an external word processor, choose Paste from the Edit menu, or press Ctrl-V here to paste them. Otherwise, you can create lyrics from scratch; just type them in, being sure to insert a hyphen between syllables. (Finale recognizes a space, hyphen, or carriage return as the end of a syllable.)

For detailed information, see the Edit Lyrics window.

See also: Lyrics Menu


Lyrics/Adjust Syllables

This command lets you move an individual syllable anywhere you want it. Click the staff above a syllable; a handle appears. Click a handle to select its syllable; Shift-click to select additional syllables attached to the same note. Drag a handle to move its syllable (or all selected syllables) to a new position; press $ to restore a selected syllable to its original position. To remove a selected syllable (or all selected syllables) from the score, press Delete .

You can also use Adjust Syllables in conjunction with the Align commands in the Lyrics menu.

See also: Lyrics Menu


Lyrics/Click Assignment

After you've typed lyrics into the Edit Lyrics window, choose  Click Assignment from the Lyrics menu. The scrolling Click Assignment window appears; click the staff to which you want to add lyrics (move the Click Assignment window out of the way, if necessary, by dragging its title bar). A syllable from the left end of this window attaches itself to each note you click (or, if the note is in Voice 2, each one you Shift-click).

If you Ctrl-click a note, however, Finale will zip through your entire set of lyrics, intelligently distributing them to the notes in the score (skipping rests and tied notes) for as many notes as there are syllables.

For detailed information, see the Click Assignment dialog box.

See also: Lyrics Menu


Lyrics/Clone Lyric

Use this command when you want to copy the lyrics from one staff (the "source" staff) to another (the "target" staff). This technique, however, only copies one set of lyrics at a time - either the Verse, Chorus, or Section currently specified by the Specify Current Lyric command, or the last lyric you edited.

Select the source measure, then drag the first selected measure so that it's superimposed on the first target measure. Finale will copy the lyrics from the source measures to the target measures. Bear in mind that only notes that fall on the same beats as those in the source measures will receive syllables.

See also: Lyrics Menu


Lyrics/Edit Word Extensions

A Word Extension is the underline that follows a syllable that's sustained beyond the note it's attached to.

To create a Word Extension, choose the command from the Lyrics menu, then click in the staff above the syllable in question. A square handle appears. Drag it to the right as far as you want to draw the Word Extension underline. To remove the Word Extension, click its handle and press Delete.

See also: Lyrics Menu


Lyrics/Shift Lyrics

When you choose this command, Finale displays the Shift Lyrics dialog box, where you can specify the direction in which you want all the syllables shifted.

For detailed information, see the Shift Lyrics dialog box.

See also: Lyrics Menu


Lyrics/Type Into Score

Instead of typing lyrics into the Edit Lyrics window separately, you can enter them directly into the music so that you know at all times where you are relative to the melody.

To do so, first specify the lyric type and number for the lyrics you intend to create (by choosing Specify Current Lyric or Edit Lyrics from the Lyrics menu). Choose Type Into Score from the Lyrics menu. A set of four positioning triangles appears at the left edge of the screen. These control the baseline of the lyrics (against which the bottom edges of the words line up).

Click on the staff at the position of the first melody note. Don't click the notehead - instead, click in the staff lines. A small blinking cursor - the insertion point - appears beneath the staff where you clicked. Type the lyrics normally; each time you type a space or a hyphen, Finale automatically moves the insertion point to the next note in preparation to enter the next syllable. As you type, Finale automatically scrolls the music so you always know where you are.

If you make a mistake, just backspace over it by pressing the backspace key. To change a word you've already typed, click in the staff lines above it so that it's highlighted, then type its replacement. If you encounter a melismatic passage, where one syllable is sustained through several melody notes, skip past each sustained note by pressing the Space bar.

Note that as you type, Finale stores each syllable in the Edit Lyrics window - the Lyric Tool's text processor. It's important to understand that the Edit Lyrics window and the lyrics in the score are dynamically linked. If you change a syllable in the Edit Lyrics window, the syllable instantly changes in the score - and vice versa.

See also: Lyrics Menu


Lyrics/Align Syllable Left

This command is only available when Adjust Syllables is selected in the menu. Use it to align selected syllables (in several verses) with the left edge of the uppermost selected syllable. You might use this feature to left-justify the first syllable of each verse under the first note of a hymn, for example.

Begin by using the Adjust Syllables command, therefore, to position the top syllable exactly where you want it. Then, by Shift-clicking, select the handles of all syllables attached to the same note, including the one you just positioned; choose Align Syllable Left.

See also: Lyrics Menu


Lyrics/Align Syllables Right
Lyrics/Align Syllable Right

This command is only available when Adjust Syllables is selected in the menu. Use it to align selected syllables with the right edge of the uppermost selected syllable.

Begin by using the Adjust Syllables command, therefore, to position the top syllable exactly where you want it. Then, by Shift-clicking, select the handles of all syllables attached to the same note, including the one you just positioned; choose Align Syllable Right.

See also: Lyrics Menu


Lyrics/Specify Current Lyrics
Lyrics/Specify Current Lyric

Choose this command to display the Specify Current Lyric dialog box, where you can specify whether you want to edit, Type Into Score, Clone, or Click-Assign a Verse, Chorus, or Section. In the text box, you can also specify by number which Verse, Chorus, or Section you want to manipulate.

You can also switch one lyric type to another in the Edit Lyrics window- for example, if you've just used Click Assignment to place Verse lyrics in the score, but you now want to use the Edit Lyrics window to enter the chorus, choose Chorus from the Lyric drop-down list.

For detailed information, see the Specify Current Lyric dialog box.

See also:

Lyrics Menu

Edit Lyrics


Lyrics/Adjust Baselines

This command displays the Adjust Baselines dialog box, where you can specify the exact vertical location for the baseline of each lyric type and number (the invisible line against which the bottoms of the words align).

For detailed information, see the Adjust Baselines dialog box.

See also: Lyrics Menu


Mass Mover Menu

The Mass Mover menu contains commands for moving or copying music from one place to another. You can specify one of three ways to copy, and you can also specify which elements of the selected music you want copied - lyrics, chord symbols, articulations, notes, and so on.

In this menu, a check mark lets you know which action and which elements are currently selected. The Mass Mover menu remembers your settings, even when you choose another tool and later return to the Mass Mover Tool.

You can also drag and drop measures between any open Finale document window. Drag between two windows on the same document, or between windows on different documents. Drag-enclose a region to select the measures in a document window that you want to copy to another window; drag the selected region of music to an unselected region in the destination window.

Note: All Mass Mover copying operations plus all other commands in the Mass Edit menu that affect a selected region of music (like Change Note Durations) can be interrupted. Simply press Escape to stop processing the command.

Copy and Replace

Copy and Insert

Mirror

=====================

Select Partial Measures

Select Region

=====================

Move Everything

=====================

Move Entry Items

Move Measure Items

See also: Menus


Mass Mover/Copy and Replace

In this copying mode, Finale copies music (or selected musical elements) from the selected ("source") measures and pastes it into the "target" measures.

First, select a region of music; then drag the selected area so that it's superimposed on the beginning of the destination area. If Select Partial Measures is selected in the Mass Mover menu, drag to the location of the precise beat where you want the material to be pasted; otherwise, drag to any point in the first measure of the destination region. Finale copies the specified musical elements of the source music to the target location, replacing that element of the music that's already there.

See also: Mass Mover Menu


Mass Mover/Copy and Insert

In this copying mode, Finale inserts a copy of the selected music just before the target measure. This command only works if you've specified that you want to copy notes (by choosing Move Entry Items from the Mass Mover menu); you can't insert any other items by themselves.

First, select a region of music, then drag the selected region so that it's superimposed on the beginning of the destination area. If Select Partial Measures is selected in the Mass Mover menu, drag to the location of the precise beat where you want the material to be inserted; otherwise, drag to the measure before which you want the material inserted. Finale inserts a copy of the source material just before the beat or measure at which you release the mouse button. Note that Finale will automatically create enough new measures (in all staves) to accommodate the copied material, or rebar the piece as necessary.

See also: Mass Mover Menu


Mass Mover/Mirror

In this copying mode, the copy you create is an intelligent copy (a mirror) of the source measure or measures. If you edit the notes or expression markings in the source measures, the change is immediately reflected in the mirrored measures.

The process is exactly the same as any Mass Mover copying action: Select a source region of complete measures. Drag the first selected measure so that it's superimposed on the first target measure. Finale displays the Mirror Attributes dialog box, letting you specify a transposition, if you want, and other aspects of the copy. See Mirror Attributes dialog box.

You can only create this kind of copy if the target measures are originally empty. Note also that if you're creating a mirror; everything in the source measures will be copied to the target measures. (You can, however, tell Finale not to display certain elements of the music by specifying them in the Don't Draw section of the Mirror Attributes dialog box that appears).

The result is a copy that's dynamically linked to the source measures. If you change any aspect of the source measures, the mirror automatically changes too. You can change any settings you made in the Mirror Attributes dialog box. Note, too, that you can copy a mirrored measure in the usual way; if you've selected Mirror from the Mass Mover menu, the target measures will themselves be a mirror (of the mirror). If you've selected "Copy and Replace" or "Copy and Insert," however, the mirror you're copying will be turned into normal non-mirrored music.

See also: Mass Mover Menu


Mass Mover/Select Partial Measures

When this command is checked (in the Mass Mover menu), you can select part of a measure or measures. When it's unchecked, you select music in complete one-measure increments. You can drag-copy, use the Edit commands (and create Clip files) with partial measures. Note, however, that if you select a partial measure region, only the notes, rests, and their related items (such as articulations) are affected. Measure items (such as score expressions) are not included when either the source or the destination is a partial measure region.

See also: Mass Mover Menu


Mass Mover/Select Region

When you want to select a region of music to edit, erase, or copy, you generally do so by clicking, Shift-clicking, or drag-enclosing. These methods, however, require that the measures you're selecting be visible on the screen. With this command, however, you can select large or small sections of your score without scrolling; in fact, if you're viewing measure 200, you can even select measures 1 through 10 remotely (without actually clicking any measures) with this command.

When you choose this command, the Select Region dialog box appears, in which you can enter the staff names, beat and measure numbers that define the region you want to select. When you click OK, Finale selects the region you've specified - even if none of it is visible on the screen.

For detailed information, see the Select Region dialog box.

See also: Mass Mover Menu


Mass Mover/Move Everything

The bottom half of the Mass Mover menu lets you specify which elements of the selected music you want copied. If there's a check mark beside Move Everything, Finale assumes you intend to copy every element of the selected music - notes, markings, chord symbols, lyrics, changes in note size, stem and beam alterations, measure widths, key signatures, and so on. To specify only certain of these elements, choose either Move Entry Items or Move Measure Items.

See also: Mass Mover Menu


Mass Mover/Move Entry Items

An entry is a note or rest; an entry item is anything attached to it: lyrics, articulations, chord symbols, and so on. When you select this item, a dialog box appears, listing entry items that you can select for copying. Your Mass Mover copying actions will only copy the selected items.

For detailed information, see the Entry Items dialog box.

See also: Mass Mover Menu


Mass Mover/Move Measure Items

When you choose this command, Finale displays the Measure Items dialog box, listing various measure-related elements (Smart Shapes, measure widths, MIDI data, and so on) that you can select for copying. For a complete list that includes descriptions of these elements, see Measure Items dialog box. When this item is selected, your Mass Mover copying actions will only copy the selected items.

For detailed information, see the Measure Items dialog box.

See also: Mass Mover Menu


Mass Edit Menu

The Mass Edit menu is one of the most important menus in Finale. Its commands transform your music in many powerful ways; it's called Mass Edit because it can make global changes to large selections of music at once. If you've told Finale you want to be able to select partial measures instead of only one-measure increments (by choosing Select Partial Measures from the Mass Mover menu), most of the Mass Edit commands work on selected regions as small as a single beat, or as large as the entire score. All the commands described below work on partial-measure selections, except as noted otherwise.

Note: All commands in the Mass Edit menu that affect a selected region of music (such as Change Note Durations) can be interrupted. Simply press Escape to stop processing the command.

Erase

================

Measures

Multimeasure Rest

================

Apply Articulation

================

Change

Utilities

================

Music Spacing

================

Transpose

================

Rebar

Rebeam

Retranscribe

================

Alternate Notation

Fit Music

Move Layers

See also: Menus


Mass Edit/Erase

Choose Erase to display the Items to Erase dialog box, which lets you specify either Measure or Entry (note-related) items to erase. Either selection displays another dialog box (see Measure Items dialog box or Entry Items dialog box), listing every possible erasable item. Choose any items you want to erase. (If you select only part of a measure before choosing Erase, the Measure Items choice won't be available in the dialog box.)

For detailed information, see the Items to Erase dialog box.

See also: Mass Edit Menu


Mass Edit/Measures

Use the commands in the Measures submenu to add, delete, and insert measures.

Add

Insert

Delete

Clear

See also: Mass Edit Menu


MassEdit/Measures/Add
Measures/Add

When you choose Add, Finale asks you how many new blank measures you want to add (in all staves) to the end of the piece. Enter the number of measures you want added, and click OK. (This command performs the same function as Ctrl-clicking the Measure Tool.)

For detailed information, see the Add Measures dialog box.

See also: Mass Edit/Measures Menu


MassEdit/Measures/Insert
Measures/Insert

When you choose Insert, Finale asks how many measures you want to insert (in all staves) just before the first selected measure. Enter the number of measures you want inserted, then click OK.

For detailed information, see the Insert Measures dialog box.

See also: Mass Edit/Measures Menu


MassEdit/Measures/Delete
Measures/Delete

When you choose Delete, Finale removes the selected measures from the piece completely - from all staves - so that there are now fewer measures in the piece. If only part of a measure is selected, Finale will warn you that this command only applies to full measures, and offers you the option of extending your selection to the outer measure boundaries.

See also: Mass Edit/Measures Menu


MassEdit/Measures/Clear
Measures/Clear

When you choose Clear, Finale removes the contents of the selected music (whether or not you've selected entire measures), leaving equivalent rests behind.

See also: Mass Edit/Measures Menu


Mass Edit/Multimeasure Rest

Use the commands in this submenu to break existing multimeasure rests, create multimeasure rests regardless of whether Special Part Extraction is on, and edit the appearance of an individual multimeasure rest. You must be in Page View to change multimeasure rests.

Break

Create

Edit...

See also: Mass Edit Menu


MassEdit/Multimeasure Rest/Break
Multimeasure Rest/Break

Use this command in Page View to separate the multimeasure rests in the selected region into separate measures of rests. Use this command if you don't want the measures grouped together, or if you want to combine them into a different multimeasure rest grouping.

See also: Mass Edit/Multimeasure Rest Menu


MassEdit/Multimeasure Rest/Create
Multimeasure Rest/Create

Use this command in Page View to create a multimeasure rest out of consecutive empty measures in the selected region. Finale creates a multimeasure rest grouping using the definition you've set up in the Multimeasure Rest dialog box in the Options menu.

See also: Mass Edit/Multimeasure Rest Menu


MassEdit/Multimeasure Rest/Edit
Multimeasure Rest/Edit

Use this command in Page View to change the display for an occasional individual multimeasure rest in the score -- if you need to adjust for a clef change, for example.  Finale changes the appearance of the first multimeasure rest in the selected region.

For detailed information, see the Multimeasure Rest dialog box.

See also: Mass Edit/Multimeasure Rest Menu


Mass Edit/Apply Articulation

This powerful command lets you add a certain articulation mark (a staccato, for example) to every note (or notes of a particular duration) in a selected region at once.

For detailed information, see the Apply Articulation dialog box.

See also: Mass Edit Menu


Mass Edit/Change

Use the commands in this submenu, to change certain aspects of a selected region all at once - make all the barlines invisible, all the measures wider, all the notes smaller, and so on. The first five commands only affect the selection in full one-measure increments.

Barlines

Key

Time

Width

Positioning

Articulation Assignments

Chord Assignments

Staff Expression Assignments

Note Durations

Noteheads

Note Size

See also: Mass Edit Menu


MassEdit/Change/Barlines
Change/Barlines

Choose Barlines to display the Change Barline dialog box, where you can specify a barline type (double, dotted, invisible, and so on) for all measures - or every fifth measure, or whatever frequency you specify - in the selected region.

For detailed information, see the Change Barlines dialog box.

See also: Mass Edit/Change Menu


MassEdit/Change/Key
Change/Key

Choose Key to display the Key Signature dialog box, so that you can change the key for a selected region.

For detailed information, see the Key Signature dialog box.

See also: Mass Edit/Change Menu


MassEdit/Change/Time
Change/Time

Choose Time to display the Time Signature dialog box, so that you can change the meter for a selected region.

For detailed information, see the Time Signature dialog box.

See also: Mass Edit/Change Menu


MassEdit/Change/Width
Change/Width

Choose Width to change the barline-to-barline width of all selected measures.

For detailed information, see the Change Measure Width dialog box.

See also: Mass Edit/Change Menu


MassEdit/Change/Positioning
Change/Positioning

Choose Positioning to set all selected measures to one of three note-positioning schemes.

For detailed information, see the Change Positioning dialog box.

See also: Mass Edit/Change Menu


MassEdit/Change/Articulation Assignments
Change/Articulation Assignments

Choose Articulation Assignments to adjust the positions of all (or certain) articulation marks in a region - to center them, for example. You can also use this command to swap one symbol for another.

For detailed information, see the Change Articulation Assignments dialog box.

See also: Mass Edit/Change Menu


MassEdit/Change/Chord Assignments
Change/Chord Assignments

Choose Chord Assignments to display a dialog box that lets you change the visual display or playback attributes of chord symbols in the selected region.

For detailed information, see the Change Chord Assignments dialog box.

See also: Mass Edit/Change Menu


MassEdit/Change/Staff Expression Assignments
Change/Staff Expression Assignments

Choose Staff Expression Assignments to adjust the positions of all (or certain) staff expressions in a region - to center them. You can also use this command to swap one expression marking for another.

For detailed information, see the Change Staff Expression Assignments dialog box.

See also: Mass Edit/Change Menu


MassEdit/Change/Note Durations
Change/Note Durations

Using the Note Durations command, you can halve or double the note values in a selected region, in effect re-notating the same passage to last twice (or half) as long. Finale will even rebar the affected passage, if you wish, to place the correct number of notes in each affected measure.

For detailed information, see the Change Note Durations dialog box.

See also: Mass Edit/Change Menu


MassEdit/Change/Noteheads
Change/Noteheads

Choose Noteheads to display a dialog box in which you can specify which noteheads in the selected region you want to change to regular noteheads or to a particular notehead.

For detailed information, see the Change Noteheads dialog box.

See also: Mass Edit/Change Menu


MassEdit/Change/Note Size
Change/Note Size

Use Note Size to change the size of the notes in the selected region - to create cue notes, for example.

For detailed information, see the Change Note Size dialog box.

See also: Mass Edit/Change Menu


Mass Edit/Utilities

The Utilities command offers a selection of miscellaneous transformation commands.

Check Accidentals

Check Elapsed Time

Check Ties

Convert Mirrors

Explode Music

Fill With Rests

Freeze Stems Down

Freeze Stems Up

Implode Music

Remove Stem Changes

Respell Notes

See also: Mass Edit Menu


MassEdit/Utilities/Check Accidentals
Utilities/Check Accidentals

Check Accidentals tells Finale to sweep through the selected region and hide any accidentals on notes tied over from the end of the previous measure, and to add accidentals, if necessary, on subsequent notes in the measure.

See also: Mass Edit/Utilities Menu


MassEdit/Utilities/Check Elapsed Time
Utilities/Check Elapsed Time

Choose this command to verify the real-time length of the selected region of music.

For detailed information, see the Elapsed Time dialog box.

See also: Mass Edit/Utilities Menu


MassEdit/Utilities/Check Ties
Utilities/Check Ties

When you first put ties into the score using the Simple Entry or Speedy Entry tools, they sometimes don't play back correctly. For example, the ending tied note may be attacked again instead of being added to the duration of the note it's tied to; furthermore, when a tie straddles a system line break, the tie sometimes isn't continued onto the next system. Choose the Check Ties command to correct all ties within the selected region.

See also: Mass Edit/Utilities Menu


MassEdit/Utilities/Convert Mirrors
Utilities/Convert Mirrors

The Convert Mirrors command affects Mirrors, or "intelligent copies" of certain measures, in which the copies are dynamically linked to the source music. It converts such measures into "real" measures - in effect, severing the link to the original source measures, and changing the selected mirror measures into normal non-mirrors. The "Converting the mirrors." dialog box appears, asking you if you're sure you want to convert them.

See also: Mass Edit/Utilities Menu


MassEdit/Utilities/Explode Music
Utilities/Explode Music

Finale's Explode Music command strips a chordal passage into individual single-line melodies on separate staves. You could use this feature, for example, to transform a piano reduction into four monophonic-melody staves for a choir. You're not limited to exploding a single staff; you can select several staves for exploding. (Explode Music only affects full-measure selections.)

After selecting the region you want to explode, choose this command. The Explode Music dialog box appears, where you can tell Finale how many resultant staves you want, what clefs they should use, and so on.

For detailed information, see the Explode Music dialog box.

See also: Mass Edit/Utilities Menu


MassEdit/Utilities/Fill With Rests
Utilities/Fill With Rests

This command checks a selected region of music for rhythmically incomplete measures and automatically fills them with the correct number of rests. This command works on complete measures, but will not affect completely empty measures.

See also: Mass Edit/Utilities Menu


MassEdit/Utilities/Freeze Stems Down
Utilities/Freeze Stems Down

Finale normally decides whether a note's stem should go up or down depending on its vertical position in the staff. If you've specified a multiple-voice arrangement - for example, upper voice = stems up, lower voice = stems down - using the Layer Options command (Options menu), Finale again chooses stem directions automatically. You can manually flip a region of stem down, though, by choosing Freeze Stems Down.

See also: Mass Edit/Utilities Menu


MassEdit/Utilities/Freeze Stems Up
Utilities/Freeze Stems Up

Finale normally decides whether a note's stem should go up or down depending on its vertical position in the staff. If you've specified a multiple-voice arrangement - for example, upper voice = stems up, lower voice = stems down - using the Layer Options command (Options menu), Finale again chooses stem directions automatically. You can manually flip a region of stems up, though, by choosing Freeze Stems Up.

See also: Mass Edit/Utilities Menu


MassEdit/Utilities/Implode Music
Utilities/Implode Music

When you Implode Music, Finale condenses the music on the selected staves onto a single staff, a feature useful for creating piano reductions, for example. This command, which only affects full-measure selections, displays a dialog box in which you can specify how you want Finale to implode the music.

For detailed information, see the Implode Music dialog box.

See also: Mass Edit/Utilities Menu


MassEdit/Utilities/Remove Stem Changes
Utilities/Remove Stem Changes

To restore stems that have been "frozen" stems (using the Freeze Stems Down or Freeze Stems Up commands) to stems that can flip depending on the notes' pitches, select the region and choose Remove Stem Changes. This command also removes any Reverse, Double, or Split Stem editing you've done with Special Tools.

See also: Mass Edit/Utilities Menu


MassEdit/Utilities/Respell Notes
Utilities/Respell Notes

When you choose Respell Notes, Finale re-transcribes the pitches of the selected notes, so they appear as  they would when entered for the first time. For example, if a region contains C double sharps, this command will change all of them to D naturals.

See also: Mass Edit/Utilities Menu


Mass Edit/Music Spacing

These commands, which affect full-measure selections, are unique to Finale. They let you use linear spacing for the notes, or you can space the notes and measures of your score the same way a professional engraver does - by consulting a table of width values for each note, and spacing the notes and measures accordingly. The result is nonproportional spacing, where a whole note isn't allotted four times as much width as a quarter note - it's actually allotted much less space.

Keep in mind that you can use any of these three music-spacing methods on any measures in your score, mixing and matching as necessary. You can also experiment with a certain selected region, trying first one kind of music spacing and then another; only the most recently-applied spacing will remain.

Apply Beat Spacing

Apply Note Spacing

Apply Time Signature Spacing

Music Spacing Options

See also: Mass Edit Menu


MassEdit/Music Spacing/Apply Beat Spacing
Music Spacing/Apply Beat Spacing

If you Apply Beat Spacing to the selected music, Finale calculates the position of each beat in the measure according to the total duration of its notes; any notes within the beat are spaced linearly (where an eighth note gets exactly half as much space as a quarter note, and so on).

See also: Mass Edit/Music Spacing Menu


MassEdit/Music Spacing/Apply Note Spacing
Music Spacing/Apply Note Spacing

Choose Apply Note Spacing if you want Finale to calculate the precise position of each note based on its duration. This command provides more exact spacing than does the Beat Spacing command; both result in a striking, beautifully laid-out score.

See also: Mass Edit/Music Spacing Menu


MassEdit/Music Spacing/Apply Time Signature Spacing
Music Spacing/Apply Time Signature Spacing

You can also choose Apply Time Signature Spacing, which restores notes to linear spacing, where a half note gets exactly twice as much space as a quarter note. (Time Signature Spacing is what Finale uses when you first put notes into the score.)

See also: Mass Edit/Music Spacing Menu


MassEdit/Music Spacing Options
Music Spacing/Music Spacing Options

All three music-spacing commands respect the preferences you establish by choosing Music Spacing Options and making changes in the subsequent dialog box.

For detailed information, see the Music Spacing Options dialog box.

See also: Mass Edit/Music Spacing Menu


Mass Edit/Transpose

Choose this command to display the Transposition dialog box, which lets you specify how you want the selected music transposed - up an octave, down a third, or whatever interval you specify. You can also keep the original line of music when transposing notes.

For detailed information, see the Transposition dialog box.

See also: Mass Edit Menu


Mass Edit/Rebar

Use this submenu to control how far into the selection Finale will redistribute the notes when you choose the Rebar Music command.

Rebar Music

Rebar Options

See also: Mass Edit Menu


MassEdit/Rebar/Rebar Music
Rebar/Rebar Music

The Rebar Music command is useful after you insert or delete notes, halve or double note values, and so on. The command automatically re-distributes the notes of your piece so that each measure contains the correct number of beats, according to the time signature. (Finale automatically rebars the piece each time you change the time signature, unless you turn off this option in the Program Options dialog box.) When you rebar a region that contains partly-filled measures, Finale does not "pad" the measures with rests. If a measure contains two quarter notes (and no rests) in each of two measures, and you rebar the music, you'll end up with one measure containing four quarter notes. (You must enter the rests to maintain their positions.)

See also: Mass Edit/Rebar Menu


MassEdit/Rebar/Rebar Options
Rebar/Rebar Options

Choose Rebar Options to display the Rebar Options dialog box, where you can decide how far Finale should go with its rebarring: all the way to the end of the piece, only through the next empty measure, and so on. Once you've established your preferences in this way, select a region and choose Rebar Music, so Finale actually performs the rebarring. If the results aren't what you expected, choose Undo from the Edit menu, change your Rebar Options, and try the command again.

For detailed information, see the Rebar Options dialog box.

See also: Mass Edit/Rebar Menu


Mass Edit/Rebeam

When you enter notes into Finale, it beams eighth notes (and smaller values) automatically, according to the time signature. For example, when the bottom number of the time signature is a 4 (meaning that the basic beat is a quarter note), eighth notes are beamed in pairs (quarter-note groupings).

Using the Rebeam commands, however, you can change the beaming patterns for notes you've already added to the score.

Rebeam Music

Rebeam to Time Signature

Rebeam to Lyrics

See also: Mass Edit Menu


MassEdit/Rebeam/Rebeam Music
Rebeam/Rebeam Music

Rebeam Music simply restores beaming to the patterns dictated by the time signature; you'd use this command after either (a) manually changing the beaming or (b) changing the time signature for measures that already contain notes (because Finale doesn't rebeam notes automatically when you change the time signature).

See also: Mass Edit/Rebeam Menu


MassEdit/Rebeam/Rebeam to Time Signature
Rebeam/Rebeam to Time Signature

Rebeam to Time Signature, on the other hand, lets you rebeam the selected music into any beaming pattern you wish, even if it's unrelated to the time signature. Finale displays a variant of the standard Time Signature dialog box, where (by changing the "beaming signature") you specify any beaming pattern you can dream up. See Time Signature dialog box for details on how the Time Signature controls affect beaming.

For detailed information, see the Rebeam to Time Signature dialog box.

See also: Mass Edit/Rebeam Menu


MassEdit/Rebeam/Lyrics
Rebeam/Rebeam to Lyrics

Beaming to lyrics is a convention used in opera or art song notation. In this scheme, eighth, sixteenth, and shorter notes are never beamed together in the vocal line except when a syllable is sustained through more than one note (melisma). Choose Rebeam to Lyrics to display the Lyric Rebeaming dialog box, in which you can specify the lyrics you want rebeamed in this way.

For detailed information, see the Rebeam to Lyrics dialog box.

See also: Mass Edit/Rebeam Menu


Mass Edit/Retranscribe

This command renotates the selected music, regardless of whether the music contains recorded MIDI data. For example, Retranscribe enables you to renotate a recorded HyperScribe session using the new quantization settings that you specify in the Retranscribe dialog box.

Press Shift when choosing this command to use the current settings in the Retranscribe dialog box (without displaying the dialog box on the screen).

For detailed information, see the Retranscribe dialog box.

See also:

File Menu

Mass Edit/Rebeam Menu


Mass Edit/Alternate Notation

Choose this command to change the contents of the selected measures into slashes, measure-repeat signs, invisible notes, and so on - or restore such measures to normal notation.

For detailed information, see the Alternate Notation dialog box.

See also: Mass Edit Menu


Mass Edit/Fit Music

This command, only available in Page View, is extremely useful in laying out the measures of your piece - avoiding awkward page turns, placing 4 bars on a line, and so on. Select some measures; when you choose this command, the Fit Music dialog box appears, in which you can specify that you want all the selected measures placed onto one line. You can also specify a number of measures-per-line you want for the selected region. (This command only works on full-measure selections.)

For detailed information, see the Fit Music dialog box.

See also: Mass Edit Menu


Mass Edit/Move Layers

This command provides a way to move music from one of Finale' transparent staff layers to another. You can even swap the music between layers - if, for example, you mistakenly entered several stems-down notes in Layer 1, which you intended to use only for stems-up (upper) voices. This command only affects full-measure selections.

For detailed information, see the Move Layers dialog box.

See also: Mass Edit Menu


MIDI Menu

When you record a real-time performance with the Transcription Tool, you can tell Finale to remember the precise feel of your original performance, and to keep this captured MIDI data handy for playback once you return to the score.

This captured data includes key velocity information (how hard you struck each key); Note Duration data (minor deviations from the beat that result in swing, rolled chords, rushing the beat, and so on); and Continuous data (MIDI controller information you generated during your performance such as pedal and pitch wheel usage, patch changes, monophonic aftertouch, and so on).

Once you've transcribed your performance into standard notation, you can listen to it play back in one of two ways. You can listen to Finale play it exactly as it appears in the score - expressionless and rhythmically perfect; or, if you prefer, you can listen to it using the captured MIDI data so that it retains the nuances of your original performance.

The purpose of the MIDI Tool is to edit the captured MIDI data. You can make a passage louder or softer, create a swing feel in one section, edit the pedaling, insert a patch change, modify a pitch bend, and so on. The commands in the MIDI menu let you edit the captured MIDI data in various ways.

There are two ways to select the section of your notated score whose captured MIDI data you want to edit. Click the MIDI Tool. If the region is large, select the measures exactly as you would with the Mass Mover Tool: Click to select one measure, Shift-click to select additional measures, drag-enclose to select several on-screen measures, click to the left of the staff to select the entire staff, or choose Select All from the Edit menu to select the entire file. Then simply choose the appropriate commands from the MIDI menu to affect all the selected measures at once.

If the music whose MIDI data you want to edit is a one-staff region that fits on the screen, select it in the usual way, then double-click the highlighted area. You enter the MIDI Tool split-window where you can see the MIDI data represented graphically. Once in the MIDI Tool split-window, you can also specify the MIDI data - the key velocity, for example - of individual notes, even if they're buried within chords, by selecting their handles.

Once you've edited MIDI data (and returned to the score), you can then erase it, or copy it from one passage to another in the same way you'd use the Mass Mover Tool to copy music. Be sure the MIDI data type you want to manipulate is selected in the MIDI menu; select the source measures just as you did before. If the measures to which you want to copy the selected MIDI information are visible on-screen, drag the first selected measure so that it's superimposed on the first target measure. Finale copies the MIDI data from the source measures to the target measures.

To erase the captured MIDI data from a region, be sure the MIDI data type you want to manipulate is selected in the MIDI menu; select the source measures just as you did before, and press Backspace. Only the data type specified in the menu (Key Velocities, Note Durations, or Continuous Data) will be cleared from the selected region.

Key Velocities

Note Durations

Continuous Data

===================

Set To

Scale

Add

Percent Alter

Limit

Alter Feel

Randomize

===================

Send MIDI Value

Play

Show Selected Notes

See also: Menus


MIDI/Key Velocities

Choose this command to tell Finale that you want the editing commands (Set To, Add, Scale, Percent Alter, Limit, Alter Feel, and Randomize) to affect the key velocity of the selected music. If you select this command while you're in the MIDI Tool split-window, you see the velocities of the notes on the screen represented as a bar graph.

After you select this command, a check mark appears beside it in the MIDI menu.

See also: MIDI Menu


MIDI/Note Durations

Choose this command to tell Finale that you want the editing commands to affect the Start Times and Stop Times of the selected music. If you select this command while you're in the MIDI Tool split-window, you see the durations of the notes on the screen represented graphically as horizontal lines - the longer the line, the longer the note.

After you select this command, a check mark appears beside it in the MIDI menu.

See also: MIDI Menu


MIDI/Continuous Data

When you choose this command, the View Continuous Data dialog box appears, in which you can specify which MIDI controller data you want to edit (and view, if you're in the MIDI Tool split-window). Sustain pedal usage, pitch or modulation wheel changes, patch changes, and monophonic aftertouch are a few of the options; if you have other kinds of controllers, you can identify them by number. After you've specified the continuous data type you want to edit, you return to the score (or MIDI Tool split-window); you can now use the MIDI menu commands to affect the specified controller data. (Note that the "Alter Feel" and "Randomize" commands aren't available if you're editing continuous data.)

After you select this command, a check mark appears beside it in the MIDI menu.

For detailed information, see the View Continuous Data dialog box.

See also: MIDI Menu


MIDI/Set To

When you choose this command, the Set To dialog box or the Set Patch To dialog box appears, in which you can set the values of the specified MIDI data type (velocity, durations, or continuous data, or patch) for all selected notes to a single value. For example, you could set the key velocities for all selected notes to 100 (on the MIDI velocity scale of 0 to 127).

For detailed information, see the following dialog boxes.

Set To - Key Velocities

Set To - Note Durations (Start - Stop Times)

Set To - Continuous Data

Set Patch To

See also: MIDI Menu


MIDI/Scale

When you choose this command, the Scale dialog box appears, in which you can scale the values of the specified MIDI data type (velocity, durations, or continuous data) evenly from one value to another across the selected region. You could scale the velocities of the notes in a selected region, for example, from a low value to a high one; Finale would play the notes back with a smooth crescendo. This command is also useful for creating pitch bends.

For detailed information, see the following dialog boxes.

Scale - Key Velocities

Scale - Note Durations

Scale - Continuous Data

See also: MIDI Menu


MIDI/Add

When you choose this command, the Add dialog box appears, in which you can add a positive or negative amount to the values of the specified MIDI data type (velocity, durations, or continuous data) for all selected notes. You could add a certain amount to the key velocity data for every note, for example, or make a pitch bend less "deep."

For detailed information, see the following dialog boxes.

Add - Key Velocities

Add - Note Durations

Add - Continuous Data

See also: MIDI Menu


MIDI/Percent Alter

When you choose this command, the Percent Alteration dialog box appears, in which you can increase or decrease the values of the specified MIDI data type (velocity, durations, or continuous data) for all selected notes by a percentage of their original values. You could make the key velocity for every note twice as high, for example, by specifying an increase of 200%.

For detailed information, see the following dialog boxes.

Percent Alter - Key Velocities

Percent Alter - Note Durations

Percent Alter - Continuous Data

See also: MIDI Menu


MIDI/Limit

When you choose this command, the Limit dialog box appears, in which you can limit the values of the specified MIDI data type (velocity, durations, or continuous data) for all selected notes to a certain minimum and maximum value. Any notes with values above the maximum you specify will be clipped back to that maximum value; any notes with values below the minimum will be boosted to that minimum value. For example, if you discover that you can't hear any of the guitar notes in your score when the synthesizer keys are "struck" (during playback) with a velocity under 50, you could "limit" the entire guitar staff to a minimum velocity value of 50.

For detailed information, see the following dialog boxes.

Limit - Key Velocities

Limit - Note Durations

Limit - Continuous Data

See also: MIDI Menu


MIDI/Alter Feel

Like the Add or Percent Alter commands, the Alter Feel command displays a dialog box that lets you add a positive or negative number to the velocities or durations of every note in the selected region. However, in the Alter Feel dialog box, you can target individual beats in each measure to receive the alterations. For example, if you've selected Key Velocities, you can specify that the downbeat of each measure in the selected region should be played back with 50% more volume, while the other beats in the measure are unaffected. In fact, you can specify a different value for Downbeats, Other beats, and Backbeats.

For detailed information, see the following dialog boxes.

Alter Feel - Key Velocities

Alter Feel - Note Durations

See also: MIDI Menu


MIDI/Randomize

When you choose this command, the Randomize dialog box appears, in which you can specify an amount by which you want to randomly alter the velocity or duration values for all selected notes. This can be a useful option if you want to give your playback a more imperfect, "human" feeling. Type a fairly small number into the box - to randomize key velocities, for example, you might enter a number between 10 and 20 (unless you really want some unpredictable, madcap accents).

For detailed information, see the following dialog boxes.

Randomize - Key Velocities

Randomize - Note Durations

See also: MIDI Menu


MIDI/Send MIDI Value

When you choose this command, the Send MIDI Value dialog box appears. Using the options in this dialog box, you can send any kind of MIDI data to your synthesizers immediately: a patch change, a "pedal up" command, a "note off" command.

For detailed information, see the Send MIDI Value dialog box.

See also: MIDI Menu


MIDI/Play

This command, available if the MIDI Tool split-window is open, plays the displayed music immediately using the captured MIDI data.

See also: MIDI Menu


MIDI/Show Selected Notes

This command, only available if the MIDI Tool split-window is open, tells Finale to draw lines in the graph area for only notes whose handles are selected. If you're working with a "notey" score, for example, or if you're trying to work with an inner melody in a chordal passage, choose this option to hide the graph lines for the notes that aren't essential to what you're doing. (Because MIDI controller data isn't associated with individual notes, this command is not available if Continuous Data is selected in the MIDI menu.)

See also: MIDI Menu


Note Mover Menu

The Note Mover Tool moves and copies individual notes within a measure from one place to another. You can use it to create cross-staff notes, to correct split-point errors (after using one of Finale's real-time transcription tools), or to search for a certain motif or note and replace it with a different motif or note (Search and Replace).

All of the Note Mover actions begin the same way. Click a measure; a handle appears on every notehead. Select the handles of the notes you want to move or copy; select one note by clicking, additional ones by shift-clicking, a group of notes by drag-enclosing their handles, or all notes in the measure by choosing Select All from the Edit menu. Then, after making sure you've chosen the appropriate copying command from the Note Mover menu, drag any one of the selected handles to the staff lines of the target measure.

The first seven items on this menu let you tell Finale what kind of action to take when you drag selected notes (from the "source" measure) to a new place (the "target" measure). When you choose one of these items, nothing appears to happen on the screen, except that a check mark appears next to the menu item. In other words, you choose the action you want Finale to perform before you drag the selected notes to the target measure.

Note that you can also use the Note Mover to copy a note or group of notes within the same measure. If you drag a note to the end of its own measure, you create a copy of it there, after all the existing notes. If you drag a note to the middle or beginning of its own measure, you insert a copy of it at the beginning of the measure. Note, first of all, that you can perform these copying maneuvers within a single measure regardless of the currently selected Note Mover menu command. Second, note that you can only copy notes in this way if the measure is not completely full (based on the current time signature). If the measure is rhythmically full, nothing at all will happen if you drag a note within its own measure.

Copy and Replace

Copy and Merge

Delete After Replace

Delete After Merge

Cross Staff

Insert Before

Append After

==================

Float Quant in Merge

Search and Replace

See also: Menus


NoteMove/Copy and Replace
Note Mover/Copy and Replace

If this option is selected, a copy of the selected notes appears in the target measure, occupying the same beats. If your selection omitted notes on certain beats (for example, if you selected only the first and third of four quarter notes), rests will appear in the appropriate positions in the target measure.

Note that this command replaces all notes in the target measure (if there are any), no matter how few you selected in the source measure. Therefore, it works best if the target measure is empty.

See also: Note Mover Menu


NoteMove/Copy and Merge
Note Mover/Copy and Merge

If this option is selected, a copy of the selected notes appears in the target measure, occupying the same beats - but existing music in the target measure remains, instead of being replaced by the copied notes. In fact, Finale will add a second (inner) voice, if necessary, to preserve the rhythmic integrity of both source and target measures.

See also: Note Mover Menu


NoteMove/Delete After Replace
Note Mover/Delete After Replace

You can think of this command simply as Move; it replaces all notes in the target measure with a copy of the selected notes, then deletes the notes from the source measure (leaving rests in their places). Once again, if you selected only certain notes from the source measure (for example, if you selected only the first and third of four quarter notes), rests would also appear in the appropriate positions in the target measure.

This command, like "Copy and Replace," replaces all notes in the target measure (if there are any), no matter how few you selected in the source measure. Therefore, it works best if the target measure is empty.

See also: Note Mover Menu


NoteMove/Delete After Merge
Note Mover/Delete After Merge

You can think of this command as another form of Move; a copy of the selected notes appears in the target measure, occupying the same beats - but existing music in the target measure remains instead of being replaced by the copied notes, and the selected notes are deleted from the source measure, replaced by rests. (Compare with the  "Copy and Merge" command.)

This command can be very useful for moving notes from the treble-clef staff to bass-clef staff of a piano part - for example, to correct split-point errors following a real-time transcription.

See also: Note Mover Menu


NoteMove/Cross Staff
Note Mover/Cross Staff

If you've chosen this command and dragged selected notes to a target staff above or below the source staff, Finale will draw their noteheads in the target measure as cross-staff notes. If the selected notes are beamed to nonselected notes, Finale will preserve the beaming and extend the stems as necessary. (Nothing happens if you drag notes to a target measure that's not above or below the source measure - for example, the next measure on the same staff.)

A cross-staff note created in this way still "belongs" to its source staff. It plays back over the source staff's MIDI channel and is affected by the source staff's dynamics. And you can only edit it by clicking the source measure with the Speedy Entry Tool. To restore a cross-staff note to its original staff, click the source measure with the Note Mover Tool ; handles appear on all notes in the measure (including cross-staff notes). Select the cross-staff notes by clicking or drag-enclosing their handles, then press Delete. (You're not deleting the notes, just their cross-staff status.)

Note, by the way, that you can tell Finale to display cross-staff notes on their source staves, if you'd find your score easier to edit that way; you can restore them to their cross-staff positions when you're finished. Read the description of the "Display cross-staff notes in original staff" checkbox in the Document Options dialog box.

See also: Note Mover Menu


NoteMove/Insert Before
Note Mover/Insert Before

If you've chosen this command, a copy of the selected notes will appear at the beginning of the target measure, regardless of their positions in the source measure. If the target measure was already full, any extra notes will be deleted from the end of the target measure.

See also: Note Mover Menu


NoteMove/Append After
Note Mover/Append After

If you've chosen this command, a copy of the selected notes will appear at the end of the target measure, regardless of their positions in the source measure. If the target measure was already full, the notes you just copied will themselves be deleted from the end of the target measure - in other words, nothing will happen as a result of your copy. Therefore, it's best to use this command when the target measure is empty or only partially full.

See also: Note Mover Menu


NoteMove/Float Quant in Merge
Note Mover/Float Quant in Merge

When Finale combines the selected notes (from the source measure) with the existing notes in the target measure using the "Copy and Merge" or "Delete After Merge" commands, it needs to know how to notate the resultant measure if the source and target measures contained notes of different rhythmic values on the same beat. Should it notate each set of notes as an independent voice (stems up and stems down)? Or should it expand the rhythmic values of some of the notes so that they're simply additional notes on the existing stems of the target measure?

Choose "Float Quant in Merge" if you want Finale to attempt to merge the source and target notes together into a single polyphonic voice (only one set of stems). If "Float Quant in Merge" isn't selected, Finale will notate the source and target notes as two rhythmically independent voices (one stems-up and the other stems-down).

Note, by the way, that if Finale can find no way to combine the two sets of notes into a single voice, it will create rhythmically independent voices regardless of your "Float Quant in Merge" setting.

See also: Note Mover Menu


NoteMove/Search and Replace
Note Mover/Search and Replace

After selecting a note or group of notes, choose this command if you want to perform a search and replace on the selected notes - in other words, to find every occurrence of them in the score and modify each occurrence in some way.

For example, you could use the Search and Replace command to change every occurrence of a note to its enharmonic equivalent. You could also use it to renotate all occurrences of a certain recurring motif.

The first dialog box to appear is the Search and Replace dialog box, where you can specify whether or not Finale should consider the octave register or the rhythmic pattern of the selected notes in its search for matching motifs. See Search and Replace dialog box.

After you click the appropriate button, you see the Alteration for Slot dialog box, which lets you specify how you want to modify each occurrence of the selected motif. You can specify a different transposition for each note in the pattern, if you want; see Alteration for Slot dialog box.

When you return to the score, Finale adds a new menu - Search - to the menu bar, containing several commands for conducting the search.

For detailed information, see the Search and Replace dialog box.

See also: Note Mover Menu


Search Menu

You can use Finale's search-and-replace function to edit every occurrence of a particular motif, to correct every occurrence of a particular note to its enharmonic equivalent, or even to transpose every note of a particular rhythmic value that falls on a particular pitch.

Once you've specified the criteria for which you want to search (in the Search and Replace dialog box) and specified the way in which you want the selected motif transformed (in the Alteration for Slot dialog box), this menu appears. You can use it to conduct the search process, telling Finale either to pause after it finds a match (while you decide whether or not you want to modify it) before continuing the search, or to search all measures in all staves, changing every occurrence it finds without waiting for your approval each time.

For detailed information see the Search and Replace and Alteration for Slot dialog boxes.

See also: Menus


Search/Find

Choose Find to tell Finale to search your score for the next occurrence of the note or motif you've specified. Finale searches measure 1 in every staff, then proceeds to measure 2, and so on; when it finds a match, it highlights the matching notes and waits for you to choose another menu command. Note that Finale won't be able to find a certain motif if it crosses a barline.

See also: Search Menu


Search/Replace

Choose Replace to tell Finale to modify the selected note or motif according to your specifications in the Alteration for Slot dialog box. It now waits for you to choose another menu command.

See also: Search Menu


Search/Replace Then Find

Choose Replace Then Find to tell Finale to modify the selected note or motif according to your specifications in the Alteration for Slot dialog box, and then to search your score for its next occurrence. When it finds another match, it highlights the matching notes and waits for you to choose another menu command.

See also: Search Menu


Search/Replace All

Choose Replace All to tell Finale to search your score for the selected note or motif, changing every occurrence according to your specifications in the Alteration for Slot dialog box. Finale searches measure 1 in every staff, then proceeds to measure 2, and so on. There's no way to interrupt this process once it's begun, so you should allow some time for Finale to complete its task.

See also: Search Menu


Search/Quit Search

Choose this command to return to the score. The Search menu disappears, and Finale assumes you've concluded your search.

See also: Search Menu


Page Layout Menu

The first five commands in this menu are reformatting options that can apply to the entire file at once. The remaining commands appear only when you're in the Page Layout window, and affect your work there (see Page Layout window).

Insert Blank Pages

Delete Blank Pages

===========================

Redefine Pages

Optimize Staff Systems

Group Measures

===========================

Grid

Avoid Margin Collisions

===========================

Adjust Current Staff System Only

Adjust All Staff Systems

Adjust Staff System Range

===========================

Adjust Current Page Only

Adjust All Pages

Adjust Left or Right Pages

Adjust Page Range

See also: Menus


Page Layout/Insert Blank Pages

Choose this command to display the Insert Blank Pages dialog box in which you can insert blank pages anywhere in your score.

For detailed information, see the Insert Blank Pages dialog box.

See also: Page Layout Menu


Page Layout/Delete Blank Pages

Choose this command to display the Delete Blank Pages dialog box in which you can delete blank pages in your score.

For detailed information, see the Delete Blank Pages dialog box.

See also: Page Layout Menu


Page Layout/Redefine Pages

Use the commands in this submenu to redefine the pages in the score to the settings in the Page Format for Score dialog box.

Current Page

All Pages

Left Pages

Right Pages

Selected Pages

See also: Page Layout Menu


Page Layout/Redefine Pages/Current Page
Redefine Pages/Current Page

Updates only the current page to the settings in the Page Format for Score dialog box

See also: Page Layout Menu


Page Layout/Redefine Pages/All Pages
Redefine Pages/All Pages

Updates all pages to the settings in the Page Format for Score dialog box.

See also: Page Layout Menu


Page Layout/Redefine Pages/Left Pages
Redefine Pages/Left Pages

Updates only the left-hand (even-numbered) pages to the settings in the Page Format for Score dialog box.

See also: Page Layout Menu


Page Layout/Redefine Pages/Right Pages
Redefine Pages/Right Pages

Updates only the right-hand (odd-numbered) pages to the settings in the Page Format for Score dialog box.

See also: Page Layout Menu


Page Layout/Redefine Pages/Selected Pages
Redefine Pages/Selected Pages

Updates the pages you specify to the settings in the Page Format for Score dialog box.

For detailed information, see the Redefine Selected Pages dialog box.

See also: Page Layout Menu


Page Layout/Optimize Staff Systems

In Finale, the process of hiding empty staves within each system is called optimizing systems.

Using this command, you can specify the systems you want optimized - all of them, for example. Finale instantly redraws your score (in Page View), omitting blank staves from the specified systems; you'll find that your score now fits on fewer pages. If you optimize a completely empty staff system, Finale will still display the top staff, even though it's blank.

Optimizing systems in Finale has another important benefit: it permits staves to be independently movable in Page View. Under normal circumstances, you can only move, respace, or rearrange staves for all systems using the Staff Tool. If you have optimized a system, however, you'll find that the Staff Tool works in Page View as well, letting you vary the positioning and spacing of staves as they'll appear on the printed page. Furthermore, again using the Staff Tool, you can change the staff grouping of staves that have been optimized, letting you change the way in which your staves are bracketed.

When you choose this command, the Staff System Optimization dialog box appears, letting you specify the range of systems you want optimized.

For detailed information, see the Staff System Optimization dialog box.

See also: Page Layout Menu


Page Layout/Group Measures

This command displays the Mass Measure Grouping dialog box, which lets you specify how many measures you want on a line (in each system). See Mass Measure Grouping dialog box for details.

Note: The Group Measures command affects the entire score at once. If you'd rather specify a number of bars-per-line only for a selected region of measures, use the Fit Music command instead. See Fit Music dialog box.

See also: Page Layout Menu


Page Layout/Grid

The Grid command provides a visual background grid or rulers superimposed on the layout area. You may wish to use the grid as visual reference when laying out your pages.

For detailed information, see the Grid Definition dialog box.

See also: Page Layout Menu


Page Layout/Avoid Margin Collisions

If this menu item is selected (that is, if it displays a check mark) in the Page Layout window, Finale won't let you drag a system so that it's superimposed on another system or beyond the page margins; nor will it let you drag the page margins beyond the boundaries of the page. It's a good idea to leave this option selected. Without it, you could accidentally drag a system so that it overlaps the preceding system - or is even off the page completely.

See also: Page Layout Menu


Page Layout/Adjust Current Staff System Only

This option is only available when Staff Systems is selected in the Page Layout Window. When Adjust Current Staff System Only is selected, Finale only adjusts the staff system that you're editing.

See also: Page Layout Menu


Page Layout/Adjust All Staff Systems

This option is only available when Staff Systems is selected in the Page Layout Window. If Adjust All Staff Systems is selected, Finale updates every staff system in the piece to match the changes that you've made to a single staff system (such as indenting it, dragging it up or down, and so on).

See also: Page Layout Menu


Page Layout/Adjust Staff System Range

This option is only available when Staff Systems is selected in the Page Layout window. Choose this command to specify which staff systems you want updated when you adjust a single staff system in the score (such as indenting it, dragging it up or down, and so on).

For detailed information, see the Adjust Staff System Range dialog box.

See also: Page Layout Menu


Page Layout/Adjust Current Page Only

This option is only available when Page Size or Page Margins  is selected in the Page Layout Window. When this option is selected, Finale adjusts the currently displayed page in your piece.

See also: Page Layout Menu


Page Layout/Adjust All Pages

This option is only available when Page Size or Page Margins  is selected in the Page Layout Window. When Adjust All Pages is selected, every change you make to the page size or margins on one page will be applied to all pages in the score.

See also: Page Layout Menu


Page Layout/Adjust Left or Right Pages

This option is only available when Page Size or Page Margins  is selected in the Page Layout Window. When Adjust Left or Right Pages is selected, Finale adjusts only the left (even) or right (odd) pages or systems on the pages, depending on whether the currently displayed page is a left or right page.

See also: Page Layout Menu


Page Layout/Adjust Page Range

This option is only available when Page Size or Page Margins is selected in the Page Layout window. Choose this command to specify which pages you want updated when you adjust the page size or page margins on one page.

For detailed information, see the Adjust Page Range dialog box.

See also: Page Layout Menu


Shape Designer Menu

The Shape Designer menu contains a number of commands that help you create your own custom musical shapes. For example, it lets you specify how thick a line is, what kind of shading should fill a rectangle, whether a line should be dashed or solid, and so on. It also contains commands for manipulating individual objects in your drawing - for grouping them together, rearranging their front-to-back order, and so on.

Show

==============

Send to Back

Bring to Front

==============

Group

Ungroup

==============

Select Font

==============

Line Style

Line Thickness

Fill

==============

Bracket Style

==============

Rulers and Grid


Shape Designer Edit/Cut

After selecting one or more elements with the Selection Tool (by drag-enclosing or shift-clicking), choose Cut to place the selected elements on the Clipboard and simultaneously remove them from the Shape Designer drawing area. Once the elements are on the Clipboard, you can paste them into the drawing area as many times as you'd like.

See also: Shape Designer Menu


Shape Designer Edit/Copy

After selecting one or more elements with the Selection Tool (by drag-enclosing or shift-clicking), choose Copy to place the selected elements on the Clipboard without removing them from the Shape Designer drawing area. Once the elements are on the Clipboard, you can paste them into the drawing area as many times as you'd like.

See also: Shape Designer Menu


Shape Designer Edit/Paste

After using the Cut or Copy command to place elements on the Clipboard, choose Paste to place the elements into the drawing area. You can paste them into the drawing area as many times as you'd like.

See also: Shape Designer Menu


Shape Designer Edit/Select All

Choose Select All to select every element in the Shape Designer drawing area.

See also: Shape Designer Menu


Shape/Show
Shape Designer/Show

Using this submenu, you can make Finale display or hide any of three helpful, nonprinting alignment aids. (A checked item means that it's being displayed; choose the item a second time to make the check mark - and that onscreen element - disappear.)

Show Rulers

Show Grid

Show Origin

See also: Shape Designer Menu


Shape/Show/Rulers
Shape Designer/Show Rulers

Choose Rulers from the Show submenu to make rulers appear at the top and left side of the drawing area, whose units you specify using the "Rulers and Grid" command.

See also: Shape Designer Menu


Shape/Show/Grid
Shape Designer/Show Grid

Choose Grid from the Show submenu to display a series of individual points that may help you align objects and give you a sense of scale. The spacing and units used by the grid, too, are determined by your "Rulers and Grid" setting.

See also: Shape Designer Menu


Shape/Show/Origin
Shape Designer/Show Origin

The origin is a small, white round handle that appears in the center of the drawing area. It anchors your shape, acts as the zero point for the rulers and positioning coordinates, and indicates where your shape's handle will appear once you've placed it into the score.

See also: Shape Designer Menu


Shape/Send to Back
Shape Designer/Send to Back

If you've created objects that overlap each other, you can rearrange their front-to-back order by selecting an object and choosing Send to Back to place it behind the other object.

See also: Shape Designer Menu


Shape/Bring to Front
Shape Designer/Bring to Front

If you've created objects that overlap each other, you can rearrange their front-to-back order by selecting an object and choosing Bring to Front to place it in front of the other object.

See also: Shape Designer Menu


Shape/Group
Shape Designer/Group

Using the Selection Tool, you can Shift-click to select any number of objects, and then choose the Group command to bind them together into a single, grouped object. A grouped object behaves just like any normal object: you can change its fill or line thickness, drag its corner handles to resize it, drag it by the middle to move it around on the screen, and so on.

See also: Shape Designer Menu


Shape/Ungroup
Shape Designer/Ungroup

Finale always keeps track of what objects were combined into grouped objects, and can ungroup them in sequence. Select a group by clicking, then choose Ungroup; you'll see by the appearance of many more corner handles that the grouped object has now been split back into its component single pieces. (Or, if you Ungroup a grouped object, it will split into its component grouped objects.)

See also: Shape Designer Menu


Shape/Select Font
Shape Designer/Select Font

If you're using the Text Tool to create or edit a text object, choose this command to display the Font dialog box, where you can change the font, size and style of the selected text (or, if your cursor is inside a text object, the text that follows the cursor). If no text object is selected, use this command to specify the font for the next text object you create.

For detailed information, see the Font dialog box.

See also: Shape Designer Menu


Shape/Line Style
Shape Designer/Line Style

If you've selected an object composed of lines (a line, rectangle, polygon, and so on), use this submenu to determine whether its outline (or the line itself) is dashed or solid.

Solid

Dashed

See also: Shape Designer Menu


Shape/Line Style/Solid
Line Style/Solid

Choose this command to make the selected object's outline a solid line. If no object is selected, this command specifies the characteristics of the next line object you draw.

See also: Shape Designer Menu


Shape/Line Style/Dashed
Line Style/Dashed

Choose this command to make the selected object's outline a dashed line. The Dashed Line dialog box appears, where you can specify the lengths of the dashes and the gaps between them. If no object is selected, this command specifies the characteristics of the next line object you draw.

For detailed information, see the Dashed Line dialog box

See also: Shape Designer Menu


Shape/Line Thickness
Shape Designer/Line Thickness

If you've selected an object composed of lines, use the commands in this submenu to determine the thickness of its outline (or the line itself). If no object is selected, this command specifies the thickness of the next line object you draw.

None

Hairline

.5 pt

1 pt

1.5 pt

2 pt

5 pt

Other

See also: Shape Designer Menu


Shape/Line Thickness/None
Line Thickness/None

Choose None if you do not want the line or outline to appear.

See also: Shape Designer Menu


Shape/Line Thickness/Hairline
Line Thickness/Hairline

Choose this command to specify a hairline line thickness of .25 points.

See also: Shape Designer Menu


Shape/Line Thickness/.5pt
Line Thickness/.5pt

Choose this command to specify a line thickness of .5 points.

See also: Shape Designer Menu


Shape/Line Thickness/1pt
Line Thickness/1pt

Choose this command to specify a line thickness of 1 point (1/72 inch).

See also: Shape Designer Menu


Shape/Line Thickness/1.5 pt
Line Thickness/1.5pt

Choose this command to specify a line thickness of 1.5 points.

See also: Shape Designer Menu


Shape/Line Thickness/2 pt
Line Thickness/2pt

Choose this command to specify a line thickness of 2 points.

See also: Shape Designer Menu


Shape/Line Thickness/5pt
Line Thickness/5pt

Choose this command to specify a line thickness of 5 points.

See also: Shape Designer Menu


Shape/Line Thickness/Other
Line Thickness/Other

If you choose Other, the Line Thickness dialog box appears, where you can specify a thickness not listed in the submenu.

For detailed information, see the Line Thickness dialog box

See also: Shape Designer Menu


Shape/Fill
Shape Designer/Fill

If you've selected an object that's an enclosed shape (a rectangle, ellipse, or polygon), use this submenu to determine the shading of the hollow (enclosed) inside area - none (transparent), black, white, or any shade of gray between. If no object is selected, this command specifies the shading of the next enclosed object you draw.

None

White

25%

50%

75%

Black

Other

See also: Shape Designer Menu


Shape/Fill/None
Fill/None

Choose None if you do not want the shape to be filled at all.

See also: Shape Designer Menu


Shape/Fill/White
Fill/White

Choose this command if you want the object filled with white (0%).

See also: Shape Designer Menu


Shape/Fill/25%
Fill/25%

Choose this command if you want the object filled with light gray (25%).

See also: Shape Designer Menu


Shape/Fill/50%
Fill/50%

Choose this command if you want the object filled with medium gray (50%).

See also: Shape Designer Menu


Shape/Fill/75%
Fill/75%

Choose this command if you want the object filled with dark gray (75%).

See also: Shape Designer Menu


Shape/Fill/Black
Fill/Black

Choose this command if you want the object filled with black (100%).

See also: Shape Designer Menu


Shape/Fill/Other
Fill/Other

If you choose Other, the Fill dialog box appears, where you can specify a degree of gray not listed in the submenu.

For detailed information, see the Fill dialog box

See also: Shape Designer Menu


Shape/Bracket Style
Shape Designer/Bracket Style

Using the Shape Designer's Bracket Tool, you can add a bracket to a custom shape you're drawing with a single click. Choose this command to specify what bracket style you want.

For detailed information, see the Bracket Style dialog box.

See also: Shape Designer Menu


Shape/Rulers and Grid
Shape Designer/Rulers and Grid

Choose this command to display the Rulers and Grid dialog box, where you can specify the measurement units used by the grid, rulers, and the H: and V: text boxes. You can also specify how far apart the tick marks on the rulers and grid should be.

For detailed information, see the Rulers and Grid dialog box.

See also: Shape Designer Menu


Simple Menu

When you're entering notes using the Simple Entry Tool, use the Simple menu to control whether or not you want Finale to allow extra notes in a measure. When the command is selected, Finale will beep to warn you that the measure is full.

Check for Extra Notes

This command is selected by default. When selected, Finale checks each note you enter, and will not allow you to enter extra notes in the measure. If you try to add too many notes for the measure, or extend the duration of an existing note too far, Finale will beep to warn you, and won't allow you to enter the note in the measure. When Check for Extra Notes is not selected, you can enter as many notes in a measure as you'd like. Remember that any extra notes will extend past the barline of the measure, unless you choose Position Notes Evenly Across Measure in the Measure Attributes dialog box.

See also: Menus


Smart Shape Menu

The Smart Shape menu gives you control over the global settings for note-attached slurs and  measure-based Smart Shapes. Use the commands in this menu to tell Finale whether slurs are note-attached or attached to measures. Most of the commands are used to fine-tune slurs' appearance and placement, define their behavior over system breaks, and set their line thickness. When you create a note-attached slur, Finale always draws and places it the way you specified in the slur settings.

Slur Contour

Slur Placement

Smart Shape Options

==================

Attach to Notes

Slur Direction

See also: Menus


Smart Shape/Slur Contour

This command displays the Slur Contour dialog box where you can specify the default height and contour of measure-based and note-based slurs. Note that these settings only apply to slurs you are about to create. You can change Slur Contour settings at any time without affecting existing slurs.

For detailed information, see the Slur Contour dialog box.

See also: Smart Shape Menu


Smart Shape/Slur Placement

This command displays the Slur Placement dialog box where you can specify the default distance between the slur end points and the attached notes. These settings apply to the end points of slurs you are about to create. They will also apply to end points of similar types of slurs in the score, if those end points haven't been manually adjusted. Once you manually adjust an end point of an existing slur, that end point is no longer affected by Slur Placement settings. (You manually adjust a slur end point by clicking on it and dragging.)

For detailed information, see the Slur Placement dialog box.

See also: Smart Shape Menu


Smart Shape/Smart Shape Options

This command displays the Smart Shape Options dialog box where you can alter the octave up or octave down symbols, alter the settings for slurs continuing over system breaks, and change the overall appearance of lines, brackets, dashed lines and curves, and so on.

For detailed information, see the Smart Shape Options dialog box.

See also: Smart Shape Menu


Smart Shape/Attach to Notes

Choose Attach to Notes to determine whether the next slur (or curve) you create will be attached to notes (checked) or assigned to measures (unchecked). When Attach to Notes is checked, Finale creates note-attached slurs when you enter a slur, automatically drawing and placing it the way you want, according to the slur settings. If Attach to Notes is unchecked, Finale creates measure-based slurs instead.

See also: Smart Shape Menu


Smart Shape/Slur Direction

Use the commands in this submenu to determine whether Finale draws a note-attached slur in the direction dictated by the notes in the score, or whether Finale always draws an over or under slur regardless of the notes.

Automatic

Over

Under

See also: Smart Shape Menu


Smart Shape/Slur Direction/Automatic
Slur Direction/Automatic

Choose this command to draw the selected note-attached slur (or curve) as an over or under slur depending on the notes in the score. If you edit or transpose the notes, the slur will automatically change direction if necessary.

See also: Smart Shape Menu


Smart Shape/Slur Direction/Over
Slur Direction/Over

Choose this command to always draw the selected note-attached slur (or curve) as an over slur. If you want the slur to change directions if needed when you edit or transpose notes, choose "Automatic."

See also: Smart Shape Menu


Smart Shape/Slur Direction/Under
Slur Direction/Under

Choose this command to always draw the selected note-attached slur (or curve) as an under slur. If you want the slur to change directions if needed when you edit or transpose notes, choose "Automatic."

See also: Smart Shape Menu


View/Scale View to
Special Tools Menu

The options in this menu control whether Finale will display or hide the handles of elements in the selected measures and how Finale draws an element when you adjust it.

Show Handles

Update

Show Crosshairs

See also: Menus


Special Tools/Show Handles

When Show Handles is selected (a checkmark appears next to the command), Finale displays a small square handle on each note, stem, beam, tie, or dot (depending on which tool you're using). When Show Handles is not selected, the handles are hidden. This can be a useful feature if the handles are obscuring some elements in your score. All the tools work the same way when handles are hidden, except that instead of clicking a handle, you'll have to click at the location where a handle would be if it were visible.

See also: Special Tools Menu


Special Tools/Update

When Update is selected, Finale draws the selected item when you drag its handle, letting you see the current position of the element you're dragging the entire time it's being dragged. When Update is not selected and you drag a handle to reposition an element, you don't actually see the attached note (or beam, and so on) moving. Instead, you see thin, dotted-line cross-axis that represent the handle's position. When you stop dragging, the note (or other element) jumps to its new location.

See also: Special Tools Menu


Special Tools/Show Crosshairs

When this command is selected, vertical and horizontal lines appear when you drag the handle of a Special Tools object. These lines help you position the element in the score. When this command is not selected, the lines will not appear when you drag an item.

See also: Special Tools Menu


Speedy Note menu
Speedy Menu

This menu contains six settings that govern the music-entry operation of the Speedy Entry Tool.

Use MIDI Keyboard

Jump to Next Measure

Create New Measures

Check Beaming

Check Accidentals

Check for Extra Notes

Use Five Line Staff

Auto Freeze Accidentals

See also: Menus


Speedy/Use MIDI Keyboard

When this item is selected (displays a check mark in the menu), Finale assumes that you'll be entering notes in conjunction with a MIDI keyboard. When you press one of the number (rhythmic value) keys on the numeric keypad, Finale creates a rest of that value, unless you were pressing a key on the synthesizer at the time. In that case, Finale displays a note of that pitch (or a chord, if you were pressing more than one key).

When Use MIDI Keyboard isn't selected, Finale enters a note of the specified rhythmic value when you press a number key - regardless of whether or not you were pressing a key on the synthesizer (if any). To create a rest, enter a single note of the desired rhythmic value and press  Backspace.

See also: Speedy Menu


Speedy/Jump to Next Measure

When this item is selected (displays a check mark in the menu), Finale automatically moves the editing frame to the next measure as soon as there are enough notes to fill the current measure. Finale also displays the There Are Too Many Beats In This Measure dialog box immediately when you enter a note that puts the total rhythmic values in the measure over the limit allowed by the time signature.

If this item isn't selected, Finale doesn't move the editing frame to the next measure when the current one is full; you must press the right bracket (]) key to advance to the next measure. Finale also waits until you exit the current measure before it displays the There Are Too Many Beats In This Measure dialog box. See There Are Too Many Beats In This Measure dialog box.

See also: Speedy Menu


Speedy/Create New Measures

When this item is selected (displays a check mark in the menu), Finale automatically creates a new blank measure at the end the piece if you advance the editing frame beyond the last existing measure. In other words, if you're in the last measure of a piece and press the right bracket (]) key (or if "Jump to Next Measure" is selected and you fill the last measure to its rhythmic capacity), Finale adds a new blank measure and moves the editing frame to this new last measure.

See also: Speedy Menu


Speedy/Check Beaming

When this item is selected (displays a check mark in the menu), Finale automatically beams eighth notes (and smaller notes) together as they're created, according to the time signature. If this item isn't selected, Finale doesn't beam any notes together.

See also: Speedy Menu


Speedy/Check Accidentals

When this item is selected (displays a check mark in the menu), Finale automatically keeps track of the accidentals on a given line or space in the measure, according to the standard rules of accidental notation. For example, if the first E in a measure has a flat, the next Eb in the measure doesn't normally display an accidental too. On the other hand, if the first E in a measure displays a flat, the next E that isn't flatted should display a natural.

If this item isn't selected, Finale doesn't keep track of the status of the accidentals on any particular line or space. If you add a new note or change a note's pitch, Finale doesn't update the configuration of accidentals on other notes.

See also: Speedy Menu


Speedy/Check for Extra Notes

When Check for Extra Notes is selected, Finale checks for extra notes when you leave the measure. If you try to add too many notes to a measure, or extend the duration of an existing note beyond the maximum number of beats per measure, Finale displays the There Are Too Many Beats In This Measure dialog box when you leave the measure. When Check for Extra Notes is not selected, you can enter as many notes as you'd like in a measure, and Finale will not display the There Are Too Many Beats In This Measure dialog box. Any extra notes you enter will extend past the barline of the measure, unless you choose Position Notes Evenly Across Measure in the Measure Attributes dialog box.

See also: Speedy Menu


Speedy/Use Five Line Staff

When this item is selected (displays a check mark in the menu), Finale displays the standard five line staff in the editing frame even if the staff uses a different number of lines.

If this item isn't selected, Finale displays the number of lines defined for the staff. For example, if you had a single line tablature or percussion staff, Finale would display only one staff line in the editing frame.

Hint: You may prefer to have this item selected for tablature staves, but unselected for percussion staves.

See also: Speedy Menu


Speedy/Auto Freeze Accidentals

When this item is selected (displays a check mark in the menu), Finale automatically freezes accidentals when you show or hide them by pressing the asterisk key (*). The advantage of freezing the display of accidentals is that they are never removed from a note even if you insert a note of the same pitch before it.

Unless an accidental is frozen, Finale scans a measure to determine what accidentals should be displayed according to general notation rules.

Note: If you would rather not automatically freeze the display of each accidental that you show or hide, deselect this option, then individually freeze the display of an accidental by pressing Ctrl-asterisk.

See also: Speedy Menu


Staff Menu

Use this menu to add or insert blank staves into the score, remove existing staves, position staff names, change the settings for a selected staff, adjust staves vertically, redraw barlines and brackets after changing the top-to-bottom order of staves in the score, and set the spacing between staves. Create groups of staves and define their characteristics, delete groups, choose a bracket and alternate barlines for a group, and change which staves belong to a group.

Add Staves

Insert Staves

Delete Staves

Delete Staves And Reposition

==========================

Edit Staff Attributes

Respace Staves

Sort Staves

Staff Usage

==========================

Add Group and Bracket

Edit Group Attributes

Remove Group

==========================

Set Default Name Positions

Position Names

==========================

Show Default Staff Names

Show Default Group Names

See also: Menus


Staff/Add Staves

Choose this command to add new blank staves below the existing staves in your score.

For detailed information, see the New Staves dialog box.

See also: Staff Menu


Staff/Insert Staves

Select a staff, then choose this command to insert blank staves above the selected staff.

For detailed information, see the New Staves dialog box.

See also: Staff Menu


Staff/Delete Staves

Select the staff or staves that you want removed from the score, then choose this command to remove the selected staves and leave the remaining staves in their current positions.

Shortcut: Select the staves then press Delete.

See also: Staff Menu


Staff/Delete Staves and Reposition

Select the staff or staves that you want removed from the score, then choose this command to remove the selected staves and reposition any staves that were below the deleted staves. Finale moves the remaining staves up to the position of the top staff that was deleted.

Shortcut: Select the staves then press Shift-Delete.

See also: Staff Menu


Staff/Edit Staff Attributes

Choose this command to display the Staff Attributes dialog box where you can change characteristics such as name and transposition for the selected staff.

For detailed information, see the Staff Attributes dialog box.

See also: Staff Menu


Staff/Respace Staves

Choose this command to display the Respace Staves dialog box, in which you can restore all the staves in your score to uniform vertical spacing, or, if they weren't evenly spaced to begin with, you can preserve the gap between staves and make all gaps proportionally larger or smaller.

For detailed information, see the Respace Staves dialog box.

See also: Staff Menu


Staff/Sort Staves

If you've changed the top-to-bottom order of staves in the score by dragging staves, you may notice that the left barline of the score or the brackets sometimes appear to be broken or uneven afterward. Choose this command to restore their appearance based on the new staff order.

See also: Staff Menu


Staff/Staff Usage

Choose this command to display the Staff Usage List dialog box, in which you can specify the exact vertical position of a staff or staves in the score. You can also see whether the changes will affect the entire score or, in Page View, whether the change will affect all staff systems or a single staff system.

For detailed information, see the Staff Usage List dialog box.

See also: Staff Menu


Staff/Add Group and Bracket

Choose this command to display the Group Attributes dialog box, where you can create and control the appearance of groups. Choose which consecutive staves you want included in the group, name the group, choose an alternate barline, and choose a bracket to enclose them. You can also control how barlines appear.

For detailed information, see the Group Attributes dialog box.

See also: Staff Menu


Staff/Edit Group Attributes

Select a handle for a group in the score, then choose this command to display the Group Attributes dialog box, in which you can change which staves belong to the selected group, and choose a different bracket and barline.

For detailed information, see the Group Attributes dialog box.

See also: Staff Menu


Staff/Remove Group

Select a group handle or handles (to delete more than one staff group), then choose this command to remove the selected group definitions from the score.

Tip: Select the groups - then press Delete.

See also: Staff Menu


Staff/Set Default Name Positions

Use this submenu to set up the default position and alignment for all full and abbreviated staff and group names in the score.

Full Staff Names

Abbreviated Staff Names

Full Group Names

Abbreviated Group Names

See also: Staff Menu


Set Default Positions/Full Staff Names
Set Default Name Positions/Full Staff Names

Choose this command to set up the default position and alignment for all full staff names in the score. The Position Full Staff Name--Default dialog box appears, where you can adjust the position of the staff name relative to the staff, and set the text justification for multi-line names.

The default positioning will be used unless you change the position of an individual staff name in the score.

For detailed information, see the Position dialog box.

See also: Staff Menu


Set Default Name Positions/Abbreviated Staff Names

Choose this command to set up the default position and alignment for all abbreviated staff names in the score. The Position Abbreviated Staff Name--Default dialog box appears, where you can adjust the position of the staff name relative to the staff, and set the text justification for multi-line names.

The default positioning will be used unless you change the position of an individual staff name in the score.

For detailed information, see the Position dialog box.

See also: Staff Menu


Set Default Name Positions/Full Group Names

Choose this command to set up the default position and alignment for all full group names in the score. The Position Full Group Name--Default dialog box appears, where you can adjust the position of the centered group name relative to the staves, and set the text justification for multi-line names.

The default positioning will be used unless you change the position of an individual group name in the score.

For detailed information, see the Position dialog box.

See also: Staff Menu


Set Default Positions/Abbreviated Group Names
Set Default Name Positions/Abbreviated Group Names

Choose this command to set up the default position and alignment for all abbreviated group names in the score. The Position Abbreviated Group Name--Default dialog box appears, where you can adjust the position of the centered group name relative to the staves, and set the text justification for multi-line names.

The default positioning will be used unless you change the position of an individual group name in the score.

For detailed information, see the Position dialog box.

See also: Staff Menu


Staff/Position Names

Use this submenu to adjust the position and alignment of full and abbreviated staff and group names in the score for an individual staff or group.

Full Staff Name

Abbreviated Staff Name

Full Group Name

Abbreviated Group Name

See also: Staff Menu


Position Names/Full Staff Name

Choose this command to set up the position and alignment for the selected full staff name. The Position Full Staff Name dialog box appears, where you can adjust the position of the staff name relative to the staff, and set the text justification for multi-line names.

The special positioning will be used for the staff name wherever it appears in the score. To use the default positioning for the name, deselect the Position checkbox in the Staff Attributes dialog box, or select the staff name handle on-screen and press Backspace.

For detailed information, see the Position dialog box.

See also: Staff Menu


Position Names/Abbreviated Staff Name

Choose this command to set up the position and alignment for the selected abbreviated staff name. The Position Abbreviated Staff Name dialog box appears, where you can adjust the position of the staff name relative to the staff, and set the text justification for multi-line names.

The special positioning will be used for the staff name wherever it appears in the score. To use the default positioning for the name, deselect the Position checkbox in the Staff Attributes dialog box, or select the staff name handle on-screen and press Backspace.

For detailed information, see the Position dialog box.

See also: Staff Menu


Position Names/Full Group Name

Choose this command to set up the position and alignment for the selected full group name. The Position Full Group Name dialog box appears, where you can adjust the position of the centered group name relative to the staves and set the text justification for multi-line names.

The special positioning will be used for the group name wherever it appears in the score. To use the default positioning for the name, deselect the Position checkbox in the Group Attributes dialog box, or select the group handle on-screen and press Backspace.

For detailed information, see the Position dialog box.

See also: Staff Menu


Position Names/Abbreviated Group Name

Choose this command to set up the position and alignment for the selected abbreviated group name. The Position Abbreviated Group Name dialog box appears, where you can adjust the position of the centered group name relative to the staves and set the text justification for multi-line names.

The special positioning will be used for the group name wherever it appears in the score. To use the default positioning for the name, deselect the Position checkbox in the Group Attributes dialog box, or select the group handle on-screen and press Backspace.

For detailed information, see the Position dialog box.

See also: Staff Menu


Staff/Show Default Staff Names

Determines whether Finale's default staff names and staff name handles for unnamed staves appear on-screen. When selected, the default staff names, and their handles, appear on the screen, enclosed in square brackets. When not selected, default staff names and their handles are hidden on-screen for unnamed staves.

Default names can help you identify staff handles. They will not appear in printed copies of the score; only staff names that you enter appear in your printed music.

See also: Staff Menu


Staff/Show Default Group Names

Determines whether Finale's default names or "group names" for unnamed groups appear on-screen. When selected, the default group names appear on the screen, enclosed in square brackets. When not selected, default group names are hidden on-screen for unnamed groups.

Regardless of whether this command is selected, Finale will always show group handles on-screen.

Default names can help you identify group handles. They will not appear in printed copies of the score; only group names that you enter appear in your printed music.

See also: Staff Menu


Text Menu

This menu appears when the Text Tool is selected for editing text blocks directly on-screen, or when the Edit Text window appears for editing staff and group names (or text blocks). This menu contains all the commands you need for changing fonts, sizes, styles, and other character formatting for text, as well as justification and line spacing for text blocks.

Font

Size

Style

Baseline Shift

Superscript

Tracking

Character Settings

================

Inserts

Edit Page Offset

================

Justification

Line Spacing

See also: Menus


Text/Font

Choose this command to display the Font dialog box, which lists all the fonts currently installed on your system. Select the font that you want to use. Finale highlights your selection in the Font list. If you want, you can specify other font settings in the Font dialog box.

For detailed information, see Font dialog box.

See also: Text Menu


Text/Size

Use this submenu to select the point size for the selected text. Choose Other to specify a different font size than appears in the menu. A checkmark indicates the current point size.

Select Fixed Size to display the text at the specified point size, regardless of any reductions you've previously placed on a note, staff, staff system or page using the Resize Tool.

9 pt.

10 pt.

12 pt.

14 pt.

18 pt.

24 pt.

Other

Fixed Size

See also: Text Menu


Text/Size/9pt
Size/9pt

Choose this command to change the text to the specified point size. A checkmark indicates the current point size.

See also: Text Menu


Text/Size/10pt
Size/10pt

Choose this command to change the text to the specified point size. A checkmark indicates the current point size.

See also: Text Menu


Text/Size/12pt
Size/12pt

Choose this command to change the text to the specified point size. A checkmark indicates the current point size.

See also: Text Menu


Text/Size/14pt
Size/14pt

Choose this command to change the text to the specified point size. A checkmark indicates the current point size.

See also: Text Menu


Text/Size/18pt
Size/18pt

Choose this command to change the text to the specified point size. A checkmark indicates the current point size.

See also: Text Menu


Text/Size/24pt
Size/24pt

Choose this command to change the text to the specified point size. A checkmark indicates the current point size.

See also: Text Menu


Text/Size/Other
Size/Other

Choose this command to display the Size dialog box, where you can specify any font size for the selected text. A checkmark indicates that a size not found in the submenu is currently in use.

For detailed information, see Size dialog box.

See also: Text Menu


Text/Size/Fixed
Size/Fixed Size

Select Fixed Size to display the text at the specified point size, regardless of any reductions you've previously placed on a note, staff, staff system or page using the Resize Tool.

See also: Text Menu


Text/Style

Use this submenu to select a style or combination of styles for the selected text.

Plain

Bold

Italic

Underline

Strikeout

See also: Text Menu


Text/Style/Plain
Style/Plain

Select this command to remove all other type style changes for the selected text.

See also: Text Menu


Text/Style/Bold
Style/Bold

Select this command to apply the specified type style to the selected text. A checkmark indicates that the style has been applied to the text. You can choose any combination of styles, such as Bold, Italic.

See also: Text Menu


Text/Style/Italic
Style/Italic

Select this command to apply the specified type style to the selected text. A checkmark indicates that the style has been applied to the text. You can choose any combination of styles, such as Bold, Italic.

See also: Text Menu


Text/Style/Underline
Style/Underline

Select this command to apply the specified type style to the selected text. A checkmark indicates that the style has been applied to the text. You can choose any combination of styles, such as Bold, Underline.

See also: Text Menu


Text/Style/Strikeout
Style/Strikeout

Select this command to apply the specified type style to the selected text. A checkmark indicates that the style has been applied to the text. You can choose any combination of styles, such as Bold, Underline.

See also: Text Menu


Text/Baseline Shift

Choose this command to display the Baseline Shift dialog box where you can adjust the vertical position of the selected text without affecting the spacing between lines.

For detailed information, see the Baseline Shift dialog box.

See also: Text Menu


Text/Superscript

Choose this command to display the Superscript dialog box where you can adjust the vertical position of the selected text. If necessary, the spacing between lines adjusts by the same amount.

For detailed information, see the Superscript dialog box.

See also: Text Menu


Text/Tracking

Choose this command to display the Tracking dialog box, where you control the amount of horizontal space, in ems, that Finale should leave between characters for the selected text. One em is equivalent to 1/1000 of the point size.

For detailed information, see the Tracking dialog box.

See also: Text Menu


Text/Character
Text/Character Settings

Choose this command to display the Character Settings dialog box, where you can specify all the settings for the selected text. Change one or more of the following: font, style, size, effects, baseline shift, superscript, and tracking.

For detailed information, see the Character Settings dialog box.

See also: Text Menu


Text/Insert
Text/Inserts

Use this submenu to add inserts in the text block you're currently creating or editing. The current date, time, page number, or other insert appears at the insertion point.

Finale updates inserts each time the screen is redrawn. An outline appears around inserts to remind you of their special function.

Date

Time

Page

Filename

Composer

Title

Copyright

Sharp

Flat

Natural

Double Sharp

Double Flat

See also: Text Menu


Text/Insert/Date
Insert/Date

Choose this command to paste a Date insert in the text block you're editing or creating. The current date, in the format defined by the computer system, appears at the current location of the cursor.

Finale updates the date each time the screen is redrawn. An outline appears around the insert to remind you of its special function.

See also: Text Menu


Text/Insert/Time
Insert/Time

Choose this command to paste a Time insert in the text block you're editing or creating. The current time, in the format defined by the computer system, appears at the current location of the cursor.

Finale updates the time when the screen is redrawn. An outline appears around the insert to remind you of its special function.

See also: Text Menu


Text/Insert/Page
Insert/Page

Choose this command to paste a Page Number insert in the text block you're editing or creating. The current page number, assuming that the pages in the document are numbered consecutively from page one, appears at the current location of the cursor.

Use the Edit Page Offset command in the Text menu to change the page number displayed in the selected Page Number insert.

Finale updates the contents of inserts each time the screen is redrawn. An outline appears around inserts to remind you of their special function.

For detailed information, see Edit Page Offset dialog box.

See also: Text Menu


Text/Insert/Filename
Insert/Filename

Choose this command to paste a Filename insert in the text block you're editing or creating. The current filename, as saved on the computer, appears at the current location of the cursor.

Finale updates the contents of inserts each time the screen is redrawn. An outline appears around inserts to remind you of their special function.

See also: Text Menu


Text/Insert/Composer
Insert/Composer

Choose this command to paste a Composer insert in the text block you're editing or creating. The composer name as it appears in the File Info dialog box appears at the current location of the cursor. If no information has been entered in the File Info dialog box, the word Composer will appear in square brackets instead.

Choose File Info from the File menu to display the File Info dialog box. Any change you make in the Composer text box will appear in the Composer inserts used in this document.

Finale updates the contents of inserts each time the screen is redrawn. An outline appears around inserts to remind you of their special function.

For detailed information, see File Info dialog box.

See also: Text Menu


Text/Insert/Title
Insert/Title

Choose this command to paste a Title insert in the text block you're editing or creating. The title as it appears in the File Info dialog box appears at the current location of the cursor. If no information has been entered in the File Info dialog box, the word Title will appear in square brackets instead.

Choose File Info from the File menu to display the File Info dialog box. Any change you make in the Title text box will appear in the Title inserts used in this document.

Finale updates the contents of inserts each time the screen is redrawn. An outline appears around inserts to remind you of their special function.

For detailed information, see File Info dialog box.

See also: Text Menu


Text/Insert/Copyright
Insert/Copyright

Choose this command to paste a Copyright insert in the text block you're editing or creating. The copyright as it appears in the File Info dialog box appears at the current location of the cursor. If no information has been entered in the File Info dialog box, the word Copyright will appear in square brackets instead.

Choose File Info from the File menu to display the File Info dialog box. Any change you make in the Copyright text box will appear in the Copyright inserts used in this document.

Finale updates the contents of inserts each time the screen is redrawn. An outline appears around inserts to remind you of their special function.

For detailed information, see File Info dialog box.

See also: Text Menu


Text/Insert/Sharp
Insert/Sharp

Choose this command to paste a Sharp insert in the text block you're editing or creating. The sharp symbol as defined in the Text Inserts dialog box appears at the current location of the cursor.

Choose Text Inserts from the Document Settings submenu of the Options menu to display the Text Inserts dialog box. Any change you make to the corresponding symbol will appear for all inserts of that type used in this document.

Finale updates the contents of inserts each time the screen is redrawn. An outline appears around inserts to remind you of their special function.

For detailed information, see Text Inserts dialog box.

See also: Text Menu


Text/Insert/Flat
Insert/Flat

Choose this command to paste a Flat insert in the text block you're editing or creating. The flat symbol as defined in the Text Inserts dialog box appears at the current location of the cursor.

Choose Text Inserts from the Document Settings submenu of the Options menu to display the Text Inserts dialog box. Any change you make to the corresponding symbol will appear for all inserts of that type used in this document.

Finale updates the contents of inserts each time the screen is redrawn. An outline appears around inserts to remind you of their special function.

For detailed information, see Text Inserts dialog box.

See also: Text Menu


Text/Insert/Natural
Insert/Natural

Choose this command to paste a Natural insert in the text block you're editing or creating. The natural symbol as defined in the Text Inserts dialog box appears at the current location of the cursor.

Choose Text Inserts from the Document Settings submenu of the Options menu to display the Text Inserts dialog box. Any change you make to the corresponding symbol will appear for all inserts of that type used in this document.

Finale updates the contents of inserts each time the screen is redrawn. An outline appears around inserts to remind you of their special function.

For detailed information, see Text Inserts dialog box.

See also: Text Menu


Text/Insert/Double Sharp
Insert/Double Sharp

Choose this command to paste a Double Sharp insert in the text block you're editing or creating. The double sharp symbol as defined in the Text Inserts dialog box appears at the current location of the cursor.

Choose Text Inserts from the Document Settings submenu of the Options menu to display the Text Inserts dialog box. Any change you make to the corresponding symbol will appear for all inserts of that type used in this document.

Finale updates the contents of inserts each time the screen is redrawn. An outline appears around inserts to remind you of their special function.

For detailed information, see Text Inserts dialog box.

See also: Text Menu


Text/Insert/Double Flat
Insert/Double Flat

Choose this command to paste a Double Flat insert in the text block you're editing or creating. The double flat symbol as defined in the Text Inserts dialog box appears at the current location of the cursor.

Choose Text Inserts from the Document Settings submenu of the Options menu to display the Text Inserts dialog box. Any change you make to the corresponding symbol will appear for all inserts of that type used in this document.

Finale updates the contents of inserts each time the screen is redrawn. An outline appears around inserts to remind you of their special function.

For detailed information, see Text Inserts dialog box.

See also: Text Menu


Text/Edit Page Offset

Select a Page Number insert, then choose this command to display the Edit Page Offset dialog box where you can change the page number displayed in the insert.

For detailed information, see the Edit Page Offset dialog box.

See also: Text Menu


Text/Justification

Use this submenu to select how you want the text positioned within a frame. A checkmark indicates the justification in effect for the selected text block.

Left

Right

Center

Full

Forced Full

Expand Single Word

See also: Text Menu


Text/Justification/Left
Justification/Left

Choose this command to place each line of text flush with the left edge of the frame. A checkmark indicates that this justification style has been applied for the selected text block.

See also: Text Menu


Text/Justification/Right
Justification/Right

Choose this command to place each line of text flush with the right edge of the frame. A checkmark indicates that this justification style has been applied for the selected text block.

See also: Text Menu


Text/Justification/Center
Justification/Center

Choose this command to center each line of text between the left and right edges of the frame. A checkmark indicates that this justification style has been applied for the selected text block.

See also: Text Menu


Text/Justification/Full
Justification/Full

Choose this command to spread each line of text evenly between the left and right edges of the frame, except for the last line, which is always left-justified. Any line of text ending with a carriage return will also be left-justified. A checkmark indicates that this justification style has been applied for the selected text block.

See also: Text Menu


Justification/Forced Full

Choose this command to spread each line of text evenly between the left and right edges of the frame, including the last line. Lines of text ending with carriage returns will also be full-justified. A checkmark indicates that this justification style has been applied for the selected text block.

See also: Text Menu


Justification/Expand Single Word

This command is available only when Full or Forced Full is selected in the Justification submenu. Expand Single Word affects lines of text containing only one word. When selected, Finale spreads the letters of a word evenly between the left and right edges of the frame. Otherwise, all lines containing a single word are left-justified.

Note that if the text is Full justified, the last line is always left-justified, even if it contains only one word. If the text is Forced Full justified, and Expand Single Word is selected, the last line will be full-justified.

See also: Text Menu


Text/Line Spacing

Choose this command to display the Line Spacing dialog box, where you specify the exact line spacing (single-spaced, double-spaced, or some other spacing) you want applied to all lines of text in the text block.

For detailed information, see the Line Spacing dialog box.

See also: Text Menu


Transcription Menu

Once you've recorded a real-time performance in the Transcription window, Finale needs some additional information before it can begin to transcribe. In this menu you can tell Finale whether - and how - you want the performance transcribed onto two staves; what level of quantization you want applied; what range of notes you want included and excluded from the transcription; whether or not the performance included inner voices; and so on.

Split Point

Quantization

================

Allow Grace Notes

Include Voice Two

================

Input Filter

Transcription Filter

================

View Resolution

Punch In PreRoll

See also: Menus


Trans/Split Point
Transcription/Split Point

If you plan to transcribe onto two staves at once - for a keyboard piece, for example - you need to specify a point on the keyboard at which Finale should split your performance into right- and left-hand parts.

None

Fixed

Moving

See also: Transcription Menu


Trans/Split Point/None
Split Point/None

Choose None if you want the entire transcription written on a single staff.

See also: Transcription Menu


Trans/Split Point/Fixed
Split Point/Fixed

If you're recording a two-handed performance, you can specify that Finale split the transcription onto two staves automatically. If you choose Fixed, you can identify a key on your synthesizer corresponding to a pitch that divides all upper-staff notes from all lower-staff notes.

For detailed information, see the Fixed Split Point dialog box.

See also: Transcription Menu


Trans/Split Point/Moving
Split Point/Moving

If you choose Moving, Finale decides which music to put on each staff according to the width of your hands, based on the hand width interval you enter in the dialog box that appears. The advantage of this method of splitting your performance into right-hand and left-hand parts (as compared with the Fixed option) is that Finale can track the positions of your hands as they move up and down the keyboard, provided there's a wide enough interval between them for it to know which hand is which; you don't have to specify a static split point.

For detailed information, see the Moving Split Point dialog box.

See also: Transcription Menu


Transcription File/New

The Transcription window contains a  File menu for opening and saving Note (.NOT) files. Note files are special Finale files that contain all the recorded MIDI information from the music that you play into the Transcription window. Your recorded performance (or the Note file) is represented as "piano roll" notation - lines that indicate the duration and pitch for each recorded note.

New

Clears the note display area, and prepares the Transcription window for the next "track" you want to play in.

See also: Transcription Menu


Transcription File/Open

The Transcription window contains a  File menu for opening and saving Note (.NOT) files. Note files are special Finale files that contain all the recorded MIDI information from the music that you play into the Transcription window. Your recorded performance (or the Note file) is represented as "piano roll" notation - lines that indicate the duration and pitch for each recorded note.

Open

Opens an existing Note (.NOT) file. The Note file you open will be represented by "piano roll" notation in the Transcription window's note display area.

See also: Transcription Menu


Transcription File/Save As

The Transcription window contains a  File menu for opening and saving Note (.NOT) files. Note files are special Finale files that contain all the recorded MIDI information from the music that you play into the Transcription window. Your recorded performance (or the Note file) is represented as "piano roll" notation - lines that indicate the duration and pitch for each recorded note.

Save As

Saves the current recorded performance in the Transcription window  to disk, using the name that you specify. For example, if you're transcribing music for a client, you may want to have the person record the tracks for each song, saving each track in a separate Note file. You can transcribe the Note files at a later, saving your client valuable time.

See also: Transcription Menu


Transcription Edit/Select All

The Transcription window contains an Edit menu for selecting the music in the Transcription window's note display area.

Select All

Selects all the music in the Transcription window's note display area. Hint: To select only a some of the music, drag to select only the music that you want to select, or use the In or Out counters in the Transcription window.

See also: Transcription Menu


Transcription Options/MIDI Setup

Choose this command to display the MIDI Setup dialog box, where you can affect a number of settings concerning your MIDI interface setup.

For detailed information, see the MIDI Setup dialog box.

See also: Transcription Menu


Transcription Options/MIDI Thru

If you prefer to use one keyboard as a controller and another device as the sound source, choose this command to specify your MIDI Thru preferences.

For detailed information, see the MIDI Thru dialog box.

See also: Transcription Menu


Transcription Options/All Notes Off

From time to time, you may encounter MIDI lock, a rare situation in which a synthesizer sounds as if its keys are "stuck," and it plays continuously as though someone's still pressing them. To send the MIDI signal that tells it to "release the keys," choose this command; after a moment, the synthesizer will be silent.

See also: Transcription Menu


Trans/Quantization
Transcription/Quantization

A computer can perceive subdivisions of rhythm down to thousandths of a second. Therefore, in order to produce readable, musical transcriptions of your performances (no matter how precisely you play), it needs to be told how much to round off, or quantize, each note you played. You might specify, for example, that it should round off every note you played to the nearest eighth note.

Choose the level of quantization for your transcription by selecting the appropriate submenu command (generally the smallest rhythmic value you played).

Half

Quarter

Eighth

16th

32nd

64th

Floating

See also: Transcription Menu


Trans/Quantization/Half
Transcription/Quantization/Half

Choose this command to quantize (round off) the transcription to the nearest half note.

See also: Transcription Menu


Trans/Quantization/Quarter
Transcription/Quantization/Quarter

Choose this command to quantize (round off) the transcription to the nearest quarter note.

See also: Transcription Menu


Trans/Quantization/Eighth
Transcription/Quantization/Eighth

Choose this command to quantize (round off) the transcription to the nearest eighth note.

See also: Transcription Menu


Trans/Quantization/16th
Transcription/Quantization/16th

Choose this command to quantize (round off) the transcription to the nearest 16th note.

See also: Transcription Menu


Trans/Quantization/32nd
Transcription/Quantization/32nd

Choose this command to quantize (round off) the transcription to the nearest 32nd note.

See also: Transcription Menu


Trans/Quantization/64th
Transcription/Quantization/64th

Choose this command to quantize (round off) the transcription to the nearest 64th note.

See also: Transcription Menu


Trans/Quantization/Float
Transcription/Quantization/Floating

Computer quantization has traditionally posed a problem: if you quantize to eighth notes, any triplets in your performance (or sixteenth notes, or any smaller values) won't transcribe correctly; they'll be clumped together with the nearest eighth notes. If you attempt to solve the problem by quantizing to a smaller value, your eighth and quarter notes are liable to be surrounded by dozens of sixteenth rests.

To solve the problems presented by specifying a fixed quantization level, Finale offers a feature called Floating Quantization. Using this option, Finale will, whenever possible, quantize to the nearest eighth note (or whatever value you've specified). But if it ever encounters more than two notes between any two of your tempo reference taps, it immediately realizes that, for this beat only, it will have to use a finer quantization value. As a result, Finale will correctly transcribe swing pieces that include occasional triplets, marches that include occasional sixteenth notes, and so on.

When you choose Floating, the Floating Quantization dialog box appears, in which you can specify the type of Floating Quantization you want.

For detailed information, see the Floating Quantization dialog box.

See also: Transcription Menu


Trans/Allow Grace Notes
Transcription/Allow Grace Notes

Normally, Finale automatically lengthens any notes you played whose durations were less than the quantization value you've specified - in effect wiping out any grace notes. If you do want grace notes to appear in the transcription, select this command (so that a check mark appears).

See also: Transcription Menu


Trans/Include Voice Two
Transcription/Include Voice Two

If there's an inner voice in the music you'll be transcribing, choose this option (so that a check mark appears); Finale will accurately transcribe your performance into two independent voices per staff, one stems-up and one stems-down.

If there are few places where you'll be needing an inner voice, however, leave this item unselected. This will prevent Finale from creating secondary voices where you didn't intend them - for example, where you accidentally overlapped two successive notes in your performance. The status of this option can have a dramatic effect on the "cleanness" of your transcriptions.

See also: Transcription Menu


Trans/Input Filter
Transcription/Input Filter

Choose this command to display the MIDI Input Filter dialog box, in which you can tell Finale to record only certain types of MIDI data from your performance.

For detailed information, see the MIDI Input Filter dialog box.

See also: Transcription Menu


Trans/Transcription Filter
Transcription/Transcription Filter

Choose this command to display the Transcription Filters dialog box, in which you can specify certain MIDI channels and ranges of notes you want to include or exclude from your transcription.

If you've just played a multichannel sequence into the Transcription window (from an external sequencer), for example, you'll probably want the notes from each MIDI channel to be transcribed onto their own Finale staff. In this dialog box, you can specify a single MIDI channel at a time for transcription, or as many as four channels.

For detailed information, see the Transcription Filters dialog box.

See also: Transcription Menu


Trans/View Resolution
Transcription/View Resolution

When you choose this command, the View Resolution dialog box appears, in which you can specify the amount by which you want to "zoom in" to the display area, so that you can more easily view and edit individual notes or Time Tags.

For detailed information, see the View Resolution dialog box.

See also: Transcription Menu


Trans/Punch In PreRoll
Transcription/Punch In PreRoll

If you're re-recording only a certain part of your performance, or punching in, you'll probably want Finale to play a few seconds of the music just before the place you want to rerecord, so you can hear the desired passage in context and in tempo. The dialog box that appears when you choose this command allows you to specify how many seconds of the existing music you want Finale to play before switching into record mode.

For detailed information, see the Punch In PreRoll dialog box.

See also: Transcription Menu


Time Tag Menu

Once you record a real-time performance in the Transcription window, Finale needs to know where the beats and barlines fall in relation to the notes you played (in order to transcribe your performance). To provide this information, you tap along with your music as it plays back (on a key or pedal), providing Finale with a tempo point of reference. These taps are called Time Tags. They appear at the top of the display area as small quarter notes (or eighth notes, or whatever value you specified before recording them). Note that you can edit these tags manually - you can either insert a new one by double-clicking in the Time Tag display area, or you can slide them horizontally. See Transcription window for complete details.

The Time Tag menu contains a number of Time Tag-related commands. Using them, you can tell Finale the duration of the tags you'll be recording, adjust each to align with the nearest note, or assign Measure Tags (a special Time Tag that tells Finale where the beginning of each measure falls in relation to the music you played).

Choose one of the three commands (Tag, Beat, Measure) to tell Finale what kind of Time Tag you'll be recording or editing.

Tag

Beat

Measure

==============================

Clear All Tags

==============================

Assign Measure Tags

Convert To Time Signatures

Create Tags From First Two Tags

==============================

First Tag is

Record Equal Durations

==============================

Click Input

Click Output

==============================

Create Tags From Background File

Align Tags to Notes


Time Tag/Tag

The Tag type is the normal Time Tag; with each tap on a key or pedal, you specify the position of a beat. (You specify the rhythmic value of your taps by choosing the appropriate value from the "First Tag Is:" section of this menu - see below.) When you're finished recording these tags, a small quarter note symbol (or whatever note value you specified) appears at the top of the display area for each of your taps.

See also: Time Tag Menu


Time Tag/Beat

The Beat type is a special Time Tag you'll rarely need. It has no effect unless you're using the "Convert to Time Signatures" feature (described below), which creates meter changes in the score based upon your measure and beat taps in the Transcription window. Each Beat Tag you record (after recording normal Time Tags) is represented by a small accent symbol (>) at the top of the Time Tag display area.

When creating these time signature changes, Finale creates a subdivision of the time signature each time it encounters a beat tag in the Transcription window. By creating a beat tag on the first and fourth beats of a 5/4 measure, for example, you signal Finale to divide the measure into two primary pulses; it will create a 3+2 over 4 time signature (instead of 5/4).

The placement of Beat Time Tags tells Finale how to subdivide the numerator of the meter in each measure.

See also: Time Tag Menu


Time Tag/Measure

The Measure type is a Time Tag you'll only need to record in a separate pass (after recording normal Time Tags) if the meter changes during the section you're transcribing (and you haven't created these meter changes in the score in advance).

After selecting Measure from this menu, record your Measure Tags by tapping the downbeat of each measure. When you're finished, a small M appears at the top of the display area for each of your taps. If you then choose "Convert to Time Signatures" (see below), Finale automatically changes the meters for the corresponding measures in the score. With this method, you can automatically create a transcription of a complex-metered piece by tapping your Measure Tags where you feel each measure should begin; in this way you avoid having to calculate and insert the various time signatures manually.

See also: Time Tag Menu


Time Tag/Clear All Tags

Choose this command to delete all Time Tags, of all types, from the Time Tag display area.

You can also remove just one Time Tag, or a few at a time, without using this command. To do so, click the words Time Tag in the Transcription window. Drag across the Time Tags you want to clear (in the upper strip of the display area) and press Delete.

See also: Time Tag Menu


Time Tag/Assign Measure Tags

When you choose this command, Finale puts Measure Tags into the selected region of your performance automatically, based on the time signature in the score (starting with the measure you clicked). Even if there's a meter change in every measure of the score, this is a quick, easy way to apply Measure Tags - which, incidentally, are mandatory if Finale is to transcribe your performance.

See also: Time Tag Menu


TimeTag/Convert Time Signatures
Time Tag/Convert to Time Signatures

If the piece you're transcribing contains changing time signatures, you can use this command to create the meter changes in the score automatically. (You must first record regular Time Tags before you begin the following steps.)

First record Measure Tags: Choose Measure from the Time Tag menu, select the region for which you want to record Measure Tags (or choose Select All from the Edit menu), set the Keyboard option button to Play, set the Time Tag option button to Record, and click Wait Till - then tap a key or pedal at the downbeat of each measure while the music plays back.

When you're finished, an M appears in the Time Tag display area for each of your taps. If you want Finale to create composite time signatures (for example, to create a 3+2 over 4 meter instead of 5/4), record Beat Tags (see "Beat" command). Finally, make sure the desired region is selected, and choose "Convert to Time Signatures." Finale automatically changes the time signatures in the corresponding measures in the score, based upon the placement of your Measure Tags and Beat Tags. Finale will even create fractional and composite meters, if necessary (3.5/4, for example).

See also: Time Tag Menu


Time Tag/Create Tags From First Two Tags

If the performance you created was in a fairly strict tempo, you may not have to record Time Tags by tapping along with the entire performance while it plays back. Instead, enter just two tags at the beginning of the recording. Make sure they're as accurately placed as possible; it's a good idea to choose "Align Tags to Notes" at this point (see below). Choose Select All from the Edit menu (or select the region you want to transcribe, beginning with the two Time Tags you placed manually). Choose this command; Finale creates and places Time Tags automatically throughout the selected portion of your performance by extrapolating from the positions of the first ones you entered.

See also: Time Tag Menu


Time Tag/First Tag is

Use these commands to tell Finale the rhythmic value of the first Time Tag you tap. If you've also selected Record Equal Durations, this rhythmic value is assigned to all your taps.

If you want to create a Time Tag manually (by double-clicking in the Time Tag display area), your selection from these commands also specifies the rhythmic value of the Time Tag you create.

Half

Quarter

Eighth

16th

See also: Time Tag Menu


TimeTag/FirstTag/Half
Time Tag/First Tag is Half

Choose this command to specify that the first tap (and all taps if Record Equal Durations is selected) is a half note.

See also: Time Tag Menu


TimeTag/FirstTag/Quarter
Time Tag/First Tag is Quarter

Choose this command to specify that the first tap (and all taps if Record Equal Durations is selected) is a quarter note.

See also: Time Tag Menu


TimeTag/FirstTag/Eighth
Time Tag/First Tag is Eighth

Choose this command to specify that the first tap (and all taps if Record Equal Durations is selected) is an eighth note.

See also: Time Tag Menu


TimeTag/FirstTag/16th
Time Tag/First Tag is 16th

Choose this command to specify that the first tap (and all taps if Record Equal Durations is selected) is a 16th note.

See also: Time Tag Menu


Time Tag/Record Equal Durations

You don't have to tap steadily when you record Time Tags. You could, in fact, simply tap along to your melody; Finale infers the rhythmic value of each tap, even if it changes.

You'll probably get the best results, however, if you choose Record Equal Durations; as your piece plays back, tap the same rhythm throughout (just quarter notes, for example). You tell Finale what that one rhythmic value is by choosing the appropriate "First Tag Is" command.

See also: Time Tag Menu


Time Tag/Click Input

Normally, when you record Time Tags in a separate pass (after recording your performance), you can tap any key - you can even change keys during the process. As long as the Keyboard Play option button is selected, and the Time Tag Record option button is selected, Finale interprets a press of any key on MIDI channel 1 as a Time Tag.

With this command, you can tell Finale that you'll be tapping a key on some other MIDI channel - or that you'll be tapping a pedal or other controller instead of a key. You'll also find this feature useful if you want to record your performance and the Time Tags simultaneously, so that Finale knows what key (or controller) it should listen to for Time Tags (and not as part of the performance itself). For example, you could tell Finale that you want to tap your foot on a pedal (to provide Time Tags) while you play, as you do in HyperScribe. Likewise, you'd want to use this method to transcribe a sequence from an external sequencer (one that provides a click track Finale can use as the Time Tag source, for example).

For detailed information, see the Click Input dialog box.

See also: Time Tag Menu


Time Tag/Click Output

Choose this command to display the Click Output Type dialog box, in which you can specify which note and MIDI channel Finale should use when it plays back the Time Tags.

There are two cases in which you might like Finale to play Time Tags as you record in the Transcription window. First, you might want Finale to provide a "click track" as you record a real-time performance, so that you won't have to record Time Tags in a separate pass. (The "click track" is nothing more than playback of Time Tags that Finale has placed automatically.)

Second, you might want Finale to drive an external sequencer or computer using MIDI Sync, so that the external device will play in tempo with Finale.

In either case, the Click Output Type dialog box lets you specify various characteristics of the click: its pitch, duration, MIDI channel, and so on.

For detailed information, see the Click Output dialog box.

See also: Time Tag Menu


Time Tag/Create Tags from Background File

This command is only available if you're using a Background File, Finale's "overdubbing tracks" mechanism.

In a true sequencer program, you can record one track while listening to a previously recorded track. In Finale, you achieve this effect by transcribing the first track, creating a playback file from it and reentering the Transcription Tool. Finale automatically loads the playback file into the "background" of the new transcription window (and places an X in the Background File checkbox). Thus, you hear the earlier tracks being playing back while you record the new material.

The "Create Tags From Background File" command adds an extra convenience to this system. Since any new tracks you record are presumably in the same time signature and tempo as the first one you transcribed, you don't have to rerecord Time Tags in order to transcribe additional tracks, because Time Tags were already created with the first transcribed track.

When you choose this command, Finale adds Time Tags to the selected region of your most recent recording automatically, based on the positions of the Time Tags in the Background (Playback) File (which contains the playback of the tracks you've already transcribed). You still need to insert Measure Tags, however - choose "Assign Measure Tags" from the Time Tag menu.

You should also choose Align Tags to Notes from the Time Tag menu to get a more accurate transcription. But if you want to preserve the rhythmic nuances of your new track so that it plays back as accurately as possible once it's transcribed, don't select Align Tags to Notes, even though the transcription may not be as accurate.

See also: Time Tag Menu


Time Tag/Align Tags to Notes

After you've recorded a MIDI performance and then told Finale where the beats fall by entering Time Tags, use this command to align the tags more precisely with the beginnings of the notes in your performance. (Specify the region for which you want Time Tags aligned either by dragging through part of the keyboard display area or by choosing Select All from the Edit menu.) In effect, you're "quantizing" the tags to the nearest notes, so that Finale understands that the tag and the note fall exactly together.

The Align Time Tags To Note Starts dialog box appears; the number in the text box tells Finale how far from each tag it may "search" for a note with which to align it. If the performance was slow, you can increase this number; if it was very fast and "notey," you may want to use a smaller number so as not to move Time Tags inadvertently, for example, to the note after the one with which it should align.

For detailed information, see the Align Time Tags to Note Starts dialog box.

See also: Time Tag Menu


View Menu

This menu contains commands pertaining to your view of the score. You can never change the score itself with the commands in this menu - only modify the way you see it on the screen. For example, you can change the size of the displayed music, hide staves, rearrange the tool palette, or enable one of several speed-enhancing features.

Scroll View

Page View

=====================

Home Position

Redraw Screen

Redraw Options

Select Display Colors

=====================

Scale View

Select Staff Set

Bookmarks

Select Tool Set

=====================

Show - Hide Rulers

Show - Hide Margins

=====================

Select Layers

Show Active Layer Only

Show Multiple Pages

Show PostScript Preview

See also: Menus


View/Scroll View

Finale offers you the choice of two views of your music: Scroll View, where the music is a continuous horizontal band, and Page View, where the music is laid out like a page of sheet music. Most of Finale's tools work equally well in either mode, although you'll find that your computer redraws the screen faster in Scroll View than in Page View. Press Ctrl-E to switch from one view to another.

See also: View Menu


View/Page View

Finale offers you the choice of two views of your music: Scroll View, where the music is a continuous horizontal band, and Page View, where the music is laid out like a page of sheet music. Most of Finale's tools work equally well in either mode, although you'll find that your computer redraws the screen faster in Scroll View than in Page View. Press Ctrl-E to switch from one view to another.

See also: View Menu


View/Home Position

Choose this command to return to the first measure in the score (in Scroll View) or the upper-left corner of the current page (in Page View), no matter where you are in the piece.

See also: View Menu


View/Redraw Screen

Choose this command to force Finale to redraw the screen. Whenever you spot a visual anomaly - a phantom fragment of a slur, for example, or a missing barline - this command usually clears up the problem.

See also: View Menu


View/Redraw Options

Choose this command to display the Redraw Options dialog box, where you can find a number of useful preference settings that have to do with screen redraw. For example, you can tell Finale not to draw the lyrics on screen, or only to redraw the screen when you explicitly tell it to.

For detailed information, see the Redraw Options dialog box.

See also: View Menu


View/Select Display Colors

Choose this command to display the Select Display Colors dialog box. The Select Display Colors dialog box allows you to assign colors to different layers as well as to different elements in your score such as Articulations, Text Blocks and Smart Shapes. This is useful for differentiating between various objects in order to identify which tools created them, or which layer they belong to. Colors are used for on-screen display only -- not for printing.

For detailed information, see the Select Display Colors dialog box.

See also: View Menu


View/Scale View to
View/Scale View

The Scale View to submenu offers commands that let you specify the size at which you want the score displayed on your screen, expressed as a percentage of its actual size. You can't change the actual (printed) size of the music on the page in this way; this technique simply lets you magnify or reduce the screen display of the music.

Scale View to 400%

Scale View to 200%

Scale View to 100%

Scale View to 75%

Scale View to 50%

Scale View to Other

Scale View to Last Size

Scale View to Fit in Window

See also:

View Menu

Scale View


Scale View to 400%
Scale View/Scale View to 400%

To change your view of the score to 400%, just choose this command from the submenu.

See also: View Menu


Scale View to 200%
Scale View/Scale View to 200%

To change your view of the score to 200%, just choose this command from the submenu. (You can also use the Ctrl-F.)

See also: View Menu


Scale View to 100%
Scale View/Scale View to 100%

To change your view of the score to 100% (actual size), just choose this command from the submenu. (You can also use the Ctrl-G.)

See also: View Menu


Scale View to 75%
Scale View/Scale View to 75%

To change your view of the score to 75%, just choose this command from the submenu. (You can also use the Ctrl-J.)

See also: View Menu


Scale View to 50%
Scale View/Scale View to 50%

To change your view of the score to 50%, just choose this command from the submenu. (You can also use the Ctrl-K.)

See also: View Menu


Scale View to Other
View/Scale View to Other

If you choose Other, the Scale View dialog box appears, in which you can specify any reduction or enlargement you want - from 10% to 1000%.

For detailed information, see the Scale View dialog box.

See also: View Menu


Scale View to Last Size
Scale View/Scale View to Last Size

If you've been viewing your score at several different degrees of magnification, Last Size takes you back to your last magnification setting.

See also: View Menu


Scale View to Fit in Window
Scale View/Scale View to Fit in Window

This command is available only in Page View. It automatically reduces the viewing percentage just enough to fit the current page completely on your screen, no matter what size screen you have.

See also: View Menu


View/Select Staff Set

You can greatly speed your work on orchestral scores by hiding the staves you're not currently editing, so that there's less music for Finale to draw. You can create up to eight staff templates - different arrangements of the staves in your score.

To create a staff template, click the Staff Tool; select the staves you don't want to hide. If you have many staves, and you only want to hide one or two, here's a quick way to do it. Choose Select All from the Edit menu to select all handles; then Shift-click a staff handle to exclude it from the selected staves.

Next, while pressing Ctrl , choose Select Staff Set from the View menu; from the submenu, choose one of the Staff Sets (1 through 8). You've just defined a Staff Set. To view the new configuration of staves, choose the Staff Set you just programmed from the same submenu. Choose All Staves to restore all staves to the display. Note that Finale prints all staves (and displays all staves in Page View), however, no matter which are visible in Scroll View.

All Staves

Staff Set 1

Staff Set 2

Staff Set 3

Staff Set 4

Staff Set 5

Staff Set 6

Staff Set 7

Staff Set 8

See also: View Menu


View/Select Staff All Staves
Select Staff Set/All Staves

Choose All Staves to display all the staves in your score in Scroll View. This Staff Set cannot be reassigned.

See also: View Menu


View/Select Staff Set 1
Select Staff Set/Staff Set 1

Choose this command to display the staff template you assigned to Staff Set 1. Or, to create a staff template, click the Staff Tool; select only the staves you want to appear when you choose this command. Next, while pressing Ctrl , choose Select Staff Set from the View menu; from the submenu, choose Staff Set 1. You've just defined a Staff Set.

See also: View Menu


View/Select Staff Set 2
Select Staff Set/Staff Set 2

Choose this command to display the staff template you assigned to Staff Set 2. Or, to create a staff template, click the Staff Tool; select only the staves you want to appear when you choose this command. Next, while pressing Ctrl , choose Select Staff Set from the View menu; from the submenu, choose Staff Set 2. You've just defined a Staff Set.

See also: View Menu


View/Select Staff Set 3
Select Staff Set/Staff Set 3

Choose this command to display the staff template you assigned to Staff Set 3. Or, to create a staff template, click the Staff Tool; select only the staves you want to appear when you choose this command. Next, while pressing Ctrl , choose Select Staff Set from the View menu; from the submenu, choose Staff Set 3. You've just defined a Staff Set.

See also: View Menu


View/Select Staff Set 4
Select Staff Set/Staff Set 4

Choose this command to display the staff template you assigned to Staff Set 4. Or, to create a staff template, click the Staff Tool; select only the staves you want to appear when you choose this command. Next, while pressing Ctrl , choose Select Staff Set from the View menu; from the submenu, choose Staff Set 4. You've just defined a Staff Set.

See also: View Menu


View/Select Staff Set 5
Select Staff Set/Staff Set 5

Choose this command to display the staff template you assigned to Staff Set 5. Or, to create a staff template, click the Staff Tool; select only the staves you want to appear when you choose this command. Next, while pressing Ctrl , choose Select Staff Set from the View menu; from the submenu, choose Staff Set 5. You've just defined a Staff Set.

See also: View Menu


View/Select Staff Set 6
Select Staff Set/Staff Set 6

Choose this command to display the staff template you assigned to Staff Set 6. Or, to create a staff template, click the Staff Tool; select only the staves you want to appear when you choose this command. Next, while pressing Ctrl , choose Select Staff Set from the View menu; from the submenu, choose Staff Set 6. You've just defined a Staff Set.

See also: View Menu


View/Select Staff Set 7
Select Staff Set/Staff Set 7

Choose this command to display the staff template you assigned to Staff Set 7. Or, to create a staff template, click the Staff Tool; select only the staves you want to appear when you choose this command. Next, while pressing Ctrl , choose Select Staff Set from the View menu; from the submenu, choose Staff Set 7. You've just defined a Staff Set.

See also: View Menu


View/Select Staff Set 8
Select Staff Set/Staff Set 8

Choose this command to display the staff template you assigned to Staff Set 8. Or, to create a staff template, click the Staff Tool; select only the staves you want to appear when you choose this command. Next, while pressing Ctrl , choose Select Staff Set from the View menu; from the submenu, choose Staff Set 8. You've just defined a Staff Set.

See also: View Menu


View/Bookmarks

Use the first two commands in this submenu to add, and edit bookmarks in your score. A bookmark marks a particular position on a page (in Page View), or a measure in the music itself (in Scroll View). This enables you to access a certain page and a precise position on that page, or to jump to a marked measure in the music with a single command, quickly and efficiently.  Each bookmark you create appears at the bottom of this submenu, so that you can select the bookmark to jump to that place in the score.

Add Bookmark

Edit Bookmark

See also: View Menu


Bookmarks/Add Bookmark

Choose this command to create a bookmark based on the current settings in the score. The Add Bookmark dialog box appears where you can name, change and ignore settings for the bookmark.

Tip: For fast, efficient entry of bookmarks, set up the view (Scroll or Page) and view percentage, and position the music on the screen before you create the bookmark. If you do this, the text boxes will accurately reflect the bookmark's position without having to enter that information manually. Select the checkboxes for the settings you want remembered for the bookmark.

For detailed information, see the Add/Edit Bookmark dialog box.

See also: View Menu


Bookmarks/Edit Bookmarks
Bookmarks/Edit Bookmark

Choose this command to edit existing bookmarks, or add new bookmarks to the score. The Edit Bookmark dialog box appears where you can name, change and ignore settings for existing or new bookmarks.

For detailed information, see the Add/Edit Bookmark dialog box.

See also: View Menu


View/Select Tool Set

Finale's floating tool palette is extremely flexible. By Shift-dragging the tool icons, you can swap icons' locations on the palette. By dragging the sizable frame you can resize or reshape the palette. And by dragging the title bar at the top of the palette (or left side, depending on how you've reshaped your palette), you can move the palette anywhere on the screen.

If you rearrange the icons, you can tell Finale to memorize the tool and palette positions as a Tool Set. You can create up to three different configurations of tools per file, and switch from one to another instantly. For example, you might arrange the note-editing tools together at the top of one tool set - the HyperScribe and Transcription tools, the Simple and Speedy Entry tools, the Smart Shapes, and the Clef Tool. Once you've input your music, you could switch to a page layout tool set - with the Page Layout Tool, and the Resize Tool at the top of the palette, for example.

To create and save tool sets, first set up the palette the way you want it as described above. Then, while pressing Ctrl, choose a Tool Set from the Select Tool Set submenu. You've just created a Tool Set. (Finale stores the default tool palette configuration as the Master Tool Set.)

To switch from one palette setup to another, choose its name from the Select Tool Set submenu.

Master Tool Set

Tool Set 1

Tool Set 2

Tool Set 3

See also: View Menu


View/Select Master Tool Set
Select Tool Set/Master Tool Set

Choose this command to restore the default appearance and order of the Main Tool Palette.

See also: View Menu


View/Select Tool Set 1
Select Tool Set/Tool Set 1

Choose this command to switch to the tool order and configuration you assigned to Tool Set 1. Or, to reassign the tool set, configure the Main Tool Palette, then press Ctrl and choose Tool Set 1 from the Select Tool Set submenu. The Tool Set is reassigned.

See also: View Menu


View/Select Tool Set 2
Select Tool Set/Tool Set 2

Choose this command to switch to the tool order and configuration you assigned to Tool Set 2. Or, to reassign the tool set, configure the Main Tool Palette, then press Ctrl and choose Tool Set 2 from the Select Tool Set submenu. The Tool Set is reassigned.

See also: View Menu


View/Select Tool Set 3
Select Tool Set/Tool Set 3

Choose this command to switch to the tool order and configuration you assigned to Tool Set 3. Or, to reassign the tool set, configure the Main Tool Palette, then press Ctrl and choose Tool Set 3 from the Select Tool Set submenu. The Tool Set is reassigned.

See also: View Menu


View/Show - Hide Rulers

Choose this command to display nonprinting rulers at the top and left side of the screen. As you drag an object, you can see thin dotted indicator lines that show you where the cursor is, making it easy for you to align and position various objects precisely on the screen. The units of measurement are whatever you've selected using the Measurement Units command in the Options menu.

See also: View Menu


View/Show - Hide Margins

Choose this command to display the page margins and staff system margins when you're in Page View.

See also: View Menu


View/Select Layers

Use this submenu to choose which music layer you want to edit. Four music layers are available. (Or, use the Layer push-buttons in the Document Window.)

Layer 1

Layer 2

Layer 3

Layer 4

See also: View Menu


Select Layers/Layer 1

Choose this option to make layer 1 the active layer for note entry and editing.

See also: View Menu


Select Layers/Layer 2

Choose this option to make layer 2 the active layer for note entry and editing.

See also: View Menu


Select Layers/Layer 3

Choose this option to make layer 3 the active layer for note entry and editing.

See also: View Menu


Select Layers/Layer 4

Choose this option to make layer 4 the active layer for note entry and editing.

See also: View Menu


View/Show Active Layer Only

Each Finale staff is actually four transparent layers, each of which can contain its own rhythmically independent inner voice. Only one layer can be active (frontmost) at a time, however; the active layer is always identified by the push buttons in the lower-left corner of the file window.

When this item is selected (displaying a check mark), Finale hides the three inactive layers. Bear in mind that hidden layers are unaffected by almost every tool. For example, the music in a hidden layer won't play back. Nor will it be copied, pasted, or otherwise affected by Mass Mover operations - a useful fact to remember if you want to copy or paste the music of one layer only.

Choose this command a second time to make the check mark disappear (and make the other three layers reappear).

See also: View Menu


View/Show Multiple Pages

This command, available only in Page View, tells Finale to display the pages of your piece side by side in rows across your screen. Such an arrangement allows you to get an overall picture of your score, because you can scan all pages of the file at once - that is, if you've reduced the view enough to fit all the pages on the screen.

In a small-sized window, you'll need to reduce the music quite a bit in order to see more than one page at a time - for example, you might try choosing Fit in Window from the "Scale View to" submenu. In any case, you can only edit the music on the first displayed page.

See also: View Menu


View/Show PostScript Preview

When you choose this command (Page View only), Finale displays a preview of your music. Except for the fact that the screen resolution is much coarser than that of a printer, the Display in PostScript option provides you with the most accurate possible preview of what will be your printed output. Click on the page to make the display return to normal.

(Technical note: Specifically, the Display in Postscript command displays tapered slurs, kerns letter pairs, and substitutes laser fonts for bitmapped fonts, when possible.)

See also: View Menu


Options Menu

This menu contains the keys to Finale's notational flexibility. Whatever notational conventions you subscribe to, no matter what publishing specs you prefer, chances are good that an Options menu command will accommodate you. Each command brings up a dialog box that governs some aspect of the way Finale displays the music in the active file - its layout and positioning variables, for example, or the fonts, musical symbols, and clefs it uses.

Measurement Units

=================

Enharmonic Spelling

Moveable Items

Program Options

==================

Document Settings

Select Default Fonts

Data Check

==================

Click and Countoff

Playback Options

==================

MIDI Setup

MIDI Thru

Send MIDI Sync

All Notes Off

See also: Menus


Options/Measurement Units

In a number of Finale dialog boxes, you're asked to specify a measurement: the margins of each page, for example, or the thickness of eighth-note beams. Using the submenu of the Measurement Units command, you can select the measurement unit you want Finale to understand - and display - in all of its dialog boxes.

EVPU's

Inches

Centimeters

Points

Picas

Spaces

See also: Options Menu


Measurement Units/EVPUs
Measurement Units/EVPU's

Choose this command to display the measurements in EVPUs. EVPU stands for ENIGMA Virtual Page Unit, of which there are 288 per inch.


Measurement Units/Inches

Choose this command to display the measurements in inches.


Measurement Units/Centimeters

Choose this command to display the measurements in centimeters.


Measurement Units/Points

Choose this command to display the measurements in points. Points are typographical measurements of which there are 72 points per inch, and 12 points in a pica.


Measurement Units/Picas

Choose this command to display the measurements in picas. Picas are typographical measurements of which there are 6 picas per inch.


Measurement Units/Spaces

Choose this command to display the measurements in spaces. In engraving, one space is defined as the distance between staff lines; however, in Finale one space is equal to 24 EVPUs (which is Finale's default distance between staff lines).

12 spaces = 1 inch; one-half space equals one step, which is one line or space in a staff.


Options/Enharmonic Spelling

Use the commands in this submenu to control the chromatic spelling of your music when you enter notes using MIDI or use one of Finale's retranscription commands such as Mass Edit's Retranscribe or Respell Notes. You can also edit enharmonic spelling tables for major and minor keys, and for modal or chromatic spelling created in the Non-Standard Key Signature dialog box.

To determine how to spell diatonic notes (the unaltered pitches within the scale) entered in your music, Finale always uses the key signature. As an example, if the key signature is G major and you play F sharp, it will always be notated as F sharp, not as G flat. When you chromatically alter a note, Finale will use the enharmonic spelling method selected to determine how to notate it. For instance, in the key of C, the half-step between C and D may be notated as C sharp or D flat depending on your enharmonic spelling selection.

Use Default Spelling

Favor Sharps

Favor Flats

Use Spelling Tables

Edit Major and Minor Key Spellings

Edit Modal or Chromatic Spellings

See also: Options Menu


Enharmonic Spelling/Use Default Spelling

Choose this option to use Finale's automatic spelling. The spelling method is used during MIDI note entry and retranscription. Finale's default spelling offers some advantages, such as a limited ability to spell ascending or descending chromatic lines. This method is also capable of clearly representing tone clusters and chords containing close intervals.

See also: Options/Enharmonic Spelling


Enharmonic Spelling/Favor Sharps

Choose this option  to have Finale show accidentals primarily as sharps (or notes raised by a half-step) in your score. The spelling method is used during MIDI note entry and retranscription.

See also: Options/Enharmonic Spelling


Enharmonic Spelling/Favor Flats

Choose this option to have Finale display accidentals primarily as flats (or notes lowered by a half-step). The spelling method is used during MIDI note entry and retranscription.

See also: Options/Enharmonic Spelling


Enharmonic Spelling/Use Spelling Tables

Choose this option to have Finale spell the altered notes according to the spelling tables that you specify. The spelling method is used during MIDI note entry and retranscription.

For detailed information, see Edit Major and Minor Key Spellings dialog box and Edit Modal or Chromatic Spellings dialog box.

See also: Options/Enharmonic Spelling


Enharmonic Spelling/Edit Major and Minor Key Spellings

Displays the Edit Major and Minor Key Spellings dialog box. This dialog box contains Finale's enharmonic spelling settings for major and minor keys. Modify these settings to your preferred enharmonic spellings for notes that are not part of the diatonic scale. To use these settings, make sure that the "Use Spelling Tables" option is selected (checked).

For detailed information, see the Edit Major and Minor Key Spellings dialog box.

See also: Use Spelling Tables


Enharmonic Spelling/Edit Modal or Chromatic Spellings

Displays the Edit Modal or Chromatic Spellings dialog box. This dialog box contains Finale's enharmonic spelling settings for chromatic scales and modes. Modify these settings to your preferred enharmonic spellings. These settings only affect the non-major or minor key signatures that you create in the Nonstandard Key Signature dialog box. To use these settings, make sure that the "Use Spelling Tables" option is selected (checked).

For detailed information, see the Edit Modal or Chromatic Spellings dialog box.

See also: Use Spelling Tables


Options/Movable Items

Choose this command to set up the amount that Finale moves items when you press the arrows keys to move Special Tools' items on screen. You can also determine whether you want Finale to automatically constrain dragging to horizontal and vertical movements, or if you prefer to drag items in any direction. (You can press Shift to temporarily allow constrained or unconstrained dragging.)

For detailed information, see the Movable Items dialog box.

See also: Options Menu


Options/Program Options

Choose this command to display the Program Options dialog box, whose checkboxes govern various program-wide settings, including an automatic-backup feature.

For detailed information, see the Program Options dialog box.

See also: Options Menu


Options/Document Settings

Use the commands in this submenu to control the settings that are saved with a specific document. Control the appearance and placement of augmentation dots, repeats, time signatures and so on.

Augmentation Dot

Barlines

Clef Designer

Curves

Document Options

Layer Options

Lines

Multimeasure Rest

Music Characters

Music Options

Notation Options

Note Shapes

Page Format for Parts

Page Format for Score

Piano Braces

PostScript Options

Repeat Bars

Repeat Endings

Stem Connections

Text Inserts

Time Signature Options

See also: Options Menu


Document Settings/Augmentation Dot
Document Settings/Augmentation Dots

Choose this command to set up the global placement of dots on notes. Adjust the vertical placement, and specify the distance between the notehead and the first dot, and the distance between dots on notes with two or more dots. You can even move the dot  to the right for upstem flagged notes. Determine whether you want Finale to adjust the dots when it detects multiple voices.

For detailed information, see the Augmentation Dot dialog box.

See also: Options Menu


Document Settings/Barlines

Choose this command to fine-tune the global appearance of barlines, and when they are displayed in the score. Determine when Finale draws the left barline for staff systems, and whether it draws a closing (right) barline at the end of each staff system in Page View, or only at the end of the last staff system in the piece. Or, choose whether you want to display or hide all barlines in the piece.

For detailed information, see the Barlines dialog box.

See also: Options Menu


Document Settings/Clef Designer

Finale supplies you with eight standard clefs for use in your pieces. Finale treats each clef intelligently, correctly renotating the music that follows it. Choose this command to display the Clef Designer dialog box, where you can replace or edit any of the clefs - including their appearance, placement, and effect on the music.

For detailed information, see the Clef Designer dialog box.

See also: Options Menu


Document Settings/Curves

This item displays the Curves dialog box, in which you can specify how thick you want your ties to be.

For detailed information, see the Curves dialog box.

See also: Options Menu


Document Settings/Document Options

Choose this command to display the Document Options dialog box, which contains checkboxes governing stemming, time signature, and key signature options.

For detailed information, see the Document Options dialog box.

See also: Options Menu


Document Settings/Layer Options

Using Finale's four transparent layers per staff, you can notate complex inner voices on a single staff. The Layer Options dialog box that appears when you choose this item contains automatic stem direction, tie direction, and rest placement settings for each layer.

For detailed information, see the Layer Options dialog box.

See also: Options Menu


Document Settings/Lines

Lines means staff lines, ledger lines, barlines, and so on. This command displays the Lines dialog box, where you can change their thickness.

For detailed information, see the Lines dialog box.

See also: Options Menu


Document Settings/Multimeasure Rest

Choose this command to set up the global appearance of multiple measures of rests, including the placement of the shape and when Finale should display a number over the rest. You can choose between using the standard multimeasure rest shape or an alternate style of notation for multimeasure rests. The symbolic style combines whole and double-whole rests to represent block rests of different lengths, commonly those of eight or less measures.

For detailed information, see the Multimeasure Rest dialog box.

See also: Options Menu


Document Settings/Music Characters

Finale assumes that you'll generally want to use the # symbol to represent a sharp, a b to stand for a flat, and so on. You can, however, specify any musical symbol from the currently selected music font to appear as any musical element. In the dialog box that appears when you choose this command, you can specify the character you want Finale to use in your file for each of nearly three dozen musical elements.

For detailed information, see the Music Characters dialog box.

See also: Options Menu


Document Settings/Music Options

The Music Options dialog box lets you set a number of distances: between clef and key signature, between a note and a tie, between dots on a dotted note, and so on.

For detailed information, see the Music Options dialog box.

See also: Options Menu


Document Settings/Notation Options

Choose this command to display the Notation Options dialog box, which contains a variety of Finale settings. Most of them have to do with establishing default values for Finale variables: the size of grace notes and "clef-change" clefs, the key and time signature of a new Untitled file, and so on.

For detailed information, see the Notation Options dialog box.

See also: Options Menu


Document Settings/Note Shapes

Choose this command if you need every note on a certain pitch to have a certain shape. "Shape-note" gospel music uses such a system, for example, as do many drum parts (X's on the upper spaces of the staff to indicate cymbals, for example).

For detailed information, see the Note Shapes dialog box.

See also: Options Menu


Document Settings/Page Format for Parts

Choose this command to set up the page size, margins, and other page format setting for parts created parts from the score. Finale uses these settings when you choose Extract Parts or Print Parts from the File menu.

For detailed information, see the Page Format for Parts dialog box.

See also:

Options Menu

File Menu


Document Settings/Page Format for Score

Choose this command to set up the page size, margins, and other page format setting to use when new pages are created in the score. Finale will also use these settings when you use the Redefine Pages submenu in the Page Layout menu.

For detailed information, see the Page Format for Score dialog box.

See also:

Options Menu

Page Layout Menu


Document Settings/Piano Braces

This command displays a dialog box in which you can change the thickness, shape and curvature of the curly brace that brackets piano staves together.

For detailed information, see the Piano Braces dialog box.

See also: Options Menu


Document Settings/PostScript Options

Choose this command to fine-tune a number of thickness and shape parameters in PostScript printouts.

For detailed information, see the PostScript Options dialog box.

See also: Options Menu


Document Settings/Piano Braces
Document Settings/Repeat Endings

Choose this command to set up the appearance and placement of endings for first and second repeats. Determine the initial placement of the bracket used for ending repeats, as well as the placement of the text. You can also change the thickness of all ending repeat brackets in the score.

For detailed information, see the Repeat Endings dialog box.

See also: Options Menu


Document Settings/Repeat Bars

Choose this command to set up the global appearance of repeat bars. Determine the thickness and distance between the lines, and the spacing of the dot used on repeat bars. Select how you want back-to back repeats to appear, and choose whether you want a repeat wing extension to appear on all repeat bars in the score.

For detailed information, see the Repeat Bars dialog box.

See also: Options Menu


Document Settings/Stem Connections

If you're using different notehead shapes in your music (X noteheads, diamond noteheads, and so on), you can control whether special stem connections - the way a note's stem attaches to the special notehead - are used in your score. Create new stem connections and edit or remove stem connections for the custom noteheads in your score.

For detailed information, see the Stem Connections and the Stem Connection Editor dialog boxes.

See also: Options Menu


Document Settings/Text Inserts

Choose this command to display the Text Inserts dialog box where you can change the definition of the sharp, flat, natural, double sharp, and double flat signs used as text inserts. Any changes you make are reflected in each alteration insert in the document.

For detailed information, see the Text Inserts dialog box.

See also: Options Menu


Document Settings/Time Signature Options

Choose this command to set up the global appearance of time signatures. You can use a numeric or symbolic display for cut and common time signatures, and adjust the placement of the top and bottom symbols for enlarged time signatures.

For detailed information, see the Time Signature Options dialog box.

See also: Options Menu


Options/Select Default Fonts

This command displays the Select Default Fonts dialog box, which allows you to change the global or initial font used for many elements of your score.

For detailed information, see the Select Default Fonts dialog box.

See also: Options Menu


Options/Data Check

The Data Check command performs a variety of "housekeeping" tasks, mostly having to do with fonts and Finale's retention of deleted musical material.

For detailed information, see the Data Check dialog box.

See also: Options Menu


Options/Click and Countoff

Choose this command to display the Click and Countoff dialog box, where you can specify a countoff click for recording with HyperScribe or playing back using the Playback Controls. You can also determine how many measures to count off, and define two separate metronome click sounds for the down beat and other beats in your music.

If you prefer, you can click the Click and Countoff button in the expanded Playback Controls.

For detailed information, see the Click and Countoff dialog box.

See also: Options Menu


Options/Playback Options

Choose this command to display the Playback Options dialog box where you define a number of variables that affect how Finale plays back the music.

If you prefer, you can click the Playback Options button in the expanded Playback Controls.

For detailed information, see the Playback Options dialog box.

See also: Options Menu


Options/MIDI Setup

Choose this command to display the MIDI Setup dialog box, where you can affect a number of settings concerning your MIDI interface setup.

For detailed information, see the MIDI Setup dialog box.

See also: Options Menu


Options/MIDI Thru

This command determines whether MIDI Thru is used and how it works. Choose this command to specify your MIDI Thru preferences. When a check appears next to the command, MIDI Thru is in use. Use MIDI Thru if you prefer to use one keyboard as a controller and another device as the sound source.

For detailed information, see the MIDI Thru dialog box.

See also: Options Menu


Options/Send MIDI Sync

This command determines whether Finale sends MIDI Sync signals when it plays back your score. When the command is checked, Finale sends MIDI Sync signals. If you have connected your computer to an external sequencer, drum machine, or another computer that has been configured to interpret this type of MIDI message, it will wait in "pause" mode until Finale begins play back, at which time the two will play in perfect synchronization.

See also: Options Menu


Options/All Notes Off

From time to time, you may encounter MIDI lock, a rare situation in which a synthesizer sounds as if its keys are "stuck," and it plays continuously as though someone's still pressing them. To send the MIDI signal that tells it to "release the keys," choose this command; after a moment, the synthesizer will be silent.

See also: Options Menu


Window Menu

The Window menu indicates which windows are open, and which are in front (active). It also has Tile and Cascade commands, which automatically and neatly arrange multiple open windows into a more convenient arrangement.

Main Tool Palette

Simple Entry Palette

Smart Shape Palette

Special Tools Palette

===================

Instrument List

Playback Controls

Message Bar

===================

Cascade

Tile Vertically

Tile Horizontally

Arrange Icons

New Window

Close Window

[File windows]

The names of all file windows are listed in the order they were opened at the bottom of the Window menu. A check mark appears by the active window. Choose a window's name to make it active.

See also: Menus


Window/Main Tool Palette

When this item is checked, Finale's Main Tool Palette is open on the screen. The Main Tool Palette always floats in front of all other windows; you can close it by choosing this item so that the check mark disappears.

For detailed information, see the Main Tool Palette

See also: Window Menu


Window/Simple Entry Palette

When this item is checked, the Simple Entry Palette appears on the screen. You can close the palette by choosing the item from the Window menu so that the check mark disappears. Depending on the settings in the Program Options dialog box, you may have to click the Simple Entry Tool to display this palette.

For detailed information, see the Simple Entry Palette and Program Options dialog box.

See also: Window Menu


Window/Smart Shape Palette

When this item is checked, the Smart Shape Palette appears on the screen. You can close the palette by choosing the item from the Window menu so that the check mark disappears. Depending on the settings in the Program Options dialog box, you may have to click the Smart Shape Tool to display this palette. See Program Options dialog box.

For detailed information, see the Smart Shape Palette and Program Options dialog box.

See also: Window Menu


Window/Special Tools
Window/Special Tools Palette

When this item is checked, the Special Tools Palette appears on the screen. You can close the palette by choosing the item from the Window menu so that the check mark disappears. Depending on the settings in the Program Options dialog box, you may have to click the Special Tools Tool to display this palette. See Program Options dialog box.

For detailed information, see the Special Tools Palette and Program Options dialog box.

See also: Window Menu


Window/Instrument List

Choose this item to display the Instrument List, Finale's floating window that controls the playback, MIDI channels, and bank and program assignments of the staves in your file. Choose this item a second time - so that the check mark disappears - to hide the Instrument List.

For detailed information, see the Instrument List dialog box.

See also: Window Menu


Window/Playback Controls

Choose this item to display the Playback Controls, the floating window that controls playback in your file. Choose this item a second time - so that the check mark disappears - to hide the Playback Controls.

For detailed information, see the Playback Controls dialog box.

See also: Window Menu


Window/Message Bar

The message bar is the thin strip at the bottom of Finale's application window, where Finale shows help messages and identifies each tool as you click it. Choose this item to make the message bar disappear, so that you have more space for the display of your music. Note that the check mark disappears from the window menu. Select this item again to make the message bar reappear. The item should now be checked.

See also: Window Menu


Window/Cascade

If more than one file window is open on the screen, this command neatly stacks them so that they overlap by a half-inch or so, as though they're a deck of cards being fanned from upper-left to lower-right. Because this arrangement leaves each window's name bar visible, it's easy to jump from one window to another (by clicking any visible part of it). The active window is the one in the lower-right.

See also: Window Menu


Window/Tile Vertically

If more than one file window is open on the screen, this command neatly places them side-by-side, subdividing your screen area so that all windows are the same size. The active window is the one whose title bar is highlighted.

See also: Window Menu


Window/Tile Horizontally

If more than one file window is open on the screen, this command neatly places them one atop the other, subdividing your screen area so that all windows are the same size. The active window is the one whose title bar is highlighted.

See also: Windows Menu


Window/Arrange Icons

If you've minimized any windows on a document (by clicking the Minimize button in the upper-right corner), icons for the windows appear within Finale's application window. Choose this command to align the document icons neatly at the bottom of the application window.

See also: Windows Menu


Window/New Window

Choose New Window to create a duplicate of the active window (and of the same file), in which you can scroll, enlarge, reduce, or change views independently of the original window. The various windows of a single file are identified in the bottom portion of the Window menu, such as Overture:1, Overture:2, and so on.

See also: Window Menu


Window/Close Window

Choose Close Window to close the current active window. If you close the last active window on a document, Finale will close the file, asking if you want to save changes (if any changes were made since you last saved the file).

See also: Window Menu


Main Tool Pallette
Main Tool Palette

The Main Tool Palette contains all of Finale's 32 primary tools. Choose "Main Tool Palette" from the Window menu to display or hide the palette. Note that you can rearrange the tools by Shift-dragging one tool icon onto another. You can also move, resize or reshape the palette.

The tools on the Main Tool Palette can appear in color. Color will be used only when Use Colors is selected in the Select Display Colors dialog box (in the View menu). The color of the tools will match the colors set for the corresponding items in the Select Display Colors dialog box, making it easier to identify what element was created with what tool.

 Articulation Tool

Click a note to attach a marking; click a handle to move or delete one.

 Chord Tool

Choose an input method from the menu; click a note to add or edit chord symbols.

 Clef Tool

Click a measure to insert a clef change.

 Graphics Tool

Use the menu to place graphics or export part of the score as a graphics file.

 Hand Grabber Tool

Drag the music to adjust your view. Use left or right mouse button.

 HyperScribe Tool

Set up menu, then click a measure and play, for an instant transcription.

 Key Signature Tool

Click a measure to insert a key change.

 Lyrics Tool

Use the menu to create or edit lyrics and position them in the score.

 Mass Mover Tool

Drag to select music (to transpose or edit). Drag a selection to copy it.

 Measure Attributes Tool

Double-click a measure to set characteristics; drag to move a barline.

 Measure Number Tool

Ctrl-click on tool to set up measure number for a region.

 Measure Tool

Click or Ctrl-click the tool icon to add blank measures to the end of the score.

 MIDI Tool

Drag to select music, then double-click to edit velocity, timing or other MIDI data.

 Mirror Tool

Use to edit and identify measures that are live copies of other measures.

 Note Mover Tool

Click a measure, select notes (to cross-staff beam or search and replace.)

 Ossia Tool

Double-click the score to add a floating alternate ('ossia') measure.

 Page Layout Tool

Click the page to adjust margins or systems.

 Repeat Tool

Click a measure to create repeats, ending brackets or text such as 'To Coda'.

 Resize Tool

Click a note, to the left of a system or top left page corner to change its size.

 Score Expression Tool

Click a measure to attach text or a shape to some or all staves.

 Simple Entry Tool

Select values from the palette; click the staff to insert notes one by one.

 Smart Shape Tool

Click a shape on the palette; double-click and drag to draw it in the score.

 Special Tools Tool

Click a measure to fine-tune beams, note shapes, accidentals, ties and dots.

 Speedy Entry Tool

Click a measure to edit or insert music, with or without a MIDI keyboard.

 Staff Expression Tool

Click a note to attach a text phrase, or a custom shape, to a staff.

 Staff Tool

Use the menu to add or edit staves -- names, transpositions, groups, brackets, etc.

 Tempo Tool

Click a measure to create, or edit, beat by beat tempo changes.

 Text Tool

Double-click to add text blocks. Use menus to change fonts, borders and so on.

 Time Signature Tool

Click a measure to insert a meter change.

 Transcription Tool

Click a measure to enter Finale's mini-sequencer/transcriber.

 Tuplet Tool

Click the first note of a group to create or edit a triplet.

 Zoom Tool

Click the score (or drag across a region) to zoom in; ctrl-click to zoom out.


 Zoom Tool

Use this tool to magnify or reduce the music as it's displayed on the screen. You're not actually enlarging or reducing the printed size of the music - only "zooming in" or "zooming out" while you're working on it.

If the Zoom Tool is selected, and you click (in Scroll View) or drag across the music (in Page View), Finale enlarges the display, making it easier for you to do detail work. If you press ctrl while clicking or dragging, however, Finale makes the music smaller, letting you see more of the score on the screen.

Special mouse clicks

Click the music to display it at twice its previous size.

Ctrl-click the music to display it at half its previous size.

In Page View, drag diagonally across a region of music to enlarge it just enough to fill your screen.

While using any other tool, shift-click the right mouse button to zoom in, even though the Zoom Tool isn't selected. Ctrl-shift-click the right mouse button to zoom out.

See also: Main Tool Palette.


 Hand Grabber Tool

When the Hand Grabber Tool is selected, you can drag the mouse across the music in any direction to shift its position on your screen, as though you're sliding the score paper across your desk. In most cases, it's a faster, more efficient way of moving around the score than using the scroll bars.

Special mouse clicks

While using any other tool, press the right mouse button to switch temporarily to the Hand Grabber. Drag in the score to make a display adjustment without having to move the mouse to the tool palette.

See also: Main Tool Palette.


 Staff Tool

In addition to adding and deleting staves, use the Staff Tool to edit staff-specific characteristics using the Staff Attributes dialog box. Define attributes such as the staff's name, clef, transposition (if you're notating a transposing instrument's part) and so on. Or, specify the number of lines in the staff, and show or hide certain musical elements in the staff such as measure numbers, expression markings, time signatures and so on.

You can also create groups of staves; use the Group Attributes dialog box to define groups of instruments in the score and for part extraction, add a bracket to a group and specify how the barline appears on the grouped staves. An individual staff can belong to any number of groups.

When you click the Staff Tool, a Staff menu appears that contains all the commands for working with staves and groups of staves: adding, deleting, positioning and spacing staves, creating customized staff attributes, defining groups of staves, adding brackets and piano braces, and so on.

Special mouse clicks

When you click the Staff Tool, the Staff menu appears, and handles appear on each staff and on staff-related items in the score. Select a handle then choose a menu command, or use the shortcuts listed below. The shortcuts are arranged by what the handle controls: staff handles and staves, group handles (includes the group name), staff name handles, brackets handles.

Staff handles and staves:

Staff handles always appear on staves in the score, even on staves that are hidden.

Click the Staff Tool to display the Staff menu. Handles appear on each staff and staff-related item in the score.

Click a staff or a staff handle, or drag-enclose staff handles to select a staff (or staves).

Shift-click a staff or a staff handle to add the staff to the selection. If a staff is already selected, Shift-click to remove the staff from the selection.

Double-click a staff or a staff handle to edit the staff's attributes.

Double-click in the score (in Scroll View) to add a staff without repositioning the lower staves to make room for the new staff.

Shift-double-click below a staff in the score (in Scroll View) to insert a staff between staves, repositioning the lower staves to make room for the new staff.

Ctrl-click a staff or staff handle in one or more selected staves to create a new group for the selected staves.

Press Delete to remove the selected staves from the score without repositioning the remaining staves.

Press Shift-Delete to remove the selected staves from the score and reposition the remaining staves.

Drag a staff or a staff handle in Scroll View (when Special Part Extraction is not selected in the Edit menu) to adjust the staff's position in Scroll View and every staff system in Page View.

Note: The horizontal adjustment affects the placement of the staves in Scroll View only; it does not affect printout or the display in Page View.

Drag a staff or a staff handle in Scroll View (when Special Part Extraction is selected in the Edit menu) to adjust the staff's position in Scroll View only. The placement of staves remains unchanged in Page View. (When you choose Special Part Extraction from the Edit menu, Finale removes the checkmark by the command, and displays the full score using the new positioning in Scroll View.)

Drag a staff or a staff handle in Page View (when Special Part Extraction is not selected in the Edit menu) to adjust the staff's position in every staff system in Page View, and the position of the staff in Scroll View. When the top staff is adjusted, Finale adjusts the distance between staves, as well as staff systems.

Note: If two handles appear on a staff, drag the top handle. Drag a staff or a staff handle in Page View (when Special Part Extraction is selected in the Edit menu) to adjust the staff's position in every staff system in Page View; leave the position of the staff unchanged in Scroll View.

Drag the bottom staff handle in Page View to adjust the staff's position only in the current staff system (drag the top handle to adjust the position of the staff in all staff systems in Page View).

Note: If a staff system has been optimized using the Page Layout Tool, two handles will appear on each staff in the optimized staff system.

Group handles:

Group handles always appear on existing groups of staves in the score, even if you did not enter a group name.

Click a group handle, or drag-enclose group handles to select a group (or groups of staves).

Shift-click a group handle to add the group to the selection. If a group is already selected, Shift-click to remove the group from the selection.

Double-click a group handle to edit the group's attributes.

Ctrl-click a group handle to edit a group name.

Ctrl-Shift-click a group handle to position a group name.

Press Backspace to revert the position of the selected group names to their default position.

Press Delete to remove the selected group definitions.

Drag a group handle to adjust the position of a group name.

Staff name handles:

Staff name handles appear on existing staves in the score only if you have entered a staff name, or if Finale's default staff name appears for an unnamed staff.

Click a staff name handle, or drag-enclose staff name handles to select a staff name (or names).

Shift-click a full or abbreviated staff name handle to add the staff name to the selection. If a staff name is already selected,

Shift-click to remove the staff name from the selection.

Double-click a full or abbreviated staff name handle to edit the staff's attributes.

Ctrl-click a full or abbreviated staff name handle to edit a full or abbreviated staff name.

Ctrl-Shift-click a full or abbreviated staff name handle to position the selected staff name.

Press Backspace to revert the position of the selected full or abbreviated staff name to its default position.

Drag a full or abbreviated staff name handle to adjust the position of the selected staff name.

Bracket handles:

Two bracket handles appear on each bracket on a group, even if you did not enter a group name.

Click a bracket handle, or drag-enclose several bracket handles to select a bracket (or brackets).

Shift-click a bracket handle to add the bracket to the selection. If a bracket is already selected,

Shift-click to remove the bracket from the selection.

Double-click a bracket handle to edit a group.

Press Delete to remove the selected brackets.

Press Backspace to revert the selected brackets to their default length.

Drag a bracket handle vertically to make a bracket taller or shorter.

Drag a bracket handle horizontally to move a bracket closer to or away from bracketed staves.

See also: Main Tool Palette.


 Measure Tool

This tool adds new blank measures at the end of the score (in all staves at once).

Special mouse clicks

Click the Measure Tool to add a single new blank measure at the end of the score.

Ctrl-click the Measure Tool to display the Add Measures dialog box, in which you can tell Finale how many new blank measures you want to appear at the end of the score.

See also: Main Tool Palette.


 Measure Attributes Tool

When you click this tool, a handle appears on every barline; drag a barline's handle (or drag within the measure) to make the measure wider or narrower. You can also double-click a measure (or its handle) to display the Measure Attributes dialog box, where you can specify a number of measure-specific parameters: the barline type, whether or not you want the key or time signature to appear, and so on.

If you've used the Music Spacing command on a measure, it displays two handles on the barline. If you click the second one, Finale displays a beat chart above the measure - a set of handles you can drag to change the horizontal positions of the beats in all staves at once.

Finally, if you've selected "Allow Horizontal Split Points" in the Measure Attributes dialog box for a measure, it displays three handles on the right barline. If you click the bottom handle, a special rectangle appears, in which you can designate permissible split points for the measure - places where Finale may break the measure over a system break if it's too long to fit on the line.

Special mouse clicks

Double-click a measure to display the Measure Attributes dialog box. (You can also double-click a measure's handle.)

Drag the top barline handle right or left to make the measure wider or narrower. If you're in Page View, the measure to the right of the barline gets narrower or wider to compensate.

Click the second barline handle of a measure to display a beat chart, which you can use to change the horizontal positions of the beats in the measure (in all staves).

Click the third (bottom) barline handle of a measure to display a split point bar, where you can double-click to indicate a permissible place for Finale to break the measure, if necessary, at a system break.

Drag one of the lower handles in a beat chart to move that beat horizontally in all staves.

Shift-drag the lower handle of a beat chart to move that beat and all subsequent beats in the measure horizontally in all staves.

Double-click between two upper handles of a beat chart to add another upper/lower pair of beat positioning handles for the beat between the two original handles. Click any upper handle and press delete to remove it. (You can't remove the first handle in the measure, however.)

Double-click an upper handle of a beat chart (except the first one) to display the Beat Chart Element dialog box, where you can tell Finale precisely which beat's position you want the handle you double-clicked to control.

Click an upper handle (except the first one) to select it, whereupon you can press delete to remove it from the beat chart.

For further information, see the Measure Attributes dialog box.

See also: Main Tool Palette.


 Key Signature Tool

When you click this tool, a handle appears on every barline of the piece. Click the measure (or its handle) at which you want to change the key signature; the Key Signature dialog box appears, from which you can select the new key. (You can also access the Nonstandard Key Signature dialog box if you want to create nonstandard or nonlinear key signatures.) You can also specify whether or not you want any music that's already in the affected measures to be transposed into the new key.

For further information, see the Key Signature dialog box.

See also: Main Tool Palette.


 Time Signature Tool

When you click this tool, a handle appears on every barline of the piece. Click a measure (or its handle) where you want to insert a meter change; the Time Signature dialog box appears, from which you can create the new meter.

For further information, see the Time Signature dialog box.

See also: Main Tool Palette.


 Simple Entry Tool

When you click this tool, Finale displays the Simple Entry Palette, containing an individual icon for each rhythmic value (quarter note, eighth note, and so on). (If the Simple Entry Palette doesn't appear, choose its name from the Window menu.) Using the tools on this floating palette, you can enter music into your score by clicking one note at a time. The Simple Entry keyboard commands are summarized in the diagram that appears on your Quick Reference Card.

Special mouse clicks

Shift-click any measure when a duration icon is selected to enter a rest instead of a note.

Ctrl-click any measure to display the Frame dialog box, which contains dozens of very technical parameters for each note in the measure.

See also:

Main Tool Palette

Simple Entry Palette


 Speedy Entry Tool

This tool allows you to rapidly enter one note, chord, or rest at a time. You specify the rhythmic value of each entry by pressing a number key on your computer keyboard; you can specify the pitches either by pressing the desired keys on your MIDI keyboard or by pressing the appropriate letter keys on your computer keyboard. The Speedy Entry keyboard commands are summarized in the diagram that appears on your Quick Reference Card.

Special mouse clicks

Ctrl-click any measure to display the Frame dialog box, which contains dozens of very technical parameters for each note in the measure.

Press Ctrl-number when you're editing a measure to tell Finale that the next notes you enter are part of a tuplet (triplet, quintuplet, and so on). Press Ctrl-2 through Ctrl-8. signify tuplets from duplets to octuplets, respectively. If you press Ctrl-1, Finale assumes you want to enter a tuplet that's more complex than one of the 2-through-8 tuplets. The Tuplet Temporal Definition dialog box appears, in which you can specify the temporal and visual aspects of more complex tuplet groupings.

Press Caps Lock before pressing a rhythmic-value key to tell Finale that you're about to enter a whole series of notes that all have that same rhythmic value. Now you can play notes on your MIDI instrument, rapidly, and Finale will automatically enter them into the score, without your having to press a rhythmic-value key each time.

Metatools

While the Speedy Entry Tool's preprogrammed keyboard equivalents aren't technically Metatools, they're similar in that they're one-keystroke commands. They let you edit the notes in one measure at a time very rapidly.

See also: Main Tool Palette.


 HyperScribe Tool

The HyperScribe Tool is one of Finale's real-time transcription tools; you use it to transcribe a live keyboard performance into notation as you play, even onto two staves. When you click this tool, the HyperScribe menu appears; it contains all the commands you need to describe to Finale the music you're about to play.

Special mouse clicks

Click a measure to indicate where you want the transcription to begin.

After playing only partway into a measure, Ctrl-click the screen to end the HyperScribe session without affecting the remaining portion of the measure. (You'd do this if there was some music already in that measure that you wanted to preserve.)

See also: Main Tool Palette.


 Transcription Tool

The Transcription Tool is another of Finale's real-time transcription tools; you use it to record a live keyboard performance, which you can then turn into notation.

The Transcription Tool differs from HyperScribe, however, in that after you've played your piece, it retains your performance in a graphic sequencer-like window. (You can even save these performances as separate files on your hard disk and open them later.)

Special mouse clicks

Click any measure in the score to enter the Transcription window, where you can record a performance. When you turn your performance into notation, the transcription will begin in the measure you clicked.

Click a measure after recording a performance to transcribe a single measure if you've selected "Transcribe in Measures" in the Transcription window. This feature allows you to transcribe a measure at a time from your performance, so that the transcription can appear in non-consecutive measures.

Ctrl-click a measure in the score to re-enter the Transcription window if you've been transcribing a performance one measure at a time, using the Transcription Tool's "Transcribe in Measures" option.

For further information, see the Transcription window.

See also: Main Tool Palette.


 Tuplet Tool

This tool lets you create, edit, and adjust the positions of tuplets. (The word tuplet describes a class of irregular note divisions such as triplets, quintuplets, or septuplets.) You can use it to describe the visual appearance of the tuplet (whether or not it has a bracket, for example) as well as its rhythmic definition (how many quarter notes in the space of a half note, for example).

Note, incidentally, that you can predefine the default appearance of tuplets when you first create them (with the Speedy Entry, HyperScribe, or Transcription tools) including whether or not a slur or bracket appears, at what height it appears, and so on. To do so, Ctrl-click the Tuplet Tool; Finale displays the Default Tuplet Visual Definition dialog box, where you can specify how you want new tuplets to look.

Special mouse clicks

Click the first note of a tuplet to display its set of four positioning handles.

Drag a positioning handle to adjust the height and position of the tuplet's visual elements (bracket, slur, number, and so on).

Ctrl-drag a positioning handle to adjust the position of a tuplet's visual element without using dynamic drawing (where the element is visible at all times while you're dragging it). The object will disappear until you release the mouse button.

Double-click a positioning handle to display the Tuplet Temporal Definition dialog box, where you can change the temporal or visual definition of the tuplet.

Click the first of a series of notes you want to turn into a tuplet grouping to display the Tuplet Temporal Definition dialog box, where you can specify a temporal and visual definition to create a tuplet. (If this first note is in Voice 2, shift-click.) You can even click a note that's part of an existing tuplet grouping if you want to create an inner (nested) tuplet.

Ctrl-click the Tuplet Tool icon to display the Default Tuplet Visual Definition dialog box, in which you can specify the default appearance of new tuplets you create with the HyperScribe, Speedy Entry, or Transcription tools.

For further information, see the Tuplet Definition dialog box.

See also: Main Tool Palette.


 MIDI Tool

This tool lets you edit the actual MIDI data that Finale stores with your music - key velocities (how hard each note was struck), Start and Stop Times (rhythmic information), channel pressure (pressure applied to a key after it's been struck), controller data (pedaling, modulation wheel usage, and so on), pitch bend information, and patch change events. When you click the tool, the MIDI menu appears, containing all the commands you need to increase, decrease, or gradually change any of these data types.

To use the MIDI Tool, you begin by selecting a region of music whose MIDI information you want to edit; you then choose commands from the MIDI menu. If you only want to affect a one-staff region that fits on the screen, you can double-click the selected region to enter the MIDI Tool split-window, where you can view a graphic representation of the MIDI values you're editing. Using this technique, you can edit MIDI data on a note-by-note basis - for example, you can increase the key velocity of only certain notes in a chordal passage.

Other effects you can create with the MIDI Tool include inserting and editing pitch bends, creating smooth crescendos and decrescendos, creating true swing-feel playback, randomizing certain playback variables to create a more human feel, and so on.

Special mouse clicks

Click a measure to select it.

Drag-enclose several measures to select more than one.

Shift-click (or shift-drag-enclose) a measure (or measures) to extend the selected region from the first measure(s) you selected.

Click to the left of a staff to select an entire staff.

Shift-click to the left of a staff to extend the selection from any other staves you've selected.

Double-click the highlighted area to display the MIDI Tool split-window for the top selected staff.

See also: Main Tool Palette


 Smart Shape Tool

When you click this tool, Finale displays the floating Smart Shape Palette, containing an individual icon for each of several Smart Shapes - stretchable markings such as slurs, crescendo hairpins, 8va and 15ma markings, solid and dashed brackets and lines, and so on. (If the Smart Shape Palette doesn't appear, choose its name from the Window menu.) In addition, handles appear on every smart shape marking in the score.

There are two kinds of smart shapes: measure-assigned and note-assigned. A measure-assigned smart shape, which you create when "Attach to Note" is not selected in the Smart Shape menu, is positioned horizontally and vertically from measures. All smart shapes are measure-assigned except slurs and dashed curves, which can be either measure-assigned or note-assigned. A note-assigned smart shape, which you create when "Attach to Note" is selected in the Smart Shape menu, is either a slur or a dashed curve. A note-assigned smart shape is positioned according to the first and last notes of the slurred passage or phrase. Slurs and curves move when the notes change or are transposed.

Special mouse clicks

To place a measure-assigned marking into the score: Position the cursor so that the tiny arrow points to the appropriate staff. Then double-click - but on the second click, keep the mouse button pressed and drag to the right. As you drag, the shape appears and grows to the right. Release the mouse when the shape is as long as you want it.

To place a note-assigned marking into the score: Click the Slur or Dashed Curve Tool on the Smart Shape Palette. Make sure that Attach to Notes is selected in the Smart Shape menu. Position the cursor on the first note of the passage. Then double-click -- but on the second click, keep the mouse button pressed and drag to the right. As you drag, the shape appears and grows to the right and the ending note of the slur is highlighted as you drag to the right. Release the mouse when the last note that you want included in the slur or phrase marking is highlighted; the slur snaps to position.

Tip: To place a note-assigned slur or curve between two consecutive notes in the score, double-click the first note; Finale draws the slur between the notes.

Click the handle of a Smart Shape in the score to select it, as indicated by the dotted-line bounding box that appears around it. When this bounding box is visible, you can delete, move, stretch, or reshape the selected Smart Shape.

See also:

Main Tool Palette

Smart Shape Palette


 Score Expression Tool

With this tool, you can create expression markings - either textual or graphic - that appear in more than one staff at the same place in the score. For example, you might want a rehearsal letter or a tempo indication to appear in every staff in the score.

Using the Staff List feature, you can specify which staves you want a given Score Expression to appear in. Furthermore, you can specify, for each marking you place in the score, whether you want it to appear in the full score in a particular staff as well as in the extracted part - a marking can appear in one place without appearing in the other.

Score Expressions can actually affect the playback of the music in the way you'd expect. You can, for example, program a "Vivace" marking to affect the score's playback tempo wherever it occurs.

Special mouse clicks

Click above, below, or on any measure that doesn't contain a Score Expression to display the Score Expression Selection dialog box, from which you can select an expression to place in the score at the position you clicked.

Click a measure in which a Score Expression appears to display a handle on each Score Expression in the measure.

Click a measure in which Score Expression handles are visible to display the Score Expression Selection dialog box, from which you can select an additional expression to place in the score at the position you clicked.

Click or shift-click Score Expression handles to select one, additional, or several Score Expressions, respectively.

Drag a selected handle to move all selected Score Expressions; press delete to remove the selected marking. If you double-click the handle of a Shape Expression, eight bounding handles, or reshaping handles (for curves and single lines) appear, which you can drag to stretch the shape. If you double-click one of these handles (for single, ungrouped shapes), the shape's control handles appear, which you can drag to reshape the marking itself.

Double-click or Ctrl-double-click a handle to display the Text Expression Designer dialog box (where you can edit the spelling, playback definition, and font of a Text Expression) or the Shape Expression Designer dialog box (where you can adjust the shape or playback definition of a Shape Expression).

Ctrl-drag a handle if you want to adjust its position without using dynamic drawing (where the element is visible at all times while you're dragging it). The expression will disappear until you release the mouse button.

Shift-double-click a Score Expression handle to display the Score Expression Assignment dialog box, where you can specify positioning parameters for the expression whose handle you clicked.

See also: Main Tool Palette.


 Staff Expression Tool

With this tool, you can create expression markings - either textual or graphic - that appear in only one staff. For example, you might want markings such as "arco" or "Switch to Harmon mute" to appear in only one staff. A Staff Expression is attached to a particular note or rest; if the note (or rest) moves, the marking moves with it, although you can drag the marking as far from the note (or rest) as you want.

Furthermore, Staff Expressions can actually affect the playback of the music in the way you'd expect. For example, you can program a "Forcefully" marking to affect the volume level of the music in a staff wherever it occurs.

Special mouse clicks

Click on, above, or below or a note or rest that doesn't have a Staff Expression attached to display the Staff Expression Selection dialog box, from which you can select an expression to attach to the note or rest you clicked. (If the note or rest is in Voice 2, shift-click.)

Click a note to which a Staff Expression has been assigned to display a handle on the Staff Expression.

Click a note whose Staff Expressions' handles are visible to display the Staff Expression Selection dialog box, from which you can select an additional expression to place in the score, attached to the note you clicked.

Click or shift-click Staff Expression handles to select one (or additional) Staff Expressions, respectively.

Drag a selected handle to move all selected Staff Expressions; press delete to remove them. If you double-click the handle of a Shape Expression, eight bounding handles, or its reshaping handles (for curves and single lines) appear, which you can drag to stretch the shape. If you double-click one of these handles, the shape's control handles appear (for single, ungrouped shapes), which you can drag to reshape the marking itself.

Ctrl-drag a handle if you want to adjust its position without using dynamic drawing (where the element is visible at all times while you're dragging it). The expression will disappear until you release the mouse button.

Double-click or Ctrl-double-click a Staff Expression handle to display the Text Expression Designer dialog box (where you can edit the spelling, playback definition, and font of a Text Expression) or the Shape Expression Designer dialog box (where you can adjust the shape or playback definition of a Shape Expression).

Shift-double-click a Staff Expression handle to display the Staff Expression Assignment dialog box, where you can specify several positioning parameters for the expression whose handle you clicked.

See also: Main Tool Palette.


 Articulation Tool

Use this tool to enter one-character articulation markings (such as accents, staccato marks, fermatas, and so on) into your score. You attach an articulation to a single note in a single staff (by clicking on, above, or below it); if the note moves, the articulation moves with it.

You can also define an articulation for playback; it can affect either the timing or the volume (key velocity) of the note on which it appears.

Special mouse clicks

Click on, above, or below a note or rest that doesn't have an articulation attached to display the Articulation Selection box, from which you can select an articulation marking you want to insert. (If the note or rest is in Voice 2, shift-click instead.)

Click a note to which an articulation has been assigned to display a handle on the articulation.

Click or shift-click articulation handles to select one (or additional) articulations, respectively.

Drag a selected handle to move all selected articulations; press delete to remove them.

Ctrl-drag a handle to adjust a articulation's position without using dynamic drawing (where the element is visible at all times while you're dragging it). The marking will disappear until you release the mouse button.

Click a note whose articulations' handles are visible to display the Articulation  Selection dialog box, from which you can select an additional articulation to attach to the same note.

Double-click an articulation handle to display the Articulation Designer dialog box, where you can edit the character used for an articulation marking, including its playback definition, font, and automatic-placement options.

For further information, see the Articulation Designer dialog box.

See also: Main Tool Palette.


 Lyrics Tool

This tool lets you create, edit, and move lyrics in your score. You can create many different sets of lyrics (which you might use, for example, in a hymn with several verses); you can move the baseline (the imaginary line upon which the bottoms of the words align) up or down independently for each set of lyrics. When you click this tool, the Lyrics menu appears; it contains all the commands you need to create lyrics in your score.

Special mouse clicks

Choose Type Into Score or Click Assignment from the Lyrics menu, and then click a staff to tell Finale the staff to which you want lyrics attached.

In Type Into Score mode or Click Assignment mode, drag the positioning triangles at the left edge of the screen to specify the vertical position of the baseline for the lyric set you're inserting.

In Type Into Score mode, click within the staff lines at the position of the first note to indicate which note you want to attach a syllable to. Then type the lyrics normally.

In Type Into Score mode, click within the staff lines at the position of a note to select (highlight) the syllable attached to it. Anything you now type replaces the highlighted syllable.

In Click Assignment mode, click within the staff lines at the position of the first note to attach the first syllable in the scrolling window. (If the note is in Voice 2, shift-click.)

In Click Assignment mode, Ctrl-click within the staff lines at the position of the first note to tell Finale to assign all syllables in the lyric set displayed in the scrolling window. Finale attaches one syllable at a time to subsequent notes in the melody, automatically skipping over rests and tied notes. (Finale only assigns lyrics to the notes in the current layer, as identified by the Layer buttons in the lower-left corner of the window.)

In Edit Word Extensions mode, click within the staff lines at the position of the sustained syllable to display a handle at the end of the syllable. (If the note is in Voice 2, shift-click.) Drag this handle to the right to draw a word extension underline (indicating that the syllable is sustained through more than one note). Click this handle and press delete to remove the word extension.

In Adjust Syllables mode, click within the staff lines at the position of the syllable you want to move to display handles on that syllable and any others attached to the same note. (If the syllable is assigned to a note in Voice 2, shift-click.) Drag a handle to move the syllable; select it and press Backspace to restore it to its original position; select it and press delete to remove it from the score. Select several vertically-aligned handles (by shift-clicking) and choose Align Syllable Left or Align Syllable Right from the Lyrics menu if you want all selected syllables aligned with the left or right edge of the top selected syllable.

In Clone Lyric mode, click one measure, shift-click another measure, drag-enclose several measures, or click to the left of the staff to select one measure, additional measures, a group of measures, or the entire staff at once. Drag the first selected measure so that it's superimposed on the first target measure to copy the lyrics from the selected measures to the target measures.

In Shift Lyrics to the Right mode, click within the staff lines at the position of the first syllable you want shifted to shift that syllable and subsequent syllables one note to the right (automatically skipping rests and tied notes).

In Shift Lyrics to the Left mode, click within the staff lines at the position of the syllable just before the one you want shifted to shift the next syllable and subsequent syllables one note to the left (automatically avoiding rests and tied notes).

See also: Main Tool Palette.


 Chord Tool

When you click this tool, the Chord menu appears. The Chord Tool lets you create, move, and delete chord symbols in your score. These symbols are musically intelligent; they play back when you play back the piece, transpose when you transpose the music, and can be placed in your score automatically. You can even teach Finale to recognize nonstandard, complex, or unusually spelled chord symbols. Or, display chords in different styles: Standard, European, German, Roman, Nashville, or Solfeggio.

Special mouse clicks

Click the staff (but not on a note or rest) to display the four vertical-positioning arrows at the left side of the screen, which you use to adjust the position of the baseline for the chord symbols.

When Manual Input is selected in the Chord menu, click a note to which no chord symbol is attached to display the Chord Definition dialog box, where you can specify a chord symbol you want to appear at that point.

When Manual Input is selected in the Chord menu, click a note to which a chord symbol has been attached to display a handle on the chord symbol. (If the note is in Voice 2, shift-click instead.)

When Manual Input is selected in the Chord menu, drag a chord symbol handle to move the chord symbol; press delete to remove the symbol from the score.

When Manual Input is selected in the Chord menu, Ctrl-drag a chord symbol handle if you want to adjust its position without using dynamic drawing (where the chord symbol is visible at all times while you're dragging it). The chord symbol will disappear until you release the mouse button.

When Manual Input is selected in the Chord menu, double-click a chord symbol handle to display the Chord Definition dialog box, where you can change the identity or suffix of the chord symbol.

When Type Into Score is selected in the Chord menu, click a note to which you want to attach a chord symbol. A flashing cursor appears above the note. Type the chord symbol you want attached to the note.

When Type Into Score is selected in the Chord menu, click a note to select the chord symbol attached to it. The chord symbol you type will replace the selected chord symbol.

When MIDI Input is selected in the Chord menu, click a note to place the ear-shaped cursor at that spot. Now play a chord on your MIDI instrument; Finale will correctly analyze it and place the corresponding chord symbol into the score. Press a single note above Middle C to advance the ear cursor to the next note.

When One-Staff Analysis (or Two-Staff Analysis) is selected in the Chord menu, click a note to make Finale analyze the chord at that spot (one staff or two staves deep, respectively) and place the corresponding chord symbol into the score.

For further information, see the Chord Definition dialog box.

See also: Main Tool Palette.


 Clef Tool

Use this tool to create clef changes anywhere in the score - even in the middle of a measure.

Special mouse clicks

Click a measure that doesn't contain a mid-measure clef to display the Change Clef dialog box, where you can specify a clef that you want to insert in the measure you clicked.

Click a measure that contains a mid-measure clef to display a handle on every mid-measure clef.

Drag a mid-measure clef handle up, down, left, or right to adjust the clef's position. The notes before and after it are renotated accordingly as you drag it.

Click a mid-measure clef handle to select it; press delete to remove it. You can also shift-click to select additional mid-measure clef handles or drag-enclose several.

Double-click a mid-measure clef handle; on the second click, hold the mouse button down and drag the handle right or left to change the clef's identity (from a bass clef to a treble clef, for example). As you drag the clef horizontally, it cycles through its eight available identities.

Double-click a measure containing a mid-measure clef to insert a new mid-measure clef at the place you clicked.

Ctrl-click a mid-measure clef handle to display the Mid-measure Clef dialog box, where you can change the clef, specify its positioning, or turn it back into a single clef (one that appears just before the first barline of the measure and can't be moved).

For further information, see the Change Clef dialog box.

See also: Main Tool Palette.


 Repeat Tool

Using this tool, you can create and edit repeat signs and text repeats (such as D.S. al Coda) in your score. These repeats can be defined for playback, if you wish, so that Finale, playing back your score, responds to them just as a musician would.

Use this tool to create first and second endings, functional Coda and D.S. symbols, and even endless repeats.

Special mouse clicks

Click a measure that doesn't contain a repeat sign to display the Repeat Selection box, where you can create either a repeat barline or a text repeat to insert into the score (and define it for playback, if you wish).

Click a measure that already contains a repeat sign to display a handle on every text repeat in the measure and a handle at the top and bottom of the repeat barline, if any. Double-click to display the Repeat Selection dialog box, where you can select an additional text repeat or repeat barline.

Click a text repeat handle to select it; shift-click to select an additional one. Press delete to remove any selected text repeats.

Drag a text repeat handle to move the text repeat in any direction (in all staves simultaneously).

Click a repeat barline handle to select it; press delete to remove it.

Drag a repeat barline bracket handle up or down to make the bracket taller or shorter (or, in the case of the open end of the bracket, drag left or right to lengthen or shorten the bracket). (If you want to drag the bracket so that it's longer than a measure or so, double-click its handle, select Individual Positioning, and click OK.)

Double-click a text repeat handle to display the Repeat Designer dialog box, where you can change the spelling, font, or justification of the text repeat.

Double-click a repeat barline handle (or its bracket handle) to display its Repeat Bar Assignment dialog box, where you can change the playback effects of the repeat barline.

Shift-double-click a text repeat handle to display the Repeat Assignment dialog box, where you can change the playback effects of the text repeat.

For further information, see the Repeat Selection dialog box.

See also: Main Tool Palette.


 Measure Number Tool

Using this tool, you can create different regions of measure numbering in your score. Each region can have a different numbering or lettering scheme; for example, you might letter the introductory measures A, B, C, and D, and then number subsequent measures beginning with 1, 2, 3, and so on.

When you Ctrl-click the Measure Number Tool, the Measure Number dialog box appears, where you can define various parameters for the measure numbering in a region such as the font, positioning, enclosure shape (if any), and incidence of the measure numbers (how often they appear).

Special mouse clicks

Click the Measure Number Tool icon to display a handle on every measure number in the score.

Ctrl-click the Measure Number Tool icon to display the Measure Number dialog box.

Click a measure number handle, shift-click an additional handle, or drag-enclose several handles to select specific measure numbers.

Drag a selected handle to reposition the measure number (and any other selected measure numbers); press Backspace to restore the selected numbers to their original positions.

Press Delete to remove selected measure numbers. Finale hides the measure number for that measure in that staff only (not for every measure above or below it).

Double-click a measure number handle to add, edit, or select a different enclosure shape for a measure number. The Enclosure Designer dialog box appears, where you can select an enclosure shape or edit the shape's height, width, center, and line thickness. If you no longer want an enclosure to appear on a measure number, choose None from the Shape drop-down list. Finale shows any changes you make to the measure number for that measure in that staff only (not for every measure above or below it).

Double-click a measure to display all measure numbers defined for the measure. Finale shows the measure numbers for that measure in that staff only (not for every measure above or below it).  Note: Measure numbers will only appear in a staff when Measure Numbers is selected as one of the "Items to Display" in the Staff Attributes dialog box.

See also: Main Tool Palette.


 Note Mover Tool

This tool lets you move one note at a time (or several within a measure) to another measure, even on a different staff. For example, you can create cross-staff notation. Or, after transcribing a two-handed performance with HyperScribe (or the Transcription Tool), you can correct split-point errors by moving notes from the upper staff to the lower staff. You can move several notes in a measure horizontally as well; for example, you can copy a particular motif into the next measure.

The Note Mover Tool also gives you access to Finale's Search and Replace feature, which lets you search for every occurrence of a particular note or group of notes and modify them in some consistent way. For full instructions, see Search and Replace in the Finale Encyclopedia.

When you click this tool, the Note Mover menu appears, containing all the commands you need to move selected notes in a measure to other measures. See Note Mover menu.

Special mouse clicks

Click a measure to display a handle on every notehead in the measure.

Click, shift-click, drag-enclose, or shift-drag-enclose notehead handles to select one note handle, an additional note handle, groups of note handles, or additional groups of handles, respectively. (You can select nonadjacent handles, or only certain notes in a chord.) You can also choose Select All from the Edit menu to select every handle in the measure.

Drag any selected note handle to another measure (above, below, or to the right or left of the original measure) to move or copy the notes to the target measure, depending on the copying mode you've selected from the Note Mover menu. (Press delete to remove selected notes that are still in their original measure.)

Drag a note (or selected group of notes) to the end of its own measure to place a copy there (following all existing notes). This feature works regardless of the currently selected command in the Note Mover menu, and works only if the measure isn't rhythmically full.

Drag a note (or selected group of notes) to the beginning or middle of its own measure to place a copy at the beginning of the measure (preceding all existing notes). This feature works regardless of the currently selected command in the Note Mover menu, and works only if the measure isn't rhythmically full.

See also: Main Tool Palette.


 Mass Mover Tool

With this tool you can select a region of your score (from a single note to the entire score) and edit all selected music at once. The Mass Mover and Mass Edit menus appear, containing all the commands you need to edit the selected music. For example, you can change any selected measures' key, time signature, spacing, measure widths, Layer assignments, stem directions, beaming patterns, and so on. You can also rebeam, rebar, transpose, or apply articulations to every note in any selected region.

The Mass Mover gets its name from the fact that it can also be used to copy music from one place to another - even from one Finale file to another. You can also use this tool for erasing selected musical elements from a region - such as articulations, chord symbols, lyrics, Score Expressions, MIDI controller data, and so on - without disturbing the other existing elements of the music in that region.

Note: You can undo any Mass Mover operation by choosing Undo from the Edit menu immediately afterward. After extensive Mass Mover operations, however, you may discover that it takes a long time for Finale to catch up with you when you click a different tool. If so, you might want to turn the Undo feature off; to do so, choose Program Options from the Options menu, and deselect Allow Undo.

Special mouse clicks

 If "Select Partial Measures" is selected in the Mass Mover menu, double-click a measure to select it. If "Select Partial Measures" is off, a single click selects a measure.

Double-click a selected measure to extend the selection to include the entire vertical measure "stack" (that measure in all staves). (If "Select Partial Measures" is turned on, the first double-click selects a single full measure, and the second double-click selects the measure stack.)

Drag-enclose a region to select it. If "Select Partial Measures" is turned on, drag diagonally across any region, large or small, to select it, even if it straddles a barline.

Shift-click a measure (or a beat within a measure) to extend the selected region from the first region you selected.

Click to the left of a staff to select an entire staff.

Shift-click to the left of a staff to extend the selection from any other staves you've selected. You can also choose Select All from the Edit menu to select the entire score.

Drag a selected region so that it's superimposed on the beginning of an unselected region to copy or move the selected music to the destination region. You specify which musical elements you want to move, as well as how you want them copied, from the Mass Mover menu before you drag.

Ctrl-shift-click an unselected region to copy or move the specified contents of any selected music - no matter where it is in the score - to the point you clicked. You specify which musical elements you want to move, as well as how you want them copied, from the Mass Mover menu before you click.

Press Ctrl while choosing Cut or Copy from the Edit menu to display the Clip dialog box; you're in the process of creating a Clip File (a special kind of Finale file that's named and saved separately from the original file).

Press Ctrl while choosing Insert or Replace Entries from the Edit menu to display the Paste dialog box from which you can select any Clip File you've already created (so that you can paste it into the current file).

Press shift while choosing Cut or Copy to display the Items to Clip dialog box, where you can specify which musical elements you want to cut or copy. You can also press shift and Ctrl (see above) if you want to select only certain musical elements and create a Clip File.

Press delete to remove the selected music from the score, in all staves, so that there are fewer measures remaining.

Press backspace to erase the selected music, leaving behind only rests.

See also: Main Tool Palette.


 Resize Tool

This tool lets you reduce or enlarge a note, group of notes, staff, system, page, or all the music in a piece. When you use it at the note-by-note level, you can create cue notes; at the staff level, you can create a cue staff. Particularly if you plan to print on a PostScript printer, however, you'll probably use this tool most often to reduce the overall size of the music. It's important, however, that you choose Update Layout from the Edit menu after you reduce a system, a page, or the entire piece so that Finale corrects any irregularities in measure widths introduced by the change.

When this tool is selected, Finale displays the Resize dialog box - where you can specify the amount of reduction or enlargement - any time you click a musical element.

Special mouse clicks

Click directly on a notehead to reduce or enlarge the notehead itself. (If the note is in Voice 2, shift-click.)

Click a note stem to reduce or enlarge the entire note, including the notehead, stem, flag, any other notes in the same chord, and - if the note you clicked was the first note of a beamed group - any other notes in the beamed group. (If the note is in Voice 2, shift-click.) Finale also reduces any expression markings, chord symbols, or lyric syllables attached to the note.

In Page View, click to the left of a staff to reduce or enlarge the staff.

In Page View, click between and to the left of any two staves to reduce or enlarge the entire system.

In Page View, click the upper-left corner of a page to reduce or enlarge that page, a range of pages beginning with the one you clicked, or all pages from the one you clicked through the last page of the file.

See also: Main Tool Palette.


 Special Tools Tool

This tool lets you create a number of special beaming, stemming, and note positioning changes in one measure at a time. For example, you can use it to rearrange the noteheads on a stem, change the length of a stem, change the angle of a beam, or adjust the position of a dot or a tie.

For detailed information, see the Special Tools Palette window.

See also: Main Tool Palette.


 Text Tool

You can use this tool to place titles, page numbers, and other headers and footers such as composer credits, copyright notices and other similar lines of text that appear on one or more pages in the score. You can also place longer text such as a note to the performer, an extra or optional set of lyrics, or -- if you're preparing a textbook or examination -- explanatory text. You can even create notes that will appear in the score, but won't print out.

Text blocks in Finale have two elements: the text itself, which can be any number of characters, in multiple fonts and styles and can appear anywhere in the score; and the frame (the shape that contains the text). Most of the time you'll use a standard frame, which is a simple rectangle for which you can display a border. Or, you can create a custom frame and create any shape to enclose the text. You can even create a second, inner enclosed shape for a custom shape and pour in the text around it (to create a cutout for an illustration, for example).

There are two kinds of text blocks: measure-assigned and page-assigned text blocks. A measure-assigned text block, which you create in Scroll View, remains attached to its measure in the score, even if the measure's positioning in the score changes. A page-assigned text block, which you create in Page View, remains fixed to its position of the page, regardless of changes made to the layout of the measures around it.

When you click the Text Tool the Text and Frame menus appear. If you're in Scroll View, handles appear on each measure-assigned text block in the score. If you're in Page View, handles appear on each page-assigned text block in the score.

Special mouse clicks

Click a text block handle or drag-enclose text block handles to select a text block or text blocks.

Shift-click a text block handle to add a text block to the selection. If a text block is already selected, Shift-click to remove the text block from the selection.

Double-click in the score to create a frame that expands as you enter text.

Double-click and drag in the score to create a fixed-size frame for text.

Double-click a text block handle to edit the text block. The editing frame surrounding the text appears, and a cursor appears in the text block.

Shift-double-click a text block handle to edit the text block's attributes.

Press Delete to remove the selected text blocks from the score.

Drag a selected text block handle to adjust its position in the score.

See also: Main Tool Palette.


 Page Layout Tool

This tool lets you define the page layout for your file, including the page size, size of the page margins, and the positioning of the systems on each page.

There are two primary parts of the Page Layout Tool: the Page Layout window and the Page Layout menu. The Page Layout window appears when you click anywhere on the page; in this window, you can change the page size, margins, or system positioning, either one page at a time or for the entire file at once.

The Page Layout menu appears (and you switch to Page View, if you're not already there) when you click the Page Layout Tool. This menu contains a command for optimizing systems (hiding empty staves within each system to produce a more compact and readable full score), and another for grouping measures on a line, so that you can specify the number of measures you want on each line of music.

Special mouse clicks

Click anywhere on the page to display the Page Layout window, where you can adjust the page's size, margins, and system positioning.

In the Page Layout window, drag a handle to resize the page, margins, or system (as specified by the three option buttons at the right side of the screen).

After entering numbers in the text boxes in the Page Layout window, click in the page display area to tell Finale to update the display to reflect your changes.

For further information, see the Page Layout dialog box.

See also: Main Tool Palette.


 Ossia Tool

Use this tool to create floating measures - one-bar alternative passages that you can place anywhere in the score. Such a measure might provide an explication of a trill, propose a cadenza, or suggest an easier alternative to the real measure.

Because such a measure isn't part of any staff or system and can be dragged freely around the page, it's also useful for notating cutout scores or for adding musical examples. These "ossia" measures don't play back; they're purely graphic.

A measure-assigned ossia measure, which you create in Scroll View, remains attached to its measure in the score, even if that measure's position in the score changes. A page-assigned ossia measure, which you create in Page View, remains fixed to a given spot on the page, regardless of any repositioning of the music around it.

Special mouse clicks

In Page View, click the Ossia Tool to display a handle on every page-assigned ossia measure.

In Page View, double-click anywhere on any page to display the Ossia Measure Designer dialog box, where you can create a floating measure that will be attached to the place on the page you clicked.

In Scroll View, click a measure to which an ossia measure has been attached to display its handle. Double-click to display the Ossia Measure Designer dialog box, where you can create an additional floating measure.

In Scroll View, click a measure with no ossia measures attached to display the Ossia Measure Designer dialog box, where you can create an ossia measure.

Double-click a floating measure's handle to display the Ossia Measure Designer dialog box, where you can edit certain parameters of the ossia measure, such as its positioning clef, key, and size.

Click an ossia measure's handle to select it; drag it to move the measure; press delete to remove the measure.

Shift-double-click a floating measure's handle to display the Page or Measure Assignment for Ossia Measure dialog box, where you can specify positioning coordinates for the floating measure.

For further information, see the Ossia Measure Designer dialog box.

See also: Main Tool Palette.


 Mirror Tool

With this tool you can create one-measure intelligent copies, or mirrors - groups of notes that are dynamically linked to other notes in the score (the source material). When you edit the source notes, the notes of the mirror are automatically updated to reflect the change.

You can create mirrors quickly and easily using the Mass Mover Tool if the passage you want to copy is a full measure long (or longer). However, use the Mirror Tool if you want only selected notes from a source measure to appear in the mirror measure.

Furthermore, you can use the Mirror Tool to combine individual sets of notes from different source measures into a single mirror measure, which is then called a composite mirror. And no matter how the mirror was created or what kind of mirror it is, you can also use this tool to select only certain notes in the mirror that you want displayed; Finale will hide the remaining notes. For example, you might create a kind of mirror -  called a selective mirror -  if the source measure contains a chordal passage, but you only want the top note of each chord to appear in the mirror.

Finally, you can use the Mirror Tool to create a pickup measure anywhere in the score; Finale will create blank space at the beginning of such a measure, pushing any existing notes to the right to make them act as pickup notes.

Special mouse clicks

Click the Mirror Tool to display a Mirror icon on every mirror measure, and a Placeholder icon on every pickup measure. You can't edit the notes in a mirrored measure directly; you must edit them in the source measure.

Click a measure with notes in it (or a measure with a Placeholder icon) to display the Placeholder dialog box (which lets you turn the measure you clicked into a pickup measure).

Click an empty measure (or a measure with a Mirror icon) to display the Tilting Mirror dialog box, which you can use to create or edit a composite mirror (containing selected notes from other measures).

Shift-click a measure displaying a Mirror icon to display the Mirror Attributes dialog box, where you can specify a number of parameters for the mirror (such as a transposition or beaming pattern).

For further information, see the Mirror Attributes dialog box.

See also: Main Tool Palette.


 Tempo Tool

The Tempo Tool lets you create or edit a stream of data describing tiny, moment-by-moment tempo fluctuations within the playback of your piece. You generate this tempo information when you record a real-time performance in the Transcription Tool. You can also use this tool to create a swing effect, although the MIDI Tool provides a much more efficient and effective method of creating swing.

Special mouse clicks

Click a measure to display the Tempo Adjustment dialog box, where you can edit the moment-by-moment tempo changes within the measure.

For further information, see the Tempo Adjustment dialog box.

See also: Main Tool Palette.


 Graphics Tool

 Use this tool to exchange PostScript and bitmapped graphics between programs. You can place Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) files, Windows Metafiles (WMF), and TIFF (TIF) files for use within Finale, and export a region of music or pages of music as EPS and TIFF files that can be used in other applications.

When you click this tool, the Graphics menu appears; it contains all the commands to place a graphic into Finale, export pages or a selection of music from your document to another file, position graphics in your music, and show the location of graphics files.

When you place a graphic--a company logo, for example--it can be brought into the score in either Scroll View or Page View. The placed graphic may be assigned to and positioned on a single page or measure, or displayed on a range of pages, so it becomes a running header or footer throughout the document. You can position and scale graphics on your score by dragging their bounding handles.

An additional way to place a graphic is via the Graphics Tool in the Shape Designer window. Graphics placed into the Shape Designer may be used anywhere that shapes are currently used in Finale. For example, you can use placed graphics with the Staff or Score Expression Tools, or the Articulation Tool.

Special mouse clicks

Click in the Shape Designer to display the Place Graphics dialog box where you can select the graphic to place into the Shape Designer.

Click a graphic or drag-enclose graphics to select a graphic or graphics. Eight bounding handles appear on each selected graphic.

Shift-click a graphic to add a graphic to the selection. If a graphic is already selected, removes the graphic from the selection.

Double-click a graphic to edit the graphic's attributes.

Double-click in the score to place a graphic in the score.

Double-click and drag to enclose a region in Page View containing the musical example to export.

Press Delete to delete the selected graphics.

Drag to adjust the selected graphics' position in the score.

Drag a graphic's bounding handle to resize the graphic horizontally or vertically.

For further information, see the Shape Designer and Graphics menu.

See also: Main Tool Palette.


Simple Entry Palette

Choose "Simple Entry Palette" from the Window menu to display or hide the Simple Entry Palette. This palette contains an individual icon for each rhythmic value (quarter note, eighth note, and so on). (If the Simple Entry Palette doesn't appear, click the Simple Entry Tool.) Using the tools on this floating palette, you can enter music into your score by clicking one note at a time. The Simple Entry keyboard commands are summarized in the diagram that appears on your Quick Reference Card.

 Eraser

Click above or below a note to delete it; click a notehead to change it into a rest.

 Double Whole Note

Click the staff to place a double whole note (breve); click again to change note to a rest. Shift-click the staff to place a double whole rest.

 Whole Note

Click the staff to place a whole note; click again to change note to a rest. Shift-click the staff to place a whole rest.

 Half Note

Click the staff to place a half note; click again to change note to a rest. Shift-click the staff to place a half rest.

 Quarter Note

Click the staff to place a quarter note; click again to change note to a rest. Shift-click the staff to place a quarter rest.

 Eighth Note

Click the staff to place a eighth note; click again to change note to a rest. Shift-click the staff to place an eighth rest.

 16th Note

Click the staff to place a 16th note; click again to change note to a rest. Shift-click the staff to place a 16th rest.

 32nd Note

Click the staff to place a 32nd note; click again to change note to a rest. Shift-click the staff to place a 32nd rest.

 64th Note

Click the staff to place a 64th note; click again to change note to a rest. Shift-click the staff to place a 64th rest.

 128th Note

Click the staff to place a 128th note; click again to change note to a rest. Shift-click the staff to place a 128th rest.

 Half Step Up

Click a notehead to raise its pitch by a half step.

 Half Step Down

Click a notehead to lower its pitch by a half step.

 Whole Step Up

Click a notehead to raise its pitch by a whole step.

 Whole Step Down

Click a notehead to lower its pitch by a whole step.

 Remove Accidental

Click a notehead to remove all accidentals.

 Grace Note

Click a note to make it a grace note; click again to restore it to full size.

 Dot

Click on, above or below a note or rest to make it a dotted; click again to add another dot.

 Tie

Click a notehead to tie it to the next note; click a stem to tie an entire chord.


Smart Shape Palette

Choose "Smart Shape Palette" from the Window menu to display or hide the Smart Shape Palette. This palette contains an individual icon for each of several Smart Shapes - stretchable markings such as slurs, crescendo hairpins, 8va and 15ma brackets, dashed lines, and so on. (If the Smart Shape Palette doesn't appear, click the Smart Shape Tool.)

Finale automatically determines the direction of measure-based slurs, curves, 8va and 15ma markings and brackets. If you draw a marking over the middle line, Finale creates an over slur (or curve), or an 8va or 15ma marking (or bracket) with a down hook. If you draw a marking below the middle line, Finale creates an under slur (or curve), or an 8vb or 15mb marking (or bracket) with a up hook. When "Attach to Notes" is selected in the Smart Shape menu, slurs and curves attach to notes, and will automatically adjust when you edit or transpose them.

 Slur

Double-click by the first note and drag to the last note to draw a note-attached tapered slur. Double-click above or below the staff to draw a measure-based tapered slur. ("Attach to Notes" must be unchecked.)

 Dashed Curve

Double-click by the first note and drag to the last note to draw a note-attached dashed curve. Double-click above or below the staff to create a measure-based dashed curve. ("Attach to Notes" must be unchecked.)

Note: The dashed curves do not have tapered ends.

 Decrescendo Tool

Double-click and drag to the right to draw a decrescendo (hairpin).

 Crescendo Tool

Double-click and drag to the right to draw a crescendo (hairpin).

 Trill

Double-click and drag to the right to draw a trill marking with an extension (wavy line).

 Trill Extension

Double-click and drag to the right to draw a trill extension (wavy line).

 8va

Double-click above or below the staff to draw an 8va over or under marking.

 15ma

Double-click above or below the staff to draw an 15ma over or under marking.

 Solid Double-Ended Bracket

Double-click above or below the staff to draw a solid horizontal bracket with hooks at both ends.

 Dashed Double-Ended Bracket

Double-click above or below the staff to draw a dashed horizontal bracket with hooks at both ends.

 Solid Bracket

Double-click above or below the staff to draw a solid horizontal bracket with a down or up hook.

 Dashed Bracket

Double-click above or below the staff to draw a dashed horizontal bracket with a down or up hook.

 Solid Line

Double-click and drag to draw a solid line.

 Dashed Line

Double-click and drag to draw a dashed line.


Glossary

Adobe Type Manager

Aftertouch

Alternate Notation

Background File

Baseline

Beat Chart

Channel

Clip Files

Continuous Data

EDU

EPS

EVPU

Frame

Handle

HyperScribe

Icons

Keyboard Equivalents

Landscape Orientation

Layers

Learned Chords

Libraries

Metatool

MIDI

MIDI File

MIDI Time Code

Mirror

Note On - Note Off

Optimization

Patch

Petrucci

Playback File

Portrait Orientation

PostScript

PostScript Listing

Quantization

RAM

Seville

Shape Expression

Smart Shapes

Staff List

Staff Set

Tamburo

Text Block

Text Expression

Tiling Pages

Time Tags

Tool Set

True Type Fonts

Type 1 Fonts

Voice

Word Extension


G_Adobe Type Manager
Adobe Type Manager

A font management program that uses PostScript outline font

technology  for improved screen display and high-resolution

printing on non-PostScript printers.


G_Alternate Notation
Alternate Notation

Alternate methods of notating music, such as slash notation,

which indicate free interpretation or "comping" of passages.

Finale also displays one and two-bar repeat symbols.


G_Aftertouch
Aftertouch

A MIDI signal transmitted by changing the pressure of a MIDI controller

while it's held. (Useful for creating crescendos or decrescendos).

There are two types of aftertouch: Channel Pressure

(Monophonic Aftertouch) and Key Pressure (Polyphonic Aftertouch).


G_Background File
Background File

An alternate name for a Finale Playback file which can

be played back while  recording a new track in the

Transcription window.


G_Baseline
Baseline

An imaginary line used to align the bottom edge of font

characters. Finale displays arrows that control the

baseline positioning for lyrics and chords.


G_Beat Chart
Beat Chart

A set of handles (accessed through the Measure Attributes Tool)

used to adjust the horizontal position of notes. Handles appear

either on the beat (Beat Spacing) or on each note of a measure

(Note Spacing). Adjusting the handle for one note or beat will move

the notes in all staves at once, keeping them rhythmically aligned.


G_Channel
Channel

MIDI channels are used to transmit and receive MIDI information such

as note on and note off messages as well as controller and patch

information to your MIDI device(s).


G_Clip Files
Clip Files

A Finale file similar to a Clipboard file that can actually be saved to or loaded from

your hard drive to copy or paste into Finale files. They are created by holding

the Ctrl key down while choosing Cut or Copy from Finale's Edit menu.


G_Continuous Data
Continuous Data

Continuous Data a broad MIDI term which includes both Controller

data, such as volume or aftertouch, as well as patch, pedaling, and

pitch wheel information. Continuous Data is not associated with

particular notes, but is stored with measures.


G_EDU
EDU - Enigma Duration Unit

EDUs or ENIGMA Durational Units, are Finale's high-resolution

measurement for the duration of notes and rests.

1024 EDUs = 1 quarter note


G_EPS
EPS - Encapsulated PostScript

An EPS file is a high-resolution graphics file format that

uses PostScript to define images and text. You can create

music examples in Finale and save them as EPS files

for use in desktop publishing and word processing programs.


G_EVPU
EVPU - Enigma Virtual Page Unit

EVPUs, or ENIGMA Virtual Page Units, are Finale's flexible

measurements used to calculate the size and spacing of your music.

You can display the measurements in more common units such as

inches, centimeters, points or spaces.

288 EVPUs = 1 inch

24 EVPUs   = 1 space


G_Frame
Frame

A frame is a layer that contains one measure's worth

of music. You can have up to four layers of music per

measure, so one measure can contain up to four frames.


G_Handle
Handle

A small square which appears on currently "selectable" elements

in the score. Handles allow you to select, edit  and adjust musical

elements in the score.


G_HyperScribe
HyperScribe

A patented method of entering music in Finale by

transcribing a real-time MIDI performance into notation.

It transcribes the music onto one or two staves,

even if you alter the tempo as you play.


G_Icons
Icons

A visual representation of a file type or tool that

can be selected to perform a particular function.


G_Keyboard Equivalents
Keyboard Equivalents

A shortcut or alternate method of choosing a menu command,

or performing a function. See the Quick Reference Card for a

list of keyboard shortcuts.


G_Landscape Orientation
Landscape Orientation

A positioning of the printed page

so that it is wider than it is tall.


G_Layers
Layers

An independent overlay of music in the same measure.

In Finale each measure may contain 4 layers of music.

Each layer may also contain 2 independent voices.


G_Learned Chords
Learned Chords

Chords that Finale has analyzed during chord entry that do

not match any chord in it's chord suffix library. When Finale

encounters a chord it does not recognize, it lets you define it

yourself, or Finale will make its "best guess." You can change

the definition or spelling of learned chords.


G_Libraries
Libraries

Sets of musical symbols, expression markings,

and other important musical elements that are

stored on your hard drive. They can be loaded

into Finale files.


G_Meta Tool
Metatool

A Finale keyboard shortcut that lets you enter markings very quickly.

Up to eight metatools can be programmed for the following tools:

Articulations, Chord Symbols, Expressions, Key Signatures, Time

Signatures, Mass Mover, Repeats, Simple Entry and Tuplet.


G_MIDI
MIDI - Musical Instrument Digital Interface

MIDI is a standardized protocol by which music applications,

computers and MIDI instruments talk to each other.


G_MIDI Time Code
MIDI Time Code

A type of signal that is used to synchronize one or more MIDI devices

to another MIDI device, which generates the signal. This signal

allows the devices to play "in time" with each other.


G_MIDI File
MIDI File

A type of file written in a standardized format that can be understood

by music programs from different manufacturers so that one file can be used in

several different programs. For example, music created in any sequencer

program can be opened by Finale and converted into written notation.


G_Mirror
Mirror(s)

Intelligent copies of musical source regions

that are dynamically linked: when the source

measure is changed, the mirror also changes.


G_Note On - Note Off
Note On - Note Off

MIDI signals that instruct MIDI instruments to play or

stop a note, "turn on" and "turn off," respectively.


G_Optimization
Optimization

A Finale feature that suppresses any empty staves

(in a staff system) from page view and the printed page.

The staves will, however, be visible in scroll view.


G_Patches
Patch

Particular instrument sounds within a MIDI channel.

Consists of a simple program change or a combination

of bank and program changes.


G_Petrucci
Petrucci

Finale's music character font. Both TrueType

and Type1 PostScript versions are supported.


G_Playback File
Playback File

A special audio-only file, created from your notated

music, that can be saved onto your disk.


G_Portrait Orientation
Portrait Orientation

A positioning of the printed page so that it is

taller than it is wide.


G_PostScript
PostScript

A page-description language that computers and

high-resolution printers use to communicate with each other.


G_PostScript Listing
PostScript Listing

A special type of text file containing all of a document's printing

information. You can send the listing to any PostScript printer

directly, without having to run Finale to print your document.


G_Quantization
Quantization

A process of rounding off rhythmic values of notes played

in a MIDI performance to the nearest selected duration,

resulting in a cleaner transcription of the notes.


G_RAM
RAM

Random Access Memory, is a computer's internal working

memory. This is not the same as the storage capacity

of the computer's hard drive.


G_Seville
Seville

Finale's guitar fretboard font. Both TrueType

and Type1 PostScript versions are supported.


G_Shape Expression
Shape Expression

A graphic expression mark, such as a slur, crescendo,

or glissando, added to the score with the Staff and

Score Expression tools.


G_Smart Shapes
Smart Shapes

Curves and lines that expand and compress if a measure width changes.

They also automatically separate if the shape needs to stretch across

more than one staff system in Page View.


G_Staff List
Staff List

A listing of all staves in a score that lets you determine

in which staves a Score Expression will appear.


G_Staff Set
Staff Set

A particular group of staves displayed in Scroll View,

using the View menu. They let you display only the staves

you need to edit, rather than all the staves in the score.


G_Tamburo
Tamburo

Finale's percussion and shape note font. Both TrueType

and Type 1 PostScript versions are supported


G_Text Block
Text Block

Text created and edited in the score that is enclosed in a "Standard"

rectangular frame for which a border can be displayed, or a "Custom"

frame that you create. They can be placed anywhere in the score,

and displayed on a single page or a range of pages.


G_Text Expression
Text Expression

A text marking, such as dynamics or tempo markings,

added to the score with the Score or Staff Expression tools.


G_Tiling Pages
Tiling Pages

A way of printing out very large scores (11" by 17") onto

several smaller pages that can be taped together.

A portion of the full score page appears on each printed page.

Tiling is available only when Compiling a PostScript Listing.


G_Time Tags
Time Tags

Points of reference for tempo entered into Finale's Transcription

window by the user. They determine how the real-time performance

is rhythmically divided for transcription into notated music.


G_Tool Set
Tool Set

Alternate configurations of the Main Tool Palette, which can contain

a subset of all the tools. The arrangement of tools, size and location

of the palette are stored with each tool set.


G_True Type Fonts
True Type Fonts

Scalable fonts used to display and print your Finale

documents. To use, turn on the True Type option in

the Fonts section of the Windows Control Panel.


G_Type 1 Fonts
Type 1 Fonts

Refers to PostScript printer fonts. PostScript printers

use Type 1 fonts to acurately scale text on the printed

page at any resolution.


G_Voices
Voice

Independent musical voices that respond with different stem

direction depending upon which note(s) the Voice 2 notes

were "launched." Only two voices are available per layer.


G_Word Extension
Word Extension

An underline that is used to indicate that a syllable

is being sustained through more than one note.


Simple Entry Keypad

The Simple Entry keyboard commands are also summarized in the diagram that appears on your Quick Reference Card.

See also: Simple Note Entry


Speedy Entry Keypad

The Speedy Entry keyboard commands are also summarized in the diagram that appears on your Quick Reference Card.

See also: Speedy Entry Tool


General MIDI

Part of the reason General MIDI was established, was to provide a standardized listing of sounds or patches. This standard was developed so that when you play the same MIDI file on different MIDI setups, you'll hear roughly the same result. Many, though not all, MIDI instruments support General MIDI.

General MIDI Patch Set Groupings

General MIDI Patch Numbers & Names

General MIDI Percussion Map Table


General MIDI Patch Set Groupings

The patches, or sounds, in General MIDI are grouped according to the following table. This grouping is used for all channels except for channel 10, which is used for percussion.

Patch Number             Patch Name

1-8..............................Piano

9-16............................Chromatic Percussion

17-24..........................Organ

25-32..........................Guitar

33-40..........................Bass

41-48..........................Strings

49-56..........................Ensemble

57-64..........................Brass

65-72..........................Reed

73-80..........................Pipe

81-88..........................Synth Lead

89-96..........................Synth Pad

97-104........................Synth Effects

105-112......................Ethnic

113-120......................Percussive

121-128......................Sound Effects


General MIDI Patch Numbers & Names

This list contains all the General MIDI Patch Numbers and Patch Names.

Patch Number          Patch Name

1..........................Acoustic Grand Piano

2..........................Bright Acoustic Piano

3..........................Electric Grand Piano

4..........................Honky-tonk Piano

5..........................Electric Piano 1

6..........................Electric Piano 2

7..........................Harpsichord

8..........................Clavi

9..........................Celesta

10........................Glockenspiel

11........................Music Box

12........................Vibraphone

13........................Marimba

14........................Xylophone

15........................Tubular Bells

16........................Dulcimer

17........................Drawbar Organ

18........................Percussive Organ

19........................Rock Organ

20........................Church Organ

21........................Reed Organ

22........................Accordion

23........................Harmonica

24........................Tango Accordion

25........................Guitar (nylon)

26........................Acoustic Guitar (steel)

27........................Electric Guitar (jazz)

28........................Electric Guitar (clean)

29........................Electric Guitar (muted)

30........................Overdriven Guitar

31........................Distortion Guitar

32........................Guitar harmonics

33........................Acoustic Bass

34........................Electric Bass (finger)

35........................Electric Bass (pick)

36........................Fretless Bass

37........................Slap Bass 1

38........................Slap Bass 2

39........................Synth Bass 1

40........................Synth Bass 2

41........................Violin

42........................Viola

43........................Cello

44........................Contrabass

45........................Tremolo Strings

46........................Pizzicato Strings

47........................Orchestral Harp

48........................Timpani

49........................String Ensemble 1

50........................String Ensemble 2

51........................SynthStrings 1

52........................SynthStrings 2

53........................Choir Aahs

54........................Voice Oohs

55........................Synth Voice

56........................Orchestra Hit

57........................Trumpet

58........................Trombone

59........................Tuba

60........................Muted Trumpet

61........................French Horn

62........................Brass Section

63........................SynthBrass 1

64........................SynthBrass 2

65........................Soprano Sax

66........................Alto Sax

67........................Tenor Sax

68........................Baritone Sax

69........................Oboe

70........................English Horn

71........................Bassoon

72........................Clarinet

73........................Piccolo

74........................Flute

75........................Recorder

76........................Pan Flute

77........................Blown Bottle

78........................Shakuhachi

79........................Whistle

80........................Ocarina

81........................Lead 1(square)

82........................Lead 2 (sawtooth)

83........................Lead 3 (calliope)

84........................Lead 4 (chiff)

85........................Lead 5 (charang)

86........................Lead 6 (voice)

87........................Lead 7 (fifths)

88........................Lead 8 (bass+lead)

89........................Pad 1 (new age)

90........................Pad 2 (warm)

91........................Pad 3 (polysynth)

92........................Pad 4 (choir)

93........................Pad 5 (bowed)

94........................Pad 6 (metallic)

95........................Pad 7 (halo)

96........................Pad 8 (sweep)

97........................FX 1 (rain)

98........................FX 2 (soundtrack)

99........................FX 3 (crystal)

100......................FX 4 (atmosphere)

101......................FX 5 (brightness)

102......................FX 6 (goblins)

103......................FX 7 (echoes)

104......................FX 8 (sci-fi)

105......................Sitar

106......................Banjo

107......................Shamisen

108......................Koto

109......................Kalimba

110......................Bag pipe

111......................Fiddle

112......................Shanai

113......................Tinkle Bell

114......................Agogo

115......................Steel Drums

116......................Woodblock

117......................Taiko drum

118......................Melodic Tom

119......................Synth Drum

120......................Reverse Cymbal

121......................Guitar Fret Noise

122......................Breath Noise

123......................Seashore

124......................Bird Tweet

125......................Telephone Ring

126......................Helicopter

127......................Applause

128......................Gunshot


General MIDI Percussion Map Table

This listing contains all the General MIDI percussion tones on channel 10, which is the channel reserved for percussion.

Note Number             Note Name

35.........................Acoustic Bass Drum

36.........................Bass Drum 1

37.........................Side Stick

38 ........................Acoustic Snare

39.........................Hand Clap

40.........................Electric Snare

41.........................Low Floor Tom

42.........................Closed Hi Hat

43.........................High Floor Tom

44.........................Pedal Hi Hat

45.........................Low Tom

46.........................Open Hi Hat

47.........................Low-Mid Tom

48 ........................Hi-Mid Tom

49.........................Crash Cymbal 1

50.........................High Tom

51.........................Ride Cymbal 1

52.........................Chinese Cymbal

53.........................Ride Bell

54.........................Tambourine

55.........................Splash Cymbal

56.........................Cowbell

57.........................Crash Cymbal 2

58.........................Vibraslap

59.........................Ride Cymbal 2

60.........................Hi Bongo

61.........................Low Bongo

62.........................Mute Hi Conga

63.........................Open Hi Conga

64.........................Low Conga

65.........................High Timbale

66.........................Low Timbale

67.........................High Agogo

68.........................Low Agogo

69.........................Cabasa

70.........................Maracas

71.........................Short Whistle

72.........................Long Whistle

73.........................Short Guiro

74.........................Long Guiro

75.........................Claves

76.........................Hi Wood Block

77.........................Low Wood Block

78.........................Mute Cuica

79.........................Open Cuica

80.........................Mute Triangle

81.........................Open Triangle


About Finale

This dialog box displays the user's name and serial number along with the current software version number.

See also: Technical Support


Accidental Octave Placement

Use this dialog box when designing your own key signatures. Use it to change the octave in which accidentals are placed in the key signatures for each clef.

Clef: Prev, Next

This number indicates which clef (numbered 0-7) you're editing. Click the Prev or Next buttons below to move through the clefs in the piece. The numbers for the eight default clefs are: 0 = Treble, 1 = Alto, 2 = Tenor, 3 = Bass, 4 = Percussion, 5 = Treble 8vb, 6 = Bass 8vb, 7 = Baritone (F).

Unit: Prev, Next

This number indicates which Unit (accidental) you're editing. Accidentals are numbered in the order they appear. Click the Prev or Next buttons below to move through the accidentals in the key signature.

Delete

Click this button to revert the accidental placements for all clefs back to their major-scale values.

Octave

Type the octave you want this accidental (Unit) to appear in. Octave 0 is the octave beginning with middle C; octave 1 is the octave above middle  C, octave -1 is the octave below middle C, and so on.

See also: Nonstandard Key Signature


Accidental Order and Amount

Use this dialog box when designing your own key signatures. Use it to specify which accidentals appear in a nonlinear key signature and where their placement in the staff will be, or the pitches for each accidental that appears as you move through a linear key format such as the traditional key system.

Unit: Prev, Next

This number indicates which Unit (accidental) you're editing. Click the Prev or Next buttons to move through the accidentals in the key signature. Accidentals are numbered in the order they appear. In linear key formats positive numbers indicate sharps, negative numbers indicate flats. In nonlinear key signatures, the unit numbers are always positive.

Step Level

Type the position of the current accidental (Unit), expressed as a number of scale degrees from the root of the key signature. For example, the first accidental in the major key signature is F-sharp, which is 3 diatonic steps above C, so the Step Level = 3.

Amount

Type the interval, in chromatic steps, by which the current accidental (Unit) should alter the pitch. For example, in the major scale, the first accidental raises F by one chromatic step, so the Amount = 1.

Delete

Click this button to revert the accidental placements for all accidentals to their major-scale value.

See also: Nonstandard Key Signature


Action Type

Use this dialog box to change certain items when copying measures with the Mass Mover Tool. To specify which items to change (key signatures, time signatures, measure widths or measure positioning), just select them in the Measure Items dialog box.

Don't Alter

Does not change the selected measure item when you copy the region.

Set To

Changes the entire region to a single new key signature (or time signature, measure width, or positioning mode) when you copy the music.

Add To

When copying key signatures, adds (or subtracts) a certain number of sharps to every key signature in the region. When copying measure widths, adds (or subtracts) a certain amount of width to every measure in the region. Not available when copying time signatures or measure positioning.

Add or Set (Text Box)

When copying key signatures and Add To is selected, type the number of sharps to add to all key signatures. Or, type a negative number to add flats to the key signatures. When copying measure widths and Add To is selected, type the amount to widen or narrow all selected measures. When Set To is selected, type the width for all selected measures. Not available when copying time signatures or measure positioning.

See also: Measure Items


Add Continuous Data
Add - Continuous Data

Use this dialog box to change all the MIDI values for the currently selected Continuous Data type (pitch wheel, monophonic aftertouch, and so on) in the selected region by a fixed amount.

Add

Type a positive number to increase, or a negative number to decrease the values of the specified Continuous Data type in the selected region.


Add Key Velocities
Add - Key Velocities

Use this dialog box to change  the key velocities of the selected notes by a fixed amount.

Add

Type a positive number to increase, or a negative number to decrease the key velocities of the selected notes.


Add Bookmark

Use this dialog box to create a new bookmark based on the current settings and position in the score. This dialog box changes slightly depending on whether you've selected Assign to: Scroll View or Page View.

Name

Enter a descriptive name for the bookmark to be added.

Assign to: Page View, Scroll View

Assign a bookmark to Page View or Scroll View by clicking the appropriate radio button. The "Settings for" group box changes to reflect the current view.

Settings for Page View: Page, Scale View to, Horizontal, Vertical

This group box appears when "Assign to: Page View" is selected. The settings reflect the score setup when you enter this dialog box.

Click the checkboxes for the settings you want remembered for this bookmark. In the Page text box, enter the page number that the bookmark will be assigned to. "Scale View to" is the size the score displays on the screen. Enter a valid view percentage. Enter a value into the Horizontal text box corresponding to the bookmark's horizontal position on the page. Enter a value in the Vertical text box corresponding to the bookmark's vertical position on the page.

Settings for Scroll View: Measure, Scale View to, Staff Set, Staves

This group box appears when "Assign to: Scroll View" is selected. The settings reflect the score setup when you enter this dialog box.

Click the checkboxes for the settings you want remembered for this bookmark. In the Measure text box, enter the number of the measure that the bookmark will be assigned to. (This is the measure number that Finale displays in Measure controls in the document window.) "Scale View to" is the size the score displays on the screen. Enter a valid Scale View percentage. Either choose a Staff Set option to associate the bookmark with all staves or a staff set at the selected Measure, or use the Staves option to name an individual staff associated with the bookmark at the indicated Measure.

Add

Click Add to add the bookmark.


Add Measures

Use this dialog box to add measures to the end of the piece.

How many measures

Type the number of measures that you want to add to the end of the piece.


Add Note Durations
Add - Note Durations

Use this dialog box to change the note durations of the selected notes by a fixed amount.

Add

Type the amount, in 1024ths of a quarter note, to increase or decrease the durations of the selected notes. Positive numbers shift the Start or Stop times forward in time; negative numbers shift them back in time.

Start Times

Changes the Start Times by the specified amount; otherwise, keeps the current Start Times. Positive numbers delay the attack and shorten the note; negative numbers anticipate the attack and lengthen the note.

Stop Times

Changes the Stop Times by the specified amount; otherwise, keeps the current Stop Times. Positive numbers lengthen the note's duration; negative numbers shorten the note's duration.


Additional PostScript Infomation
Additional PostScript Information

Use this dialog box to embed information in the header of the PostScript file. This information can be viewed only by opening the PostScript file in a word processor.

Date

Type the date you want to appear in the PostScript file. The current date appears as the default.

For

Type your name or other information that you want to appear in the PostScript file.

See also: Compile Postscript Listing


Adjust Baselines

Use this dialog box to change the position of the lyrics to a specified distance from the staff. The lyric position is measured from the baseline of the font (the invisible line upon which the bottom of the words align).

Set Piece Offsets to Default Font

Restores all lyric baselines to their original position.

Type: Verse, Chorus, Section

Click one of these options to specify the lyric type (Verse, Chorus, or Section) to adjust.

Number

Specifies the Verse (or Chorus, or Section) whose baseline you want to move up or down.

Offsets: Piece

Type a positive number to move the lyric baseline up, or a negative number to shift the baseline down in all staves in the piece.

Offsets: Staff; Prev, Next

Type a positive or negative number to shift the lyric baseline in one particular staff. Click the Prev and Next buttons to specify the staff you want.

Offsets: Staff System; Prev, Next

Type a positive or negative number to shift the lyric baseline in one particular staff system. Click the Prev and Next buttons to specify the system you want.

Total Offset

This indicator displays the final position for the lyric type, number, staff and system, as measured from the middle line of the staff.


Adjust Page Range

Use this dialog box to specify which pages you want updated when you adjust the page size or page margins on one page in the Page Layout Window.

Page Range

Determines whether to change the settings for all pages, or only the pages you specify. Enter the page numbers that define that page range you want.

Adjust Left or Right Pages Only

Determines whether to change only the left (odd-numbered) pages or the right (even-numbered) pages. When selected, and you specify all pages or an odd-numbered page as the first page in the page range, Finale updates all of the left pages in the range. If you specify an even-numbered page as the first page in the page range, Finale updates all of the right pages in the range.


Adjust Staff System Range

Use this dialog box to specify which staff systems you want updated when you adjust a single staff system in the score (such as indenting it, dragging it up or down, and so on) in the Page Layout Window.

All Systems, Systems __ Through __

Determines whether to change the settings for all staff systems, or only the staff systems you specify. Enter the numbers that define that staff system range you want. Hint: The staff systems are numbered in the Page Layout Window.


Align Time Tags To Note Starts

Use this dialog box to adjust the Transcription Window's tag information more precisely with the recorded notes.

Search Width

Specify, in thousandths of a second, the maximum distance a time tag may be from a note and still "belong" to that note. If a note falls within that distance the time tag is adjusted.

See also: Transcription


Alter Feel - Key Velocities

Use this dialog box to modify key velocities on particular beats by a fixed amount.

Downbeats by

Type the amount (as a positive or negative number, or as a percentage) to affect the key velocity of the first note of each measure. Positive numbers or percentages greater than 100 increase the velocities; negative numbers or percentages less than 100 decrease the velocities.

Other Beats by

Type the amount (as a positive or negative number, or as a percentage) to affect the key velocities of all beats (except the first) in each measure. Positive numbers increase the velocities; negative numbers decrease the velocities.

Backbeats by

Type the amount (as a positive or negative number, or as a percentage) to affect the key velocities of unstressed beats (for example, the second 8th note of each beat in 4/4 time). Positive numbers increase the velocities; negative numbers decrease the velocities.

Absolute

Uses the numbers as actual MIDI values.

Percent of Original

Uses the numbers as percentages of the notes' original MIDI values.


Alter Feel - Note Durations

Use this dialog box to shift the attack (in time) of notes by shifting the Start and Stop Times on particular beats by a fixed amount.

Downbeats by

Type the amount (in 1024ths of a quarter note, or as a percentage) to affect the notes on the first beat. Positive numbers or percentages greater than 100, shift the notes forward in time; negative numbers or percentages less than 100, shift the notes backward.

Other Beats by

Type the amount (in 1024ths of a quarter note, or as a percentage) to affect the notes on all beats (except the first) in each measure. Positive numbers shift the notes forward in time; negative numbers shift the notes backward.

Backbeats by

Type the amount (as a positive or negative number, or as a percentage) to affect the notes on unstressed beats (for example, the second 8th note of each beat in 4/4). Positive values shift notes forward in time; negative values shift them back.

Absolute

Uses the numbers as actual MIDI values.

Percent of Original

Uses the numbers as percentages of the notes' original MIDI values.


Alteration for Slot

Use this dialog box to modify each occurrence of the selected note or notes.

Slot: Prev, Next

Click the Prev or Next button to move through the notes (slots) in the selection. You can specify a different transposition for each note.

Set All

Modifies all the selected notes in the same manner.

No Transposition

Keeps the current pitches of the selected note or notes.

Transpose

Lets you specify the transposition of the selected note or notes.

Enharmonic

Changes the spelling of the selected note or notes.

See also: Search and Replace


Alternate Notation

Use this dialog box to display the music in the selected region in normal (standard) music notation or an alternative style of notation.

Slash Notation

Hides the music in Layer 1, and replaces it with evenly-spaced, stemless slashes which appear on each beat in the measure.

Rhythmic Notation

Converts every note or chord in Layer 1 to a slash or diamond-shaped notehead that is beamed and stemmed in the same rhythm.

Blank Notation

Hides the music in Layer 1.

One-Bar Repeat(s)

Hides the music in all layers, and displays a one-measure repeat symbol in each measure.

Two-Bar Repeat(s)

Hides the music in all layers, and displays a two-measure repeat symbol for each pair of measures.

Normal Notation

Displays the music in all layers in standard music notation.

Selected Region Only

Affects the music only in the region you selected.

Selected Region Through End of Piece

Affects all music from the beginning of the selected region to the end of the score.


Apply Articulation

Use this dialog box to apply an articulation to the note or notes in the selected region.

Articulation

Type the number of the articulation that you want to apply to the notes in the selected region. If you don't know its number, click Select.

Select

Click this button to select an articulation from the full Articulation Selection dialog box.

All Notes

Applies the symbol to every note in the selected region.

Notes Within the Range of Durations

Applies the symbol only to notes having the specific note values selected in the From and Through palettes.

From, EDUs

Using this palette, select the smallest note value you want affected. Click the dot to change the duration to a dotted rhythm value. To specify a note value not pictured, type a rhythmic value in the EDUs text box (in 1024ths of a quarter note).

Through, EDUs

Using this palette, select the largest note value you want affected. Click the dot to change the duration to a dotted rhythm value. To specify a note value not pictured, type a rhythmic value in the EDUs text box (in 1024ths of a quarter note).

Include Notes that Start a Tie

Makes the articulation appear on all selected notes, even those on which a tie begins; otherwise, the articulation does not appear on any note on which a tie begins.

Include Notes that Continue or End a Tie

Makes the articulation appear on all selected notes, even those on which a tie ends; otherwise, the articulation does not appear on any note on which a tie ends.

Additional Positioning: H, V

Type a distance in H to place the selected articulation marking farther to the right or left than usual. A negative number moves the marking left.

Type a distance in V to place the selected articulation marking higher or lower than usual. A negative number moves the marking down.


Array Overview

The following dialog boxes are very similar. Click a dialog box name for specific information.

Multiple Passes for Ending

Multiple Passes for Repeat

Sample List for Executable Shape


Articulation Designer

Use this dialog box to create new symbols or change existing symbols, their placement, or playback in the score.

Articulation, arrow controls

This number indicates the current articulation you're editing. To edit a different articulation, click the up or down arrows on the arrow controls.

Main: Shape, Character

This symbol will appear on the note you clicked in the score. To change it to another shape or font character, click Shape or Character then click Main.

Flipped: Shape, Character

This symbol is the "upside-down" version, if required, of the Main symbol. To change it to another shape or font character, click Shape or Character then click Main.

Symbols: Set Font

Click this button to change the font used for the Main and Flipped symbol.

Symbol Options: When Placed Above the Note

Use this drop-down list to specify which symbol (Main or Flipped) appears when the symbol is attached above the note.

  Symbol Options: When Placed Below the Note

Use this drop-down list to specify which symbol (Main or Flipped) appears when the symbol is attached below the note.

Symbol Options: Copy the Main Symbol

(Only available when Position Manually is selected.) Lets you copy the symbol horizontally (for trills) or vertically (for rolled chords); otherwise, the symbol appears only once (and cannot be copied by dragging the articulation's handle). Hint: For trill markings, use the Smart Shape trill instead.

Playback Effect

Use this drop-down list to specify the effects, if any, this articulation will have on playback. You can change the attack, duration and key velocity. Choose None to disable all three playback effects for the articulation.

Playback Effect: Top Note Value, Bottom Note Value

Type a number to indicate how much playback effect you want this articulation to have on the top or bottom note of a chord. Hint: Leave the Bottom Note Value text box set to zero if you want the Top Note Value to apply to the entire note or chord.

Playback Effect: Values are Percentages

When selected, the numbers in the Top Note and Bottom Note Value boxes are expressed as percentages of normal notes.

Positioning: Avoid Staff Lines

Ensures that this articulation's handle never falls on a staff line.

Positioning: Always Place Outside Staff

Ensures that this articulation's handle won't fall within the staff lines; If not selected, it may fall within the staff lines.

Positioning: Attach to Top Note

(Only available when Position Manually is selected.) Attaches the articulation to the top note of a chord. If not selected, the articulation is attached to the bottom note.

Positioning: Center Horizontally

Automatically centers the articulation on the note; If not selected, it appears where you click.

Positioning: Position

Use this drop-down list to specify how this marking will be positioned: above or below a note, on the notehead or stem side, or manually.

Positioning: Default Vertical Position

Type the vertical distance to position this articulation relative to the note or staff. A negative number moves the articulation down from a note or in toward the staff; a positive number moves the articulation up from a note or away from the staff.

Positioning: Handle Positioning

Click this button to specify additional automatic-positioning information for the articulation symbols.

See also:

Apply Articulation

Articulation Selection


Articulation Selection

Use this dialog box to select, edit, create, duplicate, or delete articulations.

Selection boxes

Click an articulation to select it. Use the scroll bars to display more articulations. The slot number for an item appears in the left corner of each box; sometimes you can type a marking's slot number instead of selecting it from this selection box. A number may also appear in the right corner of a box; this number, which is enclosed in parenthesis, indicates the metatool that was assigned to the marking. (To use a metatool in the score, press the number and click a note to assign the marking.)

Select

Adds the current articulation to the score.

Edit

Lets you change the appearance or definition of the selected articulation.

Create

Lets you design a new articulation.

Duplicate

Creates a new articulation, which is an exact duplicate of the currently selected articulation. You can then edit the articulation, and either change its symbol or change its placement settings slightly.

Delete

Deletes the selected articulation from the document. If the marking appears in the score, you'll be given the opportunity to switch it to another marking, or delete every occurrence of it from the score.


Augmentation Dot

Use this dialog box to fine-tune the placement of augmentation dots in your music.

Space Between Dot and Note

Sets the horizontal distance between a notehead and the first dot on a dotted note.

Space Between Dots

Sets the horizontal distance between the dots on notes with more than one dot.

Vertical Adjustment of Dot

Adjusts the vertical placement of the dot -- measured from Finale's default placement of the dot between two staff lines.

Horizontal Adjustment for Upstem Flags

Sets the horizontal distance between a notehead and the first dot on upstem flagged notes.

Adjust Dot for Multiple Voices

Determines whether Finale automatically adjusts the vertical placement of dots in multiple layer and inner voice situations (where stems are frozen up). If selected, Finale places dots below the staff line when necessary.

See also: Options Menu


Backward Repeat Bar Assignment

Use this dialog box to define how the 'Backward' repeats affect the playback of your piece.

Measure

This displays which measure the repeat appears in.

Target Measure

Type the number of the measure that you want playback to skip to.

Repeat Action: Always Jump

Makes playback skip to a specific spot in the score every time this repeat is reached.

Repeat Action: Jump on Total Passes

Makes playback skip to a specific spot in the score only on a certain repetition of the music (as indicated in the Total Passes text box). For example, use this option for a '3rd time to Coda' repeat.

Repeat Action: Repeat until Total Passes

Makes playback skip to a specific spot in the score every time it reaches this repeat, until the music has played the number of times indicated in the Total Passes box. For example, use this option for a '1., 2., 3.' ending.

Total Passes

Type the number of times playback should reach this repeat before performing the Repeat Action you've specified above.

Reset on Repeat Action

Resets this repeat's internal 'counter' to 0 after the Total Passes number has been reached; otherwise, the counter is unchanged so that this repeat has no effect after the Total Passes is reached. This option is useful for nested repeats.

Individual Positioning

Allows this repeat's bracket to stretch beyond one measure length, and allows the bracket to be positioned independently in every staff; otherwise, the bracket maintains the same position in every staff, and will no longer stretch beyond one measure length.

Relative Jump

Indicates that Finale should jump forward or backward from the current location. Finale jumps the number of measures entered in the Target Measure text box.


Barlines

Use this dialog box to control the appearance of barlines, and control when to display barlines in the score.

Heavy Line Thickness

Set the thickness of the heavy line used for the Final and Solid barlines.

Thin Line Thickness

Sets the thickness of the thin line used for barlines.

Space Between Double Barlines

Sets the distance between the two lines used for Double barlines.

Space Between Final Barlines

Sets the distance between the two lines used for Final barlines.

Dash Length

Sets the length of the dash used for dashed barlines. Enter a larger value to lengthen the dash. Enter a smaller value to shorten the dash.

Dash Space

Sets the space between dashes used for dashed barlines. Enter a larger value to widen the gap between dashes. Enter a smaller value to narrow the gap between dashes.

Display Left Barline on Single Staves

Determines whether to draw the left barlines in each staff system that contains only a single staff, such as a solo line. When unselected, Finale will omit the left barline on a single staff in a staff system.

Display Left Barline on Multiple Staves

Determines whether to draw the left barline in staff systems that contain two or more staves, such as a piano part. When unselected, Finale will omit the left barline on two or more staves in a staff system.

Display All Barlines

Determines whether to make all barlines visible in the score.

Close Barline at End of Each System

Determines whether to ignore the regular staff grouping at the end of each staff system, and draw the barline you selected for the end of each staff system through all the staves.

Close Barline at End of Piece

Determines whether to ignore the regular staff grouping in the last measure, and draw the barline you selected for the last measure of the piece through all the staves.


Baseline Shift

Use this dialog box to adjust the vertical position of the selected text without affecting the spacing between lines.

Amount

Enter the amount, in measurement units, that Finale should shift the selected text characters vertically above or below the baseline. A negative value lowers the text, and a positive value raises it.


Beam Extension Selection

Use this dialog box to specify which beams you want to extend and to set up beaming over barlines.

Extend Selected Beams

Lets you drag the specified beam: 8th - 4096th. Click to select the beam(s) you want to extend. Any beam not selected cannot be extended.


Beaming Chart

Use this dialog box to specify the beaming for a mirrored measure.

Beaming Chart for Frame

Displays the ID number of the current Frame.

Handles

Handles appear for each beamed or flagged note (eighth note or smaller). Select a handle to break the beam between the selected note and the previous note. To beam all the notes together, click the first handle.

See also: Tilting Mirror


Beat Chart Element

Use this dialog box to specify the precise beat or sub-division of a beat for which you want to control the spacing within the measure.

Beat Chart Element

Displays the ID number of the Beat Chart handle you selected. The handles are numbered in order from left to right.

Elapsed Duration

Type a number, in EDUs (1024ths of a quarter note), to specify which beat (or sub-division) you want to control with the Beat Chart handle. The number must be within the displayed range.

Position

Displays, in the selected Unit of Measurement, the position of the first entry of that beat (or sub-division) within the measure. The Position must fall within the specified Position Range for that beat (or sub-division).

End Position

Displays, in the selected Unit of Measurement, the position of the last entry of that beat (or sub-division) within the measure. The Position must fall within the specified Position Range for that beat (or sub-division).

Minimum Position

Displays, in the selected Unit of Measurement, the first possible position of the first entry of that beat (or sub-division) within the measure. The Position must fall within the specified Position Range for that beat (or sub-division).

Duration Range

Displays, in EDUs, how close to the beginning of the measure (and to the end of the measure) you can drag the selected Beat Chart handle's lower positioning handle.

Position Range

Displays, in the selected Unit of Measurement, the total positioning range available for the entries in the selected beat (or sub-division). The range extends to the beat chart handles on either side of the current handle.

Total Duration

Displays, in EDUs,  the duration of the measure according to the time signature.

Total Width

Displays the total width available, measured from position of the first beat chart handle to the position of the last beat chart handle.

See also:

Mass Edit

Measure Attributes


Bracket

Use this dialog box to add one or more brackets to a staff group.

Bracket

Click to choose a bracket style. Double-click to select a bracket and return to the score.

Bracket (text box, arrow controls)

If there is more than one bracket on the staff group, type the number of the bracket you want to edit. Or, click the up or down arrow to display the bracket you want to edit.

Positioning: Distance from the Left Edge of Staff

Type a negative number to specify the bracket's horizontal distance from the staff.

Positioning: Vertical Adjust (Top of Bracket)

Type a number to specify the top of the bracket's vertical distance from the top of the staff. A positive number raises the top of the bracket above the staff; a negative number drops the top of the bracket below the staff.

Positioning: Vertical Adjust (Bottom of Bracket)

Type a number to specify the bottom of the bracket's vertical distance from the bottom of the staff. A positive number raises the bottom of the bracket; a negative number lowers the bottom of the bracket.

Add, Delete

Click add to add a new bracket to this staff group. Click Delete to remove the current bracket from the staff group.


Bracket Style

Use this dialog box to select which type of bracket you want to add when you use the Bracket Tool in the Shape Designer.

Bracket palette

Click to select a bracket style. Double-click a bracket to select it and return to the Shape Designer.

See also: Shape Expression Designer


Change Articulation Assignments

Use this dialog box to change one articulation to another, or adjust the positioning of all articulations or the articulation you select.

Position All Articulations

Adjusts all articulations in the selected region, according to your specifications.

Position Selected Articulation: Select

Adjusts each occurrence of a particular articulation, according to your specifications. To specify the articulation you want to change, type its number in the text box or click Select and choose the symbol in the Articulation Selection dialog  box.

Change All Articulations (or Selected Articulation) to Articulation: Select

The articulation you specify here will replace every occurrence of the one selected above. If you don't want to exchange symbols, leave this check box unselected. To specify the replacement articulation, type its number in the text box, or click Select and choose the symbol in the  Articulation Selection dialog  box.

Add to (drop-down list)

Use this drop-down list to specify whether the numbers in the H and V text boxes should move the markings away from their current positions (Add to Current Position) or their original default positions (Add to Default Position).

H, V

Type the amount by which you want to move the articulations horizontally (H) and vertically (V). A negative number in H moves markings left; a negative number in V moves markings down.


Change Barlines

Use this dialog box to change the barlines, or to set or remove multimeasure rest breaks in the selected region.

Change Barline

Changes the style of barlines in the selected region. Click a barline style in the palette to specify the new barline style.

Break a Multimeasure Rest

When gray, leaves the multimeasure rest breaks at their current settings.

When unchecked, removes any multimeasure rest breaks.

When checked, creates multimeasure rest breaks at the specified interval.

Change Every ___ Measure(s)

Type a number to specify which barlines you want to change in the selected region: every barline (1), every other (2), every eighth (8), and so on.


Change Chord Assignments

Use this dialog box to change chord symbol transposition, playback, position, and display.

Show: Root

Determines whether the Roots will appear. When gray: leaves the Root at current settings. When unselected: the Root will not appear. When selected: the Root will appear.

Show: Root - Lowercase

Determines whether the Root appears in uppercase or lower case. When gray: leaves the chord display at their current settings. When unselected: the Roots will be uppercase. When selected, the Roots will be lowercase.

The Lowercase setting for chord roots affects playback, unless a chord suffix is selected. When no chord suffix is selected, Finale plays a major triad for uppercase chord roots and a minor triad for lowercase chord roots.

Show: Chord Suffix

Determines whether the Chord Suffixes will appear. When gray: leaves the Chord Suffix at current settings. When unselected: the Chord Suffix will not appear. When selected: the Chord Suffix will appear.

Show: Alternate Bass

Determines whether the Alternate Bass notes will appear. When gray: leaves Alternate Bass at current settings. When unselected: the Alternate Bass will not appear. When selected: the Alternate Bass will appear.

Show: Alternate Bass - Lowercase

Determines whether the Alternate Bass note appears in uppercase or lower case. When gray: leaves the chord display at their current settings. When unselected: the Alternate Bass notes will be uppercase. When selected, the Alternate Bass notes will be lowercase.

Show: Alternate Bass - Put Under Root

Determines whether the alternate bass appears fraction-style beneath the chord (checked) or slash-style to the right of the chord (unchecked).

Play: Chord Suffix, Root, Alternate Bass

Determines whether any portion of the chord plays back. When gray: leaves Chord Suffix, Root, or Alternate Bass at their current settings. When unselected: Chord Suffix, Root, or Alternate Bass won't play. When selected: Chord Suffix, Root, or Alternate Bass will play back.

Hide Fretboard

Determines whether individual fretboards on chords will be hidden. When gray: keeps the current settings. When unselected: fretboards will appear. When selected, fretboards will be hidden.

 Note: To display fretboards on all chords in the piece, Show Guitar Fretboards must be selected in the Chord menu.

Transpose

Click the Transpose button and select a transposition to transpose chord symbols without changing key. The checkbox indicates whether you have selected a transposition.

Add to

Use this drop-down list to specify whether the numbers in the H and V text boxes should move the markings away from their current positions (Add to Current Position) or their original default positions (Add to Default Position).

H, V

Type the amount by which you want to move the chord symbols horizontally (H) and vertically (V). A negative number in the H text box moves chord symbols left, a negative number in the V text box moves chord symbols down.


Change Chord Suffix Fonts

Use this dialog box to change font characteristics for all chord suffixes.

Search for: All Fonts, Selected Fonts; Font, Size, Style, Set Font

Determines whether to change all fonts or selected fonts and font characteristics. Click Set Font to select the font characteristic(s) you want to change.

Replace with: Font, Size, Style, Set Font

Determines what font characteristics to apply. Click Set Font to select the font characteristics(s) to apply.

Fix Chord Suffix Spacing

Adjusts the spacing of the characters in each suffix (to compensate for new fonts or sizes).

Fix Baseline Positioning

Adjusts the vertical position of the characters in each suffix so that they align with the same baseline.


Change Clef

Use this dialog box to change the clef for one or more measures.

Clef Palette

Click a clef in the palette to change the clef.

Create a Clef Change at Beginning of Measure

Places the new clef at the beginning of the measure.

Create a Movable Mid-measure Clef

Places the new clef (which you can drag anywhere in the measure) at the beginning of the measure.

Measure Region: Measure Through,  Measure Through End of Piece

Determines the range of measures in which to change clef by typing values in the text box.


Change Measure Width

Use this dialog box to change selected measures to a fixed, wider, or narrower width.

Set all selected measures to

Click this button and type the measure width you want in the text box.

Add to all selected measures

Click this button and type the width you want to add to or subtract from the measures in the text box. Enter positive numbers to widen the measures; negative numbers to narrow them.


Change Note Durations

Use this dialog box change note duration values.

Change All Note Durations by

Changes the value of all notes by the same percentage (for example, 200% doubles them).

Change Selected Note Duration: From, To

Changes every occurrence of one value (From) to another (To), leaving other values unchanged (for example, change every quarter note to a half note).

Include Tuplets

Select Include Tuplets to change the durations of tuplets (triplets, quintuplets, and so on) as well as normal (non-tuplet) notes.

Rebar Measures

Select Rebar Measures to redistribute the notes (after changing their values) so that each measure still contains the correct number of beats.


Change Noteheads

Use this dialog box to change the noteheads in the selected region to regular noteheads or to the notehead you specify.

Find: All Noteheads, All Custom Noteheads, Selected Notehead; Select

Determines what noteheads will be changed. Choose All Noteheads to change all regular and custom noteheads in the selected region; choose All Custom Noteheads to change every custom notehead  in the selected region; choose Selected Notehead to change only the notehead you specify in the selected region. To specify a particular notehead, enter its keyboard equivalent in the text box, or click Select to choose the notehead in the Symbol Selection dialog box.

Change to: Regular Noteheads, Selected Notehead; Select

Determines the replacement noteheads to use for the specified noteheads in the selected region. Choose Regular Noteheads to change the noteheads to regular noteheads; choose Selected Notehead to change the noteheads to the notehead you specify. To specify a particular notehead, enter its keyboard equivalent in the text box, or click Select to choose the notehead in the Symbol Selection dialog box.

See also: Mass Edit/Change Menu


Change Note Size

Use this dialog box to change the size of notes in the selected region.

Resize Notes to

Enter the percentage by which you want to enlarge or reduce the size of notes in the selected region, relative to normal size (for example, entering 50 reduces them to half their normal size).


Change Positioning

Use this dialog box to change the note-spacing method for the selected measures.

According to the Time Signature

Spaces the music in the selected measures evenly according to the time signature.

Manually (by Dragging)

Provides no spacing for the music in the selected measures.

Position Notes Evenly Across Measure

Select this option to space the notes evenly across a measure regardless of the number of notes in the measure. Hint: This option is very useful for cadenzas or measures containing tremolos.


Change Staff Expression Assignments

Use this dialog box to change one staff expression to another, or adjust the positioning of all expressions or the expression you select.

Position All Staff Expressions

Adjusts all expressions in the selected region, according to your specifications.

Position Selected Staff Expressions: Select

Adjusts each occurrence of a particular expression, according to your specifications. To specify the expression you want to change, type its number in the text box or click Select and choose the marking in the Staff Expression Selection dialog  box.

Change All Staff Expressions (or Selected Staff Expression) to Staff Expression: Select

The expression you specify here will replace every occurrence of the one selected above. If you don't want to exchange markings, leave this check box unselected. To specify the replacement expression, type its number in the text box, or click Select and choose the marking in the Staff Expression Selection dialog box.

Add to (drop-down list)

Use this drop-down list to specify whether the numbers in the H and V text boxes should move the markings away from their current positions (Add to Current Position) or their original default positions from the noteheads (Add to Default Position).

H, V

Type the amount by which you want to move the expressions horizontally (H) and vertically (V). A negative number in H moves markings left; a negative number in V moves markings down.


Character Settings

Use this dialog box to select the font settings as well as the baseline shift, superscript and tracking settings for the selected text in your score. This is a three-state dialog box, so that you can change certain character formatting such as the font without changing other formatting such as the font size.

Font

Select a font from the scroll box, or type its name. The icon to the left of the font name indicates the type of font: the "T" icon indicates a TrueType font, and the printer icon indicates a PostScript font.

Font Style

Select the font style from the scroll box.

Size

Select the font size from the scroll box, or type its number.

Effects

Select the font effects. Strikeout and Underline are standard options. Outline and Shadow are provided for compatibility with Finale files created on the Macintosh; they can be used in Compiled PostScript Listings only. When Fixed Size is selected Finale maintains the specified font size, regardless of the resizing of music elements in your score.

Sample

This text displays how your font settings will look in the score.

Baseline Shift

Enter value to adjust the vertical position of the selected text without affecting the spacing between lines.

Superscript

Enter a value to adjust the vertical position of the selected text. If necessary, the spacing between lines adjusts by the same amount.

Tracking

Enter the amount of horizontal space, in ems, that Finale should leave between characters for the selected text. One em is equivalent to 1/1000 of the point size.


Check Document Fonts Against System Fonts

Use this dialog box to reassign or maintain font assignments for fonts that are embedded in the document but not installed on your computer system.

Select Another Font

Displays the Font dialog box in which you can select another font for the element.

Remove the Font From the List

Reassigns the font for the element to a default font (determined) by the system. Hint: If you want to use a font other than the system default font, use the option below.

Select Another Font and Then Remove the Font From the List

Displays the Font dialog box in which you can select another font, and removes any assignment of the missing font.

See also: Data Check


Check Graphics

Use this dialog box to display the location and full name of all graphics files placed into your score.

Note: Finale doesn't actually embed graphics in your Finale document when you place a graphic directly into the score or into the Shape Designer. Instead, it places a link to the graphic's location on your computer.

Scrolling List: Missing Graphics, Found Graphics

Finale searches for the path and name of each graphics file placed in the current document. Any missing graphics appear at the top of this list, followed by the original path and full name of each missing graphics file.

Found graphics appear in the list after any missing graphics in the file. The first line shows the original path and full name of the graphics file. A second line will appear if Finale is unable to locate the file in its original location, but finds the graphic in a new location. This line is indented, and begins with "Found in", then lists the path of the directory where the file was located.

Copy List to Clipboard

Copies the contents of the scrolling list into the clipboard. You can then paste the contents into a word processing program, and print the list if you want a printed reference. This can be useful if you'll be printing from another system, and want to make sure that all the graphics are available for printing.


Chord Definition

Use this dialog box to specify a new chord symbol or edit the selected chord symbol. Type the chord symbol into the Chord Symbol text box, or enter the root, alternate bass note, and suffix into separate text boxes.

Chord Symbol

Type the chord's root with any alteration (# or b), followed by the suffix. If you want an alternate bass to appear for the symbol, type a slash (/) or underscore (_) followed by the alternate bass note and alteration.

Pay attention to capitalization as you type: Finale displays chords like "F" or "e" or "IV" or "iii".  Capitalization also matters in suffixes -- it's how Finale distinguishes a "CM7" from "Cm7".

See Type Into Score (Chord menu) , which provides a table of keystrokes for typing chord symbols.

Settings: Root Scale Tone

To display the chord's root, click this box. Displays the chord's root. To hide the root, click this box to uncheck it. Type the scale degree for the root of the chord. Hint: In C major, 1 = C, 2 = D, 3 = E, 4 = F, 5 = G, 6 = A, 7 = B.

Settings: Root Scale Tone - Alteration

Type a number to change the root by the specified number of sharps or flats. Enter positive numbers to raise (sharp) the note; negative numbers to lower (flat) the note.

Settings: Root Scale Tone - Listen

To specify the chord's root by playing it (instead of typing numbers), click this button.

Settings: Root Scale Tone - Lowercase

Select Lowercase if you want the Root Scale Tone to appear in lowercase. For example, if you're using the Roman display chord style, select Lowercase to display minor chords (ii, iii, and so on) in the score. Finale ignores lowercase settings when displaying Nashville and Solfeggio chord styles, which follow different conventions.

The Lowercase setting for chord roots affects playback, unless a chord suffix is selected. When no chord suffix is selected, Finale plays a major triad for uppercase chord roots and a minor triad for lowercase chord roots. Similarly, this setting affects whether Finale displays a major or minor fretboard, when Show Guitar Fretboards is selected in the Chord menu.

Settings: Alternate Bass

To display the chord's alternate bass (the D in Em7/D), click this box to uncheck it. To hide the alternate bass, click this box. Type the scale degree for the alternate bass of the chord. In C major, 1 = C, 2 = D, 3 = E, 4 = F, 5 = G, 6 = A, 7 = B.

Settings: Alternate Bass - Alteration

Type a number to change the alternate bass (the D in Em7/D) by the specified number of sharps or flats. Enter positive numbers to raise (sharp) the note; negative numbers to lower (flat) the note.

Settings: Alternate Bass - Listen

To specify the chord's alternate bass (the D in Em7/D) by playing it (instead of typing numbers), click this button. The alternate bass will be placed after the chord, separated by a slash.

Settings: Alternate Bass - Put Under Root

The alternate bass (the D in Em7/D) will normally be placed after the chord, separated by a slash. To place it under the chord, fraction-style, click this box.

Settings: Alternate Bass - Lowercase

Select Lowercase if you want the Alternate Bass note to appear in lowercase. For example, if you're using the Roman display chord style, select Lowercase to display minor chords (ii, iii, and so on) in the score. Finale ignores lowercase settings when displaying Nashville and Solfeggio chord styles, which follow different conventions.

Settings: Chord Suffix ID - Select

To select a chord suffix or edit the selected suffix, click this button or type the ID of the chord suffix you want to use. Click the "Select" button to display the available suffixes.

Settings: Chord Suffix ID - Listen

To specify the chord's suffix by playing it, click this button.

Play: Chord Suffix

To hear the chord suffix during playback, select this box.

Play: Root

To hear the chord root during playback, select this box.

Play: Alternate Bass

To hear the chord's alternate bass during playback, select this box.

Hide Fretboard

Use this checkbox to hide individual fretboards. When selected, Finale hides the fretboard for the current chord symbol. When not selected, Finale will display the fretboard for the selected chord when Show Guitar Fretboards is selected in the Chord menu.

Note: To display fretboards on all chords in the piece, Show Guitar Fretboards must be selected in the Chord menu.


Chord Suffix Editor

Use this dialog box to create and edit chord suffixes.

Display Area

Displays the chord symbol as it will appear in the score. Drag a handle to move the currently selected character.

Show Handles

Determines whether the small handle on each character appears in the Display Area. You can move characters without handles by dragging where the handle would appear.

Update

Determines whether the character appears continuously as you drag it or updates the Display Area after you drag the character to position.

Set Play

To set what notes play when the chord symbol plays. Setting playback helps Finale to recognize chords.

Set Font

To set or change the font of the current character. (You can set the font to use for each character globally by clicking "Chord: Symbol" in the Select Default Fonts dialog box.

Symbol

To select or type the next character to use in the chord symbol. If the next ‘character' is a two-digit number, such as the 11 in 7(#11), type 11 and select Number (below Symbol).

Number

To specify that the character in the Symbol box is a two-digit number, such as the 11 in 7(#11).

Prefix with: Flat, Sharp, Minus, Plus

To attach a prefix to a character, such as the # in the suffix 7(#11). Click flat, sharp, minus, or plus to determine which prefix.

H, V

Enter the distance between the display's vertical line (H) or horizontal line (V) and the current character. Larger numbers move the character right or up; smaller numbers move the character left or down. Positive and negative numbers may be used.

Prev

To move to the previous character in the chord suffix.

Next

To move to the next character in the chord suffix.

See also:

Chord Definition

Chord Suffix Selection


Chord Suffix Selection

Use this dialog box to select, edit, create, duplicate, or delete chord suffixes.

Selection boxes

Click a chord suffix to select it. Use the scroll bars to display more chord suffixes. The slot number for an item appears in the left corner of each box; sometimes you can type a marking's slot number instead of selecting it from this selection box.

Select

Selects the current chord suffix for the chord you're defining.

Edit

Lets you change the definition of the selected chord suffix.

Create

Lets you design a new chord suffix.

Duplicate

Creates a new chord suffix, which is an exact duplicate of the currently selected chord suffix. You can then edit the chord suffix, and either change its symbol or change its placement settings slightly.

Delete

Deletes the selected chord suffix from the document. If the suffix appears in the score, you'll be given the opportunity to switch it to another suffix, or delete every occurrence of it from the score.


Clef Designer

Use this dialog box to create or modify clefs.

Clef: Prev, Next

Displays which of the score's eight clefs (numbered 0 to 7) you are editing. Prev: To display information for the previous clef. Next: To view information for the next clef.

Symbol

Determines which symbol will represent this clef. Hint: It's easier to click Symbol and choose from a palette than it is to enter the letter that corresponds to the music font symbol you want.

Middle C Position (from Top Staff Line)

Determines the number of scale steps that represents the distance between the clef's "Middle C" line and the top staff line.

Clef Position (from Top Staff Line)

Determines the number of scale steps that represents the distance between the clef's baseline and the top staff line.

Extra Distance for Mid-measure Clef

Makes clefs appear higher or lower when they occur as a reduced-size, mid-measure clef change. Enter the number of scale steps for the extra distance in the number box. (A negative number moves the clef down.)


Clef Selection

Click to select one of the score's eight clefs.

See also: Change Clef


Click and Countoff

Use this dialog box to specify a countoff click for recording with HyperScribe or playing back using the Playback Controls. You can also determine how many measures to count off, and define two separate metronome click sounds for the down beat and other beats in your music.

Countoff

Use this drop-down list to specify when Finale plays a countoff metronome click. "Always" counts off a specified number of measures before recording with HyperScribe or playing back with the Playback Controls. "While Recording" counts off only when you're recording with HyperScribe. "While Playing" counts off only when you're playing back with the Playback Controls. Choose "Never" if you don't want any countoff at all.

Measures

Enter the number of measures you want Finale to count off before starting to record with HyperScribe or play back using the Playback Controls. Enter 1 if you want one measure counted off, 2 to hear two measures, and so on.

Click

Use this drop-down list to determine when Finale plays a metronome click to indicate the beat in your music. "Always" plays a metronome click while recording with HyperScribe and playing back with the Playback Controls. "While Recording" plays a metronome click only when recording with HyperScribe. "While Playing" plays a metronome click only when playing back with the Playback Controls. Choose "Never" if you don't want any metronome click to sound while recording or playing back.

Note: Finale will always sound a metronome click while playing the countoff measures.

Source

Use this drop-down list to specify the type of MIDI signal for the Metronome Sound. In general, you'll probably choose a MIDI note rather than a MIDI event for the down beats and other beats. To distinguish the down beat click from that of other beats, you might want to choose a short percussive sound or a high note. Choose MIDI Data if you want to use something other than a MIDI Note for the metronome click.

Metronome Sound - Down Beats, Other Beats, Listen

The labels for the Down Beats and Other Beats text boxes change if you choose MIDI Data; you'll see Channel, Status, Data1, Data2, and Duration, instead of Channel, Note, Velocity, and Duration, which appear when MIDI Note is selected. To have Finale enter the MIDI information automatically, click Listen in the Down Beats or Other Beats row, then play the note or trigger the MIDI event that you're planning to use for the metronome click. Finale will automatically enter all values except Duration for you; if you prefer, you can type these values yourself.


Click Assignment

Use this window to enter lyrics into your score by clicking on the notes.

Lyric Type and Number

The title bar shows the type of lyric (verse, chorus, or section) and which lyric is selected. Use the vertical scroll bar to specify which verse, chorus or section you want to enter. Hint: Change Lyric Types (Verse, Chorus or Section) in the Specify Current Lyric dialog box.

Auto Update

Select Auto Update if you want the measure to be widened as you click the lyrics in. The measure only widens if the syllable collides with another syllable in the measure. Hint: It's quicker to leave Auto Update unselected, and then apply a Music Spacing command in the Mass Edit menu.

Lyric Display

Displays the current lyric. The next word or syllable to be entered appears on the left side of the window. Use the horizontal scroll bar to move through the lyrics.


Click Input

Use this dialog box to determine where Finale will listen for a rhythmic (or tempo) tap during a transcription.

Input Code: Listen

Type the MIDI codes that specify the rhythmic tap or (much easier) click Listen and play the MIDI input you are using for a rhythmic tap.

Ignore First Data Byte

Determines whether any key (or controller) or a specific key (or controller) will be used to record Time Tags. Don't select this box if you plan to record both Time Tags and a keyboard performance simultaneously.

Second Data Byte Greater Than Zero

Determines whether or not a Time Tag is recorded each time you tap a key, regardless of the key velocity. Only deselect this option when Time Tags are being generated by a drum machine.

See also: Transcription


Click Output Type

Use this dialog box to instruct Finale to provide a click track (or metronome).

Send MIDI Sync

Transmits MIDI Sync signals to external sequencers during playback.

Send MIDI, Channel,  Start Code, Stop Code, Listen

Produces an audible click during playback or recording. Enter the MIDI Channel, Start Code ("click on"), and Stop Code ("click off") for sending the click signal or (much easier) click Listen and play a click signal on your MIDI instrument.

Click Duration

Sets the duration for each click, in thousandths of a second.


Compile PostScript Listing

Use this dialog box to create a PostScript listing.

Compile: Score, Parts

Determines whether the full score (default) or each part in the score is compiled.

Page Range: All, From to

Compiles the specified pages (All, by default, or a range) in the score or parts. To specify a range of pages, enter the first and last pages in the From and to number boxes.

Orientation: Portrait, Landscape

Determines whether the document appears in Portrait (tall) orientation, which is the default setting, or in Landscape (wide) orientation.

Page Size: Letter, Legal, Tabloid, A4, B5

Determines whether your document will be set to print on US Letter size (default), US Legal size, US Tabloid, A4 Brief, or B5 Brief size pages.

Max Height

Determines the height, in the current unit of measurement, that the printer should use for each page. The height automatically changes when you select a page size.

Max Width

Determines the width, in the current unit of measurement, that the printer should use for each page. The width automatically changes when you select a page size.

Center Music on Page

Determines whether to center the printed image on the page or tiled page.

Tile Pages

Determines whether to use as many pages as needed to print the full image.

Manual Feed

Determines whether the printer should wait for each hand-fed sheet of paper or use the paper tray.

Include Fonts in Listing

Determines whether to include the fonts in use within the file, so you won't have to download them separately.

Specify Additional PostScript Information

To enter the date and text for the header of the PostScript listing.


Composite Time Signature

Use this dialog box to create complex time signatures.

Beat Groups

Determines the upper part of the time signature. Enter the number or series of numbers that define the upper half of the composite time signature. You can use plus signs (+) and decimal points (.).

Beat Duration

Determines the lower part of the time signature. Enter the number or series of numbers that define the lower half of the composite time signature.

Use EDUs for Beat Durations

Determines whether to interpret the beat duration values as EDUs. When selected, enter the duration in EDUs instead of entering the numbers that you want to appear in the lower half of the composite time signature. For example, to specify a dotted quarter as the beat duration, enter 1536 (1024 EDUs = quarter note, plus 512 EDUs = eighth note for the dot value).

Clear

Changes the current composite time signature back to a regular time signature.

See also: Time Signature


Copy Measures

Use this dialog box to specify how many times you want to copy the selected measures.

How many times

Type the number of times you want the specified measures copied.


Copy MIDI Data

Use this dialog box to specify how many times you want to copy the selected measures of MIDI data.

How many times

Type the number of times you want the specified measures of MIDI data copied.


Custom Frame

Use this dialog box to select a custom shape for text to flow into for the text block.

Display Area

Displays the elements of the text block that are selected in the Show group box.

Shape: Select

Sets the ID number of the custom shape that the text will be flowed into or around. Click Select and choose from a palette to select an existing shape or to draw a new one.

View

Sets the amount by which to magnify or reduce the display (as a percentage of actual size). Use the drop-down list to enlarge or reduce the display.

Show: Handle, Shape, Text

Determines whether to show the frame's handle, custom shape, and actual text in the display. Selecting Shape also determines whether the bounding shape will appear in your score and on printout.

Distance from Handle: H, V

Determines the horizontal and vertical offsets for the text block's handle relative to the text itself.

Inset Text

Enter the distance, in measurement units, that you want the text to be inset from the custom shape. This value is always used, even if you don't show the shape.


Cut Measures

This alert appears if you choose Cut from the Edit menu when complete measures are selected with the Mass Mover Tool.

Clear the Selected Measures, Replacing Their Contents With Rests

Replaces the music in the selected measures (in the selected staves) with rests.

Delete the Selected Measures and Measure Contents For All Staves in the Score

Removes the selected measures and the music in those measures, for every staff in the score.


Cut Music

This alert appears if you choose Cut from the Edit menu when partial measures are selected with the Mass Mover Tool.

Clear the Selected Notes and Rests, Replacing Them With Rests

Replaces the selected music with rests.

Delete the Selected Notes and Rests, Then Rebar the Music

Deletes the selected music, and then rebars the music according the settings in the Rebar Options dialog box.

See also: Rebar Options


Curves

Resolution:

Type a number here to represent the quality of ties as drawn on the screen.

1 = lowest quality, fastest screen drawing

128 = highest quality, slowest screen drawing

Hint: It's faster to select one of the Resolution options below.

Lower Resolution - Faster Drawing

Draws ties at their poorest screen quality, but makes them appear on the screen faster.

Hint: This setting does not affect printouts on PostScript printers.

Medium Resolution

Draws ties at a medium screen quality, taking a medium amount of time to appear on the screen.

Hint: This setting does not affect printouts on PostScript printers.

High Resolution - Slower Drawing

Draws ties at their best screen quality, but makes them appear on the screen more slowly.

Hint: This setting does not affect printouts on PostScript printers.

Thickness:

Type the thickness you want for your ties when displayed on the screen.

Hint: This setting does not affect printouts on PostScript printers.


Dashed Line

Dash Length

Type a number to specify how long you want each segment of the dash to be.

Space

Type a number to specify how much space should appear between each segment of the dash.

Unit of Measurement

Use this drop-down list to specify the units of measurement for the dash.

Reset

To set the dash settings back to the default dash specified in the Options menu, click this  button.

See also:

Shape Designer

Shape Expression Designer


Data Check

Use this dialog box to perform a variety of "housekeeping" tasks, mostly having to do with fonts and Finale's retention of deleted music.

Check Document Fonts Against System Fonts

Eliminates dimmed names from this document's font list and allows you to substitute accessible fonts for missing ones.

Swap One Font For Another

Searches for every occurrence of one font and size, and replaces each with another font and size.

Scale One Font To Another

Searches for every occurrence of a font, and replaces each with a larger or smaller size.

Remove Deleted Items

Makes the file smaller by discarding notes and rests, measures, and staff systems you've already deleted.

Swap Fonts in Shapes

Determines whether Finale will search shapes, as well as text, for font changes when you select any of the data check options relating to fonts. When not selected, Finale only searches text--such as text expressions, lyrics, staff and group names, headers and footers--for font changes, but does not search for fonts used in shapes -- such as shape articulations or shape expressions. When selected, Finale will search text and shapes thoroughly for font characters embedded in shapes.

Note: When Swap Fonts in Shapes is selected, any data check operation may take slightly longer, depending on the number of shapes and the fonts used in the shapes.


Default Tuplet Visual Definition

Use this dialog box to change the default notation for all new tuplets.

Number: Nothing, Number, Ratio

Use this drop-down list to specify whether to show a number, a ratio, or no mark on the tuplet.

Shape: Nothing, Slur, Bracket

Use this drop-down list to display the tuplet with no shape appearing over it, or with a slur or bracket.

Placement: Manual, Beam Side

Use this drop-down list to place the tuplet using the values in this dialog box, then manually position the tuplet on the notes in the score. Or, if Beam Side is selected and you create a tuplet on beamed notes, Finale automatically places the tuplet on the beam side and matches the beam angle.

Use Bottom Note

To attach the tuplet figure to the bottom note (when the tuplet begins with a chord).

Break Slur or Bracket

To create a gap in the center of the slur or bracket, allowing room for the number.

Ignore Format Offset

To display the tuplet number in its usual place, regardless of tuplet setting in Document Options dialog box.

Allow Horizontal Drag

Determines whether you can drag each part of the tuplet horizontally on-screen.

Match Length of Hooks

Determines whether the tuplet shape is symmetrical. When selected, and you drag to shorten or lengthen one hook, Finale automatically draws the other hook the same length.

Auto Bracket

Determines whether to place only numbers on beamed groups of notes and a number with bracket or slur on unbeamed groups. If this option is not selected, Finale always places numbers and shapes according to the Number and Shape settings.

Number: H:, V:

Adjusts the horizontal and vertical position of the tuplet number displayed in the score.

Shape: H:, V:

Adjusts the bracket in relation to the tuplet number. To move the bracket closer to or further away vertically from the note, enter a smaller or larger value for V:. Enter a smaller or larger value for H: to decrease or increase the gap left for the tuplet number in the middle of the bracket or slur when "Break Slur or Bracket" is selected.

Left Hook, Right Hook

Sets the length of the left or right hook on a tuplet bracket or slur. Enter a negative value to drop the hook down from the bracket. If Match Length of Hooks is selected, Finale uses the Left Hook value for each hook.

Left Extension, Right Extension

Extends the bracket or slur beyond the position of the notes. Enter larger values to lengthen the bracket or slur.

Slope

Sets the angle of the bracket or slur. Enter a positive value to make the right side higher than the left. Enter a negative value to make the right side of the tuplet lower than the left.

Ignore Format Offset

To display the tuplet number in its usual place, regardless of the tuplet setting in the Document Options dialog box.

To attach the tuplet figure to the bottom note (when the tuplet begins with a chord).

Display: Number Only, Number With Slur, Number With Bracket

To show no visual indication that this is a tuplet; To show only the number (such as the 3 over a triplet); To show the tuplet number centered within a slur; To show the tuplet number centered within a bracket.


Delete Blank Pages

Use this dialog box to remove blank pages from any point in your score. When you delete blank pages (pages that do not contain music), items such as titles or text blocks that were assigned to that particular page will also be deleted.

Page Region

Determines whether to delete blank pages only from the pages you specify, or from the current page through the end of the piece. Enter the page numbers that define the page range you want to delete blank pages from.

Tip: When you're working with Facing Pages that have different left and right page margins, delete two pages at a time to maintain the correct margins.


Document Options

Use this dialog box to control miscellaneous options that are saved with the file.

Display Score in Concert Pitch

Determines whether all staves (even transposing instruments, like trumpets) appear as non-transposing C instruments or as transposing instruments.

Display Expressions for Extracted Parts

Determines whether Score Expression markings appear in the score the same as they appear in extracted parts (if you've made them different from those in the full score).

Draw Flat Beams

Determines whether all angled beams are perfectly horizontal or angled with their notes.

Display Reverse Stemming

Determines whether changes you've made to stem positioning using the Reverse Stem Tool appear.

Include Rests in Beam Groups

Determines whether to extend the beams over rests within a beat (or to break the beams).

Display Half-Stems for Beamed Rests

Determines whether to draw partial stems on rests crossed by beams (or to hide the stems).

Include Seconds in Time Stamp

Determines whether to include seconds as part of a time stamp (1:15:00). Create a time stamp using the Text Tool.

Scale Manual Positioning of Notes

Determines whether to store the positions of dragged notes relative to the measure's overall width (instead of by the actual distance moved). Leave this box unchecked for new Finale 3.5.1 documents.

Display Courtesy Key Signature at End of Staff System

Determines whether a courtesy key signature appears at the end of one line when a new key signature begins the next.

Date Format

Use this drop-down list to specify a format for date stamps. Create a date stamp using the Text Tool.

Display Courtesy Time Signature at End of Staff System

Determines whether a courtesy time signature appears at the end of one line when a new time signature begins the next.

Display Courtesy Clef at End of Staff System

Determines whether a courtesy clef appears at the end of one line when a new clef begins the next.

Slash Flagged Grace Notes

Determines whether to draw a small slash through the flags of each unbeamed grace note.

Display Cross-Staff Notes in Original Staff

Determines whether cross-staff beaming you've created using the Note Mover Tool appears.

Cancel Outgoing Key Signature

Determines whether to show naturals before the barline to "cancel" an outgoing key signature.

In C, Display Naturals at Start of Staff System

Determines whether courtesy naturals appear at the beginning of a line where there's a key change to C.

Redisplay Key Signature If Only Mode is Changing

Determines whether to display key signature when changing between two keys with identical key signatures but different modes (from C minor to E-flat major, for example).

Display Clef Only on First Staff System

Determines whether to display the clef on the first staff system only for lead sheets (or to display the clef at the start of every staff system).

Display Key Signature Only on First Staff System

Determines whether to display the key signature on the first staff system only for lead sheets (or to display the key signature at the start of every staff system).


Dot Offsets

Use this dialog box to precisely adjust the position of the dot on a dotted note or rest.

H Offset, V Offset

Determines the dot's horizontal and vertical distance from its default position. Positive numbers move the dot right and up; negative numbers move it left and down, respectively.

Inter-Dot Spacing

Determines the distance between dots.

Delete

Restores the position of the selected dots to their default position.


Duration Allotment

Use this dialog box to edit or create an Allotment Library that controls how much space to give the notes in your music. See "Note spacing" in the Finale Encyclopedia for more information.

Duration Allotment, Prev, Next

Displays the ID number of the current duration/width setting in the library. Click Prev or Next to display the previous or next duration's width.

Duration

Determines the note duration for which to set a width. Click Duration to select the duration from a palette or enter the note duration (in 1024ths of a quarter note) in the number box.

Allotment

Determines how much space you want to appear after notes with the specified duration.

Insert, Delete

To insert or delete the specified duration's width in the library.

See also: Music Spacing Options


Edit Learned Chords

Use this dialog box to "teach" Finale chords.

Display Area, Prev, Next

Displays the current learned chord. Click Prev and Next to display the other learned chord.

Set Key

Changes the key signature so the chord can be recognized in another key. (since learned chords are scale degree-specific).

Learn

Teaches Finale a new learned chord. You'll be asked to play the chord on your MIDI instrument.

Delete

Deletes the currently displayed learned chord.

Find

Searches for and displays a specific learned chord. You'll be asked to play the chord on your MIDI instrument.

Edit

Edits the current learned chord. The Chord Definition dialog box appears, where you can change the way the chord appears in the score.


Edit Lyrics

This window displays lyrics in the same fonts and styles that will appear on the screen and on printout. The Edit and Text menus are available when the window appears so you can copy and paste text, change fonts and styles, and carry out other editing tasks.

Lyric: Verse, Chorus, Section

Specifies the lyric type for display and editing.

Lyric: Number

Sets which Verse, Chorus, or Section you want to edit.

Show Hidden Commands

Determines whether to display the hidden commands (codes) in the text for font changes, and other Text menu settings. When selected, all text and hidden commands appear in the Edit Lyrics window in a single text font. When this option is not selected, the lyrics appear in the window as they will appear on your printed page.

Revert

Click to discard any edits made to the lyrics since you entered this window.

See also:

Text menu

Edit menu


Edit Text

This window displays text in the same fonts and styles that will appear on the screen and on printout. A rectangle around a portion of text indicates an insert command was used to display the date, composer, or similar text items. The Edit and Text menus are available when the window appears so you can copy and paste text, change fonts and styles, and carry out other editing tasks.

Editing: [Item Type], [Text ID]

These settings identify the type of text block you're currently editing - full or abbreviated staff or group name, or text block created with the Text Tool appears first (Item Type). The text's Finale-assigned number also appears.

In one instance, arrow controls appear next the text ID number. (Click the Text Tool. With no text block selected, choose Edit Text from the Frame menu.) Use the arrow controls to cycle through all the text blocks in the score.

Show Hidden Commands

Determines whether to display the hidden commands (codes) in the text block for inserts, font changes, and all other Text menu settings. When selected, all text and hidden commands appear in the Edit Text window in a single text font. When this option is not selected, the text appears in the window as it will appear on your printed page.

Revert

Click to discard any edits made to the text since you entered this window.

See also:

Text menu

Edit menu


Edit Major and Minor Key Spellings

Use this dialog box to define the enharmonic spelling of non-diatonic notes in major and minor keys in your piece. These settings are used if "Use Spelling Tables" is selected in the Enharmonic Spelling submenu.

These tables refer to the notes as scale degrees rather than as actual note-names in a scale. This is because one table is used for all major keys and another for all minor keys. Each fixed scale degree is numbered, starting at step 1, which is the tonic (C in the key of C major, D in D major, and so on), up to step 7. Notes outside the scale (altered scale steps) entered in your piece will be raised or lowered by a half-step according to your settings.

Major keys: Fixed Scale Step, Altered Scale Step, Raise, Lower

Determines the spellings for the altered scale steps in all major keys used in your piece. Notes appear as scale degrees rather than as actual note-names in a scale because the same table is used for all major keys. The key signature determines the spelling of all notes (fixed scale steps) in the major scale.

For the notes outside the regular scale (altered scale steps), choose whether you want to spell the note as a raised or lowered interval. For example, if you select Raise 1 for the half-step between Fixed Scale Steps 1 and 2 (C and D in C major, D and E in D major, and so on), Finale displays the note as a raised interval when it's entered in your score. If you select Lower 2, the same half-step between Fixed Scale Steps 1 and 2 will be displayed as a lowered interval.

Minor keys: Fixed Scale Step, Altered Scale Step, Raise, Lower

Determines the spellings for the altered scale steps in all minor keys used in your piece. Notes appear as scale degrees rather than as actual note-names in a scale because the same table is used for all minor keys. The key signature determines the spelling of all notes (fixed scale steps) in the minor scale.

For the notes outside the regular scale (altered scale steps), choose whether you want to spell the note as a raised or lowered interval. For example, if you select Raise 1 for the half-step between Fixed Scale Steps 1 and 2 (C and D in C minor, D and E in D minor, and so on), Finale displays the note as a raised interval when it's entered in your score. If you select Lower 2, the same half-step between Fixed Scale Steps 1 and 2 will be displayed as a lowered interval.


Edit Modal or Chromatic Spellings

Use this dialog box to change the enharmonic spelling of chromatically altered notes in modes and chromatic scales, created in the Non-Standard Key Signature dialog box. These settings are used if "Use Spelling Tables" is selected in the Enharmonic Spelling submenu.

Step, Raise, Lower

This table sets the enharmonic spelling for the twelve steps of a chromatic scale, allowing you to define spelling for modes. Step 1, the tonic note of the scale, does not change. The enharmonic spelling is used only for non-diatonic notes (those that are outside the scale). Otherwise Finale uses the key signature to spell the notes.

Click the Raise or Lower button for each step to specify the enharmonic spelling. For example, if you click Raise for step 2, Finale displays the note as a raised interval when it's entered in your score. If you select Lower, the note will be displayed as a lowered interval.


Edit Page Offset

Use this dialog box to change the page number displayed in the selected Page Number insert.

Add to Current Page Number

By default, Finale assumes that the pages in a document are numbered consecutively from page one. To display alternate page numbers, enter a number to add to Finale's current page number.

For example, if you start a movement in a new file, you might want to start numbering the first page of the new file at page 5; in this case enter 4 in the text box (page 1 of the current file, plus 4 pages offset).

Finale updates the contents of inserts each time the screen is redrawn. An outline appears around inserts to remind you of their special function.


Elapsed Time

Use this dialog box to display the total time required to play the selected region. Hint: This information is useful when composing music that must last an exact amount of time such as jingles for commercials.

Time at the Beginning of Measure

Displays the first measure of the selected region, and the time required to play from the beginning of the piece up to that measure.

Time at the End of Measure

Displays the last measure of the selected region, and the time required to play from the beginning of the piece up through that measure.

Elapsed Time of Section

Displays the total time required to play the selected region.


Enclosure Designer

Use this dialog box to specify the enclosure you want to use around text elements including measure numbers and staff and score expressions.

Display Area

Displays the shape that will enclose the text element in your score.

Shape

Determines the shape to enclose your text element. The choices include None (no shape), Oval, Triangle, Rectangle and so on.

Line Thickness

Determines the line thickness, in the current Unit of Measurement, for the enclosure.

Height, Width

Specifies the height and width of the shape.

Center H, V

Specifies where the center of the shape is. When they are set to zero, the shape is centered around the text. Otherwise the shape is offset from the text.

Options

Determines whether there are any special restrictions placed on the shape. Enforce Minimum Width indicates that the width of the shape can not be less than the shape's height. Match Height and Width allows the shape to maintain the same dimensions, regardless of which handle is being used to reshape it. None allows the shape to stretch without any restrictions. This setting is useful for squares and circles.

Fixed Enclosure Size

When selected, prevents the shape from expanding or shrinking to accommodate the number of characters in the text element. Hint: Use this option for Rehearsal letters if you want the shape to be the same size throughout the score.


Ending Repeat Bar Assignment

Use this dialog to specify the appearance and playback of ending repeats (repeat brackets for numbered endings).

Ending Text (Optional)

Specifies alternate text to appear under the ending bracket. Use for example if you want "1." to appear in your score instead of "1" (without a period). If you do not enter any text, Finale displays the number indicated in Total Passes.

Target Measure

Specifies the measure of the next ending or the next section to jump to if this ending has already been played.

Total Passes

Specifies which ending this is, and which time it should be played. For example, enter 1 for a first ending, 2 for a second ending, and so on.

Individual Positioning

Specifies that an ending bracket can be adjusted in one staff without affecting the appearance of the brackets in any other staff.

Multiple

Determines whether the ending is used more than once, and which times it should be played. For example, 1, 3, 5 indicates that the ending should be played the first, third, and fifth time the ending is encountered.

Jump if Ignoring Repeats

Determines whether Finale should take a repeat, such as a first ending repeat, unconditionally -- even if Ignore Repeats is selected in the Playback Options dialog box.

Relative Jump

Indicates that Finale should jump forward or backward from the current location. Finale jumps the number of measures entered in the Target Measure text box.


Entry Items

Use this dialog box to copy or erase any element of your music without disturbing the remaining elements (erasing the lyrics while keeping their notes, for example).

Entries

Determines whether to include notes and rests (and everything attached to them, if you're erasing). You'll be asked whether you want to modify the copied material in some way.

Articulations

Determines whether to include articulations (such as accents and staccato marks).

Chords

Determines whether to include chord symbols.

Lyrics

Determines whether to include lyric syllables.

Staff Expressions

Determines whether to include Staff Expressions (such as dynamic markings).

Slurs (Assigned to Notes)

Determines whether to include any slurs that are assigned to notes. (Use the Measure Items dialog box to include slurs that are assigned to measures.)

Notehead and Percentage Alterations

Determines whether to include changes to the sizes of notes and changes to the positions of noteheads and accidentals.

Performance Data

Determines whether to include any MIDI playback (velocity and note duration) data created with the Transcription, HyperScribe, or MIDI Tools.

Tuplet Definitions

Determines whether to include tuplet information (triplets, quintuplets, and so on).

Beam Extensions

Determines whether to include extended or shortened beams (that you created using the Beam Extension Tool).

Secondary Beam Breaks

Determines whether to include any changes you've made with the Secondary Beam Break Tool (of the Special Tools Tool).

Stem and Beam Alterations

Determines whether to include changes you've made to beams or stems using the Stem Length, Custom Stem, Broken Beam, Beam Angle, and Secondary Beam Angle Tools (of the Special Tools Tool).

Dot and Tie Alterations

Determines whether to include changes you've made to dots or ties using the Special Tools Tool.

Entries in Other Staves

Determines whether to include cross-staff notes' status. Copying: These notes will become normal notes. Erasing: these notes will remain cross-staff notes. Includes tuplet information (triplets, quintuplets, and so on).

Clefs

Determines whether to include the starting clef and any clef changes.

All, None

To select or deselect all checkboxes.


Entry Modifications

Use this dialog box to modify music that you are copying.

Check Accidentals

Determines whether to correct instances in the copied material where an accidental improperly appears on a tied note.

Freeze Stems: Up, Down

Determines whether to create a copy in which all note stems point up or down.

Reanalyze Harmonics

Determines whether to restore chromatic notes in the copied material to their default enharmonic spellings.

Rebeam

Determines whether to beam eighth notes (and smaller values) in the copied material in a new beaming pattern.

Remove Reverse, Split, Double and Freeze Stemming

Determines whether to remove stemming changes in the copied music (that you made using the Special Tools Tool).

Transpose

Determines whether to transpose the copied material up or down.


Erase Layers

This alert appears if you choose Move Layers from the Mass Edit menu, then set up the options so that you'd be copying over music that already exists.

OK

Overwrites the music in the layer you're copying the music into with the music in the specified layers.

Cancel

Cancels the operation, and returns you to the score without making any changes.


Executable Shape Designer

Use this dialog box to define executable shape playback characteristics.

Shape ID

Determines the shape that will govern the playback characteristics. Click Shape ID to select a shape from the Shape Selection dialog box, or type the ID of the shape you want to edit.

Time Scale

Sets the ratio that indicates how long the effect of the shape lasts. For example, if you draw a shape that spans two eighth grid points in the Shape Designer, enter 4:1 to make it last an entire measure.

Level Scale

Sets the ratio that indicates the amount of your shape's effect. For example, if you drew a shape that sloped up by 5 tempo grid points, enter 4:1 to make it increase the tempo by 20 beats per minute.

Sample Rate

Type a higher number here to make the playback change less smooth. This technical parameter is primarily useful for Restrike Keys effects.

Use List

Determines whether this Executable Shape affects playback on specific beats only. This technical parameter is primarily useful for Restrike Keys effects.

Repeat Count

Determines the number of extra times you want the Executable Shape to repeat itself.

Log All

Determines whether the shape affects playback on every beat (regardless of whether its contour has changed). This technical parameter is primarily useful for Restrike Keys effects.

Quit at End of Sample List

Determines whether to cycle through the Sample Rate: Use List until the end of the shape or to run through the list once. "Use List" must be selected. This option is useful in conjunction with Restrike Keys effects, which can be used for trills and tremolos.


Executable Shape Selection

Use this dialog box to select, edit, create, duplicate or delete executable shapes which can be used to define playback effects.

Selection boxes

Click an executable shape to select it. Use the scroll bars to display more executable shapes. The slot number for an item appears in the left corner of each box; sometimes you can type a marking's slot number instead of selecting it from a selection box.

Select

Selects the current executable shape for the expression's playback definition.

Edit

Lets you change the definition of the selected executable shape.

Create

Lets you design a new executable shape.

Duplicate

Creates a new executable shape, which is an exact duplicate of the currently selected shape. You can then edit the executable shape and change its symbol playback settings slightly.

Delete

Deletes the selected executable shape from the document. If the shape is being used in the score, you'll be given the opportunity to switch it to another shape, or delete every occurrence of it from the document.


Explode Music

Use this dialog box to distribute the music from a selected region of measures among existing or newly created staves.

Split Into Staves

Determines the number of staves into which you want the selected music split.

Staff Overload Order

Determines the order of the staves (1 = the top staff) in which to place any extra notes.

Use These Clefs

Determines which clefs to use for each of the newly created exploded staves. Enter the clef ID numbers (0-7).

New Staves Added to Bottom of Score

Places the "exploded" music into newly created staves added to the bottom of your score. If "Use These Clefs" is selected, the new staves appear in the indicated clefs.

Existing Staves Starting at Top Staff of Selection

Places the "exploded" music into existing staves. The music appears starting at the top staff of the selection, and in the staves directly below it, as needed. Note: If you place the music into existing staves, the music in the selected region for those staves will be lost.


Export Selection/Pages

Use these dialog boxes to export a selection of your score or pages of your score into a graphics file format usable in other programs such as word processing or desktop publishing programs. These files can be saved as Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) or TIFF (TIF) graphics file types.

Whether you choose Export Selection or Export Pages from the Graphics menu, the dialog box settings are the same, except for the title. The difference between the dialog boxes is that you're either exporting a selected region on the current page (or range of pages) using the Export Selection dialog box, or you're exporting an entire page (or range of pages) using the Export Pages dialog box.

Type: EPS, TIFF

Specifies the type of graphics file Finale will create.

Pages: All, From__ to__

Determines whether to export every page of your score to a graphics file, or whether to export the specified range of pages. Note that each page is saved to a separate graphics file.

File Names: Generate names from, Prompt for each name.

Determines whether to generate filenames automatically, or whether to prompt for each filename.

If Finale is generating the filenames, it uses what you type in to the text box as  a prefix; enter the file's path and title in the text box, followed by a number sign (#), which will be replace by a sequential number for each file (if you're exporting more than one page). Select Prompt for each name if you want Finale to ask you for a title each time a file is created.

PostScript Options - Include TIFF Preview

Determines whether to include a TIFF image of the page for display in other computer applications.

PostScript Options - Include Fonts in Listing

Determines whether to include the fonts in use in the document, so you won't have to download them separately.

TIFF Resolution

Determines the resolution of the TIFF file. Choose a value from the drop-down list or enter a value between 1 - 3000 dpi into the text box; the higher the value, the better quality of printout you'll obtain.

Note: The higher the resolution you select, the larger the resulting files will be. If your printer has trouble printing TIFF files, choose a lower resolution when exporting files - perhaps 300 dpi to match the resolution of your printer, or 72 dpi to match the resolution of your monitor.


Extract Parts

Use this dialog box to specify which staves or groups of staves to extract and how you want to extract them.

Staves

Use this list box to select which staves you want to extract. Use the scroll bar to display additional staves. Click to select a staff; Shift-click to select another staff and all staves between them; Ctrl-click to add any other staff to the selection, or to remove a selected staff from the selection.

Groups

Use this list box to select which groups of staves you want to extract. Use the scroll bar to display additional groups. Click to select a group; Shift-click to select another group and all groups between them; Ctrl-click to add any other group to the selection, or to remove a selected group from the selection.

Music Layout - Fit ___ Measures Per System

Determines whether to display the same number of measures in each system. When selected, the number of measures you specify will appear in each staff system in the extracted part. When not selected, the number of measures placed in each system varies depending on the length of the measures.

Music Layout - Preserve Current Spacing, Apply Beat Spacing, Apply Note Spacing, Apply Time Signature Spacing

Determines whether to space the notes and measures of the extracted part to avoid collisions and maximize the amount of music per page by beat, by note, or evenly by beat according to the time signature and the current measure width. You can also maintain the same spacing as the score (Preserve Current Spacing).

Music Layout - Music Spacing Options

Displays the Music Spacing Options dialog box which defines the rules that are applied when beat or note spacing is applied.

File Names - Generate Names From, Prompt For Each Name

When Generate Names From is selected, Finale automatically names all the extracted-part files, using the title that you enter into the text box as a prefix; It also saves all part files into the same directory. When Prompt For Each Name is selected, you must specify the path and file name before Finale extracts the next part.

Page Format

Click this button to display the Page Format for Parts dialog box, in which you can modify the page formatting for the parts. Finale displays the settings you specify using the Page Format for Parts command in the Document Settings submenu of the Options menu.

Multimeasure Rests

Click this button to display the Multimeasure Rest dialog box, in which you can modify the appearance of multimeasure rests displayed in the parts. Finale displays the settings you specify using the Multimeasure Rests command in the Document Settings submenu of the Options menu.

Options

Click this button to display the Page Options dialog box, in which you create a staff or group name header for each extracted part, and choose what text-related items you want to appear in the parts.

See also:

Page Options

Page Format for Parts

Multimeasure Rest

Music Spacing Options

Page Layout Menu


File Info

Use this dialog box to enter and display descriptive and statistical information about the current file.

Title, Composer, Copyright, Description

Enter the title of the piece, the composer's name, copyright information, and a document description that contains file-specific information that you may want to refer to later on. If you're sending the file to a publisher, for example, you might use the file description area to communicate information about the fonts that were used in the file.

Created, Modified: Initials, Date, Application

Enter the initials of the file's creator and modifier. Finale automatically provides the creation and modification dates, the name of the application (Finale) and platform (Macintosh or Windows) that created the file, and the application version number.

Statistics

Click to display the File Statistics dialog box which displays statistical information about the content of your file such as the number of measures.

See also: File Statistics dialog box


File Statistics

Use this dialog box to display the number of active frames (layers that contain music within each measure). Hint: This can provide useful billing information for Finale music copyists.

Pages, Staff Systems, Measures

Displays how many pages, staff systems and measures are in your piece.

Active Frames

Displays the total number of all active frames in your piece. An active frame is a layer that contains music. You can have up to four layers of music per measure, so one measure could contain up to four active frames (or no active frames). This count also includes all frames in which rests were manually entered. (Finale automatically displays whole rests in empty measures, but these are not considered "entered" rests.)

Non-Whole Rest Active Frames

Displays the total number of active frames in your piece, except the measures in which whole rests were manually entered. (Finale automatically displays whole rests in empty measures, but these are not considered "entered" rests.)


Fill

Use this dialog box to specify how to "color in" a Shape Designer shape.

Fill

Sets the amount of shading between 0 (white) and 100 (black).

Display Area

Displays the shape's shading defined by the fill percentage or the scroll bar.

Solid Fill (PostScript Only)

Determines whether to fill the entire shape when you print on a PostScript printer.

See also:

Shape Designer

Shape Expression Designer

Staff Expression Assignment

Score Expression Assignment


Filter Channels

Use this dialog box to combine selected notes from several different sequencer tracks onto a single staff.

Key Range: Track/Channel

Displays the MIDI track and channel numbers you want transcribed.

Low

Sets the MIDI key number (middle C = 60) of the lowest note you want to transcribe from the current MIDI track and channel.

High

Sets the MIDI key number (middle C = 60) of the highest note you want to transcribe from the current MIDI track and channel.

Listen

Lets you specify the key range by playing. Play the low note, and then the high note to set up the MIDI note numbers.

See also:

Track/Channel Mapping

Track/Channel Mapping to Staves

Transcribe MIDI File


Finale Registration

Use this dialog box to personalize your copy of Finale. This information will then appear in the About Finale dialog box.

Name

Type in your name here. You must enter at least one character.

Serial Number

Type in your serial number here. You must enter at least ten characters.


Fit Music

Use this dialog box to force selected measures onto one staff system or to set the number of measures per staff system for the selected region. This function is only available in page view.

Measures Per System

Fits the selected measures into staff systems by the number of measures specified.

Fit Selected Measures into One System

Fits the selected measures into one staff system.


Fixed Split

Use this dialog box to specify how you want a MIDI File's track separated when you transcribe it onto a staff.

Key Range: Low, High, Listen

Determines the lowest and highest notes to include for the staff. You can specify up to four ranges, but be sure to set the corresponding Number of Splits. Click Listen to play the range on your MIDI instrument.

Number of Splits

Determines how many staves to create for the track. You can specify between one and four staves.

See also: Track/Channel Mapping


Fixed Split Point

Use this dialog box to designate a MIDI key number as the split point for a two-handed HyperScribe or Transcription session.

Split at MIDI Note, Listen

Sets the split point MIDI key number. All notes below this key will appear on the lower staff (Middle C = 60). Click Listen to specify a split-point by playing the note on your MIDI instrument.


Floating Quantization

Use this dialog box to set rounding-off levels on a beat-by-beat basis.

Beat Subdivisions: No Tuplets, Mix Rhythms, Space Notes Evenly in Beat

When No Tuplets is selected, transcribes only even divisions of a beat (eighth notes, 16ths, 32nds, and so on). When Mix Rhythms is selected, transcribes both tuplets and even divisions of a beat (your playing must be very precise). When Space Notes Evenly in Beat is selected, transcribes both tuplets and even divisions of a beat based on how many notes you played within the beat. For example, in common time, if you play an eighth note and two sixteenths, Finale transcribes an eighth-note triplet. If you play four sixteenths (or an eighth note and a sixteenth-note triplet), Finale transcribes four sixteenth notes for the beat.

Smallest Tuplet

Determines the smallest tuplet value to transcribe.

Sensitivity Level

Determines the finest quantization level to use.

Use Floating Quantization

Determines whether to use floating quantization.

See also: Quantization


Format Parts

Use this dialog box to adjust the layout of the parts when printed directly from the score using the File menu's Print Parts command.

First System Drop

Sets the vertical position of the first staff system on the first page of your music. Enter a negative value to specify where, measured from the top page margin, Finale should place the music.

First System Indent

Indents the first staff system on the first page of your music. Enter a positive value to specify where, measured from the left page margin, Finale should place the music.

Top Staff

Sets the position of the first staff in your music. Enter a negative value to specify where, measured from the top of the screen, Finale should place the staff. The placement of this staff affects the distance between staff systems in Page View.

First Page Drop

Sets the position of the top page margin on the first page of your music. Enter a negative value to specify where, measured from the top of the page, Finale should place the music.

Scale Pages To

Determines at what percentage of normal size the new pages appear.

Multimeasure Rest

Click to display the Multimeasure Rest dialog box where you can change the appearance of multimeasure rests created in the parts.

See also:

Print Parts

Multimeasure Rest


Font

Use this dialog box to select the font, size and style for text and music symbols in your score.

Font

Select a font from the scroll box, or type its name. The icon to the left of the font name indicates the type of font: the "T" icon indicates a TrueType font, and the printer icon indicates a PostScript font.

Font Style

Select the font style from the scroll box.

Size

Select the font size from the scroll box, or type its name.

Effects

Select the font effects. Strikeout and Underline are standard options. Outline and Shadow are provided for compatibility with Finale files created on the Macintosh; they can be used in Compiled PostScript Listings only. When Fixed Size is selected Finale maintains the specified font size, regardless of the resizing of music elements in your score.

Sample

This text displays how your font settings will look in the score.


Font Multi - state
Font

Use this dialog box to select the font, size and style for text and music symbols in your score. This is a three-state dialog box, so that you can change certain character formatting such as the font without changing other formatting such as the font size.

Font

Select a font from the scroll box, or type its name. The icon to the left of the font name indicates the type of font: the "T" icon indicates a TrueType font, and the printer icon indicates a PostScript font.

Font Style

Select the font style from the scroll box.

Size

Select the font size from the scroll box, or type its name.

Effects

Select the font effects. Strikeout and Underline are standard options. Outline and Shadow are provided for compatibility with Finale files created on the Macintosh; they can be used in Compiled PostScript Listings only. When Fixed Size is selected Finale maintains the specified font size, regardless of the resizing of music elements in your score.

Sample

This text displays how your font settings will look in the score.


Frame Attributes

Use this dialog box to control the positioning of a text block in the score, the range of pages a text block appears on, and whether it is assigned to a measure or a page (in which case you can set the text block to display on one or more pages).

If you're creating running headers or footers in your score, you might want to position text blocks differently on left and right pages. This is easily done using special positioning settings for right-facing pages.

Attach to: Page: Single Page, All Pages, Left Pages, Right Pages; Page, Through

Click Attach to: Page to assign the text block to a page. Use the Page drop-down list to have Finale show the text block on a single page, all pages, left-facing (even-numbered) pages or right-facing (odd-numbered) pages, then specify the range of pages where the text block will appear. (For example, choose Left Pages, and enter 6 Through 10 to display the text block on every left page between pp. 6-10).

Note: The Page options are only available when Attach to: Page is selected.

Attach to: Measure, [Staff names]

Click Attach to Measure to assign the text block to a measure. Enter the number of the measure that the text block will be assigned to, and use the Staff drop-down list to choose the staff you want associated with the text block. Finale aligns and positions the text block in relation to this measure and staff. When your measure layout changes, the text block moves with the measure.

Alignment and Positioning: Horizontal; Vertical; Position from; H:, V:

The alignment drop-down lists are only available for page-assigned text blocks.

Use the Horizontal drop-down list to position the text block flush with the left or right edge or margin of the page. Or, center the text block between the left and right edges or margins.

Use the Vertical drop-down list to position the text block vertically from the top or bottom of the page or the margin of the page as a header or footer, respectively. Or, center the text block between the top and bottom of the page.

Use the Position from drop-down list to have Finale calculate the text block's position starting from either the page margin or page edge.

The H: and V: text boxes are available for measure-assigned and page-assigned text blocks. Measure-assigned text blocks are positioned from the top-left of the specified measure; Page-assigned text blocks are positioned on the page, based on the drop-down selections in the Alignment and Positioning group box.

In either case, a positive number for H: moves the text block to the right; a negative number moves it to the left. A positive number for V: moves the text block higher; a negative number moves it lower.

Right Page Alignment and Positioning: Use Right Page Positioning; Horizontal; H: , V:

Select Use Right Page Positioning if you want to position a page-assigned text block differently on right-facing pages (odd-numbered) and left-facing (even-numbered) pages.

When selected, you can specify different positioning for right-facing pages; Finale uses the settings in the Alignment and Positioning group box for left-facing pages, and the settings in the Right Page Alignment and Positioning group box for right-facing pages in the score.

Use the Horizontal drop-down list to change the alignment for page-assigned text blocks on right-facing pages.

Use the H: and V: settings to change the position of page-assigned text blocks on right-facing pages.

Position from Edge of Frame

This option is selected for text blocks created in Finale 3.5 or earlier. It should not be selected for new text blocks.


Edit Bookmark

Use this dialog box to edit or delete existing bookmarks, or create new bookmarks based on the current settings and position in the score. This dialog box changes slightly depending on whether you've selected Assign to: Scroll View or Page View.

Name

Enter the name of a bookmark to be added or edited, or select the bookmark name in the Bookmarks list box.

Bookmarks

This list box contains the names of existing bookmarks. Use the scroll bars as needed to display the bookmarks. Select a bookmark in the list to edit it. Changes are updated as they are made.

Assign to: Page View, Scroll View

Assign a bookmark to Page View or Scroll View by clicking the appropriate radio button. The "Settings for" group box changes to reflect the current view.

Settings for Page View: Page, Scale View to, Horizontal, Vertical

This group box appears when "Assign to: Page View" is selected. It reflects the settings for the selected bookmark, or if you added a new bookmark, it reflects the score setup when you entered this dialog box.

Click the checkboxes for the settings you want remembered for this bookmark. In the Page text box, enter the page number that the bookmark will be assigned to. "Scale View to" is the size the score displays on the screen. Enter a valid view percentage. Enter a value into the Horizontal text box corresponding to the bookmark's horizontal position on the page. Enter a value in the Vertical text box corresponding to the bookmark's vertical position on the page.

Settings for Scroll View: Measure, Scale View to, Staff Set, Staves

This group box appears when "Assign to: Scroll View" is selected. It reflects the settings for the selected bookmark, or if you added a new bookmark, it reflects the score setup when you entered this dialog box.

Click the checkboxes for the settings you want remembered for this bookmark. In the Measure text box, enter the number of the measure that the bookmark will be assigned to. (This is the measure number that Finale displays in Measure controls in the document window.) "Scale View to" is the size the score displays on the screen. Enter a valid Scale View percentage. Either choose a Staff Set option to associate the bookmark with all staves or a staff set at the selected Measure, or use the Staves option to name an individual staff associated with the bookmark at the indicated Measure.

Add

Click Add to add a new bookmark based on the score setup when you entered this dialog box.

Delete

Click Delete to remove the selected bookmark from the list box and the score.


Edit Frame

Use this dialog box to edit the raw data associated with each note.

Frame

Shows the ID number of the current frame. A frame is a layer containing music in a particular measure. Frames are numbered in the order they are entered, not in the order of appearance.

First Entry

Shows the ID number of the first entry in the measure.

Last Entry

Shows the ID number of the last entry in the measure.

Current Entry

Shows the ID number of the current entry in the measure.

Duration

Specifies the rhythmic value of this note (in 1024ths of a quarter note). Click Duration and choose from the palette to specify a different duration.

Position

Specifies the horizontal offset from the entries default position in the measure. Enter a positive or negative number to move the entry to the right or left, respectively.

Legality

Caution: Don't click this box. When deselected, this entry and all following entries in the frame are hidden.

Note/Rest

Specifies whether the entry is a note (checked) or a rest (unchecked).

V2 Launch

Specifies whether a Voice 2 note is launched from this entry.

Voice 2

Specifies whether this note or chord is in Voice 2.

V2 Beam

Determines whether you can beam to another Voice 2 beamed entry.

Chord

Specifies whether a chord is attached to this entry.

Clef Change

This setting is used internally by Finale, and does not affect the display of the score.

Float Rest

Specifies whether the rest can be adjusted vertically on the staff.

Grace

Specifies whether this entry is a grace note.

Note Detail

Specifies whether this entry has been resized using the Resize Tool.

Articulation

Specifies whether an articulation is attached to this entry.

Staff Expr

Specifies whether a staff expression is attached to this entry.

Text Detail

Specifies whether a lyric syllable is attached to this entry.

Tuplet

Specifies whether this entry is the first note in a tuplet.

V2 Tup Para

Specifies whether this Voice 2 tuplet, if it overlaps a Voice 1 tuplet, is properly spaced.

Perf Data

Specifies whether MIDI Performance Data (key velocity or note duration) is attached to this entry.

Ignore

Determines whether this entry is shown (unchecked) or hidden (checked).

Beam Ext

Specifies whether this entries' beam has been extended using the Special Tools Tool.

Flip Tie

Specifies whether this entries' tie has been flipped in the opposite direction.

Special

   Specifies whether this entries' tie or dot has been adjusted using the Special Tools Tool.

Beam/Beat

Determines whether the note is beamed (unchecked) or not beamed (checked) to the previous note.

Sec Beam

Specifies whether this entries secondary (16th note or smaller) beams have been broken using the Special Tools Tool.

Freeze Stem

Specifies whether this entries' stem has been frozen up or down (checked) or is free to flip in any direction (unchecked).

Stem Detail

Specifies whether this entries' stem has been stretched or changed using the Special Tools Tool.

Cross Up

Specifies whether the entry has a cross-staff stem.

Reverse Up, Reverse Dn

Specifies whether this entries' upward or downward stem, respectively, has been flipped to the "wrong" side of the notehead using the Special Tools Tool.

Double Stem

Specifies whether this note or chord has a double stem (a stem pointing both up and down) created with the Special Tools Tool.

Split Stem

Specifies whether this chord's stem has been split into two stems using the Special Tools Tool.

Up/Down

Specifies whether this entries' stem, if frozen, is frozen up (checked) or down (unchecked).

Entry Slot: Prev Entry, Next Entry, Add, Delete

Displays the ID number if the current note, rest or chord. Click Prev Entry or Next Entry to view information about the previous or next note, rest or chord in the frame. Entries are numbered in the order they are entered, not in the order of appearance. Click Add or Delete to add or remove an entry from the frame.

Note ID

Specifies the current note in the chord.

Displacement

Specifies the note's pitch, expressed as the number of scale degrees away from the first note of the scale.

Raise/Lower

Specifies the chromatic alteration of the note's pitch. Enter a positive or negative number to add the corresponding number of sharps or flats, respectively.

Legality

Caution: Don't click this box. When deselected, this note and all following notes for this entry are hidden.

 Tie Start, Tie End

Specifies whether a tie begins or ends on the note.

Cross Note

Specifies whether the note has been made a cross-staff note using the Note Mover Tool.

Upstem 2nd, Downstem 2nd

Specifies whether the notehead is on the "wrong" side of the stem.

Upstem Split

Specifies whether this notes stem has been split (checked) or not split (unchecked) from the other notes in the chord.

Accidental

Specifies whether there is an accidental on this note.

(Accidental)

Specifies whether there is an courtesy accidental (an accidental in parenthesis) on this note.

Freeze Accidental

Specifies whether an accidental has been forced (checked) to appear on this note, or if the accidental is free (unchecked) to appear as musically appropriate.

Note Slot: Prev Note, Next Note, Add, Delete

If the entry is a chord, the Note Slot displays the ID number of the current note in the chord. Click Prev Note or Next Note to edit the previous or next note in the chord. The chord's notes are displayed in order from bottom to top. Click Add or Delete to add or remove a note from the chord.


Graphic Attributes

Use this dialog box to control the positioning of a graphic in the score, the range of pages a graphic appears on, and whether it is assigned to a measure or a page (in which case you can set the graphic to display on one or more pages).

If you're using running headers or footers in your score, you might want to position a graphic as a header or footer near the "outside" edges or margins of each left or right page, as opposed to always distancing the graphic from the left or right page edge (or margin). This is easily done using special positioning settings for right-facing pages.

Type, Height, Width, Path

This shows the type of graphic placed (EPS, TIFF, or WMF), the current dimensions of the graphics file, and the original path of the graphic (where it was located when you placed it into score).

Attach to: Page: Single Page, All Pages, Left Pages, Right Pages; Page, Through

Click Attach to: Page to assign the graphic to a page. Use the Page drop-down list to have Finale show the graphic on a single page, all pages, left-facing (even-numbered) pages or right-facing (odd-numbered) pages, then specify the range of pages where the graphic will appear. (For example, choose Left Pages, and enter 6 Through 10 to display the graphic on every left page between pp. 6-10).

  Note: The Page options are only available when Attach to: Page is selected.

Attach to: Measure, [Staff names]

Click Attach to Measure to assign the graphic to a measure. Enter the number of the measure that the graphic will be assigned to, and use the Staff drop-down list to choose the staff you want associated with the graphic. Finale aligns and positions the graphic in relation to this measure and staff. When your measure layout changes, the graphic moves with the measure.

Alignment and Positioning: Horizontal; Vertical; Position from; H:, V:

The alignment drop-down lists are only available for page-assigned graphics.

Use the Horizontal drop-down list to position the graphic flush with the left or right edge or margin of the page. Or, center the graphic between the left and right edges or margins.

Use the Vertical drop-down list to position the graphic vertically from the top or bottom of the page or the margin of the page as a header or footer, respectively. Or, center the graphic between the top and bottom of the page.

Use the Position from drop-down list to have Finale calculate the graphic's position starting from either the page margin or page edge.

The H: and V: text boxes are available for measure-assigned and page-assigned graphics. Measure-assigned graphics are positioned from the top-left of the specified measure; Page-assigned graphics are positioned on the page, based on the drop-down selections in the Alignment and Positioning group box.

In either case, a positive number for H: moves the graphic to the right; a negative number moves it to the left. A positive number for V: moves the graphic higher; a negative number moves it lower.

Scale: H:, V:

Displays the current scaling in effect for the graphic. The H: and V: values are percentages of the graphic's original size. To scale the graphic proportionally, enter the same value for H: and V:. Enter 100 in both text boxes to show the graphic at 100% (its original size); enter 50 to reduce it to half (50%) of its original size.

Right Page Alignment and Positioning: Use Right Page Positioning; Horizontal; H: , V:

Select Use Right Page Positioning if you want to position a page-assigned graphic differently on right-facing pages (odd-numbered) and left-facing (even-numbered) pages.

When selected, you can specify different positioning for right-facing pages; Finale uses the settings in the Alignment and Positioning group box for left-facing pages, and the settings in the Right Page Alignment and Positioning group box for right-facing pages in the score.

Use the Horizontal drop-down list to change the alignment for page-assigned graphics on right-facing pages.

Use the H: and V: settings to change the position of page-assigned graphics on right-facing pages.


Grid Definition

Use this dialog box to provide a visual background grid on the page layout area.

Lines every ___ EVPUs

Sets the frequency of grid lines in EVPUs (1 inch = 288 EVPUs).

Lines every ___ Points

Sets the frequency of grid lines in points (1 inch = 72 points).

Inch Ruler with Extension Lines Every: Inch, Half Inch, Quarter Inch

Displays rulers along the left and bottom edges of your screen (in addition to the grid) and includes tick marks every: inch, half inch, or quarter inch.

Show/Don't Show Grid

Determines whether or not to show the grid.

See also: Page Layout


Group Attributes

Choose this command to display the Group Attributes dialog box, where you can create and control the appearance of groups of staves. Choose which consecutive staves you want included in the group, name the group, choose an alternate barline, and choose a bracket to enclose them. You can also control how barlines appear.

Group Name - Edit

Displays the full group name. This name will appear only in the first staff system.

For example: Piano or Percussion.

Click Edit to display the Edit Text window where you can mix fonts and styles, and even create multi-line names.

Group Name - Position

Determines whether and by how much to move the full group name for this group only. Deselect this checkbox to use the default positioning for group names set in the Staff menu.

Abbr. Group Name - Edit

Displays the abbreviated group name. This name will appear in every staff system except the first. For example: Pno. or Perc.

Click Edit to display the Edit Text window where you can mix fonts and styles, and even create multi-line names.

Abbr. Group Name - Position

Determines whether and by how much to move the abbreviated group name. Deselect this checkbox to use the default positioning for group names set in the Staff menu.

Staff, Through

Choose staff names from these Staff drop-down lists to specify the starting and ending staves in a group. A group always includes the staves in between the specified staves.

Draw Barlines: Only on Staves, Through Staves, Only Between Staves (Mensurstriche)

Determines how the barlines are drawn for the group of staves. Select Only on Staves if you want the barlines drawn only within each staff, without connecting each staff with the barline; select Through Staves to draw one continuous barline passing through all the staves in the group. Select Only Between Staves (Mensurstriche) to draw barlines between the staves, but not through the staff lines of each staff in the group.

Show Group Name

Determines whether group names that you enter will appear in the score. When selected, the full and abbreviated group names appear in your score. If you prefer to hide the names for this group, deselect this checkbox.

Tip: Use Show Default Group Names in the Staff menu to control the appearance of default, non-printing group names in the score.

Group ID

Displays the Finale-assigned Group ID for the current group. Click the arrow controls to display the attributes for other groups of staves.

Staff List

Displays which staff systems will be affected when you change the attributes of a group.

When "Global" appears, changing a group's attributes will alter its appearance in Scroll View. The changes will also appear in every staff system in Page View - unless you're viewing a Special Part Extraction, or have already optimized staff systems.

When "Special Part Extraction" appears, changing a group's attributes in Page View will affect its appearance in every staff system, except for optimized staff systems, but won't change its appearance in Scroll View.

"Staff System" (plus the current staff system number) appears when the selected staff system has been optimized using the Page Layout Tool. Any change to a group's attributes in Page View will affect the current staff system only.

Use Alternate Group Barline

Select this option if you want Finale to use an alternate barline style that you select from the Barline palette, instead of the barline style selected in the Measure Attributes dialog box.

Note: You can override the barline selected for a group on a measure-by-measure basis such as for the final bar in a piece. To do so, select Override Group Barlines in the Measure Attributes dialog box.

Barline Palette

Click to choose an alternate style for the current group. Finale uses the selected style instead of the barline that was set up in the piece using the Measure Attributes dialog box. The barline is only used if "Use Alternate Group Barline" is selected in this dialog box.

Bracket Options - Bracket Palette

When you first create a new group of staves, "None (No bracket) is selected by default. Click to select the bracket style you want to use for the current group, or leave "None" selected if you don't want a bracket to enclose the group.

Tip: To display more than one bracket on a staff or staves in a group, create additional groups for the staves, then choose a different bracket style for each group.

Bracket Options - Distance from the Left Edge of Staff, Vertical Adjust (Top of Bracket), Vertical Adjust (Bottom of Bracket)

Drag the handles of a bracket on the score to adjust its placement on the staves of the group. Or, enter values into these text boxes to adjust the positioning of the bracket.

Distance from the Left Edge of Staff affects the distance (in measurement units) from the left edge of the grouped staves on which Finale will place the bracket. Enter a negative number to move the bracket to the left.

Enter new values in the Vertical Adjust (Top of Bracket) and Vertical Adjust (Bottom of Bracket) text boxes to adjust the upper and lower ends of the bracket in relation to the top of the top staff and the bottom of the bottom staff, respectively. The default value of zero aligns the bracket ends evenly with the top and bottom lines of the group. A positive number moves the bracket end upward; a negative number moves the bracket end downward.

Bracket Options - Show Bracket if Group Contains Only One Staff

Determines whether a bracket will appear on a single staff. When selected, a bracket will appear even if the group contains only one staff, or whenever all staves but one are "optimized out" (i.e., removed because the staves are resting instruments). This option is usually not selected, since brackets are generally omitted when only one staff appears in a staff system.


Hand Width Split

Use this dialog box to split the contents of sequencer tracks into two staves according to the width of your hands.

Starting Right Hand Position, Listen

Sets the MIDI key number (middle C = 60) where Finale thinks your right hand is currently positioned (measured from the leftmost finger). Click Listen to specify the starting position of the right hand by playing a note.

Starting Left Hand Position, Listen

Sets the MIDI key number (middle C = 60) where Finale thinks your left hand is currently positioned (measured from the leftmost finger). Click Listen to specify the starting position of the left hand by playing a note.

Hand Width, Listen

Sets the widest interval, in half steps, either hand played. Click Listen to specify the hand width by playing the widest interval in the performance.

See also:

Track/Channel Mapping

Track/Channel Mapping to Staves

Transcribe MIDI File


Handle Positioning

Use this dialog box to shift articulation handles for better positioning.

Main Symbol: H, V

Specifies an offset for the center point (H) or baseline (V) of the articulation's Main Symbol. (Setting a horizontal offset is useful when Center Horizontally is selected for the articulation's definition.) Negative numbers move the symbol left (H) or down (V); positive numbers move the symbol right (H) or up (V).

Flipped Symbol: H, V

Specifies an offset for the center point (H) or baseline (V) of the articulation's Flipped Symbol. (Setting a horizontal offset is useful when Center Horizontally is selected for the articulation's definition.) Negative numbers move the symbol left (H) or down (V); positive numbers move the symbol right (H) or up (V).

See also: Articulation Designer


HyperScribe

Use this dialog box to monitor the MIDI Input received while you HyperScribe your music.

Beat and Note displays

The boxes on the left and right display square boxes to indicate that MIDI information is being received. Hint: If these boxes completely fill up, then you may lose some of the music that you played in. If you're using the metronome, slow the tempo. If you're providing the tap, stop playing, wait for the boxes to clear and then begin playing again.

Duration, Division

Displays the beat duration (in 1024ths of a quarter note), and how many times the beat should be divided as specified in the Quantization dialog box. These values determine what the beat or tap is, and the smallest note value that will be transcribed.

See also: Quantization


HyperScribe Options

Use this dialog box to control some specialized settings that help you get the most accurate HyperScribe transcription.

Options: Record Key Velocities

Determines whether to save your key velocity data (how hard you strike the keys) for playback.

Options: Record Note Durations

Determines whether to save your note duration data (small rhythmic variations that give your playing a human feel) for playback.

Options: Include Voice Two

Determines whether to notate a stems-down inner voice on each staff. For a cleaner transcription, don't select this box unless you can play the inner voice with great accuracy.

Options: Tie Across Barlines

Determines whether to tie notes into the next measure. For a cleaner transcription, be careful not to hold down notes over the barline that you do not want tied.

Options: Refresh Screen

Determines whether to keep your screen display current, showing you the notes as you play them. For greater speed, keep this option deselected.

Receive On: All Channels, Only Channel

Determines whether to transcribe MIDI information received on all channels or only on a specific MIDI channel.


Implode Music

Use this dialog box to "implode" or merge the music from a selected region of measures into an existing or a newly created staff.

New Staff Added to Bottom of Score

Places the "imploded" music into a newly created staff added to the bottom of the score.

Top Staff of Selection

Places the "imploded" music into the top staff of the selected region. Note: If you place the music into the top staff, the music in the selected region for that staff will be lost.


Insert Measures

Use this dialog box to specify how many measures to insert before the selected measure(s).

How many measures

Type the number of measures to insert.


Insert Blank Pages

Use this dialog box to insert blank pages (pages that do not contain music) at any point in your score.

Insert

Enter the number of blank pages you want to insert at the specified point in the score.

Tip: When you're working with Facing Pages that have different left and right page margins, insert two pages at a time to maintain the correct margins.

Before Page, After Page, At End of Document

Select where you want the pages inserted in the score -- before or after the page you specify, or at the end of the score. If you select Before Page or After Page, be sure to enter the page number in the score where you want the pages inserted.


Instrument List

Use this window to control the playback and the instrument assignments (MIDI sounds) of the staves in your score. You can also specify which staves or layers to record into (and channels to record from) for HyperScribe's Multitrack record mode. There are two ways to display the instrument list: View by Staves, which shows settings for each staff of the score in score order; and View by Instruments, which shows the instruments (MIDI sounds) in alphabetical order and which staves have been assigned the instrument sound.

R, RChan (Record, Record Channel)

When View by Staves is selected, the Record and Record Channel columns appear. These record columns can be used for recording with the HyperScribe Tool.

The Record (R) column, indicating which staves or layers will be recorded into, always appears. When the Record column is blank, no staves (or layers) of staves are selected to record into. Click in the R column next to the staff or layer you want Finale to record into. A black triangle indicates that Finale will record into the active or selected layer of that staff.

The Record Channel (RChan) column only appears when Multitrack Record is selected in the HyperScribe menu's Record Mode submenu. RChan indicates what channel(s) will be recorded into the staves or layers selected for recording (a black triangle appears in the R column next to the layer or staff). Enter the channel number that you want Finale to record from for each staff or layer. By default, Finale records from channel 1 (RChan is set to 1).

Staff Name, Arrow

When View by Staves is selected, the staff names appear on the left side of the Instrument List. The staves appear in score order. Click the arrow by the staff name to display the settings for the entire staff, or for each element of the staff. When the arrow points down, you control the playback of the staff as a whole. When the arrow points up, you can individually control the playback of each element of the staff (layers and chords and expressions).

Instrument

When View by Instruments is selected, the instrument names appear in alphabetical order on the left side of the Instrument List.

Ctrl-click in this column to display the Instrument Definition dialog box where you can edit the settings for the instrument.

P (Play)

Only the staves or instruments with a "square" in the Play column will playback. Click in this column to mute a staff or instrument. Note: If a dot appears in the Solo column, only the soloed staves (or instruments) will play back.

S (Solo)

Overrides all settings in the Play column. Click in this column to play back only the staves (or instruments) with a dot in the Solo column.

Instrument

When View by Staves is selected, the fourth column displays the instrument currently assigned to the staff (or staff element). Click the arrow to display the existing instruments. Select another instrument from the list, or choose None if you don't want the staff to playback at all. You can also choose New Instrument from the list to create yet another instrument to add to the list.

Ctrl-click in this column to display the Instrument Definition dialog box where you can edit the settings for the instrument.

Chan, B, Prog. (Channel, Bank, Program Change)

Specifies the MIDI Channel, Bank and Program Change information for the selected instrument, and any staff (or staff element) using that instrument.

You can change the channel and program change by editing the values in the Instrument List. However, to change the bank you must use the Instrument Definition dialog box. If the Bank column is empty, a simple patch assignment is set; a program change number with no bank information is set for the instrument. However, if a B appears in the Bank Column, a bank change and a program change is set for the instrument.

Ctrl-click any of these columns, or click the Bank column to display the Instrument Definition dialog box where you can edit the settings for the instrument, including changing the Bank select message.

Staff Name, Arrow

When View by Instruments is selected, the staff names appear on the right side of the Instrument List. If the instrument is assigned to more than one staff a arrow appears by it. Click the arrow to expand or collapse the staff display. When the arrow points down, only the first staff that uses the instrument is displayed. When the arrow points up, each staff that uses the instrument is displayed.

View by Staves

Displays the settings for each staff of the score in score order. The staff names appear on the left side of the Instrument List.

View by Instruments

Displays the instruments (MIDI sounds) in alphabetical order and indicates which staves use the instrument sound. The Instruments appear on the left side of the Instrument List.

Auto-create Instrument

Creates a new instrument (assigned to Channel 1, Patch 1) each time a staff is added in the score. This setting is useful if you want to make sure that each staff can have different patches or dynamics, or if you want each staff to be assigned to a separate track when you create a MIDI file.

Send Patches Before Play

Determines whether to send patch information set in the Instrument List to the appropriate MIDI device each time you playback.

Play All, Play None

Click Play All to set all staves or instruments to play back with a single click. Click Play None to turn off the playback of all staves or instruments with a single click.

Solo All, No Solos

Click Solo All to set all staves or instruments to solo (play back) with a single click. Click No Solos to turn off the solo of all staves or instruments with a single click.

Edit Instrument

Appears only when View by Instruments is selected. Click in the Instrument (or Chan or Prog) column to select an instrument; the Edit Instrument button becomes available. Click the Edit Instrument button to display the Instrument Definition dialog box in which you can edit the name, MIDI Channel and Patch number for the selected instrument.

New Instrument

Appears only when View by Instruments is selected. Click this button to display the Instrument Definition dialog box in which you can specify a name, MIDI Channel and Patch number for the newly created instrument.

Delete Instrument

Appears only when View by Instruments is selected. Click this button to delete the selected instrument name in the Instrument column.

See also:

Instrument Definition

Window menu


Interval

Use this dialog box to specify another interval for the Interval drop-down list in the Transposition and Staff Transpositions dialog boxes.

Interval

Sets the number of diatonic steps (scale degrees) that you want to transpose by. Enter positive numbers only.

Alteration

Sets the number of chromatic steps (scale degrees) that you want the interval altered by. Positive numbers increase (sharp) the interval; negative numbers decrease (flat) the interval. In a Mass Edit operation, available when Chromatic is selected from the Transposition dialog box drop-down list. For example, to transpose up a minor third: Interval = 3, Alteration = -1.

See also:

Transposition

Staff Transpositions


Items to Clip

Use this dialog box to exclude some elements when cutting or copying music. If a checkbox is selected, Finale will include that element. If a checkbox is unselected, that element will be excluded.

Score Expressions and Smart Shapes (Assigned to Measures)

Determines whether to include Score Expressions and measure-based Smart Shapes with the copied music. These items are not included when you copy only part of a measure.

Repeats

Determines whether to include Repeats with the copied music. Repeats are not included when you copy only part of a measure.

Entry Items

Determines whether to copy notes and rests, and include specified items attached to them.


Items to Erase

Use this dialog box to specify which elements of the music to remove when you use the Erase command.

Everything

Erases everything, leaving behind only rests.

Only Selected Items: Measures, Entries

Erases only certain elements of the selected music (such as lyrics or dynamics). Click Measures to select measure-related items you want to erase (such as text blocks or Smart Shapes). Click Entries to select note-related items you want to erase (such as lyrics or articulations).


Key Signature

Use this dialog box to select a key signature.

Scroll Key Display

Displays the currently selected key signature. Use this scroll bar to specify a new key signature. Click the up arrow to add sharps. Click the down arrow to add flats.

Major Key, Minor Key and Nonstandard Key

Use this drop-down list to specify the mode: major, minor, or nonstandard.

Measure Region: Measure ___ Through ___, Measure ___ Through End of Piece

Sets the key change for only the measures you specify or through the end of the document.

Transposition Options: Transpose Notes, Hold Notes to Original Pitches, Hold Notes to Same Staff Lines (Modally)

Transposes any existing notes into the new key (use the drop-down list to specify whether you want the notes transposed up or down; Leaves existing notes at their original pitches, despite the change of key signature (use the drop-down list to describe whether you want the pitches spelled chromatically [the exact spelling as the original], or enharmonically); Leaves existing notes on their original staff lines and spaces, despite the change of key signature, but doesn't add any accidentals.

Transposition Options: Transpose All Keys Proportionally

Determines whether to shift key changes within the measures you're changing so that they maintain their relationship to the measure you clicked.

Transposition Options: Wrap Keys If Necessary

Determines whether key signatures will "wrap" during proportional key changes. This option is only available when "Transpose All Keys Proportionally" is checked. The setting is remembered during the session, but is not saved with the file. The "Wrap Keys" option defaults to checked. When checked, this setting prevents keys with double sharps and flats such as A sharp major (10 sharps) occuring during proportional key changes. By default you'll get B flat, instead of A sharp. When unchecked, key signatures with more than seven sharps or flats may occur.


Key Step Map

Use this dialog box to specify octave structure for a nonstandard key signature.

Scroll Bar

Sets how many steps you want in the "octave".

Keyboard checkboxes

Click these squares to indicate where the chromatic and diatonic steps fall. A black square specifies a chromatic step.

Display Keyboard

Displays an imaginary piano keyboard showing the specified chromatic settings.

New

Clears chromatic settings, so that you can reassign them. A black square indicates a chromatic setting.

Delete

Restores the pattern of chromatic and diatonic steps to the standard major scale.

See also: Nonstandard Key Signature


Layer Options

Use this dialog box to define the behavior of music in layers, when notating simultaneous independent voices on a single staff.

Settings for

Determines which layer you are defining.

Freeze Stems and Ties

Determines whether all note stems and tie arcs point the same direction.

Freeze Stems

Determines whether stems and tie arcs should point up or down (only available when the "Freeze Stems and Ties" checkbox is selected).

Freeze Ties in the Same Direction as Stems

Determines whether ties arc in the "wrong" direction (that is, in the same direction as note stems).

Adjust Floating Rests by Steps

Determines whether to shift the default position of rests in this layer up or down and by what amount.

Apply Settings Only if Notes are in Other Layers

Determines whether to make your stem, tie, and rest settings take effect only in a measure where other layers contain notes.


Limit - Continuous Data

Use this dialog box to limit continuous data MIDI values within a selected measure region. For example, you can limit the amount of monophonic aftertouch to control the amount of vibrato on any note.

to a Minimum of and a Maximum of

Sets a range with which to limit the continuous data in the selected region.


Limit - Key Velocities

Use this dialog box to limit MIDI key velocity values within a selected measure region.

to a Minimum of and a Maximum of

Sets a range with which to limit the key velocities in the selected region. Enter numbers between 0 (softest) and 127 (loudest).


Limit - Note Durations

Use this dialog box to limit note duration MIDI values within a selected measure region.

to a Minimum of and a Maximum of

Sets a range with which to limit the note durations (in 1024ths of a quarter note) in the selected region. Enter the duration values that limit the difference between the notated value and the actual performance of the notes. Enter "0" to hear the notated values; enter positive or negative numbers to move the attack or release from the notated values.


Line Spacing

Use this dialog box to specify the line spacing for a text block.

Automatic

Sets the line spacing for text automatically. Single = 100%, 1 1/2 = 150%, Double = 200%. Choose from the drop-down list or enter a value in the number box. If you enter a value that isn't available in the drop-down list, "Other" is selected.

Absolute

Sets the line spacing for text by a fixed value, regardless of point size. Use the drop-down list to specify the units of measurement for the absolute spacing and enter an absolute value.

See also: Text menu


Line Thickness

Use this dialog box to specify a thickness for new lines in the Shape Designer.

Display Area

Displays the line with the specified thickness value.

Line Thickness

Sets the line thickness. Choose from the drop-down list to specify the units of measurement for the line thickness.

See also:

Shape Designer

Shape Expression Designer


Lines

Use this dialog box to specify the thickness of staff lines, stems, ledger lines, and other straight lines (on-screen and in printing).

Thickness: Beams, Enclosures, Ledger Lines, Staff Lines, Stem Lines, Other Lines  and Tuplet Bracket

Sets the thickness for the type of line indicated. Other Lines controls tuplet bracket lines and repeat bracket lines.

Ledger Line Length: Left or Right Half

Sets the length for the left or right half of ledger lines.


Mass Measure Grouping

Use this dialog box to specify how many measures on a line for the entire document.

Freeze layout with ___ measure(s) on a line

Determines how many measures appear in each staff system.

See also: Page Layout


Measure Assignment for Ossia Measure

Use this dialog box to specify a measure-assigned floating measure's positioning relative to the real measure to which it's attached.

Distance from Beginning of Measure: H, V

Specifies an offset for the ossia measure relative to the upper-left corner of the measure to which it's attached. Enter positive numbers to move the ossia right (H) or up (V); negative numbers to move the ossia left (H) or down (V).

See also: Ossia Measure Designer


Measure Attributes

Use this dialog box to specify measure characteristics.

Measure Attributes for Measure

Shows which measure is being edited. Enter the number of the measure you want to edit then press Tab, or click the arrows to change the measure.

Barline

Determine a barline style for the end of the measure.

Width

Sets a width for the measure.

Key Signature

Determines whether a key signature appears at the beginning of the measure.

Time Signature

Determines whether a time signature appears at the beginning of the measure.

Position Notes

Determines how notes are spaced in the measure.

Options: Hide Cautionary Clefs, Key and Time Signatures

Determines whether to hide any cautionary changes that appear at the end of a measure.

Options: Position Notes Evenly Across Measure

Determines whether to space all notes evenly in the measure, regardless of how many there are.

Options: Begin a New Staff System

Determines whether to force this measure to begin a new staff system. You won't see its effect until you choose Update Layout from the Edit menu.

Options: Break a Multimeasure Rest

Determines whether to force this measure's right barline to break a multimeasure ("block") rest into two smaller rests (when the parts are extracted).

Options: Allow Horizontal Split Points

Determines whether to permit this measure to break so that it continues on another line. To break the measure, select its bottom barline handle, double-click a permissible split point in the horizontal strip appearing above the measure, and then choose Update Layout from the Edit menu.

Options: Override Group Barlines

Determines whether to override the barline specified for a group of staves for this measure. When selected, this barline will always appear, regardless of any alternate barline style selected in the Group Attributes dialog box. This might be used for a double barline or the final bar in a piece.


Measure Items

Use this dialog box to specify which measure-related markings and variables you want to copy, erase, or edit.

Continuous Data

Includes continuous MIDI data.

Key Signatures

Includes key signatures.

Measure Number Enclosures

Determines whether to copy measure-number enclosures. (You can only delete measure-number enclosures using the Measure Number Tool.)

Measure Positioning

Determines whether to copy note-spacing information. (You can't erase note spacing data.)

Measure Widths

Determines whether to change or copy the widths of all selected measures. (You can't erase measure widths.)

Ossia Measures (Assigned to Measures)

Includes floating, measure-attached "ossia" measures.

Repeats

Includes repeat barlines and text repeats.

Score Expressions

Includes Score Expressions.

Smart Shapes (Assigned to Measures)

Includes measure-based Smart Shapes (crescendos, for example).

Split Points

Includes places where you've indicated that a measure may split in half.

Tempo Changes

Includes tempo-fluctuation information.

Text Blocks (Assigned to Measures)

Includes measure-attached text blocks.

Time Signatures

Determines whether to copy or change time signatures. (You can't erase time signatures.)

Graphics (Assigned to Measures)

Includes measure-attached graphics.


Measure Number

Use this dialog box to specify how to number your measures. You can have Finale display these measure numbers in the Document Window's Measure Controls or any dialog box containing text boxes for measure numbers such as the Time Signature and Key Signature dialog boxes. Use the Program Options dialog box to change whether Finale displays the measure numbers you define.

Region

Displays the current measure number region. Click the arrow controls to display another measure number region.

Includes Measure, Through

Sets the first and last measure of the region you want numbered (type the actual measure numbers).

Delete

Deletes the current measure number region.

Insert

Duplicates the settings of the currently displayed measure number region, and inserts a new measure number region after the current region.

Sort

Sorts the measure number regions based on the actual measure numbers included in the region; the regions will be sorted in the order they appear in the score, unless there are overlapping regions.

First Measure in Region

Specifies the measure number on the first measure in the region. If a numeric style is selected, enter the first number that you want to appear in the region (1, or 2, or 3, and so on). If a letter style is selected, enter a number that corresponds to the position or order of the letter in the alphabet, such as 1 for A, 2 for B, 3 for C, and so on.

Prefix

Sets the number prefix you want to use in this numbering region. For example, type 225 to create numbers 225a, 225b, 225c.

Suffix

Sets the number suffix you want to use in this numbering region.

Style

Choose a numeric style (1, 2, 3, 4) or select one of four letter styles (a, b, c...aa, bb, cc; A, B, C...AA, BB, CC; a, b, c...aa, ab, ac; A, B, C...AA, AB, AC) from the Style drop-down list. To define an alternate measure numbering style, choose Other, then set up your own style in the Measure Number Style dialog box.

Set Font

Sets the font for measure numbers in this region. The font that is currently selected appears next to the button.

Enclosure Shape

Specifies the shape that can enclose measure numbers.

Show Enclosures on Every Number, Show Enclosures on Selected Numbers

Select Show Enclosures on Every Number to automatically enclose every measure number defined by this region.

Select Show Enclosures on Selected Numbers to enclose only the measure numbers that you specify. (In the score, double-click the handle of the measure number you want an enclosure to appear on, to display the Enclosure Designer dialog box, then click OK.)

Edit Enclosure

Displays the Enclosure Designer dialog box, where you can edit the settings of the currently selected shape.

Show Measure Numbers at Start of Each Staff System, Show Every ___ Measures Beginning with Measure

Select Show Measure Numbers at Start of Each Staff System if you want measure numbers to appear at the beginning of every line. To display the measure number every few measures (every 5 measures, for example), starting at a particular measure number, select Show Every ___ Measures Beginning with Measure ___, then enter values for the measure number and the display interval.

Hide First Measure Number in Region

Determines whether the first measure defined for the region will be displayed in the score. When selected, Finale will not display the first measure number in the region. For example, many copyists hide the measure number on the first measure in the score. When not selected, Finale displays the measure number.

Always Show On Top Staff, Always Show On Bottom Staff

Determines whether to show measure numbers in the top staff of the full score, regardless of what instrument it is or in the bottom staff of the full score (regardless of what instrument it is).

Position

Displays the Position Measure Number dialog box where you can set the position of measure numbers in this region (relative to the staff).

See also:

Measure Number Style

Enclosure Designer

Position Measure Number

Program Options


Measure Number Style

Use this dialog box to set a measure numbering style that is not available in the Measure Number dialog box.

Numbering Base

Sets the numbering base (26 for letters, 10 for numbers).

Starting Character

Sets the first number or letter to be used in this region (usually 0, A, or a). Click the button to select the character from the Symbol Selection dialog box, or type the text font equivalent for the character.

Count From One

Determines whether to begin numbering with 1 instead of 0. Select this box when using measure numbers.

No Zero

Determines whether to use the starting character or the number after the starting character when repeating. For example, you'll see 1, 2...10, 11, 12 with No Zero unchecked.

Double Up

Determines whether to repeat characters (A, B...AA, BB) instead of cycling through them. Select this box when using letters.

See also: Measure Number


Mid-measure Clef

Use this dialog box to change the identity, size, and placement of a Mid-Measure Clef.

Clef Palette

Click a clef in the palette to change the clef.

Clef Size

Sets the size of the mid-measure clef, as a percentage of normal size.

Distance from Beginning of Measure: H, V

Sets the clef's horizontal and vertical distance from the left barline and top line of the staff, respectively. Positive numbers move the clef right (H) or up (V); negative numbers move left (H) or down (V).

Revert to Single Clef

To replace all clefs in the measure with a single clef.

Beats/EDUs

Choose from this drop-down list to specify whether you're measuring the clef's distance in beats or in EDUs. 1024 EDUs = 1 quarter note.

See also: Change Clef


MIDI Event

Use this dialog box to choose a MIDI signal for a HyperScribe tempo reference.

Text boxes, Listen

Click Listen and play a MIDI event (note, sustain pedal, pitch wheel, and so on) to specify the MIDI event for a HyperScribe tempo reference or type ‘$' and a hexadecimal number to specify the third byte of the MIDI Event (note, sustain pedal, pitch wheel, and so on).

See also:

Playback Source

Tap Source


MIDI Input Filter

Use this dialog box to specify which kinds of MIDI information you want recorded from your transcription.

Notes

Determines whether to record actual note information in the next recording.

Pitch Bends

Determines whether to record pitch bend information in the next recording.

Program Changes

Determines whether to record program (patch) changes in the next recording.

Controllers

Determines whether to record the controller information specified in the next recording.

All, Only: Listen

All records all controllers. Only records only one (or up to 4) specific controller(s). Type a controller ID number or click Listen and simply play the controller.


MIDI File Options

Use this dialog box to specify the MIDI file format you want Finale to use when it saves a MIDI File.

Format 1

Creates separate tracks for each staff assigned to a different Instrument.

Format 0

Saves all staves to one track.

Tempo Map

Creates a tempo map only and ignores any music in the staves.

Save Bookmarks as Markers

Determines whether to convert Finale bookmarks to sequencer markers in the MIDI file.

See also: Instrument List


MIDI Setup

Use this dialog box to specify the MIDI interface and the channels associated with the interface you're using for MIDI playback and recording.

MIDI In: Device

Select up to eight separate MIDI devices for MIDI In. Choose the device(s) you want to use from the list. Note that you can use the same device for different ranges of MIDI channels.

MIDI In: Base Channel

Determines the first channel to use for the selected device. For example, if you specify the same device for the first and second MIDI In slots and use the default settings for Base Channel, any MIDI Information that's sent through the specified MIDI device will be received by Finale Channels 1-16 (first slot) and Finale Channels 17-32 (second slot).

MIDI In: Sync Master

This column appears only for the MIDI In configuration. Choose the device you want to receive MIDI Sync information.

MIDI Out: Device

Select up to eight separate MIDI devices for MIDI Out. Choose the device(s) you want to use from the list. Note that you can use the same device for different ranges of MIDI channels.

MIDI Out: Base Channel

Determines the first channel to use for the selected device. For example, if you specify the same device for the first and second MIDI Out slots and use the default settings for Base Channel, any MIDI Information that's sent through Finale Channels 1-16 (first slot) and Finale Channels 17-32 (second slot) will be received by the specified MIDI device.

MIDI Out: Reset MIDI Out

When deselected (unchecked), Finale resets the MIDI devices (sends note off information). When selected (checked), the MultiMedia driver resets the devices. Hint: If you experience "MIDI Overload," click to deselect this checkbox. Finale's method of sending note off information is more efficient and should be adequate for most MIDI devices.

MIDI Driver Version

Displays the version number of the active Finale MIDI driver.


MIDI Thru

Use this dialog box to determine whether to use your computer to send the incoming channels back out through the specified channels. This feature is used with controllers, which send MIDI data but cannot produce sounds, and sound modules. Control how the signals coming from your MIDI controller are routed to other MIDI channels.

Off

Determines whether MIDI Thru is used at all. When selected, no routing takes place.

Fixed Channel

Determines whether all incoming channels are routed to the single channel you specify. Enter the number of the channel that you want all channels mapped to.

Smart

Determines whether you'll hear the channel assigned to a staff while recording with HyperScribe or editing with Speedy Entry. When selected, Finale uses the Instrument List settings for the staff, and routes all incoming signals to the channel defined for that instrument. If you're playing your keyboard and not recording with HyperScribe or editing with Speedy Entry, Finale continues to use the last active "smart" channel.

Direct

Determines whether the outgoing channels are mapped directly to the incoming channels that are being played. (This is the same as selecting Table and leaving the MIDI Thru Table at its default mapping, in which the outgoing channel is the same as the incoming channel.)

Table, Edit

Determines whether all incoming channels are mapped to different outgoing channels on a channel-by-channel basis. Click Edit to display the MIDI Thru Table dialog box where you can remap each incoming channel by entering a channel number in each text box.


MIDI Thru Table

Use this dialog box to route the signals coming from your MIDI controller to other MIDI channels.

MIDI Channels

Determines the MIDI channel numbers to which you want the incoming channels sent.

The fixed numbers specify incoming MIDI channels 1-64.

Reset

Restores the settings to the original one-to-one channel mapping.


MIDI Tool split window

Provides a graphic display of the three types of MIDI information you can edit: key velocities, note durations (Start and Stop Times), and continuous data (patch changes, pedal usage, pitch wheel and so on). Let's you edit full measures or specific notes. The display corresponds to the highest staff displayed on the screen. To display the graph for another staff, use the vertical scroll bars to change which staff appears first, then double-click the staff.

Vertical Ruler (Key Velocities, Note Durations, Continuous Data)

When Key Velocities is selected in the MIDI menu, the vertical "ruler," which appears on the left side of the screen, displays values between 0-127. Handles appear for each note in the current staff, and a thin vertical line represents the key velocity of each note. Key velocities range from 0 (silent) to 127 (very loud).

When Note Durations is selected in the MIDI menu, the vertical "ruler," which appears on the left side of the screen, displays pitches according to the pitch representation setting in the Program Options dialog box. Pitches are either represented as MIDI note numbers (60 = middle C), or as pitches where C4 (or C3 or C5) indicates middle C. Handles appear for each note in the current staff, and a horizontal line indicates the duration (Start and Stop Time) of each note.

When Continuous Data is selected in the MIDI menu, the vertical "ruler," which appears on the left side of the screen, displays values between 1-128. Many controllers (a type of continuous data) are either on (128) or off (1). Handles do not appear on notes, because continuous data is assigned to measures. A program change is also a type of continuous data. If a bank change is part of the program change message, a B appears above the program change display.

See also: MIDI menu


Mirror Attributes

Use this dialog box to specify ways in which you want a mirrored measure to differ from its source measure.

Mirror Attributes for Frame

Shows the number of the frame being edited.

Transposition

Determines whether to transpose the mirror relative to the original material.

Don't Draw

Determines whether to hide certain elements in the mirror.

Don't Draw: Notehead or Percent Alterations

Determines whether to hide changes you've made to note shapes or sizes.

Don't Draw: Articulations and Staff Expressions

Determines whether to hide Articulations and Staff Expressions.

Don't Draw: Slurs Attached to Notes

Dertimines whether to hide note-attached slurs. Only note-attached slurs that start and end in the selected region can appear in the mirror.

Don't Draw: Lyrics

Determines whether to hide lyrics.

Don't Draw: Beam Extensions

Determines whether to hide extended beams you created with the Special Tools Tool.

Don't Draw: Secondary Beam Breaks

Determines whether to hide breaks in the beams of 16th notes (and smaller values) you created with the Special Tools Tool.

Don't Draw: Stem and Beam Alterations

Determines whether to hide changes in beams and stems you created with the Special Tools Tool.

Don't Draw: Entries in Other Staves

Determines whether to show cross-staff notes in their original staves.

Don't Draw: Reverse Stems

Determines whether to hide reverse stems you created with the Special Tools Tool.

Don't Draw: Double or Split Stems

Determines whether to hide double or split stems you created with the Special Tools Tool.

Don't Draw: Chords

Determines whether to hide chord symbols.

Freeze Stems: Up, Down

Determines whether to flip stems in the mirror all up or all down.

Rebeam

Determines whether to rebeam the notes in the mirror. (Only available once a mirror has been created: click OK, click the Mirror Tool, and Shift-click the mirror.)

Rebeam: Rebeam to Time Signature, Rebeam to Beam Chart

Rebeams the notes according to the current time signature, exactly like normal notes; Rebeams the mirror notes in a pattern you specify.

Selective Mirror ID

Determines whether to include only certain notes of the mirror (such as the top notes of a chordal passage). (Only available once a mirror has been created: click OK, click the Mirror Tool, and Shift-click the mirror.) Type a number to specify the ID number of the Selective Mirror to use for this mirror.

Hide Others

Shows blank beats, instead of rests, for beats you omitted from the Selective Mirror.

Hide Voice 2

Hides notes in Voice 2 in the Selective Mirror.

Use Rest Level

Specifies where rests should appear in this mirror, as measured from the root scale tone, measured in lines and spaces.

Float Rest

Places rests in the usual position.


Movable Items

Use the Movable Items dialog box to instruct Finale to automatically constrain movements when dragging or nudging elements, and to set the distance to nudge by whenever you use an arrow key to move an element.

Arrow Keys Nudge Items by

Enter a value to specify the number of pixels Finale should move a selected Special Tools element such as a dot or an accidental each time you press an arrow key.

Note: The nudge "amount" only applies when you're working with Special Tools. When you use the nudge keys at other times, Finale adjusts the element by one pixel each time you press the arrow key.

Automatically Constrain Dragging

Determines whether to automatically constrain dragging of any item in the score. When selected, dragging will be constrained horizontally or vertically based on the initial direction of your drag. To temporarily allow movement in any direction, press Shift. When not selected, elements can be moved in any direction in the score. To temporarily constrain dragging in the initial direction of your drag, press Shift.


Move Layers

Use this dialog box to move music from one layer to another.

Move Contents of Layer 1 into

Determines whether to move the music from Staff Layer 1 into a different layer. Choose from the drop-down list to specify where you want to put the music from Layer 1.

Move Contents of Layer 2 into

Determines whether to move the music from Staff Layer 2 into a different layer. Choose from the drop-down list to specify where you want to put the music from Layer 2.

Move Contents of Layer 3 into

Determines whether to move the music from Staff Layer 3 into a different layer. Choose from the drop-down list to specify where you want to put the music from Layer 3.

Move Contents of Layer 4 into

Determines whether to move the music from Staff Layer 4 into a different layer. Choose from the drop-down list to specify where you want to put the music from Layer 4.


Moving Split Point

Use this dialog box to split your recorded performance into two staves according to your hand width.

Current Right Hand Position, Current Left Hand Position

Displays the default MIDI note numbers for the right and left hand positions, 65 and 48 respectively (middle C = 60). After you transcribe any part of your performance, these values change to reflect the current positions.

Hand Width, Listen

Specifies the widest interval played by either hand during your performance. Type the interval in half steps, or click Listen and play the widest interval in the performance.

Reset

Resets the current right and left hand positions to the default MIDI note numbers of 65 and 48 respectively .

See also: Transcription menu


Multimeasure Rest

Use this dialog box to define the appearance of multimeasure rests in the score when they are first created, or the appearance of an individual multimeasure rest. Use a standard shape or an alternate symbolic style which combines whole and double-whole rests to represent block rests of different lengths, commonly those of eight or less measures.

Select

Identifies the shape used for the multimeasure rest. If a number other than zero appears, a shape has already been selected. Click Select to view the shape in the Shape Designer. If a zero appears in the text box, click Select to enter the Shape Selection dialog box, where you can select or create a shape to use as the multimeasure shape.

Shape: Adjust Start Point, Adjust End Point

Sets the start and end points of the shape used for the multimeasure rest. Changing these values lengthens or shortens the shape. Enter positive values to shift the shape's start or end point to the right; enter negative values to shift the start or end point to the left.

Options: Number Adjustment: V:, H:

Sets the vertical and horizontal position of the rest number. Enter a positive value in V: to raise the rest number away from the staff. Enter a positive value in H: to move the number to the right.

Start Numbering at ___ Measures

Sets the minimum number of measures in a multimeasure rest, for which Finale will display the multimeasure rest number. For shapes, this value would normally be 2. For symbols, which would typically be used for rests that are less than nine measures, enter a 9 in this text box if you don't want a number to appear over the symbols.

Measure Width

Sets the minimum width of a multimeasure rest measure

Use Symbols for Rests Less Than ___ Measures

Determines whether to use the symbolic style, which combines whole and double-whole rests to represent multimeasure rests of different lengths, commonly those of eight or less measures. Enter a different value if you want to display symbols for multimeasure rests of different lengths.

Tip: If you don't want numbers to appear over the symbolic rests, be sure to change the "Start Numbering at ___ Measures" text box.

Space Between Symbols

Sets the distance that appears between each rest symbol when you're using the symbolic style to notate multimeasure rests.


Multiple 'Total Passes' for Ending

Use this dialog to specify which times the ending should be played.

<<, >>

Use these arrows to scroll through the six possible settings. Enter the ending numbers that you want this ending associated with. For example, if the ending should be played the first, third, and fifth time it's reached, enter 1,3, and 5 in the first three boxes.

See also: Ending Repeat Bar Assignment


Multiple 'Total Passes' for Repeat

Use this dialog to specify which times to jump.

<<, >>

Use these arrows to scroll through the six possible settings. Enter the repetitions for which you want this repeat to be performed. For example, if the repeat should jump "To Bridge" the first and third times through, enter 1 and 3 in the first two boxes.

See also: Repeat Assignment


Multiple Splits

Use this dialog box to specify how many staves you want the MIDI File's track separated or "exploded" into when you transcribe it onto a staff.

Number of Splits

Determines how many staves to create for the track.

Overload Order

Determines which staves to place any "extra" notes into.

See also: Track/Channel Mapping


Music Characters

Use this dialog box to specify characters for virtually every music symbol in a document, or choose an alternate style of straight flags that look like beams on single notes.

Noteheads, Select

Choose from the drop-down list to specify which notehead type you want to change. Click Select to choose a new symbol.

Rests, Select

Choose from the drop-down list to specify which rest type you want to change. Click Select to choose a new symbol.

Flags, Select

Choose from the drop-down list to specify which flag symbol you want to change. Click Select to choose a new symbol.

Straight Flags

Determines whether to use straight flags on note stems (angled or horizontal straight flag symbols are available in Coda's Tamburo font). If Straight Flags is not selected, Finale assumes that it's placing regular curved flags on stems.

Notes, Select

Choose from the drop-down list to specify which note accidental symbol you want to change. Click Select to choose a new symbol.

Chord, Select

Choose from the drop-down list to specify which chord accidental symbol you want to change. Click Select to choose a new symbol.

Key Signatures, Select

Use this drop-down list to specify which key signature symbols you want to change. Click Select to choose a new symbol.

Alternate Notation, Select

Use this drop-down list to specify which alternate notation symbols you want to change. Click Select to choose a new symbol.

Other Symbols

Use this drop-down list to specify which music symbols you want to change -- the dot used for notes or repeat bars, or the plus sign used for time signatures. Click Select to choose a new symbol.

Positioning...

Displays the Music Character Positioning dialog box, where you can specify the precise placement of rests of various durations, flags, and alternate notation symbols used for rhythmic notation.

See also: Music Character Positioning


Music Character Positioning

Use this dialog box to precisely place elements such as stems, rests, flags, and noteheads and stems for alternate notation.

Rests: Eighth, 16th, 32nd, 64th, 128th

Adjusts the vertical positioning of 8th through 128 rests. Hint: Change this value only if you're using a font other than Petrucci.

Flag Positioning: (drop-down list); H, V

Use the drop-down list to select the flag you want to adjust. Enter new values in H and V to adjust the vertical and horizontal positioning of flag characters used to build 8th through 128 flagged notes. Hint: Change this value only if you're using a font other than Petrucci.

Stem Offset for Noteheads

Adjusts the vertical position of the note stems relative to their notehead. Hint: Change this value only if you're using a font other than Petrucci.

Flag Spacing

Adjusts the vertical distance between flags. Hint: A larger number increases the distance, a smaller number decreases the distance between flags. Hint: Change this value only if you're using a font other than Petrucci.

Secondary Group Adjust

Shifts the 16th and smaller flags (the secondary flags) away from the eighth flag. Hint: A larger number moves the secondary flags further away from the eighth flag. A smaller number moves the secondary flags closer to the eighth flag. Change this value only if you're using a font other than Petrucci.

Alternate Notation: Small Slash - Vertical, Number - Vertical, Small Slash Stem Connection - Vertical, Diamond Stem Connection -Vertical

Governs the exact placement of slash and diamond noteheads and how these symbols attach to note stems when you're using alternate notation, such as percussion notation.


Music Options

Use this dialog box to specify distances between items of your score.

Spacing: Before, After; Clef, Music, Time, Key, Cancelled Key,

Sets the amount of space you want before and after the following music elements.

Clef: between the left barline and the clef; between the clef and the key signature.

Music: between the measure header (clef, key, and time signature) and the first note in a measure; between the last note in a measure and the right barline.

Time: to the left of the time signature; to the right of the time signature.

Key: to the left of the key signature; to the right of the key signature.

Cancelled Key: between the naturals in a "cancelled" key signature and the new key signature.

Tie: Position from Notehead (H, V, Arc Height)

Sets the horizontal distance between a notehead and the beginning of a tie; between a notehead and a tie's endpoints. A higher positive number (H) moves the tie endpoints closer together; A negative number moves the tie endpoints down (V). Arc Height: sets the vertical height of ties.

Normal Stem Length

Sets the length of note stems.

Shortened Stem Length

Sets the length of shortened note stems (one that's flipped in the "wrong" direction and is more than 1 line away from the middle of the staff).

Half-Stem Length

Sets the length of all half-stems placed over rests (as specified in the Document Options dialog box).

Space Between Accidental and Note

Sets the amount by which accidentals appear before their notes.

Space Between Accidentals on Notes

In chords, sets the amount by which accidentals appear before their notes.

Space Between Key Signature Accidentals

Sets the distance between accidentals in a key signature.

Space Within Multi-character Accidentals

Sets the distance between accidentals that appear on the same line or space, for use in nonstandard key signatures or triple-flatted notes.

Tuplet Number on Upstem Side of Note

Sets the amount you want to shift tuplet numbers horizontally (appearing above notes). A negative number moves the tuplet number left.

Tuplet Number on Downstem Side of Note

Sets the amount you want to shift tuplet numbers horizontally (appearing below notes). A negative number moves the tuplet number left.

Grace Note Spacing

Sets the horizontal distance of the first grace note from the note it is attached to, as well as the distance between grace notes.

Pickup: Set Duration

Click Set Duration and select the pickup's total rhythmic value if the first measure of the score is a pickup measure or enter a value in EDUs.


Music Spacing Options

Use this dialog box to determine how Finale handles note spacing.

Avoid Collision of: Notes and Accidentals

Determines whether to avoid overlapping notes and accidentals.

Avoid Collision of: Articulations

Determines whether to avoid overlapping articulation markings.

Avoid Collision of: Chords

Determines whether to avoid overlapping chord symbols.

Avoid Collision of: Lyrics

Determines whether to avoid overlapping lyric syllables.

Avoid Collision of: Staff Expressions

Determines whether to avoid overlapping expression markings.

Allotments

Determines whether to edit the amount of horizontal space given to notes of each rhythmic value.

Minimum Measure Width

Determines the narrowest measure you'll allow.

Maximum Measure Width

Determines the widest measure you'll allow.

Minimum Distance Between Items

Sets the minimum distance that will appear between elements selected for "collision avoidance."

Use Default Spacing

Determines whether to use a fixed amount of space between undefined notes instead of adjusting the space between undefined notes proportionally.

Manual Positioning: Clear, Ignore, Incorporate

Use this drop-down list to determine how Finale handles any manual positioning of notes when you apply music spacing to a selected region. Manual positioning refers to any manual dragging you've done with the Speedy Entry Tool or the Special Tools Tool. Choose "Clear" to reset manual positioning of notes. Choose "Ignore" to retain the manual positioning, but ignore it during Finale's collision calculations. Choose "Incorporate" to factor manual positioning into Finale's collision calculations.


Instrument Definition

Use this dialog box to create an instrument (MIDI sound) to assign to the staves in your score.

Instrument Name

Enter a name for your new instrument. The instrument name will then appear in the instrument drop-down list.

Channel

Determines the MIDI channel number to assign to the instrument.

Patch

This drop-down list provides the types of bank and program changes available in Finale. Finale supports bank changes listed in the MIDI Specification and supports the implementations of several manufacturers. Choose the method that matches your MIDI gear.

"Program Change" provides a simple program change with no bank change -- just enter the program change (sometimes called patch) number. The remaining options provide bank support. "Bank Select 0, Bank Select 32, Program Change" is the standard method of doing bank select; first controller 0 (C0), then controller 32 (C32) are sent with their respective values (these two controllers determine the bank), then a program change value is sent. The next two menu selections are variations on the standard. In both cases, only one of the controllers is sent with its value. "Program Change, Program Change" is bank select accomplished by sending two standard program change messages.

Bank Select 0

This text box may be disabled depending on the selection in the Patch drop-down list. If available, enter the value of the bank that you want to change to.

Bank Select 32

This text box may be disabled depending on the selection in the Patch drop-down list. If available, enter the value of the bank that you want to change to.

Program Change

Enter the number of the MIDI program change (the number of the instrument sound) that you want Finale to send.

See also: Instrument List


New Staves

Use this dialog box to add any number of uniformly-spaced new staves beneath any existing staves.

Number of Staves

Sets the number of new staves.

Topline to Topline Distance

Sets the distance you want between the new staves. Use negative numbers to add staves beneath the existing staves.


Nonstandard Key Signature

Use this dialog box to create your own key signatures in any format.

Display and Scroll Bar

Displays the current key signature. Use the scroll bar to view other key signatures in a linear format.

Prev, Next

To view the previous and next nonstandard key signatures (if any).

Linear Key Format

Creates and edits linear key formats. Linear key format: a key whose scale is a repeating sequence of diatonic and chromatic steps, such as the major scale.

Nonlinear Key Signature

Creates or edits a nonlinear key signature. Nonlinear key signature: One that's not part of a progression (or "circle") of keys, with no pattern to its scale or accidentals.

Key Map

To specify how many steps are in an octave and which steps are diatonic. (Not available for Linear Key Formats 0 and 1.)

AOrdAmt

To specify the order in which you want accidentals to appear, and on which lines and spaces. (Not available for Linear Key Formats 0 and 1.)

ToneCnt

To choose the root of each key. (Not available for Linear Key Formats 0 and 1.)

ClefOrd

To specify the octave in which you want each accidental to appear, based on each clef.

Attribute

To specify nonstandard symbols to be used instead of normal sharp and flat symbols.

See also: Key Signature


Notation Options

Use this dialog box to establish default values for notation variables.

Default Clef Change: Select, Percent, Offset

Click Select to choose a clef symbol or type the number of the clef you want as the default for new staves; Type the size you want for an inserted, mid-staff clef, as a percentage of normal size; Type a number to change the distance between an inserted, mid-staff clef and the barline it precedes (a larger negative number moves the clef left).

Lyrics: Space Between Hyphens

You can now control the maximum space between multiple hyphens for lyrics with the new "Space Between Hyphens" setting in the Notation Options dialog box. When the distance between hyphens matches this value, Finale creates another hyphen between the lyric syllables.

Lyrics: Word Extension: Lift, Push

Sets the amount by which to shift lyric extension lines vertically (Lift) and horizontally (Push). A negative number moves the lines down (Lift) or left (Push) and a positive number moves the lines up or right.

Lyrics: Line Thickness

Sets the thickness for word extension lines in your score.

Acci Overlap

Sets the minimum vertical distance between noteheads required for Finale to rearrange accidentals to avoid crowding.

Beam Sep

Sets the vertical distance between beams on 16th notes (and smaller values).

HM Beam Tip

Sets the maximum distance the endpoint of a beam may be from the middle staff line.

Max Slope

Sets the maximum vertical distance between the high and low ends of a beam.

Rev Stem Adj

For reverse stems (on the "wrong" side of the notehead), type a number to represent the stem length, measured from the normal (non-reversed) endpoint of the stem.

Broken Beam Length

Sets the length of all broken beams in the score. (To change the direction of a Broken Beam use the Special Tools Broken Beam Tool.)

Decimal Places

Sets the number of decimal places you want Finale to use when you create a composite time signature.

Grace Note Size

Sets the size you want grace notes, expressed as a percentage of normal notes.

Tab Spaces

Sets the number of spaces you want Finale to type when you press the Tab key.


Note Shapes

Use this dialog box to specify a different note shape for every note of the scale or for every rhythmic value for every note of the scale.

Replace

Choose from this drop-down list to specify the notehead type you want to change.

Noteheads on Scale Degree

Sets the scale degree for which you want the selected notehead to have a different shape. Click the arrows to increase or decrease the scale degree.

With This Symbol, Select

Click Select and choose the symbol for the replacement notehead shape (in the music font) or type the letter that corresponds to the shape.

Use Note Shapes

This checkbox only appears when you display this dialog box using the Options menu. Determines whether Finale uses the alternate note shapes you've selected.

See also: Staff Attributes


OpenFile
Open\Open Library\Save\Save As\Save Library\Place Graphics

This dialog box appears when you use Finale's File menu to open or save files and libraries. It also appears when you choose Place Graphics from the Graphics menu (or when you click in the Shape Designer's drawing area when the Graphics Tool is selected). Use this dialog box to open an existing Finale or MIDI file that you want to work on in Finale. Or, use it to open Finale libraries which contain music markings that you can use in your score. Or, use it to place graphics that you want to place directly onto the score, such as a company logo, or place graphics into the Shape Designer to use as an articulation or a score or staff expression.

You can also use this dialog box to save the current score that you're working in Finale. Or, use it to save Finale libraries which contain the current set of music markings present in your score. This dialog box works the same as any standard Windows Open or Save dialog box. The only difference is the File Type.

File Name

Specifies the file to open or save. Only the files of the specified file type appear in the list box. Choose All Files to display all files. Type a file name in the text box to name the current file you want to save, or to specify the file you want to open. You can also use the File Name list box to open a file: simply click the file you want to open to select it.

List Files of Type

Choose the file type you want to open or save from the drop-down list, or choose All Files to display all the files in the current directory regardless of file type. Choose Finale Binary File (.MUS) to display "regular" Finale files. Choose Enigma Transportable File (.ETF) to display Finale files that were saved in a special "transportable" format. Generally ETF files are used when you're going to share a file between PC's and Macintoshes. Choose MIDI File to display Standard MIDI Files created in Finale or a sequencer program. Choose Finale Template File (.FTM) to display Finale files saved as templates. These files open as "Untitled," but contain all the custom score settings contained in the template file.

In the Open Library dialog box, choose Library File (.LIB) to display the available Finale libraries (sets of musical markings such as Articulations, Text Expressions and Shape Expressions).

In the Place Graphic dialog box, choose TIFF File (.TIF), Windows Metafile (.WMF), or Encapsulated PostScript Listing (.EPS)  to display the files of the selected type in the scrolling list. Choose All Files to display files of all types in the scrolling list.

Directories

Specifies the current directory. Using the Directory list box, select the directory that contains the file you want to open or select the directory in which you want to save the file.

Drives

Specifies the current drive. Using the drop-down list, choose the drive that contains the file you want to open or choose the drive on which you want to save the file.


Optimizing a System of Staves

Use this alert to determine whether Finale prompts you before hiding empty staves while optimizing staff systems in Page View.

Remove Empty Staves

Specifies that Finale should remove any empty staves from a staff system automatically.

Ask Before Removing Staves

Specifies that Finale should ask before removing any empty staff from a staff system it's optimizing.

Keep At Least One Staff

Determines whether at least one staff will remain in an optimized staff system -- even if all staves are empty.


Ossia Measure Designer

Use this dialog box to specify the source measure on which you're basing a floating ossia measure.

Source Staff

The number of the staff that contains the music you want to appear in the floating measure.

Source Measure

The number of the actual measure that contains the music you want to appear in the floating measure.

Bracket Group: Select

Click Select to add a staff bracket to the floating measure or enter the bracket group number.

Key Signature

Click to select a key signature for the floating measure.

Time Signature

Click to select a time signature for the floating measure.

Clef: Select

Click Select to choose a clef for the floating measure.

Barline

Click a barline type to select it for the floating measure.

Items to Display:

The selected items appear as part of the floating measure: Endings and Text Repeats, Score Expressions, Left Line, Staff, Key Signature, Time Signature, Clefs.

Display Settings: Scale to %

Sets the size of the floating measure, as a percentage of actual size.

Display Settings: Top Margin

Sets the vertical distance between the top line of the floating measure and its handle.

Display Settings: Left Margin

Sets the distance between the left line of the floating measure and its handle.

Display Settings: Right Offset

Sets the distance between the right barline of the floating measure and its handle (a larger negative number makes the measure narrower).

Display Settings: Center Pull

Sets the amount by which to shift the music horizontally within the measure (a positive number moves the music away from the clef and key signature).


Page Assignment for Ossia Measure

Use this dialog box to specify the positioning for a page-assigned floating measure.

Distance from Top of Page: H, V

Specifies an offset for the ossia measure from the upper-left corner of the page margin. Enter larger numbers to move the ossia right (H) or down (V); smaller numbers to move it left (H) or up (V).

Measure Width

Sets the width of the ossia measure.

See also: Ossia Measure Designer


Page Format for Parts

Use this dialog box to define the page format of parts extracted from the score using the Extract Parts command in the File menu. You can specify page size, first page settings, and separate left and right margins for facing pages.

Page Size: Height, Width

Determines the height and width for all pages.

Staff System Margins: Top, Left, Right, Bottom

Determines the distance (for all new pages) between the bottom of one staff system and the top of the next (Top): usually zero; between the left page margin and the left edge of each staff system (Left): usually zero; between the right page margin and the right edge of each staff system (Right): usually zero; between staff systems (Bottom).

Left Page Margins: Top, Left, Right, Bottom

Sets the top, left, right and bottom margin for all left pages when you've selected Facing Pages. All even-numbered pages are considered left pages (as Finale numbers them in Page View). Left Page Margin settings apply to all newly created pages when Facing Pages is not selected.

Facing Pages

Determines whether to use the settings in both the Left and Right Page Margin group boxes when creating left and right pages in the score. To Finale, all even pages are left-facing pages, and all odd pages are right-facing pages (as Finale numbers them at the bottom of the window in Page View.)

Scale Page to

Determines at what percentage of normal size all pages appear.

First Page Drop

Sets the position of the top page margin on the first page of your music. Enter a negative value to specify where, measured from the top of the page, Finale should place the music.

First Staff System: Drop, Indent

Enter a negative value in the Drop text box to tell Finale how far down the page to place the first system, measured down from the top page margin. Enter a positive Indent value to specify how far you want Finale to indent the first system on the first page.

Right Page Margins: Top, Left, Right, Bottom

Sets the top, left, right and bottom margin for all newly created right pages when Facing Pages is selected. All odd-numbered pages are considered right pages (as Finale numbers them in Page View). When Facing Pages is not selected, Finale does not use these settings.


Page Format for Score

Use this dialog box to define the page format of newly created pages in the score. You can specify page size, first page settings, and separate left and right margins for facing pages.

Page Size: Height, Width

Determines the height and width for all new pages.

Staff System Margins: Top, Left, Right, Bottom

Determines the distance (for all new pages) between the bottom of one staff system and the top of the next (Top): usually zero; between the left page margin and the left edge of each staff system (Left): usually zero; between the right page margin and the right edge of each staff system (Right): usually zero; between staff systems (Bottom).

Left Page Margins: Top, Left, Right, Bottom

Sets the top, left, right and bottom margin for all newly created left pages when you've selected Facing Pages. All even-numbered pages are considered left pages (as Finale numbers them in Page View). Left Page Margin settings apply to all newly created pages when Facing Pages is not selected.

Facing Pages

Determines whether to use the settings in both the Left and Right Page Margin group boxes when creating left and right pages in the score. To Finale, all even pages are left-facing pages, and all odd pages are right-facing pages (as Finale numbers them at the bottom of the window in Page View.)

Scale Page to

Determines at what percentage of normal size all new pages appear.

First Page Drop

Sets the position of the top page margin on the first page of your music. Enter a negative value to specify where, measured from the top of the page, Finale should place the music.

First Staff System: Drop, Indent

Enter a negative value in the Drop text box to tell Finale how far down the page to place the first system, measured down from the top page margin. Enter a positive Indent value to specify how far you want Finale to indent the first system on the first page.

Right Page Margins: Top, Left, Right, Bottom

Sets the top, left, right and bottom margin for all newly created right pages when Facing Pages is selected. All odd-numbered pages are considered right pages (as Finale numbers them in Page View). When Facing Pages is not selected, Finale does not use these settings.


Page Layout

Use this window to change system placement and indentation, margin widths, and page sizes.

Page: Prev, Next

Enter the page number that you want to display, then press the Tab key, or click the Prev or Next buttons to display a different page.

Update Page Layout

When selected, the page formatting settings in the Page Format for Score dialog box (Options menu) will be updated to match the changes made here.

View

Enter a new percentage, or use this drop-down list to change the display size of the current page.

Layout Display

Displays the framework of your page size, margins, or staff systems, depending on which option button is selected (Page Size, Page Margins, or Staff Systems). Drag a handle to move it or click a handle and enter numbers in the four text boxes at the right, to adjust the page size, margins, or staff systems numerically. When viewing Staff Systems, the number below the display page indicates how much room is needed for the next system to fit on this page.

Top, Left, Right, and Bottom text boxes

When viewing Page Size, Top = page height; Left = zero coordinate for left edge of page, leave at 0; Right = page width; Bottom = zero coordinate for bottom edge of page, leave at 0.

When viewing Page Margins or Staff Systems, Top = top margin, expressed as a negative number; Left = left margin, expressed as a positive number; right margin, expressed as a negative number; Bottom = bottom margin, expressed as a positive number.

Page Size, Page Margins, Staff Systems

Displays the page size, page margins, or staff systems.

Blank Page

Determines whether the page is blank (by pushing all music onto the next page). Only accessible when Page Size is selected.

Optimized

Determines whether to remove empty staves from the selected staff system. Only accessible when Staff Systems is selected.

Show Music

Determines whether to view the actual music on the page framework. You can't adjust the page layout when the music is shown.

Default

Resets the page, margin, or staff system to its default. Change the default setting by choosing Page Format for Score from the Document Settings submenu in the Options menu.


Page Options

Use this dialog box to set up a staff or group name title for the parts and select which text items appear in the parts.

New Staff Positions

Determines whether to place the staves in the extracted parts according to the distances specified in the Top Staff and Between Staves text boxes.

Top Staff

Type the distance (usually a negative number) you want between the top of the screen and the top staff. Used only when "New Staff Positions" is selected.

Between Staves

Type the distance (usually a negative number) you want between the staves in each staff system. Used only when "New Staff Positions" is selected.

Items to Remove: Single-Page Text Blocks (Page 1), Single-Page Text Blocks (Page 2+), Staff or Group Names, Multiple-Page Text Blocks

Specify which items you want to appear in your extracted parts. When selected, the item is removed and will not appear in the extracted part. When unselected, the item is retained and will appear in the extracted part.

Single-Page Text Blocks (Page 1) - keeps or removes text blocks assigned to only the first page of the score.

Single-Page Text Blocks (Page 2+) -  keeps or removes text blocks attached to every page (except page 1) of the score.

Staff or Group Names - keeps or removes the full and abbreviated staff names or group names, depending on whether you're extracting a staff or a group of staves.

Multiple-Page Text Blocks- keeps or removes text blocks that appear on more than one page of the score.

Create Staff or Group Name Header

When selected, Finale places the staff or staff group name at the top of the specified pages, depending on whether you're extracting a staff or a group, respectively. The name used is the staff's full name that appears in the Staff Attributes dialog box in the full score, or the group's full name that appears in the Group Attributes dialog box.

H:, V:

Positions the staff or group name header on the first page of each extracted part, relative to the left and top page margins. The name moves to the right as the H: value increases; it moves down as the V: value decreases.

Resize Name to

Enter the percentage that you want the staff or group name text scaled by. For example, if you want the header to be twice the size of the regular staff or group name, enter 200%.

Page, Through

Enter the page range for which you want the header displayed.

See also: Extract Parts


Partial Measure Selection

This alert appears when you select only part of a measure, but then choose a command that works only on full measures.

Continue

Performs the operation on all measures that include the selected region.

Cancel

Returns to the score without performing the operation.


Percent Alteration Continuous Data

Use this dialog box to alter the values of the continuous data type in the selected region by the specified percentage.

Make all Continuous Data ___ Percent of Current Value

Determines the percentage that the values of the continuous data type will be altered by.


Percent Alteration Key Velocities

Use this dialog box to alter the key velocites of the notes in the selected region by the specified percentage.

Make all Key Velocities ___ Percent of Current Value

Determines the percentage that the key velocities will be altered by.


Percent Alteration Note Durations

Use this dialog box to alter the durations of the notes in the selected region by the specified percentage.

Make all Note Durations ___ Percent of Current Value

Determines the percentage that the note durations will be altered by.


Percussion Map Designer

Use this dialog box to create or edit a map for percussion notation. Each percussion instrument you create or edit (such as a hi-hat, bass drum, snare drum, and so on) has a particular notehead shape and occupies a specific space or line on the staff. You can even specify a MIDI note for playback. If you've specified that Finale should use the note definition ("Use This Note" is selected), Finale will apply these settings whenever that note is entered on the staff.

Map

Enter a name for the percussion map. You can use this map for any staff in your score.

List box: MIDI Pitch, Playback, Noteheads, Name

This list box displays all your note definitions for the current percussion map. The list always contains 128 items, numbered 0127, which correspond to MIDI note numbers. These are actual MIDI notes that are used during MIDI entry. For example, the MIDI note numbers on a full 88-key keyboard range between 21 and 108. In Finale, MIDI key 60 is equivalent to C3, which is middle C. To set up a note definition, click the box that you want to change. For example, if the percussion sound you want to change is on MIDI note 35, scroll to 35 in the list and select it, then make your changes in the Note Definition group box by entering values in the text boxes or by dragging the handle in the active display area. Each item in the list box shows the current settings for each note.

Use Note

If an asterisk (*) appears to the left of an item in the list, the settings are turned "on" for the note, so the note definition will be used for the current staff. If no asterisk shows, the settings are turned "off" and Finale will use standard notation for any note on the current staff. If this checkbox is selected, Finale will use the note definition for the note selected in the list box. If the checkbox is not selected, Finale will ignore the note definition for the note and display the note in standard notation.

Name

Enter a name for the percussion instrument (snare drum, bass drum, cymbal, and so on) that the note represents. Finale doesn't use this name in the score -- it's simply there for your reference.

Playback Note, Listen

Change the Playback note if you want to use a different percussion sound during playback once you've already set up the note definition. Enter a new number to specify a different MIDI note, or click the Listen button and play the desired note on your MIDI instrument. During playback, Finale plays the sound corresponding to the MIDI note number that you entered rather than the actual pitch you entered.

Staff Position

Determines which line or space on the staff the notehead is placed on, measured (in lines and spaces) from the first ledger line below the staff (which is middle C in the treble clef). Positive values place the notehead above the ledger line, and negative values place it below. Enter a new value or drag the handle in the notehead display to change the note's position.

Closed Notehead, Select; Open Notehead, Select

Enter the character that you want to use for the note in the list box. Or, click Select to display the Symbol Selection dialog box which shows all the characters in the notehead font in a graphical palette. Closed noteheads are used for quarter notes or smaller, and open noteheads are used for half or whole notes.

Notehead Display Area

Drag the handle up or down to raise or lower the noteheads. Open and closed noteheads share the same line or space. Finale updates the Staff Position value as you drag, increasing it as you drag the handle up, and decreasing it as you drag the handle down.


Percussion Map Selection

Use this dialog box to edit, create, duplicate, or delete percussion maps that can be used for any staff, and to select a percussion map that to use for the current staff.

List

Displays the percussion maps available in this document. Finale's default percussion maps (which are saved in Finale's percussion library), as well as any you create or edit, appear in this dialog box. The slot number for an item appears in the left corner of each box; this number can help identify the percussion map.

Edit

Displays the Percussion Map Designer dialog box, where you can modify the note definitions for the selected percussion map, and choose which notes are used for the current staff.

Note: Changes made to a percussion map apply to all staves that use that particular percussion map.

Create

Displays the Percussion Map Designer dialog box, where you can set up the note definitions for a new percussion map, and specify which notes are used for the current staff.

Duplicate

Creates a new percussion map, which is an exact duplicate of the currently selected percussion map. You can then edit the map, and change its noteheads or playback pitches, for example.

Delete

Removes the currently selected percussion map from the list. If the map is selected for the current staff or any other staff in the piece, you must choose an alternate percussion map for those staves before you can delete the percussion map.

Select

Uses the selected percussion map for the staff. Finale will use the selected percussion map for this staff until you select a different map, reset the staff to standard notation, or choose another option from the Notation Style drop-down list in the Staff Attributes dialog box. Remember that Finale only remaps a particular note if you select "Use This Note" in the Percussion Map Designer dialog box.


Piano Braces

Use this dialog box to adjust the curvature, thickness, and overall shape of the curly piano braces in your document.

Brace Display

Inner Tip Handle: Adjusts the inner tip curve.

Outer Tip Handle: Adjusts the outer tip curve.

Outer Body Handle: Adjusts the outer body curve.

Inner Body Handle: Adjusts the inner body curve.

Width Handle: Adjusts the overall brace thickness.

Outer Tip: H, V

Sets the position for the Outer Tip Handle which governs the outer curve of the brace near the tips. A negative number moves the handle to the left (H) or down (V).

Inner Tip: H, V

Sets the position for the Inner Tip Handle which governs the inner curve of the brace near the tips. A negative number moves the handle to the left (H) or down (V).

Outer Body: H, V

Sets the position for the Outer Body Handle which governs the outer curve of the brace in the middle. A negative number moves the handle to the left (H) or down (V).

Inner Body: H, V

Sets the position for the Inner Body Handle which governs the inner curve of the brace in the middle. A negative number moves the handle to the left (H) or down (V).

Width of Brace

Sets the overall width of the complete brace shape, point-to-point.

Center Thickness

Sets the thickness of the center point of the piano brace. Increase the value to make the center point thicker, decrease the value to make the center point thinner.

Tip Thickness

Sets the thickness of the tips of the piano brace. Increase the value to make the tips blunter, decrease the value to make the tips thinner.

Reset

Restores the piano brace's original shape.


Placeholder

Use this dialog box to create pickup measures by creating an invisible placeholder of a rhythmic duration you specify for the beginning of a measure.

Placeholder for Frame

Indicates the frame (which measure on which staff) you are editing.

Rest for

Sets the number of the selected duration that is inserted in front of the measure's contents.

Delete

Converts this placeholder measure into a normal one.


Playback Controls

Use these controls to control playback by clicking tape deck-like buttons.

|<<

Rewinds to the beginning.

<<

Rewinds. Click and hold to rewind incrementally.

Stop

Stops playback.

Play/Pause

Starts playback or, if playback is already started, pauses playback. You can also press the Space bar to Play/Pause.

Record

Starts recording at the specified measure based on your settings in the Click and Countoff dialog box; Finale will either start recording immediately, or after playing the indicated number of countoff measures. This button is available when the HyperScribe Tool is selected.

Unless you're tapping to provide the beat (Tap is checked in HyperScribe's Beat Source submenu), Finale will wait for the start signal you selected in the Playback Source dialog box before playing the countoff measures and recording your performance.

>>

Advances. Click and hold to advance incrementally.

>>|

Advances to the last measure in the score.

Measure

Indicates the current measure during playback or sets the starting measure for playback or HyperScribe recording. Click the up and down arrows to change measures. You can also change this number during playback for immediate response.

Countoff

Indicates the number of "count off" measures before starting to record with HyperScribe or play back using the Playback Controls. If you change this number, Finale updates the Click and Countoff dialog box.

Options

Expands (or condenses) the playback controls to offer you additional (or fewer) playback options.

Playing

Determines whether to play the current document or a playback file (pre-compiled audio-only file). The current file being played appears to the left of the drop-down list. Choose "Select Playback File" to display the Play dialog box, where you can choose a playback file for the document.

Play Mode

Determines whether the music scrolls as it plays back. "Non-Scrolling" plays the music back without scrolling,  processing playback information as it plays. "Non-Scrolling (Pre-Scan Music)" plays the music without scrolling, but takes a moment to pre-process playback information before it plays. Use this option if a complex piece doesn't play evenly. "Scrolling (Scroll View)" works in Scroll View only. It pre-processes playback information, then shows a pointer that follows the music as it plays.

Play From: Leftmost Measure, Measure ___

Determines whether to start playback with the first measure visible on the screen or with a measure you specify by entering its measure number (or clicking the up and down arrows to change the default measure number).

Play Through: End of Piece, Measure ___

Determines whether to end playback with the last measure of the piece or with a measure you specify by entering its measure number (or clicking the up and down arrows to change the default measure number).

Playback Tempo

Determines at what tempo to play. Choose from the drop-down list, enter a tempo in the text box, or click the up and down arrows to change the current tempo.

Base Key Velocity

Determines the overall dynamic level. Enter a key velocity in the text box or click the up and down arrows to change the current velocity.

Save File

Creates a MIDI file or a  playback file of the measures indicated in the Play From and Play Through boxes.

Click and Countoff

Opens the Click and Countoff dialog box.

Playback Options

Opens the Playback Options dialog box.

See also:

Playback Options

Click and Countoff


Playback Data Dump

Use this dialog box to control several data-dump functions. It is a fairly technical dialog box, requiring an in-depth understanding of the MIDI protocol. For more information, see "MIDI channels" in the Finale Encyclopedia.

Number of Units

Sets the number of MIDI bytes for the unit.

Data

Sets the first byte (regular or hexadecimal) of the MIDI code to playback.


Playback Options

Use this dialog box to define how to handle a number of playback variables.

Options

Play Recorded Key Velocities

Determines whether to play the notes with their recorded key velocities, or those added or edited with the MIDI Tool.

Play Recorded Note Durations

Determines whether to play the notes with their recorded note durations, or those added or edited with the MIDI Tool.

Play Recorded Continuous Data

Determines whether to play the music with recorded Continuous Data (Sustain Pedal, Pitch Bend, Channel Pressure and so on), or those added or edited with the MIDI Tool.

Play Recorded Tempo Changes

Determines whether to play the music with the recorded tempo changes, or those added or edited with the MIDI Tool.

Ignore Repeats

Determines whether to play the score without any repeats.

Reset Repeats

Determines whether to play any repeat barlines or text repeats Finale encounters as though it's reaching them for the first time (when playback is stopped then started again).

Playback Files

Wait for MIDI Sync

Determines whether to play only when a signal is received from an external MIDI sequencer.

Send Patch Changes During MIDI Sync

Sends patch changes when syncing to an external sequencer.

Send Continuous Data During MIDI Sync

Sends continuous data (Sustain Pedal, Pitch Wheel, Channel Pressure, and so on) while syncing playback to an external sequencer.

Use MIDI Configuration from Active Document/Playback File

Choose from this drop-down list to determine whether to use the Instrument List configuration, Channel, and Patch information from the active document or a previously saved playback file.

Dynamics and Markings: Chase from First Measure/ Use Current Settings / Reset

Use this drop-down list to determine what settings (tempo, key velocity, patches and so on) to use when playback resumes. Use Current Settings uses the settings when stopped, Reset uses the initial settings. Chase from First Measure figures out the current settings.

Duration of Grace Notes - EDUs, Set Duration

Specifies the total duration allotted to grace notes on any given note. Enter the grace note duration (1024 EDUs = one quarter note), or click Set Duration to choose a duration value from the note palette.

See also: Playback Controls


Playback Source

Use this dialog box to specify what you hear when you use HyperScribe to enter your music. Listen to just a metronome click, or listen to an instant playback of the staves that you've selected in the Instrument List.

Tempo: Listen

Sets the recording tempo you want for the metronome, in beats per minute. Click Listen to specify a tempo by tapping a key in rhythm.

Play Staves While Recording

Determines whether you hear just the metronome click specified in the Click and Countoff dialog box  or if you also hear the staves selected to play in the Instrument List.

Signal to Start Playback

Use this drop-down list to indicate what MIDI signal you want to serve as the "trigger" to start the playback of the staves or metronome click.


Position Measure Number

Use this dialog box to determine the placement of measure numbers in the score.

Display

Drag within this display area to move the measure number exactly where you want it to appear.

Alignment: Left, Right, Center

Determines whether the measure number is positioned at the left, right or center of the measure.

Distance from Staff: H, V

Specifies the vertical distance from the top line of the staff, and the horizontal distance from the left, right, or center of the measure, depending on the alignment selection.


Position Staff and Group Names

Use this dialog box to set up the position and alignment as well as the text justification for multi-line staff and group names. The title of this dialog box changes to reflect whether you're changing the default or individual positioning of full or abbreviated staff or group names.

Display

Drag within this display area to move the name exactly where you want it to appear.

Justification: Left, Right, Center, Full, Forced Full

Determines how Finale justifies lines of text in multi-line names, based on the longest line.

Expand Single Word

This option is available only for Full or Forced Full justification. Expand Single Word affects lines of text containing only one word. When selected, Finale spreads the letters of a word evenly between the left and right edges. When not selected, all lines containing a single word are left-justified.

Alignment: Left, Right, Center

Determines whether the name is aligned from the left, right or center of the handle that appears on-screen.

Distance from Staff: H, V

The horizontal distance of both staff and group names is measured from the left edge of the staff. The starting point for the vertical distance varies depending on whether you're positioning staff or group names.

Staff names are measured vertically from the top line of the staff. Group names, however, are centered between staves, so any adjustment changes the vertical distance from the default, centered position.


PostScript Options
'PostScript Options'

Use this dialog box to fine-tune a number of thickness and shape parameters for printing objects.

Fonts

Underline Depth

Sets the distance between the underline and the text baseline (for underlined text).

Underline Thickness

Sets the thickness of the underline (for underlined text).

Outline Thickness

Sets the thickness of the outline (for outlined text).

Shadow Effect: H, V

Specifies the amount by which the shadow should appear (for shadowed text) from the original text. Positive numbers move the shadow further right (H) or down (V).

Tie Ends

Starting Point: H, V

Specifies the amount by which you want to adjust the position of a tie tail's starting point. A negative number moves the point left (H) or down (V).

Ending Point: H

Specifies the amount by which you want to adjust the horizontal position of a tie tail's ending point. A negative number moves the point left.

Ties

Starting Point: H, V

Specifies the amount by which you want to adjust the starting point of ties.

Ending Point: H, V

Specifies the amount by which you want to adjust the ending point of ties.

Outer Arc's Left Point: H

Specifies the amount by which you want to horizontally adjust the left outer tie arc's curve-control point. A positive number moves the point inward, sharpening a tie's arc.

Outer Arc's Right Point: H

Specifies the amount by which you want to horizontally adjust the right outer tie arc's curve-control point. A negative number moves the point inward, sharpening a tie's arc.

Inner Arc's Left Point: H, V

Specifies the amount by which you want to adjust the left inner tie arc's curve-control point. A positive (H) number moves the point inward, thickening the left half of the tie. A negative (V) number moves the point down, thickening the tie.

Inner Arc's Right Point: H, V

Specifies the amount by which you want to adjust the right inner tie arc's curve-control point. A negative (H) number moves the point inward, thickening the right half of the tie. A negative (V) number moves the point down, thickening the tie.


Print Parts

Use this dialog box to generate quick printouts of each staff in your score.

Printer

Displays the currently selected printer. To change the printer, click the Setup button.

Setup

Click this button to display the Print Setup dialog box in which you can select another printer, or change the paper size and orientation of the printed music.

Format Parts

Click this button to display the Format Parts dialog box where you can specify limited formatting for your parts.

Other Options

The remaining settings in this dialog box, such as Print Quality and Print to File, are standard print options provided by Windows. See your Windows documentation for details.

For detailed information, see Format Parts and Print Setup dialog box.


Print Score

Use this dialog box to print your score as it appears in Page View. The contents of this dialog box vary slightly according to the printer and driver used with your computer.

Printer

Displays the currently selected printer. To change the printer, click the Setup button.

Setup

Click this button to display the Print Setup dialog box in which you can select another printer, or change the paper size and orientation of the printed music.

Print Range - All, Pages

Determines whether to print all pages of the score, or the specified pages. Click Pages, then enter the pages that you want printed.

All Pages, Odd Pages Only, Even Pages Only

Determines which pages to print. Select All Pages to print all the pages in the specified page range. Select Odd Pages Only or Even Pages Only to print only the odd or even pages, respectively, in the specified page range.

1-up, 2-up, 4-up

Print "n-up" even if your printer driver does not offer these options. When 1-up is selected, a single page of music will appear on the printed page. Select 2-up to print two pages of music side-by-side; Finale automatically scales the music to fit on the printed page. If you select 2-up, make sure you select Landscape when you print, or the two pages of music will be placed in the upper half of the printed page. Select 4-up to print four pages of music on one page; Finale automatically scales the music to fit on the printed page.

Reverse Order

Print the pages in reverse order -- from the last page to the first page.

Tile Pages

Select this option if you want Finale to print your music on more than one page of paper. This option is useful for oversized scores.

Registration and Crop Marks

Select this option if you want registration and crop marks to appear on the printed page. Crop marks identify the finished page size of the document, and registration marks help align overlapping pages or plates for printing purposes. Registration and crop marks appear on a printed page when the page is larger than the document size. When selected, Finale centers the music on the page.

Page Ranges

Don't choose the Print command repeatedly to print non-consecutive pages! Instead, enter the pages you want printed, separated by commas. You can also specify a range of pages by typing a hyphen. For example, enter 2, 5, 7-10, 16 to print pages 2, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, and 16 of your score.

Other Options

The remaining settings in this dialog box, such as Print Range, Print Quality, Copies, Print to File, and Collate Copies, are standard print options provided by Windows. See your Windows documentation for details.

See also: Print Setup dialog box.


Print Setup

Use this dialog box to control how your score prints out.

Printer: Default Printer, Specific Printer

Determines whether Finale prints to the default printer, or the printer that you select.

Orientation: Portrait, Landscape

Determines whether the score is printed Portrait (tall) or Landscape (wide).

Paper: Size, Source

Use these drop-down lists to choose the size of the paper that your score is printed on, and whether the printer uses paper from the paper tray or if it looks for a manually feed.

Other Options

The contents and appearance of the remaining settings in this dialog box, such as Options and Network, depend on your computer setup and printer selection.. See your Windows documentation for details.


Program Options

Use this dialog box to govern several overall program settings.

Allow Undo

Determines whether to enable the Undo command or (to speed up large operations) disable it. Large Mass Mover operations are faster with the Undo command off. If you run low on disk space when you're working in Finale, turn Undo off then back on. This causes Finale to delete and recreate the "undo" files it's currently maintaining, which frees up space on your hard disk.

Close Subsidiary Palettes When Leaving Tool

Determines whether to close any tool palette (other than the Main Tool Palette) when selecting another tool.

Load Window States At Startup

Determines whether to position windows, as they were when last saved, at startup.

Auto Save File(s) Every ___ Minutes

Determines whether to save this document automatically at regular intervals. Type the number of minutes you want between automatic saves in the text box.

Make Backups When Saving Files

Determines whether to create a backup of the files when Finale saves them.

Save Preferences At Exit

Determines whether to automatically save your preferences each time you exit Finale. If you prefer that Finale saves your preferences only on command, make sure this option is not selected, then Finale will only save your preferences when you choose the Save Preferences command from the File menu.

Save Window States At Exit

Determines whether to save the position of all windows when you exit Finale.

Show Rulers In New Windows

Determines whether to display rulers in new windows when they are created.

Tip: To show or hide rulers in an individual window, use the Show Rulers command.

Directories - Music

Determines which directory music files will be saved to and opened from by default.

Directories - Libraries

Determines which directory libraries will be saved to and opened from by default.

Directories - Backup

Determines which directory backup files will be saved to and opened from by default when Make Backups When Saving Files is selected.

Directories - Auto Save

Determines which directory files will be saved to and opened from by default when Auto Save File(s) Every__Minutes is selected.

Transcription - Allow Dotted Rests

Usually this option is not selected, so Finale writes out all rests instead of notating dotted rests. Select this option only if you want Finale to notate dotted rests when transcribing your MIDI file, or during a HyperScribe or Transcription Tool performance.

Transcription - Soften Syncopations

Determines whether to transcribe tied notes in syncopated rhythms into single, larger-value notes (when using HyperScribe or the Transcription Tool). For example: in cut time, two pairs of tied eighth notes will appear as eighth, quarter, eighth.

Pitch Representation -  MIDI Note Number

Determines whether to display MIDI notes as MIDI Note numbers in all dialog box that display MIDI pitch, such as the MIDI Tool split-window.

Pitch Representation -  Pitch (Middle C =  )

Determines whether to spell out MIDI notes as pitches in all dialog boxes that display MIDI pitch, such as the MIDI Tool split-window. The pitch selected in the Middle C drop-down list  is displayed in this option.

Pitch Representation -  Middle C =

Determines whether Finale spells middle C as C3, C4, or C5. MIDI manufacturers use various representations for middle C, so you can now change the display in Finale to match your MIDI gear.

Measure Number -  Display Defined Measure Numbers, Display Actual Measure Numbers

Determines whether the measure numbers that are "defined" or "actual" measure numbers are displayed in the Document Window's Measure Controls, and in edit boxes in any dialog box that displays measure numbers (such as the Measure Attributes, Key and Time Signature, and Select Region dialog boxes).

"Defined" measure numbers are the measure numbers that you defined in the Measure Number dialog box (or that were pre-defined in a template) for one or more regions in the score. "Actual" measures refer to Finale's measure numbers (Finale counts actual measure numbers consecutively from 1, starting with the first measure in the document).


Punch In PreRoll

Use this dialog box to set up punch-in for editing your real-time transcriptions.

Play the Note File for__second(s) then Start Recording

Sets the number of seconds of music you want played before you begin recording.

See also: Transcription Menu


Quantization

Use this dialog box to describe the rhythmic nature of music you are going to play in a HyperScribe session.

Beat Duration

Determines what rhythmic value you'll be tapping (click the appropriate rhythmic-value icon[s]). To specify a rhythmic value not pictured in the palette, enter it in 1024ths of a quarter note.

Divide the Beat into ___ Parts

Specifies the quantization level, expressed as a fraction of the beat. For example: if you'll be tapping your foot every quarter note, enter 2 to quantize to the nearest eighth note (2 per beat).

Floating Quantization: Select

Determines whether to use Floating Quantization, where Finale intelligently quantizes each beat individually. Click Select to set up Floating Quantization.

Tap States: Select

Determines whether to switch among several quantizing levels during a single HyperScribe performance. Click Select to set up Tap States.

See also: HyperScribe Menu


Randomize - Key Velocities
Randomize Key Velocities

Use this dialog box to randomly alter the key velocities of the notes in the selected region.

Randomize the ___ but Limit the Change to ___

Specifies the maximum amount you want to change  the key velocities by. Hint: Enter values between 5-20 to achieve a more "human" feel.


Randomize - Note Durations
Randomize Note Durations

Use this dialog box to randomly alter the start and stop times of the notes in the selected region.

Start Times, Stop Times

Specifies the maximum amount in EDUs (quarter note = 1024 EDUs)  you want to change the note attacks (start times), or the note releases (stop times) by. Hint: To alter the durations by a 16th note, enter 32.


Rebar Options

Use this dialog box to automatically redistribute the notes in your score so that each measure contains the proper number of beats.

Rebar Music Through the End of Piece or Stop at

Determines whether to stop the rebarring at the end of the selected region (as opposed to the end of the piece).

Key Signature Changes

Determines whether to stop the rebarring at the first key signature change.

Time Signature Changes

Determines whether to stop the rebarring at the first time signature change.

Special or Repeat Barlines, or Forward Repeats

Determines whether to stop the rebarring at the first special barline.

Empty Frames

Determines whether to stop the rebarring at the first empty measure.

Rebeam

Determines whether to rebeam the notes in the rebarred passage according to the time signature.


Rebeam to Lyrics

Use this dialog box to specify the set of  lyrics for which you want to break beams.

Break Beams at Each Syllable in

Determines whether to impose word-by-word beaming within All Lyrics, All Verses, All Choruses, or All Sections or to impose word-by-word beaming within a specified Verse, Chorus, or Section. Enter the number of the specific set of lyrics after choosing Verse, Chorus, or Section.

Also Break Beams at Each Beat in the Time Signature

Determines whether to beam together all notes in a melismatic passage (where a single syllable is sustained through more than one note).

See also: Rebeam to Time Signature


Rebeam to Time Signature

Use this dialog box to rebeam the notes in the selected region without changing the meter.

Display Area

Displays the time signature that determines how the notes will be rebeamed.

Number of Beats

Use this scroll bar to specify the top number of the time signature.

Beat Duration

Use this scroll bar to specify the bottom number of the time signature. Hint: Click the right arrow to make the number smaller (a longer beat), click the left arrow to make the number larger (a shorter beat).

Composite

Creates complex time signatures (such as 3+3+2 over 8).

See also: Rebeam to Lyrics


Redefine Pages

This alert appears after you choose Current Page, All Pages, Left Page or Right Page from the Redefine Pages/PageLayout menu. It warns you that any individual edits to the pages will be lost if you proceed.

OK

Proceeds with the operation, and resets all the page layout information to the layout specified in the Page Format for Score dialog box.

Cancel

Cancels the operations, and returns you to the score (or the Page Layout window) without making any changes.


Redefine Selected Pages

Use this dialog box to redefine the pages you specify to the settings in the Page Format for Score dialog box.

Page Range

Determines whether to redefine the settings for all pages, or only the pages you specify. Enter the page numbers that define that page range you want.

Include Pages

Determines whether to change only the left (even-numbered) or the right (odd-numbered) pages or both left and right pages in the specified page range. Hint: Facing Pages does not need to be selected in the Page Format for Score dialog box, in order to change only the left or right pages in the score.


Redraw Options

Use this dialog box to control how Finale draws the screen, and speed up the display.

Redraw Control: Redraw Only the Active Window, Redraw Only on Command, Allow Redraw Interrupt

These options are not selected by default so that you see a more accurate display of your score. When "Redraw Only the Active Window" is selected, only the current window will be updated (instead of all windows). When "Only on Command" is selected, the display will not be updated after an operation until you choose Redraw Screen from the View menu. When "Allow Redraw Interrupt"  is selected, any mouse click or key action will stop the screen redraw.

Draw: Music, Lyrics, Expressions, Graphics, Text Blocks, Chord Symbols, Special Positioning

When these items are selected, they will be drawn on the screen. To speed up screen redraw time, click an item to deselect it (remove the check).


Registration Confirmation

Use this dialog to verify that you have entered the correct information in the Finale Registration dialog box.

Yes

If the information is correct, click "Yes" and your copy of Finale will be personalized.

No

If the information is incorrect, click "No" and you will be allowed to change your information.

Cancel

Click "Cancel" to exit Finale without personalizing your software.


Remove Staff

Use this dialog box to control whether an empty staff is removed from a staff system during the optimization process.

Yes

Removes the indicated staff from the staff system.

No

Leaves the indicated staff in the staff system.


Repeat Assignment

Use this dialog box to define the playback effect for each text repeat.

Repeat Type - Mark

Creates a Mark repeat (one that doesn't affect playback, except to serve as the "jump to here" point for other repeats).

Jumper

Creates a Jumper repeat (one that makes playback skip to another measure).

Target

Sets the measure or the Mark repeat to which you want playback to skip.

Measure

To make playback jump to a specific measure in the score.

Repeat

To make playback jump to another repeat sign (a Mark repeat).

Individual Positioning

Determines whether to allow this text repeat to be positioned independently in every staff.

Repeat Action - Always Jump

Makes playback skip to another spot in the score every time this repeat is reached.

Jump on Total Passes

Makes playback skip to another spot in the score only on a specific repetition of the music (as indicated in the Total Passes text box). Use this option for a "3rd time to Coda" repeat.

Repeat until Total Passes

Makes playback skip to another spot in the score every time it reaches this repeat, until the music has played the number of times indicated in the Total Passes text box. Use this option for a "1., 2., 3." ending.

Total Passes

Specifies the number of times playback should reach this repeat before performing the Repeat Action you've specified.

Multiple

Determines whether to make this repeat affect playback only on specific repetitions of the music (for example, the first and third times).

Reset on Repeat Action

Determines whether to reset this repeat's internal "counter" to 0 after the Total Passes number has been reached.

Jump if Ignoring Repeats

Determines whether Finale should take a repeat, such as a first ending repeat, unconditionally -- even if Ignore Repeats is selected in the Playback Options dialog box.

Relative Jump

Indicates that Finale should jump forward or backward from the current location. Finale jumps the number of measures entered in the Target Measure text box.

See also:

Repeat Designer

Repeat Selection


Repeat Bars

Use this dialog box to define the appearance of repeat bars in the score.

Wing Styles: None, Curved, Single, Double

Choose whether you want a wing, and if so, what style, to appear on all repeat bars in your score.

Back-to-Back Styles: Thin, Mixed, Thick

Sets the style for all back-to-back repeats in your score, using thin lines, a mixture of thin and thick lines, or only thick lines.

Heavy Line Thickness

Sets the line thickness of the thick lines used in repeat bars.

Thin Line Thickness

Sets the line thickness (in measurement units) of the thin lines used in repeat bars.

Space Between Lines

Sets the distance between the thin and thick lines in repeat bars.

Forward Repeat Spacing: After Clef, After Key, After Time

Sets the space that appears before forward repeat bars in the score. Enter a positive value to change the distance between forward repeats and any starting clefs, key or time signatures at the start of staff systems.

Space Between Dot and Line: Forward Repeat, Backward Repeat

Sets the horizontal placement of the repeat dot in relation to the thin line of a repeat. Enter a value in Forward Repeat or Backward Repeat to set the horizontal spacing between a dot and the thin line in a forward or backward repeat, respectively. As the value increases, so does the distance between the dot and the line.

Vertical Dot Adjustment: Upper Dot, Lower Dot

Finale places repeat dots vertically in the center of the spaces above and below the middle line of the staff for the Upper and Lower Dot respectively. Enter new values to vertically reposition the dots in relation to their default positions. As the positive value increases, the dot moves higher up the staff. As the negative value increases, the dot moves lower.

Dot: Select

Click Select to display the Symbol Selection dialog box in which you can choose the character used for the repeat dots.

Reset

Restores Finale's built-in default settings.


Repeat Designer

Use this dialog box to define the text and appearance of text repeats.

Repeat Text

Sets the text for the text repeat.

Replace Number Sign with Total Passes

Substitutes the "total passes" value for the # sign, if any, when this repeat appears in the score. For example, "To Coda #th time" will become "To Coda 4th time."

Replace Number Sign with Repeat Mark in Target

Substitutes for the # sign, if any, the actual text of the Mark repeat when this repeat appears in the score. For example, "Last time to #" will become "Last time to Coda."

Use This Font

Determines whether to make the Mark appear in its own font (when it appears in place of the # sign).

Replace Number Sign with Measure Number in Target

Substitutes for the # sign, if any, the number of the measure to which playback will jump, when this repeat appears in the score. For example, "Last time to m. #" will become "Last time to m. 55."

Enclose Repeat

Determines whether to draw a rectangle (or other shape) around this text repeat.

Set Font

To change the typeface for this repeat.

Justification: Left, Right, Centered

Aligns the text repeat with the measure.

Horizontal Offset

Sets the horizontal position for the text repeat. A negative number moves the text repeat left.

Vertical Offset

Sets the vertical position for the text repeat, measured from the top staff line. A negative number moves the text repeat down.

See also:

Repeat Assignment

Repeat Selection


Repeat Endings

Use this dialog box to control the initial placement and the appearance of ending repeat brackets used for first and second endings.

Height of Bracket

Sets the initial height of repeat brackets used for first and second endings. This value is measured from the top line of Finale's standard five-line staff.

Length of Hook

Sets the initial length of the ending repeat bracket's hook (the short vertical line of the bracket).

Line Thickness

Sets the thickness of all ending repeat bracket lines.

Inset for Start of Bracket, Inset for End of Bracket

Determines the initial length of the bracket line by setting the initial distance from the first or last barline in a measure to the ends of the bracket line. Positive values shorten the line by moving the end point toward the middle of the measure. Negative values lengthen the line.

Ending Repeat Text: Horizontal Vertical

Sets the initial placement of the text for an ending repeat -- measured horizontally from the bracket hook and vertically from the bracket line.

Reset

Changes the ending repeat settings to Finale's built-in default values.


Repeat Selection

Use this dialog box to choose a repeat barline or select, edit, create, duplicate, or delete text repeat.

Forward repeat

This barline marks the beginning of a repeated section. It has no playback effect.

Backward repeat

This barline marks the end of a first ending (for example). It may have a playback effect.

Backward repeat with bracket

This barline marks the end of a first ending (for example), and has a bracket. It may have a playback effect.

Multiple ending repeat

This barline marks the beginning of a first ending (for example). It may have a playback effect.

Text Repeats

Click a text repeat to select it. Double-click to place it in the score. The slot number for an item appears in the left corner of each box; sometimes you can type a marking's slot number instead of selecting it from this selection box. A number may also appear in the right corner of a box; this number, which is enclosed in parenthesis, indicates the metatool that was assigned to the marking. (To use a metatool in the score, press the number and click a measure to assign the marking.)

Select

Adds the selected graphic or text repeat to the score.

Edit

Lets you change the appearance or definition of the selected text repeat.

Create

Lets you design a new text repeat.

Delete

Deletes the selected text repeat from the document. If the marking appears in the score, you'll be given the opportunity to switch it to another marking, or delete every occurrence of it from the score.

See also:

Repeat Assignment

Repeat Designer


Resize Note

Use this dialog box to reduce or enlarge a note or note group.

Resize Note to

Specifies the amount to resize the note or note group (notes beamed together) by. Hint: Numbers greater than 100 enlarge it, and numbers less than 100 reduce it.

See also: Resize Tool


Resize Notehead

Use this dialog box to reduce or enlarge a notehead.

Resize Notehead to

Specifies the amount to resize the notehead (not the stem) by. Hint: Numbers greater than 100 enlarge it, and numbers less than 100 reduce it.

See also: Resize Tool


Resize Page

Use this dialog box to reduce or enlarge a page in Page View.

Resize Page to

Specifies the amount to resize the page by. Hint: Numbers greater than 100 enlarge it, and numbers less than 100 reduce it.

Hold Margins

When selected, the current page size is maintained and the music (and other elements) are resized. Otherwise the size of the page is resized by the specified amount.

Page Range

Determines which pages will be resized.

Update Page Layout

When selected, the page resize setting in the Page Format for Score dialog box (Options menu) will be updated to match the resizing made here.

See also: Resize Tool


Resize Staff

Use this dialog box to reduce or enlarge a staff in Page View.

Resize Staff to

Specifies the amount to resize the staff by. Hint: Numbers greater than 100 enlarge it, and numbers less than 100 reduce it.

Staff System Range

Determines which staff systems will be resized.

See also: Resize Tool


Resize Staff System

Use this dialog box to reduce or enlarge a staff system in Page View.

Resize Staff System  to

Specifies the amount to resize the staff system by. Hint: Numbers greater than 100 enlarge it, and numbers less than 100 reduce it.

Hold Margins

When selected, the original width is maintained and the music (and other elements) are resized. Otherwise the width of the staff system is resized by the specified amount.

Resize Vertical Space

When selected, the space between staff systems is resized by the specified amount. Otherwise the original space is maintained.

Staff System Range

Determines which staff systems will be resized.

See also: Resize Tool


Respace Staves

Use this dialog box to adjust the vertical spacing of all staves.

Top Staff Position - Keep Current Position

Leaves the top staff's vertical position unchanged.

Set to

Moves the Top Staff to a position you specify.

Scale to

Adjusts the top staff's position by a percentage of it's current position. Hint: A number greater than 100 will drop the staff.

Distance Between Staves - Set to

Separates the staves by a distance you specify. Enter a negative number to specify the distance between staves within a system.

Scale to

Changes the distances between all staves proportionally, expressed as a percentage of their current distances apart.


Retranscribe

Use this dialog box to specify new quantization settings to apply when renotating the selected region.

Press Shift when choosing Retranscribe from the Mass Edit menu to use the current settings in this dialog box (without displaying the dialog box on the screen).

Resolution: Double Whole, Whole, Half, Quarter, Eighth, 16th, 32nd, 64th, Dot; EDUs

Use this palette to select the degree of quantization you want applied to the region. Generally you'll select the smallest note value you want notated in the region.

Floating Quantization, Select

When this option is selected, Finale will, when necessary, quantize to the nearest sixteenth note, eighth note triplet, or whatever duration you specify in the Floating Quantization dialog box. All other notes of larger rhythmic values will be automatically expanded to their full notated values, even if you didn't hold down the keys for the full notated durations while you were playing. As a result, your transcription will be free of assorted sixteenth rests and tied 32nd notes. In other words, when Floating Quantization is selected, Finale knows to vary its quantization level on a beat-by-beat basis. Click Select to turn on Floating Quantization and enter the Floating Quantization dialog box. To turn off Floating Quantization, click the checkbox to deselect it.

Allow Grace Notes

If this option is selected, any note in the selected region that's shorter than the specified quantization value will appear as a grace note in the score. If this option is not selected, Finale automatically lengthens any notes in the selected region file whose durations were less than the quantization value you specified.

Include Voice Two

Select this option if there's an inner voice in the music you'll be transcribing. Determines if Finale will renotate the region into two independent voices per staff, one stems-up and one stems-down.

Retranscribe

Renotates the music in the selected region according to the settings you've specified in this dialog box.


Rulers and Grid

Use this dialog box to change the units of measurement for the ruler and grid marks used in the Shape Designer.

Measurement

Determines whether the grid marks and ruler are displayed in inches, centimeters, picas, points, EVPUs or Eighth Notes (useful for executable shapes).

Grid Marks Every

Specifies how often a grid mark should appear on the grid.


Sample List for Executable Shape

Use this dialog to specify when Finale should sample, and respond to, an executable shape. Finale normally samples executable shapes at regular intervals, such as every eighth note.

<<, >>

Use these arrows to scroll through the six possible settings. Enter numbers to specify which of the samples generated by the executable shape you want Finale to respond to.

Clear

Sets the numbers in all the text boxes to zero. Finale will again sample the executable shape at regular intervals.

See also: Executable Shape Designer


Save Library

Use this dialog box to specify which set of elements you want to save as a library.

Allotments

Creates a library of width settings for various note values (used by the Music Spacing commands).

Articulations

Creates a library of single-note expression markings: staccato marks, accents, and so on.

Chord Suffixes

Creates a library of chord-symbol suffixes ("maj7," "M9," and so on) and Learned Chord definitions.

Document Settings

Creates a library that stores the active document's menu settings, layer and redraw options, metatools, and tool palette configurations.

Executable Shapes

Creates a library of playback definitions that change over time (crescendos, rallentandos, and so on).

Instruments

Creates a library containing the active document's MIDI configuration, including the instruments, MIDI channels, and patches assigned to each staff.

Key Signatures

Creates a library of nonstandard key signatures, if you've created any.

Percussion Maps

Creates a library of the percussion maps created in the Percussion Map Designer in your score.

Shapes

Creates a library of graphics created in the Shape Designer.

Shape Expressions

Creates a library of graphics-based expression markings (crescendo hairpins and slurs, for example).

Text Expressions

Creates a library of text-based expression markings (dynamics, for example).

Text Repeats

Creates a library of text-based repeat indications (such as "To Coda").


Save Tempo Changes

Use this dialog box to create a tempo map for your score while transcribing your Transcription window performance.

Do Not Save Tempo Changes

Does not save the recorded tempo fluctuation for playback.

Save Tempo Changes as an Absolute Tempo

Remembers the recorded tempo change exactly as they occurred. Any tempo changes you indicate with the Playback Controls or a Staff or Score Expression will be ignored.

Save Tempo Changes as a Percent Alteration

Remembers the recorded tempo changes for the score. The tempo is saved as a percentage of the tempo before it so you can change the starting tempo with the Playback Controls or a Staff or Score Expression, and still maintain the relative tempo.

Save Tempo Changes as a Percent Alteration With an End-of-Measure Reset

Remembers the recorded tempo changes at the beginning of each measure. The tempo is saved as a percentage of the tempo before it so you can change the starting tempo with the Playback Controls or a Staff or Score Expression, and still maintain the relative tempo.

See also: Transcription


Scale - Continuous Data
Scale Continuous Data

Use this dialog box to scale the values of the selected continuous data type for the selected region. This can be useful for defining a pitch bend over a region.

from, to, in increments of

Specifies the minimum and maximum values to use for scaling, as well as the amount  to increment the value by.

Absolute, Percent of Original

Determines whether the values will be saved as an absolute (fixed) value, or whether the values are relative to any previous settings.


Scale - Key Velocities
Scale Key Velocities

Use this dialog box to scale the values of the key velocities of the selected notes. This can be useful for creating a crescendo or decrescendo.

from, to

Specifies the minimum and maximum key velocities for the first and last note. The velocities of  notes in between will be scaled as needed.

Absolute, Percent of Original

Determines whether the values will be saved as an absolute (fixed) value, or whether the values are relative to any previous settings.


Scale - Note Durations
Scale Note Durations

Use this dialog box to scale either the Start or StopTimes of the notes in the selected region.

Start Times, Start Times

Determines whether the Start Times (attacks of notes) or the Stop Times (releases of notes) will be scaled.

from, to

Specifies the minimum and maximum key velocities for the first and last note. The velocities of  notes in between will be scaled as needed.


Scale View

Use this dialog box to resize the display of the music on the screen (not on printout).

Scale View to

Determines the percentage the music will be displayed at on the screen.


Scanning Smart Shapes

This alert appears if Finale detects a corrupt shape (created with the Smart Shape Tool) in the score.

OK

Scans the document, and deletes all corrupt smart shapes from the score.

Cancel

Cancels the operation, and returns you to the score without deleting the shape.

See also: Data Check


Score Expression Assignment

Use this dialog box to set several options pertaining to a score expression's placement and playback.

Distance from Beginning of Measure: H, V

Sets this expression's distance from the left barline (H) and top staff line (V).

Beats, EDUs, Inches

Use this drop-down list to specify whether you're measuring the expression's distance in beats, inches or EDUs. 1024 EDUs = 1 quarter note.

Show On - All Staves

When selected, the expression appears on every staff in the score and parts.

Show On - This Staff Only

When selected, the expression appears on the current staff only.

Show On - Staff List, Edit

When selected, the expression appears on the specific group of staves defined by the staff list currently selected in the drop-down list.

To select a Staff List already created for use in the score, choose its name from the drop-down list. Or, choose New Staff List to display the Staff List dialog box, where you define which staves will display expressions. Click Edit to display the Staff List dialog box for the selected Staff List, and change which staves the Score Expression using that Staff List should appear in.

Begin Playback at: Beginning of Measure, Position in Measure

Determines whether this expression's playback effect, if any, starts at the beginning of the measure or at the expression's exact musical position in the measure.

Allow Individual Positioning

Determines whether to let the expression move independently in every staff of the score.

See also: Staff List


Score Expression Selection

Use this dialog box to select, edit, create, duplicate, or delete shapes and text expressions for use in the score. A score expression can appear in more than one staff in your score.

Selection boxes

Click a shape to select an expression. Use the scroll bars to display additional expressions. The slot number for an item appears in the left corner of each box; sometimes you can type a marking's slot number instead of selecting it from this selection box. A number may also appear in the right corner of a box; this number, which is enclosed in parenthesis, indicates the metatool that was assigned to the marking. (To use a metatool in the score, press the number and click a measure to assign the marking.)

Select

Adds the current expression to the score.

Edit

Lets you change the selected expression.

Create

Lets you design a new expression.

Duplicate

Creates a new expression, which is an exact duplicate of the currently selected expression. You can then edit the expression, and either change its appearance or playback settings slightly.

Delete

Deletes the selected expression from the library. If the marking appears in the score, you'll be given the opportunity to switch it to another marking, or delete every occurrence of it from the score.

Text

Displays all the text expressions in the library.

Shape

Displays all the shape expressions in the library.


Staff List

Use this dialog box to name staff lists  - groups of staves that particular score expressions should appear in for the score and extracted parts. Staff lists can be used for any number of expressions.

Staff List

Choose the Staff List you want to edit from the drop-down list, or click arrow controls to display the settings for other staff lists.

List Name

The name of the currently selected Staff List appears here. If you're adding a new Staff List, change the name that appears in the text box, then click Add. The names of the Staff Lists appear in alphabetic order.

Add

Add a new Staff List after you've entered the name of the new list in List Name. The new list will be added to the drop-down list in alphabetical order. You can create over 1000 staff lists (1023 to be exact).

Delete

Removes the currently selected Staff List from the drop-down list.

Staves, Score, Parts

The name of each staff in the score appears in the Staves column. Entries in the Score and Parts columns for each staff indicate whether Score Expressions for the staff should appear. Click in the Score or Parts column to set the Score and Parts entries for a staff. The Score and Parts columns cycle between three states as you click: hide a Score Expression for the staff (the column is blank), show a Score Expression (an "X" appears in the column), or force a Score Expression to always appear (an "F" appears in the column). When an "F" appears, the expression will always appear in that staff, even if you've elected to hide a Score Expression for the staff in the Staff Attributes dialog box.

Set Score, Clear Score, Set Parts, Clear Parts

Use these buttons to control all the settings in the Score or Parts columns at once. Click Clear Score (or Clear Parts) to remove "X" or "F" from every staff in the Score or Parts column. Click Set Score (or Set Parts) to add an "X" to every staff in the Score or Parts column.

Always Show On - Top Score Staff

Determines whether the expression always appears in the top staff of the full score, even if, for example, flute is the top staff in one system and clarinet is the top staff in another system.

Always Show On - Top Part Staff

Determines whether the expression always appears in the top staff of the extracted part.

Always Show On - Bottom Score Staff

Determines whether the expression always appears in the bottom staff of the full score, even if, for example, bass is the bottom staff in one system and percussion is the bottom staff in another.

Always Show On - Bottom Part Staff

Determines whether the expression always appears in the bottom staff of the extracted part.


Search and Replace

In All Octaves, In Selected Octave Only

Determines whether Finale will search for a match in pitches in all octaves or in the same octave of the specified pitches.

Match Durations

When selected, Finale will search for a match in both the pitch and the rhythmic value. Otherwise, Finale compares the pitches only.


Secondary Beam Break Selection

Use this dialog box to create special beaming breaks for 16th notes and smaller.

Break Through

Breaks the beams through the largest beam specified in Beam Durations.

Break Only

Breaks only the beam specified in Beam Durations.

Beam Durations: 16th, 32nd...4096th

Determines which beam will be separated from the rest of the beam group. Note that you select a beam duration when Break Through is selected, all smaller beams are automatically selected.

Delete

Removes the current beam break settings and reverts to the music back to its standard display.


Select Default Fonts

Use this dialog box to globally change the font for most elements in your score. The font selected for the current element appears below its drop-down list. You can also change the positioning of chord root alterations in the score.

Lyrics: Set Font

To change the font for lyric elements. Use the drop-down list to select the type of lyric to alter, then click Set Font to display the Font dialog box where you can choose an alternate font and size for the element.

Text: Set Font

To change the font for text elements. Use the drop-down list to select the type of text to alter, then click Set Font to display the Font dialog box where you can choose an alternate font and size for the element.

Notation: Set Font

Use this drop-down list to choose the musical element that you want to change, then click Set Font to display the Font dialog box where you can choose an alternate font and size for the element.

Chord: Symbol, Suffix, Alteration; Set Font

To change the font for the chord root and alternate bass notes of chord symbols in the score and to change the initial font used for characters when creating new chord suffixes in the Chord Suffix Editor dialog box. Use the drop-down list to select the chord item to alter, then click Set Font to display the Font dialog box where you can choose an alternate font and size for the element.

To change the font for suffixes already created ("maj7," for example), use the Change Chord Suffix Fonts command in the Chord menu.

Chord Alteration Baseline Adjustmenut: Sharps, Flats, Naturals

Sets the baseline values for sharp (and double-sharp) signs, flat (and double-flat) signs, and naturals (for European chord style display) placed on chord suffixes.

Set Default Music Font

Displays the Font dialog box where you choose the music font you want to use for all of the music symbols. Resets the musical symbols in the Notation drop-down list to the font you select.

Note: If you choose Petrucci or Sonata as the default music font using this button, Finale resets the music symbols in the Notation drop-down list and automatically updates the new Music Character Positioning dialog box to the correct settings for the font you selected. Otherwise you'll need to change the settings in the Music Character Positioning dialog box.


Select Display Colors

Use this dialog box to assign colors to a number of items in your score so that you can identify which tools created them, or which layer they belong to. The colors are used for on-screen display only -- not for printing.

Layer 1, Layer 2 ... Repeats

The items that are listed can be assigned different colors. You can display one color for all the items in a layer, or different colors for items that were created by different tools. Click on any item button to choose a color for the item.

Use Colors

Select this option if you want Finale to display items in color. The corresponding tool on the Main Tool Palette also appears in color to help identify various elements of the score. If this option is not selected, color is not used for any items.

Layer Colors Apply to All Layer Items

Select this checkbox if you want Finale to set all items in layers 1, 2, 3 and 4 to the specified colors for each layer.


Select Region

Use this dialog box to select large or small selections of your score without scrolling. Select Partial Measures, from the Mass Mover Menu, must be checked to use some of these options.

From - Staff, Measure

Use this drop-down list to specify the top staff you want included in your selection and enter the first measure in the measure text box.

Beats/EDUs

Determines whether the region you're selecting begins on a specific beat or a specific EDU (1024 EDUs = quarter note). Enter the beat or EDU value you want to begin the selection in the text box.

Through - Staff, Measure

Use this drop-down list to specify the bottom staff you want included in your selection and enter the last measure in the measure text box.

Beats/EDUs

Determines whether the region you're selecting ends on a specific beat or a specific EDU (1024 EDUs = quarter note) Enter the beat or EDU value you want to end the selection in the text box.


Selection Overview

The following dialog boxes are very similar. Click a dialog box name for specific information.

Articulation Selection

Chord Suffix Selection

Executable Shape Selection

Percussion Map Selection

Score Expression Selection

Shape Selection

Staff Expression Selection

Stem Connections


Selective Mirror

Use this dialog box to display selected notes from existing mirrors.

Selective Mirror for Frame

Displays which frame (completely blank layer in a measure) the mirrored music will appear in.

ID

Displays which selective mirror you're currently editing.

Display

Select the notes you want to appear in this selective mirror.

Prev, Next

Click prev and next to cycle through the selective mirrors in the score.

See also: Mirror Tool


Send MIDI Value

Use this dialog box to transmit any MIDI message directly to your synthesizers.

MIDI Channels - All MIDI Channels

Sends the MIDI signal on every MIDI channel.

MIDI Channels - Only MIDI Channel

Sends the MIDI signal on one specific MIDI channel. Enter a channel number in the text box.

MIDI Data - Key Off

Sends a "note off" message to a specific MIDI note. Enter the MIDI note number (Middle C = 60) in the first text box and enter a key velocity (0 = Off) in the second.

MIDI Data - Key On

Sends a "note on" message to a specific MIDI note. Enter the MIDI note number (Middle C = 60) in the first box and enter a key velocity (0 = Off) in the second.

MIDI Data - Controller

Transmits a MIDI controller message (to the sustain pedal, for example). Enter appropriate numbers in the two text boxes (controller number in the first and value in the second).

MIDI Data - Patch

Transmits a patch change to your MIDI instrument. Choose the type of bank and program change from the drop-down list, then enter the bank and program change values in the text boxes.

MIDI Data - Pitch Wheel

Transmits a pitch bend to your MIDI instrument. Enter a pitch-bend value in the text box.

MIDI Data - Channel Pressure

Transmits a channel pressure (aftertouch) value to your MIDI instrument. Enter a channel pressure value in the text box.

MIDI Data - Other

Sends a MIDI message not specifically named in this dialog box. Enter the appropriate MIDI codes in the three text boxes.


Set Distances

Use this dialog box, when transcribing a MIDI file, to set up the position of the first staff, and the distance between any subsequent staves.

Distance to Top Staff

Determines the placement of the top staff in the score.

Distance Between Staves

Determines the placement of the next staff, by measuring the distance below the previous staff.


Set Durations

Use this dialog box to select rhythmic values from the palette.

Duration icons, Dot icon

Click the Duration icon for the rhythmic value you want to represent. Click the Dot icon to select or deselect it.


Set Patch To

Use this dialog box to set the patch for the selected region of measures.

Patch

This drop-down list provides the types of bank and program changes available in Finale. Finale supports bank changes listed in the Standard MIDI Specification and supports the implementations of several manufacturers. Choose the method that matches your MIDI gear.

"Program Change" provides a simple program change with no bank change -- just enter the program change (sometimes called patch) number. The remaining options provide bank support. "Bank Select 0, Bank Select 32, Program Change" is the standard method of doing bank select; first controller 0 (C0), then controller 32 (C32) are sent with their respective values (these two controllers determine the bank), then a program change value is sent. The next two menu selections are variations on the standard. In both cases, only one of the controllers is sent with its value. "Program Change, Program Change" is bank select accomplished by sending two standard program change messages.

Bank Select 0

This text box may be disabled depending on the selection in the Patch drop-down list. If available, enter the value of the bank that you want to change to.

Bank Select 32

This text box may be disabled depending on the selection in the Patch drop-down list. If available, enter the value of the bank that you want to change to.

Program Change

Enter the number of the MIDI program change (the number of the instrument sound) that you want Finale to send.


Set Placeholder

Use this dialog box to reassign or maintain font assignments for fonts that are embedded in the document but not installed on your computer system.

Change This Staff Only

Creates a pickup measure (by shifting the notes by the specified duration) only for the staff you clicked.

Change All Staves

Creates pickup measures (by shifting the notes by the specified duration) for all staves in the score.


Set Swing Ratio

Percent

Enter the amount of swing you want. A value of 200 works well. Hint: The higher the number, the later the second note in a swing pair.

Duration

Determines the durational value of the notes to which you're applying swing.


Set To - Continuous Data

Use this dialog box to set continuous data values for a selected region of measures.

Set Continuous Data to

Specifies the value for all selected data.


Set To - Key Velocities

Use this dialog box to set key velocities for a selected region of measures.

Set Key Velocities to

Specifies the value for all selected data.


Set To - Start/Stop Times

Use this dialog box to set start and stop time values for a selected region of measures.

Start Time

Determines whether to apply a start time for all selected data.

Stop Time

Determines whether to apply a stop time for all selected data.


Shape Designer

Use the Shape Designer to create shapes to use as staff and score expressions and for text blocks, multimeasure rests, and so on.

Tools (from left to right); Selection, Hand Grabber, Text, Line, Rectangle, Ellipse, Curve, Slur, Multiline, Polygon, Bracket, Graphics

Click to a tool to select it, then click or drag in the display area to use it.

Selection - click to select an object (Shift-click or drag-enclose to select additional objects)

Hand Grabber - drag to adjust the display area

Text - click and then type characters or lines of text at the blinking cursor (press Enter to start a new line)

Line - drag to draw a line from the point you click (Press Shift to constrain dragging to 45 degree angles)

Rectangle - drag to draw a rectangle from the point you click (Press Shift to draw a square)

Ellipse - drag to draw a ellipse from the point you click (Press Shift to draw a circle)

Curve - drag to draw a non-tapered curved line from the point you click (Curves can be solid or dashed lines)

Slur - drag to draw a tapered curved line from the point you click (Slurs are always solid, tapered curves; use the Curve Tool for dashed, non-tapered curves)

Multiline - drag to draw the first line segment; click and drag to draw the next line segments; double-click to draw the last line segment.

Polygon- drag to draw the first line segment; click and drag to draw the next line segments; double-click to close the shape.

Bracket - click to place the bracket (selected in the Bracket Style dialog box) below the point you click.

Graphics - click to place a bracket (that you select in the Place Graphic dialog box) below the point you click.

Draw area

Use the tools in the Draw area. To select an existing object, click it with the selection tool. When it's selected, you can use the Shape Designer menu to change its line style, fill style, and so on.

View

Sets the viewing percentage. This does not resize the shape. It only zooms in or out. Choose a percentage from the drop-down list if you prefer.

Positioning: H, V

Specifies the current position of the cursor, measured from the origin (the small white circle). Also changes the coordinates of a selected point. A positive number is to the right of (H) or above (V) the origin and a negative number is to the left (H) or below (V).


Shape Expression Designer

Use this dialog box to specify the shape expression, and any playback effects, you want to use in the score.

Shape, Select, Edit

Displays the ID number of the selected shape. If the number is zero, no shape has been selected yet. Click Select or Edit to select a new shape or edit the current shape, respectively.

Allow Horizontal Stretching

Determines whether a shape will stretch slightly (checked) with the measure in Page View, or whether it will maintain its exact length (unchecked).

Playback Options

Click this button to expand the dialog box and show the playback settings. Click this button again to hide the playback settings.

Type

Use this drop-down list to specify what playback effect you want this marking to have.

None

No effect.

Tempo

Changes the tempo.

Controller

Affects a MIDI controller, such as a wheel or pedal.

Key Velocity

Affects how hard the keys are struck (which usually affects volume).

Transposition

Transposes the music following this expression without changing the way it's notated.

Channel

Changes the MIDI channel.

Patch

Changes the synthesizer sound (patch) used. When selected, the Patch drop-down list appears, which lists the type of bank and program changes available. Enter the bank and program change values in the Set To Value text boxes.

Pitchwheel

Creates a pitch bend, as though the pitch wheel had been turned.

Channel Pressure

Affects monophonic aftertouch (pressure on a key while it's being held down), if your synthesizer is equipped to respond.

Restrike Keys

Plays the affected note or chord repeatedly. Use this option to create tremolo effects.

Dump

For MIDI programmers: transmits MIDI codes.

Play Tempo Tool Changes

Allows stored performance tempo data to affect playback tempo. Performance tempos are created when you use the Tempo Tool or notate a Transcription Tool performance.

Ignore Tempo Tool Changes

Prevents stored performance tempo data from affecting playback. Performance tempos are created when you use the Tempo Tool or notate a Transcription Tool performance.

Set to Value

Creates a playback effect by setting a MIDI aspect to a specific value. Example: A dynamic symbol could set key velocities to 64. Enter a MIDI playback value.

Execute Shape: Select

Creates a playback effect by changing a MIDI aspect over time. Example: A crescendo symbol could increase key velocities gradually from 50 to 100. Click Select to select or draw a shape whose contour will govern this playback effect or enter the ID number of the shape whose contour you want to govern playback.

Play Only on Pass

Determines whether this expression has playback effect only on a specific repetition of the passage.


Shape Selection

Use this dialog box to select, edit, create, duplicate, or delete shapes for use in shape expressions, or shape expressions.

Selection boxes

Click a shape to select it. Use the scroll bars to display additional shapes. The slot number for an item appears in the left corner of each box; sometimes you can type a shape's slot number instead of selecting it from this selection box.

Select

Selects the current shape for the element you're creating.

Edit

Lets you change the selected shape.

Create

Lets you design a new shape.

Duplicate

Creates a new shape, which is an exact duplicate of the currently selected shape. You can then edit the shape, to change its appearance slightly.

Delete

Deletes the selected shape from the document. If the shape is being used in the document, you'll be given the opportunity to switch it to another shape, or delete every occurrence of the shape from the document.


Shift Lyrics

Use this dialog box to shift syllables right or left by one note.

Shift Lyrics to the

Use this drop-down list to specify the direction (right or left) you want your lyrics shifted (relative to the notes in the score).

Shift Syllables by One Note, to the End of the Lyric

Shifts every syllable in the lyric set, beginning with the one whose note you click.

Shift Syllables by One Note, to the Next Open Note

Shifts syllables in the lyric set only as far as the next note that has no syllable attached.

Rotate Syllables

Shifts all syllables in the entire lyric set, relative to their notes.

See also: Lyrics Tool


Size

Use this dialog box to specify a point size for the selected text. This dialog box lets you enter different font sizes than those in the menu.

Point Size

Enter the size, in points, for the selected text.

Fixed Size

Select Fixed Size to display the text at the specified point size, regardless of any reductions you've previously placed on a note, staff, staff system or page using the Resize Tool.


Slur Contour

Use this dialog box to define the general shape Finale will automatically give to all new slurs when they're created.

Active display area

This area shows a slur that you can edit. Drag the control point handle beside the slur to adjust the default height and inset.

Staff display area

This display area shows the slur in proportion to other elements in your score.

Control Points for: Short Span, Medium Span, Long Span

Each slur length (short, medium, and long) has its own height and inset values. Use this drop-down list to choose the slur length for which you want to change height and inset settings.

Height

This is the vertical height of the current slur's arc. In general, slurs have varying heights, depending on the length of the slur. Set the height of the three slur lengths (in the "Control Points for" drop-down list). As you create a slur, Finale senses the length of the slur and automatically applies an appropriate height from among these settings.

When the length of the slur falls somewhere between short and medium, or between medium and long, Finale finds a proportional height somewhere between the respective settings.

When the slur's length is less than the short or greater than the long slur lengths, Finale simply applies the height from the short or long setting, respectively.

Inset

Changing the default inset value affects the look of the ends of the slur. The slur ends are more rounded when the inset is a low value. They take on a flatter look when the inset is a high value. The inset is a percentage of the length of the slur.

As you create a slur, Finale determines the inset value in the same way it determines the height, sensing the length of the slur and automatically applying an appropriate inset based on the settings.

Units: EVPUs, Inches, Centimeters, Points, Picas, Spaces

Use this drop-down list to choose an alternate measurement unit.

Reset

Restores Finale's built-in Finale default settings for the slurs.

See also: Smart Shape Tool


Slur Placement

Use this dialog box to control precisely how slurs attach to notes in a score, by defining their position relative to the top center or bottom center of a note or the tip of a stem.

List box

The different notational contexts upon which the attachment of slurs is based are modeled in the list box. The general placement of slurs is based upon standard music notational practice. However, the precise placement, or even the choice of following your own "standard", is up to you.

Finale makes intelligent decisions about a slur's direction and end position based on the stem positions of notes, as well as conditions of voicing and beaming. The slurs in the list box represent the rules that Finale automatically follows. Although there are a limited number of examples in the list box, they cover most of the contexts for controlling how note-attached slurs will connect to noteheads and/or stems.

Active display area

Use the Active display area to alter the slur model selected in the list box. Drag the slur's end points to adjust where they're placed relative to the notehead or stem. Note that the values for the Start and End Points are updated as you drag. Changes you make to the slur's end points will apply to all slurs of this type that you create as well as to end points that haven't been manually adjusted in all similar slurs in the score.

Start Point H:, Start Point V:

Sets the horizontal and vertical positions of the slur in relation to its start point. The slur initially attaches to the note stem or to the center top (or bottom) of the notehead, depending on the rule.

Enter values or drag the start of the slur in the active display area to change its position. Drag to the left and right, or up and down to change its horizontal and vertical position. As you drag, the H: and V: text boxes change to reflect the current position.

End Point H:, End Point V:

Sets the horizontal and vertical positions of the slur in relation to its end point. The slur initially attaches to the note stem or to the center top (or bottom) of the notehead, depending on the rule.

Enter values or drag the end of the slur in the active display area to change its position. Drag to the left and right, or up and down to change its horizontal and vertical position. As you drag, the H: and V: text boxes change to reflect the current position.

Units: EVPUs, Inches, Centimeters, Points, Picas, Spaces

Use this drop-down list to choose an alternate measurement unit.

Reset

Restores Finale's built-in default settings for the placement of slurs.

See also: Smart Shape Tool


Smart Shape Options

Use this dialog box to control the appearance of the smart shapes in your score.

Symbols: Octave Up (8va), Octave Down (8vb), Two Octaves Up (15ma), Two Octaves Down (15mb), Trill (tr), Trill Extension (wavy line ~); Select; Set Font

Choose the Smart Shape symbol you want to change from the drop-down list. Finale will use the symbols you specify for the corresponding shapes created with the Smart Shape Tool. To change the symbol, click Select to display the Symbol Selection dialog box where you can select a new symbol. To choose a symbol from font other than Petrucci, click Set Font to display the Font dialog box, where you can choose a different font for the currently selected symbol.

Show Octave Symbols as Text

Determines whether numbers or symbols will be used for the octave markings. When selected, Finale displays the number 8 for the octave up (8va) and octave down (8vb) markings, and the number 15 for the two octaves up (15ma) and two octaves down (15mb) markings. The numbers are displayed in the font set for each particular octave symbol, so if you prefer a font other than Petrucci, be sure to change the font for each symbol.

Slur System Breaks: Avoid Staff Lines by at Least, System Start Adjustment, System End Adjustment

Sets the distance between slurs and the top or bottom staff line for slurs continuing over system breaks. Sets the start and end points of slurs continuing over system breaks. They default to zero. Enter a positive value for the System Start Adjustment to specify the distance into the staff system for slurs that continue over a system break. Enter a negative value for the System End Adjustment to specify the distance from the end of a staff system to the end of a slur on that system.

Crescendo/Decrescendo: Opening Width

Determines the width of the open end for any new crescendos or decrescendo markings you create.

Crescendo/Decrescendo: Line Thickness

Determines the thickness of all crescendos and decrescendo markings.

Slur Thickness

Sets the thickness of slurs.

Line Thickness

Determines the thickness of all straight lines drawn with the various Smart Shape Tools. This setting applies to all Smart Shapes including those that already appear in the score.

Dash Length, Dash Space

Determines the length of each dash and the gap between dashes of all dashed lines drawn with the Dashed Line Tool. This setting applies to all Dashed Lines including those that already appear in the score.

Hook Length

Determines the length of the hooks on all brackets drawn with the Solid and Dashed Bracket and the Solid and Dashed Double-Ended Bracket Tools.

See also: Smart Shape Tool


Special Key Signature Attributes

Use this dialog box to specify special attributes for nonstandard key signatures. For more information, see 'Nonstandard Key Signature dialog box' in Finale Reference.

Harmonic Reference

Sets the fundamental root tone (0 = C). Hint: Don't change this value.

Middle Key Number

Sets the MIDI key number that corresponds to the Harmonic Reference number you've indicated (Middle C = 60).

Symbol Font

Click Symbol Font to change the font for accidentals or enter the font's ID number.

Symbol List ID

Click Symbol List ID to change the symbols used to represent sharps, flats, and so on or enter the ID number for the Symbol List you want to use. A Symbol List defines which symbols represent "up a half step" (usually the sharp symbol), "up a whole step," and so on.

Go to Key Unit

Sets the number of scale steps between each pair of keys on your MIDI keyboard. For example: In a quarter-tone scale, there are 2 steps between scale steps; Key Unit = 2.

Delete

To revert to settings used for the standard major scale.


Special Tools Palette

Choose "Special Tools Palette" from the Window menu to display the Special Tools Palette. (If the Special Tools Palette doesn't appear, click the Special Tools Tool.) The tools in this palette give you very fine control for a number of special notational situations. Within a given measure you can move notes or noteheads, change the lengths and directions of stems, adjust dots and ties, and modify beams in almost every way imaginable: their length, angle, breaks and so on.

Click the measure you want to edit, select one or more handles, then drag, press the arrow keys, or double-click a handle to change the element. When you drag an element, the message bar shows the relative adjustment. Use the Special Tools menu to show or hide handles on the elements in the measure. To change layers, click on the Layer push buttons at the bottom of the document window, or choose a layer from the Select Layers submenu in the View menu.

 Note Position

Select one or more handles, then drag a handle to move the  notes left and right.

 Notehead Position

Select one or more handles, then drag a handle to move the noteheads left and right.

 Note Shape

Select one or more handles, then double-click to display the Symbol Selection dialog box in which you can select an alternate notehead (for X noteheads).

 Accidental Mover

Select one or more handles, then drag a handle to move the accidentals left or right.

 Stem Length

Select one or more handles, then drag up or down to change the stem length; drag left or right to move the stem away from the notehead.

 Broken Beam

Click a handle to change the broken beam direction (left or right).

 Stem Direction

Click an upper or lower handle to freeze the stem up or down.

 Double/Split Stem

Click an outer handle to draw a second stem; click a notehead handle to split the stem.

 Reverse Stem

Click a handle to move the stem to the left or right side of the notehead.

 Custom Stem

Select one or more handles, then double-click to display the Shape Selection dialog box where you can choose or create a replacement stem shape.

 Beam Angle

Drag the left handle to change stem lengths; drag the right handle to change the beam angle.

 Secondary Beam Break

Double-click a handle to break 16th or smaller beams.

 Beam Extension

Drag a handle to extend the 8th beam; double-click a handle to extend 16th or smaller beams.

 Secondary Beam Angle

Drag the left handle to change the beam height; drag the right handle to change the beam angle.

 Tie

Drag the left or right handles to adjust the start or end of the tie; drag the middle handle to change the arc; double-click to freeze the tie up or down.

 Dot

Drag the left (or only) handle to move the first dot away from the note; drag the right handle on notes with more than one dot to change the distance between the dots.


Specify Current Lyric

Use this dialog box to specify the lyric type you want to edit (in the Edit Lyrics window), insert into the score, or copy (using the Clone Another command).

Verse, Chorus, Section

Specifies the lyric type.

Number

Sets which Verse, Chorus, or Section you want to edit.

See also: Lyrics Tool


Staff Attributes

Use this dialog box to specify staff-specific characteristics for each staff.

Staff Attributes for

Use the drop-down list to specify the staff that you're changing. Or, click the arrows to change staves.

Full Name - Edit

Displays the full staff name. This name will appear only in the first staff system.

For example: Trumpet 1 in B-flat.

Click Edit to display the Edit Text window where you can mix fonts and styles, and even create multi-line names.

Full Name - Position

Determines whether and by how much to move the full staff name for this staff only. Deselect this checkbox to use the default positioning for staff names set in the Staff menu.

Abbr. Name - Edit

Displays the abbreviated staff name. This name will appear in every staff system except the first. For example: Tpt. 1.

Click Edit to display the Edit Text window where you can mix fonts and styles, and even create multi-line names.

Abbr. Name - Position

Determines whether and by how much to move the abbreviated staff name. Deselect this checkbox to use the default positioning for staff names set in the Staff menu.

First Clef: Select

Identifies the clef at the beginning of the staff. Click Select to change it.

Transposition: Select

Determines whether to make this staff a transposing instrument (one that's written higher or lower than it actually sounds, such as a clarinet or trumpet). Click Select to choose a transposition.

Staff: Standard 5-line, 1-line with Full Barline, 1-line with Short Barline, Other

Choose from three commonly-used staves, or choose Other to display the Staff Setup dialog box in which you can specify an alternate staff.

Allow Optimization

Determines whether Finale can remove the staff during the optimization process. (When you optimize a score using the Page Layout Tool, Finale hides resting instruments on each staff system.) When selected, Finale will hide this staff (if it contains no music) in optimized staff systems. When not selected, Finale will always display the staff, even if it contains no music. For example, select this option for the Treble and Bass staves of piano staves, both staves of piano parts usually appear, even when other parts drop out.

Break Barlines Between Staves

Determines whether to hide the barlines that can be drawn between grouped staves. If you don't want barlines drawn through the staves in a group, choose the corresponding Draw Barlines setting in the Group Attributes dialog box.

Break Repeat Barlines Between Staves

Determines whether to hide repeat barlines between staves.

Display Rests in Empty Measures

Determines whether to make whole rests automatically appear in every blank measure.

Ignore Key Signatures

Determines whether to hide key signatures (and display all notes as though they're in C).

Hide Staff

Determine whether to hide the current staff for on-screen display and printout. Select this option when you want to hide a staff used for ossia measure source staves, or if you've created a staff that contains playback effects such as written out trills or tremolos. When selected, the word "(hidden)" appears after the staff name any time Finale lists the staves in the document.

Items to Display - Barlines

Determines whether to display barlines for the current staff-- provided it isn't part of a group of staves.

Tip: If you don't want barlines to appear in a particular measure in all the staves in your piece, select the "Invisible" barline in the Measure Attributes dialog box. If you don't want barlines to appear in your entire score, deselect "Display All Barlines" in the Barlines dialog box.

Items to Display - Repeat Bars

Determines whether to display the Forward or Backward repeat bars in the staff.

Items to Display - Clefs, Ending and Text Repeats, Key Signatures, Measure Numbers, Score Expressions, Staff Names, Time Signatures

Determines whether to show the listed elements.

Independent Elements - Key Signature

Determines whether to allow this staff key signatures that are unrelated to the rest of the score.

Independent Elements - Time Signature

Determines whether to allow this staff time signatures that are unrelated to the rest of the score.

Independent Elements - Notehead Font: Select

Determines whether to use an alternate font for the noteheads on the current staff. Use an alternate font that contains a variety of noteheads for use on staves that you've selected either Percussion or Note Shapes from the Notation Style drop-down list. Click Select to display the Type Style dialog box, where you select the font you want to use.

Notation Style: Standard, Percussion, Note Shapes, Tablature; Select

Use this drop-down list to choose how you want the music notated on a staff. Choose a notation style, then click the Select button to display the dialog box for that style. Standard displays the notes in standard music notation; Percussion displays the notes according the note definition you choose to use in the Percussion Map Designer dialog box; Note Shapes displays the notes using the alternate noteheads you select for the scale degree in the Note Shapes dialog box; Tablature displays the notes using the one-string staff you define in the Tablature dialog box.

See also:

Staff Tool

Staff Setup

Percussion Map Selection

Percussion Map Designer

Note Shapes

Tablature dialog boxes


Staff Expression Assignment

Use this dialog box to set options pertaining to staff expression placement and playback.

Distance from Top Note, Bottom Note: H, V

Use this drop-down list to specify whether the expression should be attached to the top or bottom note (of a chord) and enter the expression's distance from the note. A negative number moves the expression left (H) or down (V).

On Playback, Affect

Use this drop-down list to specify which staff layer (or other element) will be affected by the expression's playback effect, if any.

Begin Playback at: Assigned Note, Position in Measure

Determines whether this expression's playback effect, if any, starts at the position of the note to which it's attached or at the expression's exact musical position in the measure.


Staff Expression Selection

Use this dialog box to select, edit, create, or delete shapes and text expressions for use in the score. A staff expression only appears in one staff in your score.

Selection boxes

Click a shape to select an expression. Use the scroll bars to display additional expressions.

Select

Adds the current expression to the score.

Edit

Lets you change the selected expression.

Create

Lets you design a new expression.

Delete

Deletes the selected expression from the library. You can't delete an expression that's already in use in the score.

Text

Displays all the text expressions in the library.

Shape

Displays all the shape expressions in the library.


Staff Setup

Use this dialog box to create a custom staff in which you can define the number of lines in the staff and set the length of barlines, the placement of rests, and the point on a staff at which Finale will automatically flip stem direction.

Custom Staff, Staff Lines

Select Custom Staff to create a staff with up to 27 lines. Click the handles in the staff display area to show or hide staff lines. Finale automatically adjusts barlines to enclose the staff lines.

Select Staff Lines to create a staff with up to 100 lines. All staff lines are added below the 5-line staff, and Finale automatically adjusts the barlines to enclose the staff lines.

The arrow in the staff display area indicates Finale's reference staff line. This is the line from which Finale infers musical information and measures the placement of items such as clefs and the default placement of rests.

Default Rest Placement: Double Whole Rests, Whole Rests, Half Rests, Other Rests

Enter values in steps (measured from Finale's reference line), for where you want Finale to place each rest. Enter a positive value to move the rest higher, and a negative value to move the rest lower.

Top Barline, Bottom Barline

Extends the upper and lower parts of a barline beyond the outer staff lines. Enter a positive value to move the endpoint up, and a negative value to move an endpoint down.

Stem Reversal

Sets the line or space in a staff (measured from Finale's reference line) at which Finale will flip stems up or down.

Tip: Enter -4 to set the center line in a regular 5-line staff as the point to use for flipping stems.

Show Repeat Dots

Determines whether to display the dots on the repeat bars in the staff.

Reset Staff to: Standard 5-line, 1-line with Full Barline, 1-line with Short Barline

Use this drop-down list to reset the staff to a standard 5-line or common 1-line staff (with a full or short barline). If you specify a single-line staff with full barline, Finale draws the barline the length of a five-line staff and centers it on the selected line.


Staff System Optimization

Use this dialog box to place or remove optimization on the specified staff systems.

Optimize Staff System(s)

When selected, optimizes (removes empty staves) from the specified staff systems.

Keep At Least One Staff

Determines whether at least one staff will remain in an optimized staff system -- even if all staves are empty.

Remove Staff System Optimization

When selected, removes optimization (restore all staves) to the specified staff systems.

Keep All Staves

When selected, optimizes the specified staff systems, but keeps all staves -- even if they're empty.

Staff System ___ Through ___

Determines which staff systems will be affected by the selected procedure.


Staff Transpositions

Use this dialog box to specify a key signature or chromatic transposition for the selected staff.

Key Signature

Select from the list of common transpositions that also affect the key signature display, or select "None" to deactivate all settings except for "Set to Clef". Select "Other" to specify an alternate transposition, then enter values into the Interval and Key Alter text boxes; Finale will use these and the Set to Clef settings when transposing the staff.

Simplify Key

Determines how the key signature for the transposing instrument is spelled. This option is checked by default in older files, and is saved with the file for each staff. When checked, Finale examines the key produced by a transposition and determines if an enharmonic spelling would result in fewer sharps or flats. For example, when this option is unchecked, a passage in B major for B flat trumpet, would be notated in C sharp major (7 sharps). When checked, it would end up in D flat instead (5 flats).

Key Alter

Determines how many sharps or flats will be added to the current key signature. Hint: Enter positive numbers for sharps, or negative number for flats.

Interval

Determines the interval to transpose by. Hint: Enter a positive number to transpose up, or a negative number to transpose down.

Chromatic

Select from the list of common transpositions. Instead of affecting the key signature, Finale will show the appropriate accidental on each transposed note. Or, select "None" to deactivate all settings except for "Set to Clef". Select "Other" to display the Interval dialog box where you can specify an alternate transposition; Finale will use the Interval and the Set to Clef settings when transposing the staff.

Set to Clef

Determines whether a clef change will be part of the transposition. When selected, click the clef you want to use in the palette.

Note: When Set to Clef is selected for a staff, no clef changes will appear on the score. If you want clef changes to appear for the staff, deselect Set to Clef, then specify the Starting Clef in the Staff Attributes dialog box instead.

See also:

Staff Tool

Staff Attributes


Staff Usage List

Use this dialog box to directly edit the exact vertical position of a selected staff, measured from the top of the window in Scroll View, and to verify which staves in the score will be affected by your positioning changes.

Staff Usage List: Global, Special Part Extraction, Staff System [#}

Displays which staff systems will be affected when you position a staff or staves. Finale has three ways of displaying information in Page View. The first is the default, or "Global", view. Finale can temporarily display the page formatting in two other ways: during Special Part Extraction, and when a staff system or systems are "optimized" to remove resting parts.

When "Global" appears, adjusting a staff alters its position in Page View and in Scroll View.

When "Special Part Extraction" appears, adjusting a staff alters its position in each staff system, but doesn't change its position in Scroll View.

"Staff System" (plus the current staff system number) appears when the selected staff system has been optimized using the Page Layout Tool. Any adjustment will affect the current staff system only.

Staff Number, Prev, Next

Displays the Staff ID for the staff you clicked. Caution: If you change a staff's ID, it will display the contents of the staff with the ID you entered. Click the Prev or Next buttons to display information about other staves.

Distance From Top

Sets this staff's distance from the top of the score. Use a negative number.

See also: Staff Tool


Standard Frame

Use this dialog box to specify whether a border appears around a text block, and to specify how the text flows into its rectangular frame.

Show Border

Determines whether a border will appear around the text block. When selected, Finale displays a border around the text block using the line thickness specified in this dialog box. When this option is not selected, no border appears.

Line Thickness

Enter the line thickness, in current measurement units, for the border.

Inset Text

Enter the distance, in measurement units, that you want the text to be inset from the border or the frame shape. This value is always used, even if you don't show the border or shape.

Expand Horizontally, Expand Vertically

These options determine whether the editing frame remains a fixed size, or whether the frame expands as you type. The sides of the frame on-screen show a single line to indicate that the frame will expand horizontally or vertically, or a double line to indicate that the frame is a fixed size, and you must drag the side of the frame to resize it.

When Expand Horizontally is selected, the edge of the frame will expand left or right - depending on its horizontal alignment - as you enter text; press Enter (type a carriage return) to start a new line.

When Expand Vertically is selected, you can enter any number of lines of text in a frame. The edge of the frame will expand up or down - depending on its vertical alignment - as you enter text; press Enter (type a carriage return) to start a new line.


Stem Connections

Use this dialog box to select, edit, create, duplicate, or delete stem connection for special noteheads in the score. You must select Use Stem Connections to use these settings in the score.

Selection boxes

These boxes display the special noteheads for which sets of stem connections have been defined. The font containing the character appears at the top of each box.

Click a stem connection to select it. Use the scroll bars to display more stem connections. The current slot number for the stem connection appears in the left corner of each box; sometimes you can type a slot number instead of selecting it from this selection box.

Done

Accepts all changes made since entering this dialog box, and returns to the score.

Edit

Lets you change the stem connections or the notehead of the selected set of stem connections.

Create

Lets you design a new set of stem connections for the notehead you specify.

Duplicate

Creates a new set of stem connections, which are an exact duplicate of the currently selected stem connections. You can then edit the stem connections, and either change the notehead they affect, or change the stem placement slightly.

Delete

Deletes the selected set of stem connections from the document.

Use Stem Connections

Determines whether the stem adjustments for the special noteheads displayed in the list will be used in the score.


Stem Connection Editor

Use this dialog box to adjust the stem placement on each alternate notehead in your piece.

Display area

This area displays the alternate notehead shape with its upstem and downstem. Adjust how the stems connect to this notehead in the score by dragging the stems vertically and horizontally. Drag the upstem and downstem to adjust their connections to the notehead. As you drag, the values in the Upstem and Downstem H: and V: text boxes change to match the new stem positioning.

Connection

Click the arrow controls to view other notehead shape's stem settings (if any) in the document.

Notehead - Select

Click Select to specify the notehead shape for which you want to adjust the stem. Or, type the text-font equivalent character of the notehead symbol whose stem connection you want to adjust.

Notehead - Set Font

Click to specify the font containing the notehead shape for which you want to adjust the stem. The font currently selected for the symbol appears below this button.

Upstem H

Sets the amount by which to shift the stem horizontally (on stem-up notes). A negative number moves the stem left.

Upstem V

Sets the amount by which to shift the stem vertically (on stem-up notes). A negative number moves the stem down.

Downstem H

Sets the amount by which to shift the stem horizontally (on stem-down notes). A negative number moves the stem left.

Downstem V

Sets the amount by which to shift the stem vertically (on stem-down notes). A negative number moves the stem down.

Reset

Sets the upstem and downstem adjustment settings to zero.

View

For more precise control over positioning of stems, you can enlarge the view of the notehead from its actual size (100%) up to over 32,000%. Type the percentage into the checkbox, or select a percentage from the drop-down list.


Suffix Keynumber Offsets

Use this dialog to specify the voicing Finale should use when playing back a chord suffix. This information is also used when you use one of Finale's analysis methods for entering chords.

<<, >>

Use these arrows to scroll through the six possible notes in the chord suffix. Enter numbers, expressed as an offset from the root of the chord, to specify the notes in the chord suffix. Hint: Each number or offset represents the interval, in half steps, from the root.

Clear

Sets the numbers in all the text boxes to zero, removing the chord's playback definition.

Listen

Lets you play the chord on your MIDI keyboard. Finale automatically enters the offsets for you.

See also: Chord Suffix Editor


Superscript

Use this dialog box to adjust the vertical position of the text, adjusting the spacing between lines by the same amount.

Amount

Enter the amount, in measurement units, that Finale should shift the selected text characters vertically above or below the baseline. A positive value raises the text (making it superscript), and a negative value lowers the text (making it subscript).


Sweep for Channels Present in a Track

Use this dialog box to determine whether there is MIDI information present on a particular track.

Sweep Track

Determines which track Finale will search for MIDI information on.

Channels 1-16

When an X appears below any of the channel numbers, the track contains MIDI information on that channel.

KeyOn/KeyOff, Controller, Patch Change, Pitch Wheel

When an X appears to the right of any of these types of MIDI information, the channel (and track) contain that type of MIDI information.

See also: Transcribe MIDI File


Symbol List

Use this dialog box to specify a different character (or set of characters) you want to use in place of each kind of accidental that appears in a key signature.

Symbol List

Indicates the set of accidental/symbol pairings you're defining.

List Element

Indicates the currently displayed pairing of an accidental.

Alter Amount

Sets the amount of chromatic alteration by which to change the symbol. Examples: In a normal scale, sharp = 1; In a quarter-tone scale, sharp = 2; and three-quarter sharp = 3.

Characters

Sets the character(s) that, in the selected music font, represent the symbol(s) to use for this amount of chromatic alteration.

Prev, Next

To view the previous accidental/symbol pairing (if any).

Insert

To add the displayed accidental/symbol pair to the Symbol List.

Delete

To remove the displayed accidental/symbol pair from the Symbol List.


Symbol Selection

Use this dialog box to select any character in a font for use in the score.

Selects the current character for use in the score.

Use this dialog box to select any character in a font. For example, you can select any character to use as a notehead or an articulation marking in the score.

Font

Displays the currently selected font for the element you're editing.

Selection boxes

Click a character to select it. Use the scroll bars to display additional elements. Hint: The numbers in the left corner of the boxes correspond to the ALT key numbers. If a text box appears for the element, you can type its character (listed in the key caps chart), or choose it graphically in this dialog box.

Select

Uses the current character for the selected element in the score.


Tablature

Use this dialog box to specify the open pitch for the tablature string staff you are creating or editing.

Base Key

Sets the MIDI Key Number that represents the pitch of this open string (Middle C = 60).

Distance from Topline of Staff: V

Sets the vertical position of the fret numbers, measured in points from the top staffline (72 points = 1 inch).

Set Font

To change the font for the fret numbers.


Tap Source

Use this dialog box to establish what key, pedal, or controller you'll be tapping to provide a HyperScribe tempo reference.

Standard Sustain Pedal

Treats the synthesizer's sustain pedal as the tempo (beat) reference.

Nonstandard Sustain Pedal

Treats a nonstandard synthesizer sustain pedal (where the "up" and "down" signals are reversed) as the tempo (beat) reference.

MIDI Note, Channel

Treats taps on a particular key (MIDI note) as the tempo reference. Enter a MIDI Note number for the Tap Source. Enter a MIDI Channel number for the Tap Source.

Other: Select

Treats some other MIDI signal (pedal, note, or anything else) as the tempo (beat) reference. Click Select to specify the signal.

Listen

Finale will automatically enter the correct values for the two text boxes.

See also: HyperScribe Menu


Tap States

Use this dialog box to create up to three alternate quantization settings for a HyperScribe session.

Tap State

Indicates which alternate quantization setting (out of three) you are creating or editing.

Beat Duration ___ EDUs: Select

Determines what rhythmic value you'll be tapping. Click Select to select the appropriate rhythmic-value icon[s] from a palette. To specify a rhythmic value not pictured in the palette, enter it in 1024ths of a quarter note.

Beat Division

Specifies the quantization level, expressed as a fraction of the beat. For example: if you'll be tapping your foot every quarter note, enter 2 to quantize to the nearest eighth note (2 per beat).

MIDI Trigger: Listen

These values represent the MIDI event that signals Finale to switch to the corresponding Tap State (alternate quantization setting). Click Listen and play the key or pedal you want to use for the trigger. The MIDI code appears in the current text box.

See also: HyperScribe Menu


Tempo Adjustment

Use this dialog box to edit the tempo data for a measure.

Unit

Indicates the set of tempo-change information. Click the arrows to switch from one set to another.

Starting Time in Measure: Beat, EDUs

Use this drop-down list to specify whether the tempo change starting point is measured in beats or EDUs (EDU = 1024th of a quarter note). Enter where you want the tempo change to occur, measured in the amount of musical time from the beginning of the measure.

Set to

Sets the tempo to a specific fixed value. Enter the new tempo.

Change by %

Changes the tempo by making it a percentage of the previous tempo. Enter a percentage by which to change.

Set Swing

To create a swing feel. The MIDI Tool method of creating swing is better than this method.

Measure Region

Measure__Through__, Measure__Through End of Piece

Applies this tempo change to a specific measure or set of measures. Enter the values to specify a measure region in the text boxes.

See also: Tempo Tool


Text Expression Designer

Use this dialog box to create or edit staff and score text expressions.

(Text box)

Specifies the text for your expression.

Set Font

To choose a font for this text expression.

The current font selected for the text expression appears below the Set Font button.

Playback Options

To show or hide playback settings for the expression.

Replace Number Sign with

Set to Value Number

Replaces the # sign (if you typed one) with the playback value (if you programmed one) when the expression appears in the score. Example: "Change to patch #" will become "Change to patch 14."

Controller Number

Replaces the # sign (if you typed one) with the MIDI controller value (if you programmed one) when the expression appears in the score. Example: "Play controller #" will become "Play controller 64."

Pass Number

Replaces the # sign (if you typed one) with the repeat value (if you've designed this expression to play back only on a specific repetition) when the expression appears in the score. Example: '#th time Only' will become '5th time only.'

Enclose Expression

To draw a square (or another shape) around this marking.

Type

Use this drop-down list to specify what playback effect you want this marking to have.

None

No effect.

Tempo

Changes the tempo.

Controller

Affects a MIDI controller, such as a wheel or pedal.

Key Velocity

Affects how hard the keys are struck (which usually affects volume).

Transposition

Transposes the music following this expression without changing the way it's notated.

Channel

Changes the MIDI channel.

Patch

Changes the synthesizer sound (patch) used. When selected, the Patch drop-down list appears, which lists the type of bank and program changes available. Enter the bank and program change values in the Set To Value text boxes.

Pitchwheel

Creates a pitch bend, as though the pitch wheel had been turned.

Channel Pressure

Affects monophonic aftertouch (pressure on a key while it's being held down), if your synthesizer is equipped to respond.

Restrike Keys

Plays the affected note or chord repeatedly. Use this option to create tremolo effects.

Dump

For MIDI programmers: transmits MIDI codes.

Play Tempo Tool Changes

Allows stored performance tempo data to affect playback tempo. Performance tempos are created when you use the Tempo Tool or notate a Transcription Tool performance.

Ignore Tempo Tool Changes

Prevents stored performance tempo data from affecting playback. Performance tempos are created when you use the Tempo Tool or notate a Transcription Tool performance.

Effect - Set to Value

Creates a playback effect by setting a MIDI aspect to a specific value. Example: A dynamic symbol could set key velocities to 64. Enter a MIDI playback value.

Execute Shape: Select

Creates a playback effect by changing a MIDI aspect over time. Example: A crescendo symbol could increase key velocities gradually from 50 to 100. Click Select to select or draw a shape whose contour will govern this playback effect or enter the ID number of the shape whose contour you want to govern playback.

Play Only on Pass

Determines whether this expression has playback effect only on a specific repetition of the passage.


Text Inserts

Use this dialog box to change the appearance of the sharp, flat, natural, double sharp, and double flat signs used as text inserts.

Note: Any changes you make are reflected in each alteration insert in the document.

Symbol: Sharp, Flat, Natural, Double Sharp, Double Flat

Choose the symbol that you want to change from the Symbol drop-down list. You may want to change these if you're using a font other than Petrucci for your music font.

Select

Enter the text font equivalent for the symbol, or click this button to display the Symbol Selection dialog box, where you can choose the character you want to use for the currently selected insert.

Set Font

Click this button to display the Font dialog box, where you can choose the font and style for the currently selected insert.

Note: You cannot select a specific size for the insert character in the Font dialog box, since the size of the character is proportional to the preceding text.

Options: Font Size, Baseline Shift, Tracking Before, Tracking After

Enter values to size and position the insert proportionally, in relation to the point size of the font preceding the insert. Enter percentages for Font Size and Baseline Shift to adjust the size of the font and vertical position of the insert, respectively. Enter values, in ems, (1/1000 of the current font size) in Tracking Before and Tracking After to adjust the amount of horizontal space before and after the insert, respectively.

Apply Settings to All Symbols

Click this button if you want the current settings (except for the selected character) applied to each symbol. Finale updates the font, baseline, and tracking values for each symbol.

Reset All Symbols

Click this button if you want the font, baseline, and tracking values for each symbol reset to Finale's default settings.


There Are Too Many Beats in This Measure

This alert box appears when there are more notes than are allowed by the time signature and you exit the Speedy Entry editing frame.

Leave the measure alone

Leaves the measure with too many beats in it.

Delete the extra notes

Eliminates excess beats from the end of the measure, chopping beats in half if necessary.

Move the extra notes to the next measure

Removes excess beats from the end of the measure, and places them at the beginning of the next measure.

Keep moving the extra notes until all measures contain the correct number of beats

Removes excess beats; places them in the next measure. If the next measure itself now has too many beats, repeats the process until no measures have too many beats.


Tie Alterations

Use this dialog box to change the direction or placement of a particular tie.

Float Tie

Allows the tie to change directions in relation to the notes.

Freeze Tie: Under, Over

Forces the tie to be placed over or under the notes regardless of the notes.

Tie Offsets: Starting Point H, Ending Point H, Arc

Determines the horizontal distances from the noteheads for the start and end points of the tie, and the height of the tie's arc.

Delete

Restores the tie to its default placement, and floating status (so the tie can change directions in relation to the notes).


Tilting Mirror

Use this dialog box to create or edit composite mirrors.

Display Area Handles

Define the "cut bars" that isolate mirror fragments.

Delete

To remove the mirror fragment you're viewing.

Insert

To insert a mirror fragment before the one you're viewing.

Prev, Next

To view the previous or next mirror fragment, if any.

Layer: 1, 2, 3, 4

Use this drop-down list to move from one layer to another.

Up, Down, Left, Right arrow buttons

To view the next or previous measure within the same staff, click the right or left arrow button (respectively).

To view the measure in the staff immediately above or below the current measure, click the up or down arrow button (respectively).

See also: Mirror Tool


Time Signature

Use this dialog box to specify a new meter.

Display Area

Displays the actual time signature that determines how notes are beamed together.

Options

To view more or fewer time signature display options.

Composite

To create a complex time signature (such as 3+3+2 over 8).

Number of Beats

Use this scroll bar to specify the top number of the time signature.

Beat Duration

Use this scroll bar to specify the bottom number of the time signature. Click the right arrow to make the number smaller (a larger beat).

Rebar Music

Determines whether Finale rebars (rebeams) the music when changing the time signature. When selected, Finale rebars the music according to the time signature. When not selected, Finale leaves the beaming of the notes as it currently appears in the score.

Measure Region: Measure__ Through__, Measure__ Through End of Piece

Determines whether to change the time signature only for the measures you specify or from the measure you clicked to the end of the document. Enter the measure numbers that define the measure range you want.

Use a Different Time Signature for Display

Determines whether to show a different time signature in the score (regardless of the actual time signature).

Lower Display Area

Displays the time signature that appears in the score when Use a Different Time Signature for Display is selected.

Composite

To create a complex time signature (such as 3+3+2 over 8) for display only.

Number of Beats

Use this scroll bar to specify the top number of the displayed time signature.

Beat Duration

Use this scroll bar to specify the bottom number of the displayed time signature. Click the right arrow to make the number smaller (a larger beat).

Abbreviate

Determines whether to abbreviate (use the symbol) or not abbreviate a particular occurrence of a cut or common time signature.

See also: Time Signature Tool


Time Signature Options

Use this dialog box to control the appearance of time signatures in your score.

Abbreviate Common Time to: Select

Determines whether to show the "c" common-time symbol in place of 4/4. You can enter a symbol or select from a palette of characters from your music font.

Abbreviate Cut Time to: Select

Determines whether to show the "¢" cut-time symbol as the time signature in place of 2/2. You can enter a symbol or select from a palette of characters from your music font.

Vertical Adjustment: Abbreviated Symbol, Top Symbol, Bottom Symbol

Sets the vertical placement of the abbreviated time signature symbols used for cut and common time, the top symbol that shows the number of beats, and the bottom symbol that shows the duration of the beat. Enter a positive value to raise the symbol. Enter a negative value to lower the symbol.

Tip: change the top and bottom values if you're using enlarged time signatures in the score.


Tone Center(s)

Use this dialog box to specify the relationship between the number of accidentals in a nonstandard key signature and the tone center of the key.

Unit

Displays the accidental for which you are changing the relative tone center.

Prev, Next

To move backward or forward through the accidentals in your key signature.

Step Level

Sets the "root" of the scale that corresponds with this key signature unit, measured in diatonic steps from C (which is 0).

Delete

To revert the scale roots for all accidentals to their major scale values.


Track/Channel Mapping

Use this dialog box to control the way in which your sequencer-file tracks are transformed into staves.

Track/Channel Mapping for Slot

Indicates the slot that will be defined by you.

Track/Channel

Enter the track number and, within that track, the MIDI channel number of each sequencer track you want to include in the staves you're about to create.

Staff Names

Enter a name for each staff that you want to produce from the tracks you've specified.

Transpose

Determines whether to designate a transposing staff (for a trumpet, for example).

Clef

Sets a clef for this staff. Clef 0 = treble; Clef 2 = alto; Clef 3 = bass.

Distance

Sets the distance you want between this staff and the one above it. This is a negative number.

Split - None

Transcribes all the selected tracks' information onto a single staff.

Fixed

Splits the selected tracks' music onto two staves: above and below a certain note that you specify.

Multiple

Splits the selected tracks' music onto up to 8 staves, by "exploding" chordal passages (placing the top chord note into staff 1, the second note into staff 2, and so on).

Hand Width

Splits the selected tracks' music onto two staves (right hand and left hand) based on the width of your hand.

Filter

Splits the selected tracks' music onto up to four staves, based on pitch ranges. For example: the top octave goes into the flute staff, the next octave into the clarinet, and so on.

See also: Transcribe MIDI File


Track/Channel Mapping to Staves

Use this dialog box to control the way in which your MIDI file is transcribed into staves.

AutoSet to Tracks

Assigns each track to a separate slot which you can then customize. Each track will be transcribed onto a separate staff.

AutoSet to Channels

Assigns each channel in a track to a separate slot which you can then customize. Each channel within a track will be transcribed onto a separate staff.

Total Tracks

Indicates the total number of MIDI  tracks in the MIDI file.

Slot

Indicates the slot that will be defined by you when you click in the "row" for the slot.

Track/Channel

Displays the track number and, within that track, the MIDI channel number of each sequencer track you want to include for the slot.

Split

Displays the type of split you selected.

Name

Displays a name for each staff  that you want to produce for the slot. The number of staves is controled by the split you selected.

Tran

Displays whether or not a staff is transposing (a trumpet, for example).

C

Displays the clef for the staff. Clef 0 = treble; Clef 2 = alto; Clef 3 = bass, and so on.

Distance

Sets the distance you want between this staff and the one above it. This is a negative number.

Load

Loads the mapping file that you previously saved, replacing the settings for the slots.

Save

Saves the current settings to a mapping file.

Set Dist

Determines the placement of the staves in the score for each staff that's currently defined.

Sweep

Displays the MIDI information contained on the track you specify.

See also:

Track/Channel Mapping

Transcribe MIDI File


Tracking

Use this dialog box to change the space between selected characters.

Amount

Enter the amount of horizontal space, in ems, that Finale should leave between characters for the selected text. One em is equivalent to 1/1000 of the point size.

Ems are proportional measurement units; if you increase or decrease the point size of the text, Finale adjusts the distance between characters accordingly, keeping the same proportional distance relative to the new font size.


Transcribe

Use this dialog box to specify new quantization settings and other options to apply when pasting the MIDI information from the MIDI clipboard into the selected region.

Press Shift when choosing Import MIDI from Clipboard from the Edit menu to use the current settings in this dialog box (without displaying the dialog box on the screen).

Quantization Settings - Resolution: Double Whole, Whole, Half, Quarter, Eighth, 16th, 32nd, 64th, Dot; EDUs

Use this palette to select the degree of quantization you want applied to the region. Generally you'll select the smallest note value you want notated in the region.

Quantization Settings - Floating Quantization, Select

When this option is selected, Finale will, when necessary, quantize to the nearest sixteenth note, eighth note triplet, or whatever duration you specify in the Floating Quantization dialog box. All other notes of larger rhythmic values will be automatically expanded to their full notated values, even if you didn't hold down the keys for the full notated durations while you were playing. As a result, your transcription will be free of assorted sixteenth rests and tied 32nd notes. In other words, when Floating Quantization is selected, Finale knows to vary its quantization level on a beat-by-beat basis. Click Select to turn on Floating Quantization and enter the Floating Quantization dialog box. To turn off Floating Quantization, click the checkbox to deselect it.

Options - Allow Grace Notes

Determines whether to transcribe extremely short notes as grace notes, instead of expanding them to the minimum quantization value.

Options - Include Voice Two

Select this option if there's an inner voice in the music you'll be transcribing. Determines if Finale will renotate the region into two independent voices per staff, one stems-up and one stems-down.

Options - Tempo Changes

Determines whether to preserve tempo changes (variations in time tag spacing) for playback.

Options - Key Velocities

Determines whether to preserve recorded key velocity data for playback.

Options - Note Durations

Determines whether to preserve note duration data (deviations from the beat) for playback.

Options - Continuous Data

Determines whether to preserve controller data (pedaling, pitch bend, and so on) for playback.

Transcribe

Pastes the information from the MIDI clipboard into the selected region according to the settings you've specified in this dialog box. If the clipboard contains MIDI note data, Finale replaces the notes in the selected region.


Transcribe MIDI File

Use this dialog box to set MIDI file transcription options like quantization and split point.

Tracks Become Staves

Places the contents of each MIDI file track into its own staff.

Channels Become Staves

Places the contents of each MIDI channel into its own staff, regardless of what tracks they were on in the MIDI file.

Set Track-To-Staff List

Splits the MIDI file into staves according to any combination of tracks, pitches, or channels you specify.

Quantize Level - Half

Rounds off the notes in the MIDI file to the nearest half note.

Quarter

Rounds off the notes in the MIDI file to the nearest quarter note.

Eighth

Rounds off the notes in the MIDI file to the nearest eighth note.

16th

Rounds off the notes in the MIDI file to the nearest 16th note.

32nd

Rounds off the notes in the MIDI file to the nearest 32nd note.

None

Does not round off the rhythms of the MIDI file at all.

Float Quant

Determines whether to vary the quantization level intelligently on a beat-by-beat basis.

Key Signature - Use the File's

Selects a key signature based on the key signature established, if any, in the MIDI file.

Infer from the File

Selects a key signature based on an analysis of the notes in the MIDI file.

Infer, ask me first

Selects a key signature based on an analysis of the MIDI file, and asks you to approve the choice.

Set Key Signature

Lets you choose a key signature.

Time Signature - Use the File's

Selects a time signature based on the information, if any, in the MIDI file.

Set Time Signature

Lets you choose a time signature.

Options - Allow Grace Notes

Determines whether to transcribe extremely short notes as grace notes, instead of expanding them to the minimum quantization value.

Include Voice Two

Determines whether to notate a stems-down inner voice on each staff. For a cleaner transcription, select this box only when the inner voice was played with great accuracy.

Tempo Changes

Determines whether to preserve tempo changes (variations in time tag spacing) for playback.

Key Velocities

Determines whether to preserve recorded key velocity data for playback.

Note Durations

Determines whether to preserve note duration data (deviations from the beat) for playback.

Continuous Data

Determines whether to preserve controller data (pedaling, pitch bend, and so on) for playback.

Convert Markers

Determines whether to convert sequencer markers to Finale bookmarks when transcribing the MIDI file.

See also:

Track/Channel Mapping

Track/Channel Mapping to Staves


MIDI File Status

This status box appears when when Finale is transcribing the MIDI File you opened.

Status display

Finale displays the current information it's transcribing. It generally transcribes one measure at a time, then displays which notes in the staff it's currently transcribing.


Transcription

Use this window to control how to transcribe your real-time, Transcription Tool performances.

Display Area

Displays where the beats occur for the recorded music and displays any music you've recorded. The keyboard helps you identify the pitches of notes in the display area. Each note appears as a horizontal bar: length indicates duration, vertical placement indicates pitch. Use the scroll bar, as needed, to move through the recorded music.

Keyboard

To edit the recorded notes in the display, click this word to highlight it.

Record at End

Records new music after any music you've already recorded.

Punch In/Out

Records new music over any music in the selected region.

Play

Plays the music you've already recorded.

Time Tags

To edit the beats (time tags) in the display, click this word to highlight it.

Record

Records the beats (time tags) you specify by playing.

Play

Plays the metronome click (time tags) you've created.

Set to

Creates evenly spaced beats (time tags) throughout the selected region. Enter the number of beats per minute for the metronome (time tag) click.

Wait Till

To use a signal (any note or other MIDI event), before recording or playing the music.

Start

To start recording or playing immediately.

Reset Counters

To set the time counters to zero (and remove any selection in the display area).

Now

Indicates the cursor position, in thousandths of a second.

In

Indicates where to start recording over existing music (the "punch-in" point).

Out

Indicates where to stop recording over existing music (the "punch-out" point).

Start

Indicates where to begin recording new music, in thousandths of a second.

Save Key Velocities

Determines whether the recorded key velocities are stored for playback.

Save Note Durations

Determines whether the recorded note durations (deviations from the beat) are stored for playback.

Save Tempo Changes

Determines whether the tempo changes (variations in time tag spacing) are stored for playback.

Save Continuous Data

Determines whether the recorded continuous data (patch changes, pedaling, pitch bend, and so on) is stored for playback.

Background File

Loads a file that you created using the Playback Controls and determines whether the file plays in the background as you record a new part.

Transcribe in Measures

Determines whether the recorded music is transcribed (notated) one measure at a time (by clicking measures in the score).

Transcribe

To transcribe (notate) the music you've recorded.


Transcription Filter
Transcription Filters

Use this dialog box to specify certain MIDI channels and ranges of notes to include or exclude from the transcription.

Channel

Enter a MIDI channel number whose notes you want to transcribe.

Key Range: Low, High

Enter the key numbers to specify the lowest note (Low) and highest note (High) you want transcribed. (Middle C = 60).

Listen

To specify a channel and key range all at once by playing two notes on your MIDI instrument.

Use Filters/No Filters

Select Use Filters to confirm (or No Filters to discard) any MIDI channel and note range selection.


Transposition

Use this dialog box to specify a transposition of any interval to apply to the selected measures, and control whether the original notes are preserved.

Transpose: Up, Down

Use this drop-down list to specify whether you want the music transposed higher or lower.

Transpose: Chromatically, Diatonically

Use this drop-down list to specify a diatonic (among the seven scale degrees) or a chromatic (within the twelve half steps of the octave) transposition.

Interval

Use this drop-down list to specify how many steps you want to transpose the music.

Plus__Octaves

Sets how many octaves by which to transpose the music (in addition to the interval you specified).

Preserve Original Notes

Determines whether the original notes are retained. When selected, provides simple harmonization by retaining the original notes in your score and providing the transposed notes for the selected region. When not selected, transposes the notes without retaining the original line.


Tuplet Definition

Use this dialog box to define the rhythmic and visual aspects of a tuplet grouping.

___ in the space of ___

Enter the number of notes in the tuplet grouping and choose a rhythmic value from the drop-down list.

Display Options

Number: Nothing, Number, Ratio

Use this drop-down list to specify whether to show a number, a ratio, or no mark on the tuplet.

Shape: Nothing, Slur, Bracket

Use this drop-down list to display the tuplet with no shape appearing over it, or with a slur or bracket.

Placement: Manual, Beam Side

Use this drop-down list to place the tuplet using the values in this dialog box, then manually position the tuplet on the notes in the score. Or, if Beam Side is selected and you create a tuplet on beamed notes, Finale automatically places the tuplet on the beam side and matches the beam angle.

Use Bottom Note

To attach the tuplet figure to the bottom note (when the tuplet begins with a chord).

Break Slur or Bracket

To create a gap in the center of the slur or bracket, allowing room for the number.

Ignore Format Offset

To display the tuplet number in its usual place, regardless of tuplet setting in Document Options dialog box.

Allow Horizontal Drag

Determines whether you can drag each part of the tuplet horizontally on-screen.

Match Length of Hooks

Determines whether the tuplet shape is symmetrical. When selected, and you drag to shorten or lengthen one hook, Finale automatically draws the other hook the same length.

Auto Bracket

Determines whether to place only numbers on beamed groups of notes and a number with bracket or slur on unbeamed groups. If this option is not selected, Finale always places numbers and shapes according to the Number and Shape settings.

Number: H:, V:

Adjusts the horizontal and vertical position of the tuplet number displayed in the score.

Shape: H:, V:

Adjusts the bracket in relation to the tuplet number. To move the bracket closer to or further away vertically from the note, enter a smaller or larger value for V:. Enter a smaller or larger value for H: to decrease or increase the gap left for the tuplet number in the middle of the bracket or slur when "Break Slur or Bracket" is selected.

Left Hook, Right Hook

Sets the length of the left or right hook on a tuplet bracket or slur. Enter a negative value to drop the hook down from the bracket. If Match Length of Hooks is selected, Finale uses the Left Hook value for each hook.

Left Extension, Right Extension

Extends the bracket or slur beyond the position of the notes. Enter larger values to lengthen the bracket or slur.

Slope

Sets the angle of the bracket or slur. Enter a positive value to make the right side higher than the left. Enter a negative value to make the right side of the tuplet lower than the left.

Reset

Changes the settings to match those in the Default Tuplet Visual Definition dialog box.

See also: Tuplet Tool


Unknown Chord Suffix

This dialog box appears when Finale encounters a chord it doesn't recognize, while using one of Finale's chord analysis menu options.

I'll do it

Let's you construct the chord suffix yourself in the Chord Definition dialog box.

Let Finale do it

Let's Finale determine how the chord should appear.

See also:

Chord Definition

Edit Learned Chords


Unknown Font

This dialog box appears if you load a library that contains elements created in a font that is no longer in your system.

Add the Font to the Font List

Maintains the font for the elements. (The font won't actually appear in the list until you reinstall it. It will however appear in the Font text box when you display the Font dialog box for the text element.)

Select Another Font

Let's you reassign the font for the element to a font that is currently installed in your system.

See also: Font


Update Layout Options

Use this dialog box to control how Finale adjusts the layout of your score in Page View when you choose the Update Layout command from the Edit menu. Choose what aspects of the layout you want Finale to update, and whether Finale should update the layout each time the screen is redrawn.

Refit Staff Systems to Pages

Determines whether staff systems will reflow into different pages. When selected, Finale calculates how many staff systems will fit on each page, and moves systems to new pages as needed. If you prefer to maintain the current layout of systems in pages, make sure that this option is not selected.

Refit Measures to Systems

Determines whether measures will reflow into different staff systems, based on the measure width. When selected, Finale calculates how many measures will fit on each system, and moves measures to new staff systems as needed. If you prefer to maintain the current layout of measures in staff systems, make sure that this option is not selected.

Retain Frozen Measure Groupings

This option is only available when Refit Measures to Systems is selected. It determines whether frozen measure groupings are maintained. (Frozen measure groupings are created when you use the up and down arrows to move measures with the Mass Mover Tool, or when you choose Fit Music from the Mass Edit menu, or Group Measures from the Page Layout menu.)

When selected, Finale will maintain any frozen measure groupings, but will reflow any ungrouped measures into other staff systems as needed. When not selected, Finale will remove any frozen measure groupings it encounters, and reflow the measures into other staff systems as needed. (Press Shift while choosing Update Layout to remove the measure groupings.)

Respace Measures within Systems

Determines whether Finale updates the spacing of the measures within systems. When selected, Finale will respace the measures without changing what systems the measures appear in. If you prefer that your current spacing remains untouched, make sure that this option is not selected.

Automatic Update Layout

Determines whether Finale will update the layout each time it redraws the screen. Finale uses the current settings in this dialog box each time it updates the layout. When  selected, Finale will update the layout each time it redraws the screen (it will take a little extra time to perform the additional task). When not selected, Finale will still, on occasion, update the layout. For instance, if you adjust the position of a staff or add staves to the score, Finale will update the layout.


View Continuous Data

Use this dialog box to specify the controller whose MIDI data you want to edit.

Controller: Listen

Sets a MIDI controller. Enter the MIDI controller number or click Listen and play the controller on your MIDI instrument. Or, choose the controller from the drop-down list.

Foot Controller

Specifies that you want to edit foot controller values.

Sustain Pedal

Specifies that you want to edit sustain (damper) pedal values.

Modulation Wheel

Specifies that you want to edit modulation wheel values.

Other

Specifies that you want to edit values for a controller not listed.

Patch Changes

Specifies that you want to edit patch (synthesizer sound) values.

Channel Pressure

Specifies that you want to edit channel pressure (monophonic aftertouch) values.

Pitch Wheel

Specifies that you want to edit pitch wheel (bend) values.


View Resolution

Use this dialog box to specify the amount by which you want to "zoom in."

Each unit in the viewing area equals __/1000th(s) of a second

Enter a smaller number to "zoom in" (make the display larger), or a larger number to "zoom out".


Technical Support

As a registered owner, you may call Coda for technical support whenever you need help with Finale and can't find the answer in the manuals. There is no cost for this help (except for long-distance charges.) In addition to technical support benefits, you'll automatically receive company and product information from time to time, as well as official notification of any future upgrades to your program.

You can contact us through any of the following:

Address

Coda Music Technology

6210 Bury Drive

Eden Prairie, MN 55346-1718

Coda Technical Support

(612) 937-9703

9:00 am to 4:00 pm (US Central Time)

Monday through Friday

FAX

(612) 937-9760

If you have a modem (a telephone hookup for your computer), you can access Finale information, and communicate directly with Coda Technical Support on three "online services", or electronic bulletin boards:

America Online

MAC & PC users can enter the keyword "CODA", then click Industry Connection.

CompuServe

In the MIDIB Vendor Forum (GO CODA).

The JW Pepper network

In the Industry Hotline area (for  music educators or band directors).

To sign up for these services, you can call America Online at 800-827-6364, CompuServe at 800-848-8990, or JW Pepper at 800-345-6296.


end